Home

Digital-Capable Station - The Repeater Builder`s Technical

1. FRONT PANEL ES ON OFF SWITCH mun AND CIRCUIT BREAKER MOD FAIL FILTER POWER FET b _ oo CIRCUITRY SWITCHES RE DC INPUT REVERSE bL 24 V DC PROTECTION POLARITY t BACKPLANE CIRCUITRY PROTECTION 28V gus CONNECTOR ULM T DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY 4 28VDC 5 28V DC ion SS 28V OVERVOLTAGE MODULES 67 KHZ DETECT VIA 14 gt 15 BACKPLANE AU REF L gt Y GUHSENT OVERCURRENT DETECT v DETECT 12V STARTUP BIAS REF i g gt a 12V STARTUP BIAS 28V BULK vec Y 14 2 V INVERTER CIRCUITRY P O vec CIRCU BACKPLANE e E CONNECTOR SOFTSTART pulse CIRCUITRY WIDTH TRANSISTOR Y E 14 2V DC MODULATOR DRIVERS POWER Y FILTER 14 2V T T sian TO SWITCH CIRCUITRY STATION SHUTDOWN Y MODULES gt vec FET 22 VIA y Y 23 BACKPLANE ee vec ig ig Y 2 2 67 2 _ JRL PULSE E CROWBAR k WIDTH gt 14 2V OVERCURRENT CIRCUIT MODULATOR DRIVER DETECT OVERVOLTAGE lt DETECT x REF I SURGE CURRENT gt pas STARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITRY DELAY i
2. 4 TXLOCK 7 ANALOG x y TX POWER CONTROL CIRCUITR MULTIPLEXER L L 4 r o ADDRESS BUS EN s PALOW POWER CONTROL VOLTAGE gt 2 PA FAIL M m gt O EPROM DATA BUS MICROPROCESSOR VARIOUS 58 5 SIGNALS TO BE 4 12 ANALOG MONITORED LATCHES Bio VARIOUS FORWARD gt CONTROL a P z LINES POWER TX_VF A o Es DETECT 19 gt FILTERS L O F A D PORT M 101 r gt lt PA MODULE BOWER EGT V CONT VARIOUS gt gt gt DATA BUS AMPLIFIER VOLTAGES wawa peur m PA KEY POWER Lj VOLTAGE FROM CONVERTER 2 MUXs IN RESISTOR ROM CONTROL F POWER lt EXCITER TYPE ID TX ENABLE PIO P102 POWER AMPLIFIER c AMPLIFIER L ge L 16 MODULE FASTISLOW SELECT Ly a gt 18 MODULE BUFFER ENABLE e LJ jJ MICROPROCESSOR Y P O P101 LOCAL SPI BUS Sips SIAUON SRIBUS gt UP TIMING CONTROL LO VOLTAGE HI Z 53 MOS oor BUS CONTROL RESET BUFFER L TO FROM PIO CIRCUITRY RESET STATION 10 2 V SERIES P O P102 CONTROL PASS a 52 MISO MODULE RESET ion 54 SCK RESET TO D A FROM 55
3. P O P2801 Y 77 21 45 MHZ 1ST I F P O P2802 we 78 CUSTOM DRIVER RECEIVER CIRCUITRY 2 1 MHZ REFERENCE L DIFF DATA TO STATION CONTROL MODULE SERIAL BUS TO FROM STATION CONTROL MODULE Figure 2 VHF Ranges 1 and 2 Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68 81086 28 M MOTOROLA RECEIVER MODULE INCLUDES MODELS 6281 Receiver Board TLE5991A Preselector 403 433 MHZ 6282 Receiver Board TLE5992A Preselector 438 470 MHZ TRE6283A E Receiver Board TLE5993A Preselector 470 494 MHZ TRE6284A E Receiver Board TLE5993A Preselector 494 520 MHZ El DESCRIPTION The Quantar Quantro UHF Receiver Modules ranges 1 thru 4 are described in this section A general description identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of oper ation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all equipment modules
4. Figure 3 CLN7060A Station Control Board Functional Block Diagram 3 of 5 18 68 81096 87 9 1 00 SPI BUS P O I O PORT PO OUT INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATIONS BUS HDLC HDLC BUS F HDLC BUS CONTROL 3 3 TO FROM CIRCUITRY WIRELINE INTERFACE MODULE 4 DSP ASIC INTERFACE CIRCUITRY RX1 DATA P x ooo DIFFERENTIAL DATA RX2 DATA DIFFERENTIAL h BEGEIVER MODULE gt 5 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR DSP DSP ASIC 1 amp 2 DSP E VIA BACKPLANE ASIC RX1 ODC ODC FROM _ _ RECEIVER MODULES RX2 ODC BUFFER Fr 1 amp 2 HDLC 4 4 BACKPLANE SERIAL SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE BUS RX1 SBI SBI FROM gt RECEIVER MODULES RX2 SBI BUFFER 1 amp 2 6 5 gt gt VIA BACKPLANE RX1 AGC AGCTO gt gt RECEIVER MODULES ADDRESS HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS RX2 AGC 1 amp 2 DATA BUS a VIA BACKPLANE HOST TDM BUS TDM BUS TDM BUS TDM TO FROM DSP DATA BUS d BUFFERS 7 2 WIRELINE INTERFACE DATA f 777 DATA MODULE PROGRAM AUDIO INTERFACE BUS MEMORY LOCAL AUDIO HOST ADDRESS BUS DIGITAL INTERFACE SIGNAL BUS pe See Pe VOICEIDATA u DSP 16 8 MHZ TO ASIC 16 8 MHZ IN BACKPLANE
5. RECEIVE ANTENNA WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD WIRELINE AUDIO WIRELINE AUDIO FROM FROM LANDLINE H gt lt M 4 WIRE amp 2 WIRE AUDIO CIRCUIT STATION 4 WIRE CIRCUIT SHOWN TO TO L y RF INPUT OUTPUT STATION LANDLINE INPUT OUTPI RECEIVER MODULE i BRACKET REAR OF STATION ASTRO ADDRESS lt aa MODEM 1ST MICROPROCESSOR MIXER DATA 3 POLE UHF 5 5 POLE VHF BANDPASS Ic PERIPHERAL Cs CS 7 POLE 800 900 PENING DIFFERENTIAL DATA ASIC 125227 21 45 MHz VHF 2ND INJECTION DATA 73 35 MHZ AMPLIFICATION H MEMORY 800 900 A D CONVERSION Y Y SYNTHESIZER STATION CONTROL MODULE Eee VCO lt STATION CONTROL MODULE RSS TERMINAL DSP TDM BUS LAPTOP TYPICAL Mid BUS AIC 2 1 MHZ REF INTERFACE COMMUNICATIONS PORTS FOR DLAN ETHERNET AND A Y SERIAL DATA AUDIO MICROPROCESSOR ADDRESS INTERFACE EXTERNAL ADDRESS DIGITAL Lp BUS SPEAKER j SIGNAL DSP eit ff PROCESSOR ASIC ADDRESS DSP DATA EN HANDSET EARPIECE amp MOUTHPIECE HOT OR Y AUDIO ASIC INTERFACE lt as STATION MODULES AU fas Ss MEMORY STATION EM C LOCAL HOST SPEAKER INTERFACE VCO amp REF MOD AUDIO POWER SUPPLY MODULE 2 1 MHZ REF 2 1 MHZ REF Ps lt 2 1 MHZ 2 1 MHZ RE
6. are and ancillary equipment Figure 2 shows the physical dimensions for 7 TRN7342 all three rack sizes shown is 8 rack with ten maximum Quantar cages 7 2 TRN7343 installed 7 and 71 2 racks each hold nine maximum Recommended 8 TRN7344 clearance front and rear is 36 minimum for servicing access Refer to Equipment Ventilation on Page 3 for recommended ventilation clear ances 1 20 5 gt 14 7 52 CM CENTER 37 CM 16 8 CM 8 1 QUANTAR 20 5 CM CAGE L RACK 14 7 CENTER 87 CM QUANTAR CAGE E TOP VIEW E g lu oO QUANTAR 2 CAGE E uj Q 7RACK 84 QUANTAR 5 213CM CAGE Tw RACK a 5 229 CM QUANTAR o uU 0 75 DIA Q 8 RACK eae 20 5 gt i 1 9 CM 2 96 i 52 CM 244CM QUANTAR 46 5 9 CAGE 42 CM L 3 5 9 QUANTAR CAGE e co i RACK CENTER 7 i 15 0 i 17 8 CM 28 CM 88 5 CM QUANTAR CAGE Y 1 i QUANTAR 4 a OMI i CAGE gt 8 25 2 5 CM 21 5 10 25 26 CM Y Y MOUNTING FOOT DETAIL SIDE VIEW Figure 2 Dimensions and Clearances for 7 72 and 8 Racks 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation Physical Dimensions and Clearances Continued Quantar Cages Installed in Modular Racks Option
7. Pr M gt 55 9 CM 50 8 CM 18 3 46 5 CM 19 3 2 49 17 8 45 2 k lo o d nr 4 4 ol a LO _ z e 30 LL 76 2 CM S L oA oN L u s c s L a u c sss 0 25 LLLI LL 0 64 MOUNTING Y i RAIL FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 5 6 2 14 2 4 42 CM 2 22 2 de 5 1 CM 55 9 CM gt 5 1 CM 9 6 CM 2 9 6 CM 9 p 5 1 CM M efon 3 625 DIAMETER HOLES 1 23 bar I 19 3 49 CM 2 2 5 1 CM VIEWED 6 1 CM FROM tte TOP Hilo s t EOM G CM 0 62 DIAMETER HOLES BASE MOUNTING DETAIL 4 Figure 5 30 x 20 Cabinet Dimensions 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 11 Quantar Station Functional Manual Physical Dimensions and Clearances Continued 46 x 20 Cabinet Figure 6 shows the physical dimensions for a 46 x 20 cabinet Option X308AA Minimum recommended clearances are 30 front and 36 rear for installation access Refer to Equipment Ventilation on Page 3 for recommended ventilation clearances 22
8. 20 55 9 CM 50 8 CM 18 3 46 5 CM 3 n 17 8 j 49 CM 45 2 CM k __ O ol s 4 Zo 4 I z 46 pee hL esc 3 SS ca I MOUNTING m RAIL a 0 25 NS lo 0 64 CM FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 5 6 5 6 14 2 a m lt 14 2 CM 2 22 2 61CM 55 9 CM aj 5 1 CM 2 2 95 CN 9 6 CM 51 gt 5 1 CM Pa 3 625 DIAMETER HOLES e lt 19 3 2 7 ID z 49 2 2 5 1 VIEWED 5 1 CM FROM i b TOP 2 n 5 5 1 CM 5 1 CM 0 62 DIAMETER BASE MOUNTING DETAIL HOLES 4 Figure 6 46 x 20 Cabinet Dimensions 12 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation Physical Dimensions and Clearances Continued 60 Indoor Cabinet Figure 7 shows the dimensions for a 60 indoor cabinet Option X180AA Minimum recommended clearances are 30 front and 36 rear for installation access Refer to Equipment Ventilation on Page 3 for recommended ventilation clearances bis 55 9 CM 18 3 46
9. page 5 Startup Inverter Circuitry page 6 Main Inverter Circuitry 25 hee K adie cea edt pee pe Bae eee dba es page 6 FSV Inverter CICUITIV Gr RENTE CO IRL NEVER PME eds page 7 Diagnostics CirCUily baa inlet ee Lewin even delete een pp RUN e Tw fecero gn page 8 Address Decode Circuitry page 8 600W POWER SUPPLY MODULE 24 V dc input 68P81090E44 Description ic aa pusay bee EU Ed cel Ed 1 Performance lt page 3 Controls Indicators and page 4 Functional Theory of Operation page 5 Input Conditioning 25222 Ren mam Ry a usa ee SY page 5 Startup Inverter 1 2 05 pb osha ode sk bas taeda date epee des page 6 M in Invertor Circuitty etr Abe A ee Rr MERE ek page 6 14 2 V Inverter Circuitry 2 7 5V Inverter Circuit u u ele nA M bed eda bee
10. FROM PASIC JU1010 OUTBOUND PLACED IN 2 WIRE gt INBOUND POSITION AMPLIFIER M GAIN gt gt ADJUST gt gt ADTA OUTBOUND AMPLIFIER BUFFER CIRCUITRY STATION SIGNALS CONTROL P O A D MODULE 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR CONVERTER TDM BUS CLN6956 OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR LINE 2 OUTBOUND SIGNAL GLN6956 CLN6958 USED FOR CANCELLATION PERIPHERAL STATION BACKPLANE AGUARI ASIC d o LINE 2 AUDIO E GAIN CONTROL FROM PASI FROM LANDLINE TO STATION 4 JUMPER JUMPER ae AND a FIELD FIELD D A FROM STATION TO LANDLINE CONVERTER gt e AMPLIFIER 2 POLE GAIN pee _ LOW PASS ADJUST FROM FILTER CIRCUITRY _ STATION CONTROL MODULE TDM BUS STATION TO LANDLINE VOICE AUDIO PATH Figure 3 2 Wire Voice Audio Path Functional Block Diagram 1 OF 2 CIRCUITS SH OWN LANDLINE TO STATION VOICE AUDIO PATH GAIN CONTROL FROM PASIC 50 TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6956A PLACED IN OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR 4 WIRE POSITION CLN6956 CLN6958 a ON STATION BACKPLANE e m PEMVOICE ha Hd gt gt ADJUST AND DATA CIRCUITRY TO LINE 1 AUDIO JUMPER JUMPER BUFFER STATION FROM LANDLINE FIELD FIELD CONTROL TO STATION c AID MODULE le CONVERTER TDM BUS 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6956A PERRERA OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR CLN6956 CLN6958 ON STATION BACKPLANE AMPLIFIER GAIN CONTROL FROM
11. 2 Performance lt page 3 Inputs Outputsi uy A An Y sapu Ai ee at ae eg page 4 Functional Theory of Operation page 5 UHF TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION Options X676AN and X676AP 68P81088E54 Description 2 Dee ee EO page 1 General Description 3 1 a Meer UM p qui TURNER Re EMI page 1 Option page 2 Performance Specifications page 3 Inputs Oulpuls n eee REOR enne Deus debates med d te page 4 Functional Theory of Operation page 5 800 900 MHz TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION Options X676AR and X676AQ 68P81090E86 Descriptiom 2p boron Reb Re Een page 1 General Description ie edad cs E a at t tae Meade as S pila page 1 Option page 2 Performance lt page 2 Inputs Outpuls crescere PR bpekroY wae ra eid page 3 Functional Theory of Operation page 4 VHF
12. page 5 RECEIVER MODULE 900 MHz 68P81091E92 Description page 1 General Description u uu a a sa a REN IA e ee s page 1 Overview of Circuitry oni metre up pex RR ERU E T RYE Puasa page 1 Controls Indicators and page 2 Functional Theory of Operation page 3 Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry page 3 Receiver Front End Circuitry page 4 Custom Receiver IC Circuitry page 4 Address Decode and A D Converter Circuitry page 5 Voltage Regulator Circuitry page 5 EXCITER BOARD VHF UHF 800 900 MHz 68P81086E24 Description eR CREER e REA page 1 General Description as nie prd de rato o en e ours RR AN Rus page 1 Overview OFCIFCUIIV pel dere ecd e aped t ec e eade ENCORE page 1 Controls Indicators and page 2 Fun
13. ee VCC PRI FROM AC TO DC BOARD P O SHUTDOWN 1 SYNC SEC BACKPLANE CONNECTOR 133 KHZ 133 KHZ BE pa iA POWER YQ 4 BUFFER gt REST gt DRIVER gt FETS b gt Gp 28 VDC 5 28V DC TO I SENSE 1 MODULATOR STATION 5V_REF 1 MODULES A CURRENT LIMITING CIRCUITRY x sil 1 14 15 BACKPLANE 28V_RAW V 1 Se 1 T 133 KHZ BUFER 24 OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION CIRCUITRY i gt AMPLIFIER Y SYNC BUFFER GENERATOR 133 KHZ BUFFER 28V_RAW T T ISOLATION FILTER gt FILTER CIRCUITRY NN ISOLATION PEAK AVERAGE REF CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY 28V gt m DETECT POWER CUT PRI gt gt MAIN_SD_SEC 77 77 18 gt gt CIRCUITRY TU 7 7 266 KHZ i gt 28V_RAW md ES Y VCC PRI 400 VDC VCC_PRI WAGE 2 x FROM AC TO DC BOARD SENSE 2 14V DIAG gt 133 KHZ EEMU PULSE gt BUFFER WIDTH gt gt DRIVER a py gt iin 67 KHZ MODULATOR BACKPLANE SYNC PRI 2 EE CONNECTOR TO AC TO DC CONVERTER 1 5 2 T 1 1 16 BOARD 14 2V DC 77 TO STATION MODULES 22 VIA 14V SUPPLY CIRCUITRY 28V_RAW 23 BACKPLANE 1231 L POWER V SEC FO 14 RAW POWER FET YYYY e e aK FILTER gt A 14V 28V_RAW REGULATOR SWITCH CIRCUITRY FET 133 KHZ Y Y ES Y EVE 77 gt 1
14. page 7 Functional Theory of Operation AC to DC Converter Board page 8 Input Conditioning Circuitry page 8 Startup Delay Circuitry correcte per ueber Rated e EHE E dada page 8 Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry page 9 Battery Revert Trigger Circuitry page 9 VCC Supply Circultty gt si vie gts Gaines a eid seb ea eae EU RR ea page 9 LED Status Indicators 4 urbt ape tag anal oda RIAL page 10 Functional Theory of Operation DC to DC Converter Board page 11 28V Main Supply Circuitry uas EA Seu u bra page 11 14V Supply Circuitry ural ese pee eee vole Sea dae ee sa usa page 12 5V 90 MADE IUE 12 Battery Charger Control Circuitry page 13 Reference Voltage Circuitry page 13 Diagnostics Circuilty erea 21 nix Sushi eb E UR rx a n tees page 13 Address Decode Circuitry oto cca ieee me be E Se Pe dr e page 14 Startup Shutdown Control Circuitry
15. 14 Location of Telephone Line Connections 47 Introduction Rene MAU PA S OE QU sete nenne 14 2 Wire 4 Wire Jumper Setting 48 Unpacking Standalone Quantar Station Cage 14 Input Output Impedance Matching Jumpers 48 Unpacking 12 x 20 Cabinet 16 System Type vs Wireline Circuit Matrix 48 Unpacking 30 46 and 60 Cabinets 18 Mounting Procedures 20 Connecting V24 Modems 50 Introduction ore eise 20 Mounting Cage in Customer Supplied Cabinet 20 Connecting External Reference 51 Mounting Cage in Customer Supplied Rack 22 Overview HEURES EGER RU 51 Installing 7 8 and Modular Racks 2 24 Single Station Connections Sad oes Asana eral a cat aa dance ded 51 Mounting 30 46 and 60 Cabinets 24 Multi Drop Connections 52 Stacking Cabinets 25 i Stacking Modular Racks 26 4 Post Installation Checkout 54 Anti Vibration EMI Screws 27 Applying Power 54 Verifying Proper Operation 54 Proceeding to Optimization 56 Commercial Government and MORS Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81096E57 A Printed in U S A 1301 E A
16. page 14 Functional Theory of Operation Battery Charger Revert Board page 15 Charger Supply Circultty reise EE PR ERE e E E EM page 15 Pulse Width Modulator page 16 Battery Revert Circuilpy t pod lad nied eee tebe PUE ERR Ed gat es page 16 Current Mode Controller Circuitry page 16 SPI Bus Interface Circuitry Haste eh Ra wee Pho Rebel ER Ee mE RATS page 17 Shutdown Circuitry ocior ise yu e ad uper Ru do er page 17 Local Supplies Citcultty l a Name pul le Ska Q PER ea lees Dee rr Pr pq page 17 210W POWER SUPPLY MODULE 12 24 and 48 60 V dc input 68P81085E12 Description L ucu y yuaya Iya Pas EE SSS ek eR page 1 General Descriptions oue erue Sots go askush tob aS Pa aaa hutas page 1 Overview of Circuitry T area READ EGO UE WE a eed page 2 Performance lt page 3 continued on next page 9 1 00 68P81095E05 B vii Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs page 4 Functional Theory of Operation page 5 Input Conditioning Circuitry
17. CPN6068A DC Output Board Functional Block Diagram 1 of 2 CPN1031B Power Supply Module STARTUP SHUTDOWN CONTROL CIRCUITRY VCC_PRI PRI SHUTDOWN 1 SECOND SHUTDOWN DELAY CIRCUITRY REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUITRY 28V_RAW REGULATOR ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY FROM P O ADDRESS BUS STATION CONTROL BOARD 9 SHUTDOWN 1 gt SOFTSTAPRT ___ CIRCUITRY SHUTDOWN 2 gt DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY 5V_REF 14V_ RAW gt gt oe MOD FAIL DIAG 77 g Y DIAG L 28V 28V 28V FROM l gt DC INPUT BOARD A D CONVERTER 14V_DIAG 14V_DIAG Ls Los 5V_DIAG Ls Ln gt 2 5V_SEC vec vec POWER ON GREEN MODULE FAIL RED DC_GOOD_DIAG Ln VIN _FLTRD OVERVOLTAGE FROM UNDERVOLTAGE gt DC INPUT DETECT CIRCUITRY BOARD DC_GOOD_DIAG L 10V_SEC THERMISTOR MOUNTED ON HEATSINK PRI_SHUT_SEC pe es HEATSINK TEMP DETECT CIRCUITRY HEATSINK_DIAG ADDRESS 1 DECODE ENABLE ENABLE CIRCUITRY SPI BUS SPI BUS 3 SPI BUS TO FROM STATION CONTROL MODULE Figure CPN6068A DC Output Board Functional Block Diagram 2 of 2 9 1 00 68 81096 84 15 M
18. DSP ASIC INTERFACE CIRCUITRY HDLC BUS WIRELINE INTERFACE MODULE DIFFERENTIAL DATA FROM RECEIVER MODULE 1 VIA BACKPLANE ODC FROM RECEIVER MODULE 1 VIA BACKPLANE SBI TO RECEIVER MODULE 1 VIA BACKPLANE SERIAL BUS MODULE 1 TDM BUS TDM BUS TO FROM WIRELINE INTERFACE MODULE TO EXCITER MODULE VIA BACKPLANE 2 1 MHZ REF g gt 2 1 MHZ REF TO RECEIVER MODULE 1 VIA BACKPLANE RX1 DATA DIFFERENTIAL TO TTL E 59 CONVERTER BUFFER DSP ODC ASIC 2 d BUFFER HDLC SBI BUFFER SERIAL BUS SERIALBUS SERIAL BUFFERS 4 7 RECEIVER ADDRESS TDM BUS TDM fa BUFFERS 4 4 DATA AUDIO INTERFACE BUS LOCAL AUDIO INTERFACE BUS TX VOICE DATA 16 8 MHZ TO ASIC 16 8 MHZ IN BACKPLANE 1PPS INPUT gt KS STATION REFERENCE CIRCUITRY 1PPS a Gr 1 PPS DRIVER CIRCUITRY 2 1 MHZ FROM DSP ASIC OUT gt BUFFER SPLITTER 1 PPS BACKPLANE FUTURE 5 10 MHZ 0 BUFFER INPUT LD gt WAVESHAPING FRONT AMPLIFIER PANEL CF 5 10 MHZ REF 0 gt gt gt osc INPUT SPI BUS LOOP 3 16 8 MHZ IC Fin SPI BUS HIGH 16 8 MHZ TO ASIC STABILITY VCO
19. STATION VARIOUS CIRCUITRY i D R EIS 1 CONVER BOARD RECEIVER BOARD TER REGULATOR 5V SOURCE SELECT TO BE MONITORED Ca 4 DECODE 142 10V 10V 2 5 CIRCUITRY FROM 9 negutAron 4 BACKPLANE SOURCE CUSTOM CUSTOM os DRIVER 5V RECEIVER SPI BUS ANALOG CIRCUITRY TO FROM SPI BUS CLOCK amp DATA SPI BUS CLOCK amp DATA REGULATOR 5V IC gt SOURCE STATION aus CONTROL MODULE FILTER CIRCUITRY Y SERIAL BUS SYNTHESIZER CHIP h l TO FROM ELECT MODULE CIRCUITRY TIMING CIRCUITRY 10V amp 5 2ND LO VCO gt PHASE FREQUENCY E Y CIRCUITRY LOCKED CHANGE z m P2801 L SOP FILTER BYPASS FILTER 1 ANALOG SWITCHES 2 1 MHZ 2 1 MHZ l REF 65 gt BUFFER Rin FROM 2 1 MHZ SCM REFERENCE 49 V Y UE lt CHARGE LO PASS CONTROL VOLTAGE PUMP c LOOP gt OSCILLATOR IMPEDANCE DOWN FILTER 2 5 TO 7 5 V DC BUFFER MATCHING vco AMP FEEDBACK i gt Y mm VCO FEEDBACK lt FEEDBACK E BUFFER 2 1 MHZ REFERENCE ge Figure 2 Quantar Quantro 900 MHz Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68P81091E92 B 7 M MOTOROLA EXCITER BOARD MODELS TLD9831A D 132 154 MHZ TLD9832A D 150 174 MHZ TLE5971A F 403 433 MHZ TLE5972A F 438 470 MHZ TLE5973A F 470 494 MHz TLE5974A F 494 520 MHz TLF6920A G 850 870 MHZ TLF6930A G 935 941 MHz
20. page 12 Reference Voltage Circuitry page 12 Diagnostics tenir bh race D Eee pes tt UE deer weet page 13 Address Decode Circuitty uu 11 eet DO ER ended ere CR SER page 13 Startup Shutdown Control Circuitry page 14 Functional Theory of Operation Battery Charger Revert Board page 15 Charger Supply Circuitry 2 oe gists E Rar ek P xe de n i ga page 15 Pulse Width Modulator 2 24 page 16 Battery Revert Circuitty Reto fhe ded epee Der eens espe Mee page 16 Current Mode Controller Circuitry page 16 SPI Bus Interface Circuitry page 17 Shutdown GirCUltry n ap puedes verona sq page 17 Eocal Supplies Circuitry vh dub hte teh Sh bee tek hogs Se sa page 17 625W POWER SUPPLY MODULE ac input 68P81095E88 Description 2 y eines Riera beds Sheet ee eek page 1 Performance lt page 6 Controls Indicators and
21. gt gt VOL UP VOL DOWN INTERCOM RSS PORT DB 9 CONNECTOR mcd EXTERNAL SPEAKER EXTERNAL HANDSET MICROPHONE 5 10 MHZ INPUT amp 6 Figure 4 CLN7098A LED Board Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68 81096 87 21 M MOTOROLA WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD MODELS CLN6955A CLN6957A DESCRIPTION The Models CLN6955A and CLN6957A Wireline Interface Boards are described in this section A general descrip tion identification of jumpers indicators and inputs outputs functional block diagrams and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description Note Model CLN6955 WIB is designed for use in stations installed in locations where lo cal codes permit phone line connections to either the 50 pin Telco connector or the orange screw terminal connector Model CLN6957 allows only connections to the orange screw terminal connector Overview of Circuitry The Wireline Interface Board WIB serves as the interface between the customer telephone lines and the station equipment Each WIB con tains circuitry to interface wi
22. 9 LO PASS gt LINE 1 AUDIO BUFFER FILTER LIMITER A JUMPER JUMPER FROM LANDLINE s dE FIELD FIELD TO STATION t MICROPROCESSOR e 0 TLES Sees FAO 50 PERIPHERAL CLN6955 ASIC am STATION OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR CONTROL CLN6955 CLN6957 MODULE ON STATION BACKPLANE AMPLIFIER GAIN CONTROL VIA A FROM PASIC HDLC BUS LINE2AUDIO lt JUMPER JUMPER FROM STATION FIELD FIELD TO LANDLINE lt MJ d A GAIN 3 POLE SERIAL DATA AMPLIFIER 4 ADJUST lt LOW PASS lt CIRCUITRY FILTER E STATION TO LANDLINE DATA SIGNAL PATH Figure 6 12kbps SECURENET Modem Data Signal Path Functional Block Diagram 12 68P81094E77 A 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD MODELS CLN6956A CLN6958A DESCRIPTION The Models CLN6956A and CLN6958A Wireline Interface Boards are described in this section A general descrip tion identification of jumpers indicators and inputs outputs functional block diagrams and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understand ing of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description Note Model
23. GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 2 FLOW CHART MODULE SUSPECTED OF BEING FAULTY RUN STATION DIAGNOSTICS RSS USER S GUIDE 68P81085E35 e USING RSS RUN DIAGNOSTICS STATION MODULES GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 2 FLOW CHART MODULE SUSPECTED OF BEING FAULTY DONE Figure 1 Quantar Station Troubleshooting Overview Procedure 1 Routine Site Visit 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Quantar Station Functional Manual PROBLEM REPORTED OR SUSPECTED gt PROCEDURE 2 OBSERVE LED INDICATORS and MONITOR ALARM TONES Pages 6 amp 9 e OBSERVE LED INDICATORS ON STATION MODULE FRONT PANELS e MONITOR ALARM ALERT TONES FROM LOCAL SPEAKER INDICATES STATION IN SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MODE YES USING RSS ACCESS THE STATUS REPORT SCREEN ANALYZE MESSAGES TO DETERMINE IF MODULE FAILURE HAS OCCURRED MODULE SUSPECTED OF BEING FAULTY GO TO MODULE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ON PAGE 19 NO MODULE SUSPECTED ES n OF BEING FAULTY NO Y RUN STATION DIAGNOSTICS RSS USER S GUIDE 68P81085E35 e USING RSS ACCESS DIAGNOSTICS SCREEN RUN DIAGNOSTICS AND INTERPRET RESULTS MODULE SUSPECTED OF BEING GO TO MODULE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ON PAGE 19 FAULTY GO TO Figure
24. TERMINATOR 6 dB IN LINE PAD 50 OHM Figure 5 Quantar VHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure Sheet 2 of 3 9 1 00 HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR 0000 00 000 EJ 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 lt a 92 RF MILLIVOLTMETER VERIFYING ISOLATION Monitor Function Attenuator set to 50 dB Center frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency whichever is LOWER R2001 COMMUNICATIONS ANALYZER o Connecttest equipment as shown Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the R2001 display UG29A U BULLET CONNECTOR UNS HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR 0000 00 ool 000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 0000 EHOM Low Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency whichever is LOWER Output level set to 10 dBm TERMINATOR Connectthe test equipment to the duplexer as shown Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the R2001 display If no number is displayed consider isolation to be greater than 105 dB which exceeds the specification Subtract the absolute number noted in Ste
25. UuPrzm o Y A Y Y Y Y Y TO TO COVERAGE COVERAGE AREA B AREA C STATION TX STATION TX FROM FROM COVERAGE COVERAGE AREA AREA B Figure 1 Feature Simulcast Voting System Automatic FBICR Mode Shown 2 68P81095E96 O 7 15 99 Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat Feature If either both of these links fail station will revert to FBICR mode y RECEIVER y B Y COMPARATOR A STATION RECEIVER Figure 2 FBICR Feature Non Simulcast Voting System Automatic FBICR Mode Shown Link Failure Detection Requirements Before automatically enabling FBICR mode a link failure detection must occur defined as follows For Digital Systems e Protocol Failure e Carrier Detect Loss Note na V 24 Hybrid Configuration the loss of the analog link will not cause the station to enter FBICR mode Only the failure of the digital link will cause the station to enter FBICR mode For Analog Systems Loss of External PTT Simulcast e No TRC Keyup Voting Other Things to Know e is important to note that a station operating in FBICR mode is independent of other stations receivers in the particular system This is especially important in a Simulcast system because simulcast transmission timing will be lost for the overlap coverage area between an active Simulcast station and a FBICR statio
26. 14V b IPA Y 8 Y BUFFER P101 P102 4 ud x 28V S 8 28V P O VF P101 P102 I FPA gt DETECT 28V CIRCUITRY BUFFER P101 P102 Saa IPA FPA RESISTOR ROM gt gt 14V CURRENT IPA CURRENT INDICATES PA TYPE SENSE DETECT SENSE P O CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY FPA DETECT FPA_VF ANALOG gt gt MULTIPLEXER gt BUFFER 14 2V_REF 14V VOLTAGE oe DIVIDER Y Y Y Y MULTIPLEXER IPA DETECT VF P O eager LINE FILTER EXCITER MODULE BUFFER L __ 4 CIRCUITRY OMNI VOLTAGE VOLTAGE OMNIS DIVIDER FPA I1 A Ls FPA_I1_B Ls P O IPA 1 ANALOG z E MULTIPLEXER 28V VOLTAGE 28V REFA DIVIDER gt E THERMISTOR EO ER m MJ d T dE P O 3 a P101 FAN ON FAN ON FAN CURRENT MONITOR FAN FAN STATUS FROM FAN DRIVER EXCITER e CIRCUITRY gt STATUS T P O MODULE CIRCUITRY POWER AMPLIFIER _ 22 CASTING y FAN POWER FAN POWER 1 gt MATES WITH DUAL L ASSEMBLY FAN RTN FAN RTN MOLEX TYPE CONNECTOR T Figure 3 2061 6 110W UHF TTE2064A 100W UHF Power Amplifier Module Functional Block Diagram 8 68P81088E44 B 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE MODELS TLF1940A 20W 850 870 MHz TLF1930A 100W 850 870 MHz TLF1800A 100W 935 941 MHz DESCRIPTION The Models TLF1940A TLF1930A 800 MHz and TLF1800A 900 MHz Power Amplifier Modules are described in this section A general des
27. Figure 1 Signal Locations on System Connector 17 2 68P81096E86 O 6 1 00 Input Output Specifications for External Controllers ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS This section provides the electrical characteristics frequency response curves and other interface details for the primary interface signals Line 1 and Line 1 J17 Pins 1 and 26 General Characteristics Line 1 and Line 1 provide a balanced phone line input for incoming audio signals to the station The input impedance is set by jumpers lo cated on the Wireline Interface Board The jumpers are set at the facto ry for 600 impedance You may change the impedance if desired by changing the jumpers as described in the appropriate 4 wire or 8 wire Wireline Interface Board section in this manual Phone Line Specifications Most telephone companies recognize either 3002 or Type 5 as des ignations to define phone line types and associated electrical specifi cations Telephone lines meeting the specifications for either of these types are acceptable for use with the Quantar station The following table shows the specifications for 3002 and Type 5 phone line types Type 5 and 3002 Phone Line Specifications Parameter Specification Specification C Notched Noise 51 dBrnCO 51 dBrnCO Attenuation Distortion 504 to 2504 Hz 2 0 to 8 0 dB 2 0 to 8 0 dB 404 to 2804 Hz 2 0 to 10 0 dB spec not available 304 to
28. page 3 Editing Wildcard Tables page 8 MOTOROLA QUANTAR SECURENET ASTRO are trademarks of Motorola Inc 9 1 00 68P81095E05 B xi THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 68P81095E05 B 9 1 00 MODEL AND OPTION SELECTION PROCEDURE INCLUDES MODEL OPTION COMPLEMENTS The following equipment ordering scenario is used by the sales representative to equip a Quantar station with the proper hardware and firmware for specific system types and customer defined options and fea tures The scenario is described here to explain the process and to show the structure and contents of the various options and models The sales model is T5365A as translated from C99ED 001C NOTE The Sales Model includes only a TRN7795A Base Station Nameplate Equip ping the station with the proper modules is accomplished by ordering additional op tions as described in the following steps 2 A System Family Option must be selected as follows System Type Conventional Analog Conventional Analog SECURENET Conventional ASTRO VSELP Conventional ASTRO CAI 6809 Trunking Analog 6809 Trunking SECURENET 6809 Trunking ASTRO VSELP 6809 Trunking ASTRO CAI SMARTZONE 6809 Trunking ASTRO VSELP SMARTZONE 6809 Trunking ASTRO CAI SMARTZONE IntelliRepeater Trunking SMARTZONE ntelliRepeater Trunking SECURENET SMARTZONE ntelliRepeater ASTRO VSELP SMARTZONE ntelliR
29. Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81086E33 F Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 11 15 99 UP Quantar Station Products LOCATION OF BACKPLANE CONNECTORS Figure 1 shows the location of the connectors on each side of the station backplane board CONNECTORS 7 amp 8 CONNECTORS 5 amp 6 MATE WITH MATE WITH FRONT VIEW STATION CONTROL MODULE WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD CONNECTOR 9 MATES WITH EXCITER MODULE CONNECTOR 11 CONNECTOR 10 CONNECTOR 4 CONNECTOR 2 MATES WITH MATES WITH MATES WITH MATES WITH POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE POWER SUPPLY MODULE RECEIVER MODULE 2 RECEIVER MODULE 1 REAR VIEW CONNECTOR 20 EIA 232 CONNECTOR 18 CONNECTOR 19 CONNECTOR 21 CONNECTOR 14 ALTERNATE RSS PORT EPIC FAN POWER DLAN1 1 PPS INPUT 6809 TRUNKING MRTI OR ZONE CONTROLLER LINK Early Models Only CONNECTOR 15 6809 TRUNKING TSC CSC LINK R 3 0 Ru MI CONNECTOR 22 CONNECTOR 27 WP ome 34 in ss SA ETHERNET PERIPHERAL TRAY 5 i T BNC CONNECTOR INTERFACE CONNECTOR 31 CONNECTOR 17 CONNECTOR 30 CONNECTOR 23 CONNECTOR 24 EXTERNAL DC POWER SYSTEM 50 PIN TELCO 5 10 MHZ INPUT ANTENNA RELAY BATTERY TEMPERATURE High Impedance Figure 1 Quantar Station Backplane TRN7480A Connector Locations Front and Rear Views 2 68P81086E33 F 11 15 99 TRN7480A Station Backplane BACKPLANE CONNECTORS INFORMATION Each connector on the backplane has been assigned a connector
30. 1 DESCRIPTION The TLD9831A 32 TLE5971 thru 74 TLF6920 and TLF6930 Exciter Boards are described in this section A gener al description identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional un derstanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The Exciter Board in conjunction with the Power Amplifier Module provides the transmitter functions for the Quantar and Quantro stations Contained within a slide in module housing the exciter board gener ates a low level modulated rf signal which is input to the power amplifi er module for further amplification and output to the transmit antenna These Exciter Boards differ only in the range of operation as shown in the title of this section Unless otherwise noted the information provided in this section applies to all models Overview of Circuitry The exciter board contains the following circuitry e Microprocessor serves as the main controller for the exciter board provides control monitoring of signals and interfaces with the Station Control Module microprocessor over a serial bus e Frequency Synthe
31. L 2 Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency whichever is HIGHER Output level set to 10 dBm 6 dB CASO OBN ONE Oe eet tal E HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR 1 el 9 ro ooo ooo GOGGA ooo a s 5 s 5 sj 5 5 s 5 s o 58 6555 co 5 ot 6 9 6 3 QC Cr 5 50 TERMINATOR Figure 5 Quantar Quantro UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure Sheet 2 of 3 10 68P81087E94 A 9 1 00 VERIFYING ISOLATION R2001 COMMUNICATIONS ANALYZER Monitor Function Center frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency whichever is LOWER Attenuator set to 50 dB UG29A U o Connecttest equipment as shown BULLET CONNECTOR Observe and note the level in dBm as metu E shown on the R2001 display HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR g 8880 3854 885 5 L 23 Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency whichever is LOWER Output level set to 10 dBm 6 dB INLINE PAD 50 ed E HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR e Connectthe test equipment to the l duplexer as shown 1 6l Oc 2992 8 5 5 c z o 8580 38 8 Observe and note the level in
32. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS As shown in Figure 1 the following signals must be connected properly between the station and the external device e PTT e TX Audio e RX Audio Additionally there are two possible connection configurations Direct Connection and Splatter Filter Connection The Direct Connection configuration is chosen when the external device provides the required splatter filtering of the TX Audio signal The Splatter Filter Connection configuration is chosen when the station s internal splatter filter is to be utilized no splatter filtering provided by the external device The following procedures describe how to make the signal connections for each type of connection configuration EXTERNAL STATION DEVICE PTT TX AUDIO TX AUDIO RX AUDIO Lari RX AUDIO Figure 1 Fast Keyup Feature Wiring Diagram 68P80800A02 O 1 31 98 Fast Keyup Feature Wiring Details for Direct Connection and Splatter Filter Configurations Step 1 Connect the PTT signal from the external device to Connector 14 on the station backplane as shown below Step2 Connect TX Audio and from the external device to Connector 17 on the station backplane as shown below Step 3 Connect Aux RX Audio and GND from the station backplane Connector 17 to the external device as shown below Direct Connection Configuration 25 D TYPE CONNECTOR 14 PTT Pin 23 50
33. State of the Art Electrical Design Transmitter Circuitry The station transmitter circuitry is designed for continuous duty opera tion and may be operated at full rated power Output power is continu ally monitored by an internal calibrated wattmeter The wattmeter out put feeds a power control loop which continually adjusts and maintains the desired output power All adjustments are electronic including de viation and output power Receiver Circuitry The station receive circuitry features multiple bandwidth capability 12 5 25 or 30 kHz depending on band as well as ASTRO digital op eration Injection signals for the 1st and 2nd mixers are generated by frequency synthesizer circuitry electronically controlled by the Station Control Module All receive signals analog SECURENET ASTRO and ASTRO CAI are detected and digitized before being sent to the Station Control Module providing improved audio quality consistency throughout the coverage area Station Control Module The Quantar Station Control Module is microprocessor based and features extensive use of ASIC and digital signal processing technolo gy The module serves as the main controller for the station providing signal processing and operational control for the station modules Wireline Circuitry The station wireline circuitry provides a wide variety of telephone interfaces including analog ASTRO ASTRO CAI SECURENET Tone Remote Control DC
34. page 8 9 1 00 68 81095 05 800 900 MHz DUPLEXERS Options X182AG and X182AH 68P81091E93 Description ii a er EE WEE ERE Paina PERDRE ee eee ars 1 General Description sx eres Ee p Peeks eng ee D eA 1 22 22 2295 5 T eR ED ERA EE Ra das a ed page 2 Performance lt page 3 Typical Mounting Configuration page 3 ASTRO MODEM CARD OPTION X437AA 68P81086E38 Description roses REN ee Rea rd tri ir ati ed wears AUR page 1 General Description Randa Rud rec erbe UE EIU EEUU 1 PERIPHERAL TRAY OPTION 696 68P81086E37 Description OR Yet Peles re ee Ree ae ds page 1 General Description os quee LIEGT epe M imb rte Eq EE M es page 1 Options page 2 Peripheral Tray Contents and Inputs Outputs page 3 ULTRA HIGH STABILITY OSCILLATOR UHSO Option X873AA 68P81088E08 Description ror IERI E eed dads ba te eee aed page 1 General Descriptiori coe ere neg p dead DURE
35. TELCO CONNECTOR 17 Gen TX Data Pin 9 Gen TX Data Pin 34 Aux RX Audio Pin 30 Station GND Pin 7 Splatter Filter Connection Configuration 25 D TYPE CONNECTOR 14 PTT Pin 23 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR 17 Aux TX Audio Pin5 Station GND Pin 7 Aux RX Audio Pin 30 Station GND Pin 7 68P80800A02 O 3 1 31 98 Quantar Quantro Station Products E RSS PROGRAMMING Using the Quantar Quantro Radio Service Software RSS program Version R09 05 00 or higher make the following codeplug data changes to allow proper Fast Keyup operation Refer to the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for details on making codeplug programming changes Table 1 Codeplug Data Changes for Fast Keyup Operation Codeplug Data Parameter RSS User s Guide Location Set the Fast Key Up parameter to WIDEBAND for Direct Connection configurations or to AUX TX for Splatter Filter Connection configurations Programming the RF Configuration Data p o Chapter 4 Note AUX TX selection is not compatible with 4 68P80800A02 O 1 31 98 Fast Keyup Feature 4 FAST KEYUP PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS Figure 2 shows the performance characteristics of the station after implementing the Fast Keyup Feature Aux RX Audio Amplitude Response Aux RX Audio Phase Response sa eei n sana E S s XS 700002 gt Y 17 80 DEG N X 5275 Hz 2dB DIV START 0 Hz STOP 10 000 Hz START 0 Hz STOP
36. lt D A LINE 2 AUDIO cc JUMPER JUMPER CONVERTER FOM STATION FIELD FIELD TO LANDLINE MJ 4 a 2 POLE GAIN MEE AMPLIFIER e LOW PASS ADJUST RE TON FILTER CIRCUITRY _ CONTROL MODULE TDM BUS STATION TO LANDLINE VOICE AJDIO PATH Figure 4 4 Wire Voice Audio Path Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68 81094 78 11 Quantar and Quantro Station Products 9 6KBPS ASTRO MODEM DATA SIGNAL PATHS 1 OF 2 CIRCUITS SHOWN LANDLINE TO STATION DATA SIGNAL PATH JU1010 50 TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6956 PLACED IN 4 WIRE OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR POSITION CLN6956 CLN6958 ON STATION BACKPLANE x g o m Ls LINE 1 AUDIO BUFFER FROM LANDLINE DX TOSTATION MICROPROCESSOR L SERIAL BUS 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6956 iar STATION OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR MODEM inu CONTROL CLN6956 CLN6958 MODULE ON STATION BACKPLANE AMPLIFIER CAN HDLC BUS a t aai LNE2 AUDIO _ JUMPER JUMPER FROM STATION
37. 68P81095E96 O 7 7 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products External Mode continued Note When pins 11 and 16 are grounded the station will enter FBICR operation The station will ig nore any wireline transmit activity ignore the EXT PTT line and assert the TSTAT line While in FBICR mode the station will transmit Fail soft beeps and the subscriber will give the Failsoft indication Trunked SMARTZONE or SMARTNET Analog continued Step 5 Connect a wire to pin 11 and pin 16 of System Connector 17 located on the station backplane To activate FBICR mode an external circuit customer provided must ground these pins CONNECTOR End of Procedure 9 68P81095E96 O 7 15 99 Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat Feature External Mode continued Trunked SMARTZONE or SMARTNET ASTRO CAI VSELP Simulcast Systems Only Step 1 Access the Wireline Configuration Screen Step 2 Set the Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat field to DISABLED No Fall Back Timer setting is required MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Use Up Down Arrow Keys to Select BASE STATION PRODUCTS Wireline Operation Page 1 of 2 VER XX XX XX CHANGE VIEW WIRELINE CONFIGURATION Wireline Operation 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX Console Priority DISABLED OPTION Remote Control Type ASTRO TRC Input Line 1 Outbound Analog Link Timer 120 sec Comparator NONE OPTION Fall Back Cabinet Repeat DISABLED Status Tone
38. ASSEMBLIES I DE EE HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR 0000 00 ool 000 Cc 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 0000 1 L J Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency whichever is HIGHER Output level set to 10 dBm _ TUNING LOW NOTCH LOOP ASSEMBLIES Range set to 10 dBm BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER eee eee ew ee Set up test equipment as shown Use tuning tool to adjust trimmer screw for cavity 4 to obtain minimum reading on millivoltmeter Adjust trimmer screw to obtain minimum Reduce the range on the millivoltmeter as necessary to reach true minimum reading Repeat steps 1 and 2 for cavities 5 and 6 TRIMMER SCREW 6 dB IN LINE PAD 50 OHM CONNECTOR LOOP ASSEMBLIES HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR 0000 00 ool 000 0000 0000 SHI 0000 0000 000 0000 lt lt s qm 1 LJ Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency whichever is LOWER Output level setto
39. WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD 8 POSITION CONNECTOR CABLE CONNECTS TO ORANGE TERMINAL STRIP ON REAR OF STATION Disconnect the 8 position connector as shown and remove Wireline Interface Board from cage Tip back on the panel to pry the Wireline Interface Board out of the backplane connectors Removal Procedure for Wireline Interface Board Quantar VHF Station Shown Figure 7 11 15 99 68 81096 59 31 Quantar Station Functional Manual Replacing Receiver Module and or Preselector Assembly and UHF Note VHF UHF models the Receiv er Module is comprised of a Preselector As sembly and a Receiver Board attached to a module housing The Preselector Assembly and the Receiver Board are each considered to be a field replaceable unit FRU Replace ment procedures are given for each FRU If you choose to replace the entire module in cluding receiver board and preselector you must perform the preselector tuning proce dure Replacement Procedure Step 1 Turn off station power refer to page 20 Step 2 Using a Torx 15 driver remove anti vibration screws if installed from top and or bottom of module front panel Step 3 Slide the module out to the first stop Disconnect mini UHF connector on rf cable rf input to the module con nected to the preselector assembly Step 4 Remove faulty module from cage Step 5 If Receiver Board is being replaced Disco
40. 25 CONNECTOR ON BACKPLANE CONNECTOR 20 RS 232 DB 9 CONNECTOR ON BACKPLANE SCM FRONT PANEL BUFFERS 2 HOST ADDRESS BUS RSS PORT DB 9 CONNECTOR ON SCM FRONT PANEL HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS HOST ADDRESS BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS TO FROM BUFFERS STATION MODULES 3 HOST DATA BUS HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS SPI BUS RESET HOST DATA BUS HOST BUFFERS 5555555555555555556555 555555555555555555555555555555555555555555 ED BUFFERED BUS SPI BUS CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Module INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATIONS BUS HDLC 0 7 5 0 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FROM HOST MICROPROCESSOR FROM HOST MICROPROCESSOR SPI BUS HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS 8K x 8 EEPROM CODEPLUG 7 BELOW LE A L 72777 FLASH SIMM CTE NOTE SSS NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NUN ZZ L SEE NOTE BELOW 777 NOTE SOME EARLY MODELS SOCKETED EPROMS ARE PROVIDED TO CONTAIN STATION SOFTWARE LATER MODELS ELIMINATE THE EPROMS AND SOCKETS AND PROVIDE FLASH SIMM TO CONTAIN THE STATION SOFTWARE 777777777777777777 l
41. CIRCUITRY FILTER FILTER 1STLO VCO FEEDBACK INJECTION gt DDRESS DECODE amp A D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY AMPLIFIER CUSTOM 5 RECEIVER Y 1ST LO INPUT IC 77 CIRCUITRY amp A1 CHIP 73 35 MHZ DIFF SELECT REGULATOR 1ST I F DATA DECODE gt CHIP CIRCUITRY TO ADDRESS CIRCUITRY SELECT STATION BUS CONTROL FROM lt r m nEeeuLATOR gt 45 P2802 MODULE ees STATION I VARIOUS CONTROL SIGNALS AD 14 2V AN MODULE FROM J CONVER FROM REGULATOR BE SOURCE gt 78 3 BOARD RECEIVER BOARD TER BACKPLANE SELECT TO BE MONITORED EE mH OE V i A2 A REGULATOR 5 5 CIRCUITRY SOURCE 1 5V ANA cU CUSTOM DRIVER SPI BUS REGULATOR RECEIVER TO FROM SPI BUS CLOCK amp DATA SPI BUS CLOCK amp DATA SOURCE IC CIRCUITRY STATION CONTROL 450 KHZ las cmcumw 7 VCO SERIAL CIRCUITRY _ Bus SYNTHESIZER CHIP CU LX b TO FROM SELECT 494 V STATION CIRCUITRY 144 MHZ CONTROL TIMING Ly MODULE 10V CIRCUITRY BANDSHIFT SELECT 0 Noto Below ba 2 CIRCUITRY 9 1 lt 9 SUPER 2ND LO FILTER VCO gt P O cn CE i 9 1 V CIRCUITRY P2801 LOOP FILTER BYPASS ANALOG SWITCHES y VCO CIRCUITRY UPPER OF BAND 2 1 MHZ 2 1 MHZ Y REF 65 BUFFER gt RIN gt OSCILLATOR FROM BUFFER 2 1 MHZ SCM AMP REFERENCE Note Early models contained LI a crystal in the 14 4 MHz Timing Circuitry zi
42. EI Y Y AUF s 4 7UF 083UF 909 gt Note All jumpers removed for high impedance input output 68P81094E78 A 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Description of Audio Data Signal Paths Continued Note Depending on local codes and or customer preference phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the screw terminal connector on the station backplane Landline to Station signals are connected at Line 1 Audio or Line 3 Audio Station to Landline signals are connected at Line 2 Audio or Line 4 Audio For systems using dc remote control set jumpers JU1008 and JU1009 as shown below for 4 wire applications WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD 553 le 4 WIRE DC RE D Ao Es o JU1008 JU1009 Four levels of gain adjustment are provided by circuitry on the WIB for Landline to Sta tion and Station to Landline audio paths Additional fine level adjustments are per formed in software in the Station Control Mod ule 4 Wire Voice Audio Path Refer to Figure 4 Voice audio signals sent to from the station via 4 wire copper pairs are processed by one of two 4 wire audio circuits on the WIB e Line 1 Audio amp Line 2 Audio e Line 3 Audio amp
43. page 1 General Description adie dat eo eee NUI eid pe ede eth bee ede NDS page 1 Overview of CCU mezerami oe Ra LE E huay G eu page 1 Controls Indicators and page 2 Functional Theory of Operation page 3 RE Signal Patin 2 oreet Sawa yb aid etae ny d Saa a ankata page 3 Output Power Control su sha ayu ERE dae pneum aa aed wedi page 3 Sense and Detect Circuitry page 4 Cooling Fans Control Circuitry 6 iv 68 81095 05 9 1 00 POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE 20W 100W 800 MHz 100W 900 MHz 68P81091E91 Description geeks Sea Ee us ee eel pur Dac a Re RE eee page 1 General Description 2 scant reme rey Pee ete e Meld ee i ee aS ees page 1 Overview of Circuithy uy utara kue jetted ered det eee whose bebe demand page 1 Controls Indicators and page 2 Functional Theory of Operation page 3 RF Signal Path eren da unran agama eA DEP pu Sod EEG RA sarqa page 3 Output Power Gontrol orem Dee IX add ay D CREE D A
44. z 4 5 OPTO ISOLATED LEM INTERPROCESSOR 5 INPUTS u COMMUNICATIONS S 0707 0 pcm 225 5 SERIAL BUS vs TO FROM z 5 lt gt MODEM i NM T TRANSISTOR gt CIRCUITRY STATION CONTROL t COUPLED z Y MODULE INPUTS e AU s es sas eid Z WIRELINE FAIL EM Z WIRELINE ON u N O RELAY 9 RAM lt OUTPUTS a amp PCM VOICE DATA BUS a Giaa KO ADDRESS LINES AND DATA ADDRESS BUS 128K X 8 9 L TO FROM TRANSISTOR KX a ee PERIPHERAL J MICROPROCESSOR OUTPUTS TDM BUS 128K X 8 DC REMOTE u DETECTION DAA BUS _ CIRCUITRY FLASH 50 PIN CONNECTOR DATA BUS 256K X 8 Y Y Y Y SERAL DATA SERIAL DATA 256K X 8 SIMULCAST A D TE L3 GEN PROCESSING EO AUDIO CONVERTER SERIAL DATA BUS T amp DATA CIRCUITRY STATION CONTROL MODULE DATA BUS DATA BUS PERIPHERAL ASIC POWER c 496 A SUPPLY PCM VOICE 96V AND DATA CIRCUITRY 96 PET TOFROM MODEM STATION CONTROL 2 MODULE VIA TDM BUS LINE 3 AUDIO FROM LANDLINE TO STATION 50 TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6956 OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR CLN6956 CLN6958 ON STATION BACKPLANE Y SERIAL DATA 4 WIRE CIRCUIT 2 INCLUDES VARIABLE GAIN STAGES BUFFERS LINE DRIVERS AND A D amp D A CO
45. 5040 Grommet TTN5040A Grommet X362AA Packing X362AA Packing TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet X436AJ Instruction Manual X436AJ Instruction Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual Continued 9 1 00 68 81095 05 OPTION X240AB SELECTED IN STEP 3 Quantar UHF Range 2 25W Transmitter OPTION X640AB SELECTED IN STEP 3 Quantar UHF Range 2 110W Transmitter Source Option Description Scarce Option Description Kit Kit X240AB Quantar UHF R2 25W Transmitter X640AB Quantar UHF R2 110W Transmitter TLE2732A 25 W Power Amplifier Module UHF R2 TTE2062A 110 W Power Amplifier Module UHF R2 Option TKN8699A PA to Exciter RF Cable Option TKN8699A PA to Exciter RF Cable from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X132AB Exciter Module UHF R2 X132AB Exciter Module UHF R2 CLE1240A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CLE1240A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X334AB Receiver Module UHF R2 X334AB Receiver Module UHF R2 CLE1200A Recei
46. 6 WFI Future use 7 WFI Future use 8 DLAN1 Differential Data 9 DLAN1 Differential Data PHONE LINE INPUTS RON LINE 1 LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 2 5 6 7 8 LINE 3 LINE 3 LINE 4 LINE 4 Pin Signal Input Output Function 1 MRTI TX Audio MRTI 2 MRTI PTT MRTI 3 Open 4 Monitor MRTI 5 PL Strip MRTI 6 Open MRTI 7 MRTI RX Audio MRTI 8 Patch INH MRTI 9 Gnd MRTI 10 AUX Indicate Future use 11 TPTT Control signal to key transmitter active low 6809 12 TSTAT Indicates transmitter status active high 6809 13 Tx Data Modulation input from 6809 Controller 6809 14 15 Rx Carrier MRTI 16 Gnd Station Ground 6809 17 Gnd Station Ground 6809 18 Gnd Station Ground 6809 19 Gnd Station Ground 6809 20 Gnd Station Ground 6809 21 Tx Data Modulation input from 6809 Controller 6809 22 Rx Wideband Aud Receive output to 6809 Controller 6809 23 MUTE Mutes station signals active low 6809 24 CCI Indicates Control Channel status active low 6809 25 RSTAT Indicates receiver status active high 6809 CONNECTOR 17 SYSTEM 50 TELCO Pin Signal Input Output Function 1 Line 1 2 Customer 4 wire Phone Line Input Line 1 2 Line 2 Customer 2 wire Phone Line Input Output Line 2 3 Line 3 1 Customer 4 wire Phone Line
47. General Description Overview of Circuitry The Receiver Module provides the receiver functions for the Quantar Quantro communications equipment Each receiver module is comprised of a Preselector Filter Assembly and a Receiver Board all contained within a slide in module housing The receiver module performs highly selective bandpass filtering and dual down conversion of the receive rf signal A cus tom receiver IC then performs an analog to digital conversion of the received signal and outputs a differential data signal to the Station Control Module The preselector and receiver board models differ only in the range of operation Unless otherwise noted the information provided in this section applies to all models The receiver module contains the following circuitry e Frequency Synthesizer Circuitry consisting of a phase locked loop and VCO generates the 1st LO injection signal e Preselector Filter Assembly provides 3 pole bandpass filter ing of the receive rf input e Receiver Front End Circuitry performs filtering amplification and the 1st down conversion of the receive rf signal e Custom Receiver IC Circuitry consists of a custom IC which performs the 2nd down conversion filtering amplification and analog to digital conversion of the receive signal e Address Decode amp A D Converter Circuitry performs address decoding to provide board and chip select signals also con verts analog st
48. Troubleshooting information includes e Table defining the function of the various alarm LED indicators e Troubleshooting flow charts e Module replacement procedures e Post repair procedures for performing alignment following re placement of defective modules B RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT The following list of test equipment is recommended to perform troubleshooting procedures on the Quantar station and ancillary equipment List of Test Equipment e Motorola R2001 or R2600 Series Communications Analyzer or equivalent PC with RSS program 9 pin female to 9 pin male Null Modem Cable 30 80399E31 In Line Wattmeter Motorola S 1350 or equivalent Dummy Load 509 station wattage or higher Handset Microphone with PTT switch TMN6164 or equivalent Torx driver with 15 bit for removal of module front panels IC Extraction Tool 01 80386A04 Commercial Government and Nin Mud Industrial Solutions Sector 68 81096 59 Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 11 15 99 UP Quantar Station Functional Manual 3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES The troubleshooting and repair philosophy for the Quantar station and ancillary equipment is one of Field Replace able Unit FRU substitution The station is comprised of self contained modules FRUs which when determined to be faulty may be replaced with a known good module to quickly bring the station back to normal operation The faulty module must then be ship
49. Cabinet Figure 4 shows the physical dimensions for a 12 x 20 cabinet Option X430AA Minimum recommended clearances are 30 front and 36 rear for installation access Refer to Equipment Ventilation on Page 3 for recommended ventilation clearances 19 75 50 2 CM 18 3 ES 19 25 gt y 48 9 CM 2 CM RR zr Bq 1 4 1207 LLLA 30 5 CM _ L L 4 i MOUNTING x RAIL 0 2 0 64 CM FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 5 6 5 6 14 2 CM pe 4 142 2 22 2 6109 55 9 CM 5 1 CM 6 CM 2 5 er 1 i 7 51 f 3 625 DIAMETER d HOLES NATA 1 19 3 1 Iw q 49 CM 2 2 6 1 CM VIEWED 5 1 CM FROM rls TOP M m ae 0 62 DIAMETER HOLES 4 BASE MOUNTING DETAIL Figure 4 12 x 20 Cabinet Dimensions 10 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation Physical Dimensions and Clearances Continued 30 x 20 Cabinet Figure 5 shows the physical dimensions for a 30 x 20 cabinet Option X52AA Minimum recommended clearances are 30 front and 36 rear for installation access Refer to Equipment Ventilation on Page 3 for recommended ventilation clearances
50. v 5 fia 23 POWER SUPPLY 1 Nn OBOE 24 CIRCUITRY VIABACKPLANE 522 Y 10 27 28 45V DC FROM 29 POWER SUPPLY 30 5 V MODULE s gt VIABACIPLANE 33 CONTROL CIRCUITRY 34 SCALING 8V SAMPLE L 10V BUFFERING gt 10V 8V eres CIRCUITRY BACKPLANE CONNECTOR OVENIZED ELEMENT BUFFER 5 MHZ DC STEERING VOLTAGE 5 MHZ REFERENCE E wo L num 0 aud NE STATION CONTROL CONVERTER PARCO STATION CONTROL MODULE VIA BACKPLANE STEERING VOLTAGE E CHIP SCALING SAURE nx d eer BUFFERING gt CIRCUITRY 5 MHZ OSCILLATOR CIRCUITRY 5V Y DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY Y STEERING VOLTAGE SAMPLE a 5 MHZ SAMPLE lt SPI BUS 3 8V SAMPLE lt X 14V A 4 10V ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY VARIOUS SIGNALS FROM UHSO NES TO BE MONITORED amp A1 CHIP SELECT 1 E DECODE CIRCUITRY BUS FROM STATION CONTROL MODULE BOARD SELECT DECODE A2 A5 CIRCUITRY Figure 2 Internal UHSO Module Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68P81088E08 A 5 M MOTOROLA RA RT CONFIGURATION E amp M KEYING For Quantar and Quantro Stations E I OVERVIEW The RA RT E amp keying configuration allows a Quantar Quantro station to be controlled by a remote console using either a radio link or a microwave link in place of the usual wireline link This configuration is typically used in cases where the station is located in a relatively inaccessible location such as a mountain t
51. 000000 co Set up test equipment as shown LOOP to obtaina PEAK reading on the lt t ___ ASSEMBLIES millivoltmeter Push or pull tuning rod for cavity 4 Use wrench and tighten locking whichever is HIGHER Output level set to 10 dBm SCrew Repeat steps 2 amp 3 for cavities 5 6 BUE ay IN LINE CONNECTOR HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR 50 I N 8 8580 2854 8868 Q ALLEN LJ LOCKING SCREW Frequency set Rx Tx frequency RESONATOR TUNING add ROD TUNING HIGH NOTCH LOOP ASSEMBLIES Set up test equipment as shown Use tuning tool to adjust trimmer screws for cavity 1 to obtain minimum reading on millivoltmeter Adjust trimmer screws equally to Range setto 10 dBm TRIMMER SCREWS 2 BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER FS co obtain minimum Reduce the range on the millivoltmeter as necessary to reach true minimum reading Repeat steps 1 and 2 for cavities 2 and 3 sab IN LINE PAD 50 OHM CONNECTOR LOOP
52. 48 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation Connecting Telephone Lines Continued System Type vs Wireline Circuit Matrix Table System Type Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Note 1 Note 1 Note 3 Note 3 Seen Local Area SECURENET w Repeater Ac DVM or CIU DVM or CIU 5 i DVM or DVM or Conventional Wide Area SECURENET DIGITAC DIGITAC Conventional Simulcast Wide Area SECURENET Note 2 DOC Conventional Local Area ASTRO w Repeater Access DIU SMARTZONE SMARTZONE IntelliRepeater Trunking Wide Area Analog Audio Switch Audio Switch Not Used Not Used SMARTZONE SMARTZONE IntelliRepeater Trunking Wide Area SECURENET Audio Switch Audio Switch Not Used Not Used 6809 Trunking Single Site Analog Interconnect 6809 Trunking Single Site SECURENET DVM or CIU DVM or CIU 6809 Trunking Single Site Analog w Console Priority In Console Console Cone We terface Req d Req d 6809 Trunking Wide Area Analog Comparator 6809 Trunking Simulcast Wide Area Analog Note 2 DVM or DVM or 6809 Trunking Wide Area SECURENET DIGITAC DIGITAC 6809 Trunking Simulcast Wide Area SECURENET Note 2 Notes 1 For 4 wire systems Line 1 is transmit audio landline to station and Line 2 is receive audio station to landline For 2 wire systems Line 2 is transmit and receive audio conventional local area analog only 2 For Simulcast stations transmit audio is connected from RDM or equivalent to GE
53. 5 5 mA 2 5 mA and 2 5 mA are dc voltages nomi nally either 7V or 5V which are fed to an A D converter The conver ter serves as a comparator and interprets the inputs as highs and lows The data is then sent serially to the microprocessor Miscellaneous Inputs Outputs The following inputs and outputs are provided on the WIB These lines may be assigned various functions according to customer specifica tions e One 1 optically coupled inputs e Seven 7 transistor coupled inputs e One 1 relay closure outputs normally open contacts e Three 3 transistor coupled outputs Simulcast Processing Circuitry Summing and gating circuitry is provided on the WIB to allow PL tones reverse burst and TX audio GEN TX DATA to be combined and output to the VCO in the Exciter Module after signal processing by the SCM to directly modulate the rf carrier The simulcast circuitry is controlled by the Station Control Board microprocessor via the WIB microproces sor and the PASIC on the WIB 68 81094 77 9 1 00 CLN6955A and CLN6957A Wireline Interface Boards 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR 50 TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6955 C
54. Battery Charger Revert Board The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6074B Battery Charger Revert Board circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the func tions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 4 for a block diagram of the Battery Charger Revert Board Note Model CPN1047A Power Supply Modules without battery charging capabilities are equipped with a CPN6078A External Charger Connect Board in place of the CPN6074B Battery Charger Revert Board The External Charger Connect Board provides a direct electrical path from the 28V Main Supply Circuitry plo the DC to DC Converter Board to the card edge connector used to connect to an external charger and battery The external char ger is responsible for 1 charging the external battery and 2 detecting an AC power fail condition and initiating battery revert mode Charger Supply Circuitry Overview The Charger Supply Circuitry is comprised of a switching type power supply which generates the charging current necessary to charge an external storage battery Switching Power Supply Operation The charger switching power supply accepts 28V from the DC to DC Converter Board which is fed through a filter and a Buck FET Switch to a Power Coil This coil is controlled by the Buck FET Switch and a Boost FET S
55. Determine the location in the cabinet into which to mount the cage Note that when installing multiple cages it is recommended that you mount the first cage in the lowest possible position in the cabinet making sure the modules clear the bottom frame of the cabinet then continue to wards the top with additional cages Thread two of the supplied mounting screws into the low est mounting holes of the cabinet mounting rails Now in sert the cage into the cabinet resting the cage on the two Screws Insert the remaining two mounting screws through the bottom two mounting holes in the cage mounting flanges left and right sides and secure the cage to the cabinet mounting rails Remove the two lower mounting screws and insert them through the upper two mounting holes in the cage mount ing flanges Tighten all four mounting screws securely 20 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 21 Quantar Station Functional Manual Mounting Procedures Continued Mounting Quantar Station Cage s Customer Supplied Rack Quantar station cages intended for field mounting in a customer Note Option X153AA provides two 2 supplied rack require standoff brackets to center the cage within the standoff brackets and four 4 self tapping rack mounting rails Mount the cage s as described in Figure 11 Screws Note that when installing multiple cag
56. FIELD FIELD LANDLINE XJ 2 2 LOW PASS ADJUST e a FILTER 7 cicumav E STATION TO LANDLINE DATA SIGNAL PATH Figure 5 9 6kbps ASTRO Modem Data Signal Path Functional Block Diagram 1 OF 2 CIRCUITS SHOWN LANDLINE TO STATION DATA SIGNAL PATH JU1010 50 TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6956 PLACED IN 4 WIRE OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR POSITION CLN6956 CLN6958 io ON STATION BACKPLANE 5 3 POLE SERIAL DATA T o 22 c LO PASS FILTER LINE 1 AUDIO gt BUFFER LIMITER FROM LANDLINE DX DX 2 STATION MICROPROCESSOR e pati TO FROM 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6956 gt STATION OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR CONTROL CLN6956 CLN6958 MODULE ON STATION BACKPLANE AMPLIFIER GAIN CONTROL VIA 5 22 FROM HDLC BUS LINE2AUDIO JUMPER JUMPER FROM STATION lt KED FIELD TOLANDLINE MJ iL d GAIN 3 POLE SERIAL DATA AMPLIFIER 4 ADJUST lt LOW PASS CIRCUITRY FILTER E STATION TO LANDLINE DATA SIGNAL PATH Figure 6 12kbps SECURENET Modem Data Signal Path Functional Block Diagram 12 68P81094E78 A 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA POWER SUPPLY MODULE INCLUDES MODELS CPN1049A 265W w o Battery Charger AC Input CPN1050B 265W with Battery Charger AC Input El DESCRIPTION The Models CPN1049A CPN1050B Power Supply Modules are described in this section A general descrip
57. HOST MICROPROCESSOR HOST SUPPORT CIRCUITRY SCC1 SCC3 SCC2 SCC4 SMC1 HOST MICROPROCESSOR SMC2 CLOCK ADDRESS RESET DATA SPI BUS 7 3 7 2 2 25 MHZ 221 TIMING CIRCUITRY Figure 2 CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Module Functional Block Diagram 1 of 5 14 68 81094 76 POWER UP RESET MANUAL RESET 9 1 00 gt CONTROLLER CIRCUITRY SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS HOST ADDRESS BUS INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATIONS BUS HDLC ETHERNET CIRCUITRY ETHERNET CONVERTER CIRCUITRY EXTERNAL LINE INTERFACE CIRCUITRY 3 7 HANDSHAKING SIGNALS P O PORTS P1 OUT amp P0 IN 2 HANDSHAKING SIGNALS P O PORTS P1 OUT amp PO IN 2 HANDSHAKING SIGNALS P O I O PORTS P1 OUT amp PO IN ETHERNET CONNECTOR 22 ON BACKPLANE e 21 19 RS 485 BUS TRANSCEIVER RECEIVERS 2 DRIVERS RECEIVERS 7 DRIVERS RECEIVERS a DRIVERS HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS EIA ede BUS 12 EIA 232 ee BUS 1 232 BUS 7 DLAN DB 9 CONNECTOR ON BACKPLANE CONNECTOR 15 FOR FUTURE USE
58. TRN7751A Peripheral Tray Assembly 0383498N08 Self tapping screws 4 2785203U01 Peripheral Tray Shelf 2 68 81086 7 9 1 00 Peripheral Tray Option PERIPHERAL TRAY CONTENTS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 2 shows the Peripheral Tray equipped with dual circulator assembly and low pass filter CABLE HARNESS MATES WITH 10 PIN TRANSMIT CONNECTOR LOW 55 DUAL CIRCULATOR STATION BACKPLANE LOW PASS F FILTER FILTER ASSEMBLY HEAT SINK PERIPHERAL DC POWER TRANSMIT RF INPUT COOLING FAN HEAT SINK THERMISTOR TRAY TO FROM FOR OUTPUT COOLING FAN POWER ANPLIFIER CIRCULATOR HEAT SINK TO MODULE CABLE HARNESS Figure 2 Peripheral Tray Contents and Inputs and Outputs 900 MHz Circulator and Low Pass Filter Shown 68 81086 7 3 9 1 00 Quantar Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 4 68 81086 7 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA ULTRA HIGH STABILITY OSCILLATOR UHSO MODULE Internal Option X873AA DESCRIPTION The Option X873AA UHSO Module is described in this section A general description identification of inputs out puts functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is suffi cient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshoot ing to the module level Refer also to the Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures f
59. charges co located storage batteries and au tomatically reverts to battery backup operation in the event of ac power failure Triple Circulator Option provides additional isolation and in termodulation protection for rf congested transmitter sites Duplexer Option allows a single antenna to serve for both transmitter and receiver circuitry in repeater applications Antenna Relay Option allows a single antenna to be switched between transmitter and receiver circuitry for base station appli cations UHSO Option ultra high stability oscillator provides im proved station frequency accuracy required for some system types ASTRO Modem allows connection for ASTRO digital signal ing to a console through a Digital Interface Unit DIU in an ASTRO system Station Access Module SAM allows station to decode MDG Repeater Access e g Select5 DTMF etc Wide Space Receiver provides 8 MHz receiver bandwidth for VHF and UHF stations 68P81096E56 A 9 1 00 Quantar Station Functional Manual Multiple System Capability In addition to conventional capabilities the Quantar station can be pro grammed to operate in 6809 Trunking and ntelliRepeater Trunking systems 6809 Trunking When programmed for 6809 Trunking capability the station can oper ate in a SMARTNET trunking system under control of a 6809 Trunking Controller IntelliRepeater Trunking When programmed for ntelliRepeater capability the
60. pin D type connector 19 located the station backplane which typi cally mates with a PhoneNET adapter module connected into the IntelliRepeater local network Ethernet Port An Ethernet port is provided via a BNC connector on the station back plane which allows the station to connect into the Ethernet local net work of an IntelliRepeater trunking site The Ethernet port may also be used to allow station software to be downloaded from a local PC into the FLASH SIMM module This Ethernet port is provided by Host uP se rial communication bus SCC1 General Purpose RS232 Serial Port A general purpose RS 232 communications port is provided by Host uP serial communication bus SCCA This port is available at a DB 25 connector 15 located on the station backplane and may be used to connect external equipment e g an external modem RSS Port Backplane A 9 pin D type connector 20 is provided on the station backplane to allow service personnel to connect a PC loaded with the Radio Ser vice Software RSS and perform programming and maintenance tasks The RSS port may also be used to allow station software to be downloaded from a local PC into the FLASH SIMM module This RSS port is provided by Host uP serial communication bus SMC1 which communicates with the RSS terminal via EIA 232 Bus Receivers Driv ers RSS Port Front Panel A 9 pin D type connector is provided on the SCM front panel to allow service p
61. 10 000 Hz X 5275 Hz X 7000 Hz Aux TX Magnitude Response Aux TX Audio Phase Response 1dB DIV START 0 Hz STOP 10 000 Hz START 0 Hz STOP 10 000 Hz Figure 2 Fast Keyup Performance Characteristics 68P80800A02 O 5 1 31 98 Quantar Quantro Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68P80800A02 O 1 31 98 M MOTOROLA DUAL CONTROL OF GATED ACCESS VIA TRC AND SAM For Quantar and Quantro Stations Servicing MCS Users E OVERVIEW This section describes how to program the station Quantar or Quantro and the Station Access Module SAM to allow two functions repeater setup knockdown and gated access to be controlled toggled on and off by both of the following methods e Console Operator using TRC tones e Subscriber Unit using DTMF or MDC 1200 signaling transmitted over the air By utilizing the MCS Feature and controlling the repeater setup knockdown and gated access functions an effective Mutual Aid talk group configuration can be created In this configuration subscribers within a specific coverage area local subscribers are assigned a primary PL and have their MCS User Access field set to ENABLED These subscribers will repeat as normal assuming station is toggled to repeater setup mode Should emergency conditions require other subscribers outside of the local area to enter the communications area these subscribers will be able to communicate with each othe
62. 10 dBm _ Figure 5 Quantar VHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure Sheet 1 of 3 9 1 00 68 81086 71 9 Quantar VHF Station Functional Manual VERIFYING INSERTION LOSS Range setto 10 dBm Connect test equipment as shown Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the millivoltmeter GU 6 dB UG349A IN LINE PAD NETO BNC 50 OHM L N L HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER co CONNECTOR ooo 0000 0000 00 ool 000 oO 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 j q L e L a whichever is HIGHER Output level set to 10 dBm Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency Connectthe duplexer cable assembly and test equipment to the duplexer as shown Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the millivoltmeter Subtract the absolute number noted in Step 2 from the number noted in Step 4 The difference should be less than 1 3 dB to meet specification for Insertion Loss Repeat Steps 1 5 for Low Pass High Notch cavities with the following exceptions 1 Set Frequency Generator for Rx or Tx frequency whichever is LOWER 2 Connect Signal Generator to Low Pass duplexer input cavity 1 3 Connect terminator to cavity 6 68 81086 71
63. 14 2 V dc supply voltage This voltage is used as the 14 2 V supply voltage for the station modules via the backplane Switching Power Supply Operation The 14 V switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 133 kHz The PWM output pulses are fed through a driver to control a power FET which repetitively gates the 28 RAW from the Output Filter Circuitry on the DC Input Board to a power coil The result is a high induced voltage which charges the filter capacitors to approximately 14 2 V dc A current sense comparator provides a feedback signal to the PWM to maintain a constant output voltage Protection Circuitry An overvoltage detect circuit monitors the output voltage and if preset thresholds are exceeded turns on a FET crowbar circuit which immedi ately discharges the output to protect other modules in the station An overcurrent detect circuit monitors the current draw from the 14V Supply Circuitry and if a preset threshold is exceeded generates a PRI SHUT SEC signal which shuts down the entire power supply module The 5 V Supply Circuitry operates identically to the 14 V Supply Cir cuitry described above to generate a 5 1 V dc supply voltage This voltage is used as the 5 V supply voltage for the station modules via the backplane This circuitry accepts 28V RAW from the 28V Main Supply Circuit ry and generates 10 SEC and 2 5V_SEC supply voltages for use by local circ
64. 2 1 MHZ REFERENCE Je Figure 2 Quantro Quantar 800 MHz Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68P81086E76 D 7 M MOTOROLA RECEIVER MODULE Includes TRF6552G Receiver Board DESCRIPTION The Quantar Quantro 900 MHz Receiver Module is described in this section A general description identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are pro vided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshoot ing section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The Receiver Module provides the receiver functions for the Quantar Quantro 900 MHz station The receiver module is comprised of a Re ceiver Board and a ceramic preselector mounted on board all con tained within a slide in module housing The receiver module per forms highly selective bandpass filtering and dual down conversion of the station receive rf signal A custom receiver IC then performs an ana log to digital conversion of the received signal and outputs a differential data signal to the Station Control Module Overview of Circuitry The receiver module contains the following circuitry Frequency Synthesizer Circuitry consisting
65. 256K X 8 Y Y Y Y 256K X 8 A D DATA SERIAL DATA CONVERTER SIMULCAST GEN TX WIDEBAND AUDIO DATA Ene TO DATA BUS DATA BUS U STATION CONTROL MODULE POWER 496 A SUPPLY CIRCUITRY 96V Figure 2 CLN6955A CLN6957A Wireline Interface Board Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68P81094E77 A 5 Quantar and Quantro Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68 81094 77 10 15 96 CLN6955A and CLN6957A Wireline Interface Boards Description of Audio Data Signal Paths Note Depending on local codes and or customer preference phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the screw terminal connector on the station backplane 2 wire audio connections are made at Line 2 Audio For systems using dc remote control set jumpers JU1008 and JU1009 as shown below for 2 wire applications WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD 2 WIRE DC REMOTE JU1008 JU1009 Four levels of gain adjustment are provided by circuitry on the WIB for Landline to Station and Station to Landline audio paths Addi tional fine level adjustments are performed in software in the Station Control Module Note that a sample of the outbound signal is fed from one of the output transistors to the can cellation amplif
66. 3002 Phone Line Specifications Type 5 3002 C Notched Noise 51 dBrnCO 51 dBrnCO Attenuation Distortion 504 to 2504 Hz 2 0 to 8 0 dB 2 0 to 8 0 dB 404 to 2804 Hz 2 0 to 10 0 dB spec not available 304 to 3004 Hz 3 0 to 12 0 dB 3 0 to 12 0 dB Envelope Delay Distortion 804 to 2604 Hz 1750 usec 1750 usec Impulse Noise Threshold 71 dBrnCO Intermodulation Distortion R2 R3 Phase Jitter 20 300 Hz 10 Degrees 4 300 Hz 15 Degrees Frequency Shift 3 Hz gt 25 Degrees gt 30 Degrees 46 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation Connecting Telephone Lines Continued Location of Telephone Line Connections For added convenience telephone line connections may be made in one of two locations on the station rear panel e 50 Telco Systems Connector e Orange 8 Screw Terminal Connector The location of the telephone line connections is shown in Figure 26 Note that these connections are not surge or transient protected Refer to Quality Standards Installation Manual 68P81089E50 for de tails PHONE LINE INPUTS PHONE LINE INPUTS PNET nea a ud LINE 2 7 LINE4 8 LINE 2 LINE 4 LINE 1 3 LINE 3 LINE 1 28 LINE3 LINE 2 4 LINE 4 LINE 2 29 LINE4 8 POSITION TERMINAL CONNECTOR 50 TELCO CONNECTOR Note For easier connection of phone lines conne
67. CLN6956 WIB is designed for use in stations installed in locations where lo cal codes permit phone line connections to either the 50 pin Telco connector or the orange screw terminal connector Model CLN6958 allows only connections to the orange screw terminal connector Overview of Circuitry The Wireline Interface Board WIB serves as the interface between the customer telephone lines and the station equipment Each WIB con tains circuitry to interface with a variety of telephone line configurations and signal types In addition the board contains connectors to accept two modem cards These cards are required to interface with up to two 9 6kbps ASTRO inputs The WIB is installed behind the Station Control Module front panel and connects to the station backplane Phone line connections may be made either to a 50 pin Telco connector and or an orange screw ter minal connector see sidebar The WIB contains the following circuitry e Audio and Data Circuits the WIB provides a number of voice and data circuits which interface with the customer phone lines e Microprocessor serves as the main controller for the WIB communicates with the Station Control Module microprocessor interfaces with the ASTRO and SECURENET data signals and provides monitoring and control for a variety of on board circuits e Peripheral Application Specific IC PASIC primarily responsi ble for injecting and retrieving PCM voice si
68. Each fully equipped station cage weighs ap proximately 55 Ibs Tarpaulin or plastic drop cloth to cover surrounding equipment while drilling concrete anchor holes for installations where cabi net or rack is being anchored to concrete flooring Vacuum cleaner for removing concrete dust for installations where cabinet or rack is being anchored to concrete flooring The Quantar station equipment may be shipped either by air freight or electronic van as specified by customer The packing methods are as follows If no cabinet or rack is selected the station cage is shipped in a cardboard container with styrofoam interior corner braces If the 12 x 20 cabinet is selected the station cage is shipped installed in the cabinet all contained within a cardboard contain er with corrugated interior corner braces All other available cabinets are shipped with the Quantar station cage s installed in the cabinet with the cabinet bolted to a wooden skid and covered with a cardboard box with corrugated interior corner braces Stations ordered for use in open frame racks 7 71 or 8 avail able are shipped with the cage s in a cardboard container with corrugated interior corner braces The rack is shipped separate ly wrapped in insulating foam Stations ordered for use in a modular rack 30 45 or 52 avail able are shipped installed in the rack The rack is then covered in an anti static bag Thoroughly ins
69. El DESCRIPTION Options X182AG and X182AH provide a duplexer module for use with Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz stations respectively This section provides a general description identification of inputs outputs performance specifica tions and a typical mounting location detail duplexer module is considered non repairable and requires no field tuning General Description The duplexer module shown in Figure 1 allows a transmit and re ceive channel pair to share a common TX RX antenna Each duplexer module consists of ten resonant cavities five for transmit and five for receive contained in a temperature compensated copper enclosure designed to mount in a standard EIA 19 equipment rack Each set of five cavities is designed and tuned to pass the respective transmit or receive channel frequency or bandwidths while providing maximum TX noise suppression at the RX frequency and maximum RX isolation at the TX frequency Figure 1 Typical 900 MHz Duplexer Module Commercial Government and Motorola Inc 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81091E93 B oe 1301 Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz Stations Functional Manuals INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 2 shows the input and output rf connectors for the duplexer module RECEIVE RF INPUT TO RECEIVER MODULE TRANSMIT INPUT TO FROM ANTENNA POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE Figure 2 Quantar 800 MHz 900 MHz Duple
70. IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar and Quantro Station Products CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the WIB jumpers indicators and all input and output external connections MATES WITH CABLE TO ORANGE TERMINAL STRIP 2 WIRE 4 WIRE SELECT FLASH ACCESSIBLE ON REAR OF STATION JUMPER MEMORY LINE 1 AUDIO CIRCUIT TRANSFORMER AND IMPEDANCE MATCHING JUMPERS LINE 2 AUDIO CIRCUIT TRANSFORMER AND IMPEDANCE MATCHING JUMPERS WL FAIL DC REMOTE CONTROL 2 WIRE 4 WIRE JUMPERS CARD EDGE CONNECTORS MATE WITH BACKPLANE Figure 1 Wireline Interface Board Jumpers Indicators and Inputs Outputs CLN6955A Shown 2 68 81094 77 9 1 00 CLN6955A and CLN6957A Wireline Interface Boards 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the WIB circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for an overall block dia gram of the WIB and Figure 3 thru Figure 6 for block diagrams for 2 wire voice 4 wire voice 9 6kbps ASTRO and 12kbps SECURENET signal paths Functional Overview Refer to Figure 2 Introduction As mentioned previously the WIB serves as the interface between the customer telephone lines and the station equipment In gene
71. MULTIPLEXER DPA DETECT DPA V gt Y Y IPA DETECT BUFFER IPA VF te a NE MULTIPLEXER BUFFER FILTER H OUTPUTS 14V VOLTAGE Tee REF CIRCUITRY gt DIVIDER EXCITER MODULE D CE Y OMNI VOLTAGE VOLTAGE DIVIDER DPA A Ls gt Re IPA P O gt gt ANALOG MULTIPLEXER THERMISTOR gt gt j T z ge BUFFER M asss Figure 2 TLF1940A 800 MHz 20W Power Amplifier Module Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68 81091 91 7 Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz Stations Functional Manuals P O P101 32 33 __ __ COAXIAL CABLE FROM PWR CONTROL N POWER AMPLIFIER OUTPUT VOLTAGE 4 Po P O EE INPUT OUTPUT FROM LINE V CONT EXCITER Pige gt FILTER y VOLTAGE Se ATSR m o BRACKET MODULE CIRCUITRY REAR OF STATION ES CURRENT LIMITER CONNECTOR BRACKET 35 L U CIRCULATOR CONNECTOR N HARMONIC 125W MAX Y gt FILTER lt 0 d gt lt N COUPLER TRANSMIT RF V_OMNI OUTPUT J4100 1
72. Restore power to the station Post Replacement Optimization Procedure Step 1 If you replaced the Receiver Board Perform the Squelch Adjust and the RSSI alignment procedures lo cated in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Step 2 If you replaced the Preselector Assembly Perform the preselector field tuning procedure beginning on page 36 Replacing Receiver Module 800 MHz and 900 MHz Replacement Procedure Step 1 Turn off station power refer to page 20 Step 2 Remove anti vibration screws if installed from top and or bottom of module front panel Step 3 Slide the module out to the first stop Disconnect mini UHF connector on rf cable rf input to the module con nected to the preselector assembly Step 4 Remove faulty module from cage Step 5 Install replacement Receiver Module by sliding module into cage and firmly seating the module connector into the backplane Do not slam the module against the back plane or push any harder than necessary to seat the con nectors Connect the rf cable to the mini UHF connector at the top of the module Step 6 Restore power to the station Post Replacement Optimization Procedure Perform the Squelch Adjust and the RSSI alignment procedures lo cated in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 33 Quantar Station Functional Manual Replacing ASTRO Modem Card Replacement Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
73. SPI BUS TO FROM s TATION MODULES Figure 3 CLN7060A Station Control Board Functional Block Diagram 1 of 5 16 68 81096 87 9 1 00 HOST DATA BUS HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS BUFFERS 5555555555555555556555 555555555555555555555555555555555555555555 ED SPI BUS RESET HOST DATA BUS HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS SPI BUS CLN1614A Station Control Module INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATIONS BUS HDLC 6 6 NON VOLATILE MEMORY _ HOST DATA BUS FROM AORO PROCESSOR Y ALLL DRAM MEMORY 8Kx8 EEPROM CODEPLUG 7 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ S 7 ZZZZ77Z777777772 7ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 2 Z Z 2 DU N N HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS FROM Q HOST 4 NY MICROPROCESSOR E m N N N PROGRAM ENABLE HOST MICROPROCESSOR N N N N N N HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS N N pred J lt NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN MICROPROCESSOR SPI BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS Figure 3 CLN7060A Station Control Board Functional Block Diagram 2 of 5 9 1 00 68 81096 87 17 Quantar and Quantro Station Products HDLC BUS CONTROL CIRCUITRY O TO FROM HOST MICROPROCESSOR SPI BUS 3
74. and perform programming and maintenance tasks The RSS port may also be used to allow station software to be downloaded from a local PC into the FLASH SIMM module This RSS port is provided by Host uP serial communication bus SMC1 which communicates with the RSS terminal via EIA 232 Bus Receivers Driv ers RSS Port Front Panel A 9 pin D type connector is provided on the SCM front panel to allow service personnel to connect a PC loaded with the Radio Service Soft ware RSS and perform programming and maintenance tasks The RSS port may also be used to allow station software to be downloaded from a local PC into the FLASH SIMM module This RSS port is provided by Host uP serial communication bus SMC2 which communicates with the RSS terminal via EIA 232 Bus Receivers Drivers 68 81096 87 9 1 00 CLN1614A Station Control Module Digital Signal Processor DSP and DSP ASIC Circuitry General All station transmit and receive audio data is processed by the DSP and related circuitry This circuitry includes the DSP IC the DSP ASIC and the DSP ASIC Interface Circuitry All audio signals input to or output from the DSP are in digitized format Inputs to the DSP circuitry are e Digitized receive signals from the Receiver Module e Audio from handset or microphone connected to appropriate SCM front panel connector signal is digitized by CODEC IC p o Audio In terface Circuitry before being sent to DSP via Audio I
75. gt J TX ENABLE SCM AND LATCHES 2 SPI BUS CLOCK amp DATA SPI BUS CLOCK amp DATA Y 102V VCO SYNTHESIZER 89V a Rm CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY 2 Sai BANDSHIFT SELECT Fd AUXI c CIRCUITRY 8 9V ie NOTE 1 1 RF SWITCH lt FREQUENCY E CIRCUITRY P O E 8 7 V P102 LOCKED CHANGE LOOP FILTER BYPASS ie ANALOG SWITCHES y VCO CIRCUITRY UPPER OF BAND Y 2 1 MHZ 2 1 MHZ Y NOTE 1 REF BUFFER gt RIN OSCILLATOR 3 gt FROM BUFFER Su AMP ALL BANDS TX ENABLE EXCEPT 800 MHZ LOW FREQ 1 ANE J3100 COMP UP gt CONTRODVOLTAGE MODULATION Outer Y MINI MODULATED gt MIN CHARGE LOOP gt 4 DIODES IMPEDANCE Duo EM ATTENUATOR lt RF OUTPUT DOWN gt 2 5 7 5 V DO 487 V MATCHING Ix TO POWER ERES AMPLIFIER Fin VCO CIRCUITRY LOWER OF BAND MODULE gt OSCILLATOR gt gt 4 L BUFFER AMP MODULATION Veo VCO FEEDBACK P O _ FEEDBACK lt _ 101 BUFFER 1 NOTES REF 1 Upper Band VCO Circuitry and VCO Select Circuitry are not AUDIO LO FREQUENCY presenton 200 MHz TLF6920 and 900 MHz TLF6930 FROM 77 MODULATION xciter Boards SCM COMPENSATION MODULATION LOW PASS 2 LOW PASS vco P O P102 FILTER FILTER AUDIO FROM 78 SCM Figure 2 VHF UHF 800 MHz and 900 MHz Exciter Modules Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68P81086E24 E 7 M MOTOROLA POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE MOD
76. in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the receiver module Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry Introduction The synthesizer and VCO circuitry generate the 1st LO injection signal for the 1st mixer in the receiver front end circuitry Functional operation of these circuits is as follows Phase Locked Loop The phase locked loop PLL IC receives frequency selection data from the Station Control Module microprocessor Once programmed the PLL IC compares 2 1 MHz reference signal from the Station Con trol Module with a feedback sample of the VCO output Depending on whether the feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2 1 MHz reference correction pulses are generated The width of these correction pulses is dependent on the amount of difference between the 2 1 MHz reference and the VCO feedback The up down pulses from the PLL IC are fed to a charge pump which outputs a dc voltage proportional to the pulse widths This dc voltage is then low pass filtered and fed to the VCO as the CONTROL VOLT AGE Note that if a frequency change is requested by the microproces sor the low pass loop filter is momentarily bypassed to accelerate the frequency change vco The dc control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to dual VCOs which generate the 1st LO injection signal Within each band Range 1 and Range 2 one VCO generates signals
77. it is recommended that only the following functions be customized by the user Follow the instructions in Chapter 11 of the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for details on modifying the WildCard Tables e Disable Automatic Hot Switchover Delete WildCard Table 8 in both stations TABLE 8 OF 20 STATE CONDITION Description MAIN STANDBY 8 State Cond State Cond State EVENT FLAG 6 AND INPUT 8 ACTION INACTION ems STANDBY NULL im MRTI DISABLE RX WL MUTE ES WAIT 3 0 CER OUTER 3 Cini 8 8 68P81095E89 O 2 15 99 Main Standby Configuration e Select Alternate Function Tones to Activate Main Standby Switchover default is FT4 to switch FT5 to switch back To modify the Function Tone that initiates the initial switch from Main to Standby modify the TRC TONE entry in WildCard Table 19 in the MAIN station and WildCard Table 17 in the STANDBY sta tion To modify the Function Tone that initiates the switch back from Standby to Main modify the TRC TONE entry in WildCard Table 18 in the MAIN station and WildCard Table 18 in the STANDBY station Main Modify TRC Tone field to change Main to Standby Switchover Standby Main Modify TRC Tone field to change Standby to Main Switchover Standby 68P81095E89 O 9 2 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products e Select Alternate Function Tone to Initiate Status Request default is FT14 Main Modify TRC Tone field to change whic
78. later version boards You must remove the EPROMs or FLASH ICs from the re placement board and install the EPROMs or FLASH ICs from the old board The following illustration shows the locations of the EPROMs and FLASH ICs Install replacement Wireline Interface Board by sliding board into cage and firmly seating the board card edge connectors into the backplane Do not slam the board against the backplane or push any harder than necessary to seat the connectors Replace the front panel by pressing it into place and re placing the two screws Be sure the 2 wire cable from the local speaker is connected to the 3 pin connector at the bottom front of the Station Control Board If the connector is not keyed earlier models you may connect the 3 pin connector in either polarity Restore power to the station Post Replacement Optimization Procedure Perform the Rx Wireline and Tx Wireline adjustment procedures located in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 30 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Partially remove front panel and position the board extraction tab on the bottom rail of the cage and slide the panel to the left until the lip of the tab is positioned behind the cutout in the Wireline Interface Board Remove the two screws from top and bottom of Station Control Module front panel TORX SCREWS 2 EXTRACTOR TAB BEHIND BOARD CUTOUT STATION CONTROL MODULE FRONT PANEL
79. lt gt 5V DC CIRCUITRY WIDTH TRANSISTOR 2 CRINE MODULATOR DRIVERS Q 5V 5V lt a POWER FET FILTER e c gt RECEIVER SWITCH CIRCUITRY OR SHUTDOWN STATION gt Y vec FET 30 MODULES Y 133 KHZ 31 VIA n d Y 1 CER m BACKPLANE 67 KHZ N us PULSE CROWBAR 1 WIDTH gt FET gt 5V OVERCURRENT CIRCUIT MODULATOR DRIVER DETECT OVERVOLTAGE DETECT REF Y SURGE CURRENT 5 STARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITR 133 KHZ DELAT gt DC FAIL ALARM 2 E REF 9 j e DCINPUT DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY vec REF DETECTORS COUPLER DC FAIL ALARM vec Q STARTUP ISOLATION 12V PULSE TRANSFORMER STARTUP BIAS WIDTH MODULATOR 1 alls gt TRANSISTOR SWITCH M 133 KHZ CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUITRY 67 KHZ SLL vd 267 KHZ 133 KHZ CLOCK zt psp GENERATOR gt 2 gt CIRCUITRY 267 KHZ Figure 2 210W DC DC Power Supply Module Functional Block Diagram Sheet 1 of 2 10 68P81085E12 B 9 1 00 TRN7802A TRN7803A Power Supply Modules FAIL ALARM STARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITRY 14 2V BULK FROM MAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRY DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY RIPPLE DETECT CIRCUITRY gt gt PE A D CONVERTER FAN FAULT DETECT ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY vem L C CU 2 gt DECODE CONTROL CIRCUITRY BOARD Figure 2 210W DC
80. program make the following codeplug data changes to allow proper RA RT operation Refer to the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for details on making codeplug programming changes Table 1 Codeplug Data Changes for RA RT Operation RF Link Configuration Equipment Data Parameter RSS User s Guide Location Station 1 Disable TX Notch Filter Programming the Wireline Configuration Data p o Chapter 4 Station 3 Disable TX Notch Filter Programming the Wireline Configuration Data p o Chapter 4 Table 2 Codeplug Data Changes for RA RT Operation Microwave Link Configuration Equipment Data Parameter RSS User s Guide Location Station 3 Disable TX Notch Filter Programming the Wireline Configuration Data p o Chapter 4 8 68 81090 99 9 1 00 RA RT Configuration E amp M Control 5 TX WIRELINE ALIGNMENT You may align the TX Wireline levels as described in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 which requires the use of an external signal generator or you may use the station to generate the alignment tone This method is described as follows Note Make sure the Automatic Line Control parameter is disabled for Stations 1 2 and 3 Station 1 TX Wireline Alignment Perform standard TX Wireline alignment procedure located in RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Station 2 TX Wireline Alignment Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Con
81. rack and a 45 rack are being stacked the larger rack should be placed on the bot tom NUT amp WASHER 4 EACH UPPER MI RACK Note Lift Brackets are available from WASPD to aid in lifting the racks Install the brackets as shown below and attach a lift bar or chain thru the bracket holes A hoist may then be used to lift the rack EZ LIFT e s lt 5 BRACKET SS 0782291W01 SS BOLT amp WASHER 4 EACH e TASCSO LOWER RACK Modular Rack Stacking Limits Stacking Combinations Three 30 Modular Racks One 45 and One 30 Modular Rack One 30 and One 52 Modular Rack Two 45 Modular Racks One 45 and One 52 Modular Rack 26 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation Anti Vibration EMI Screws Stations are shipped with Torx head tapping screws installed at the top and bottom of each of the module front panels These screws help reduce EMI emissions from the station modules as well as provide ad ditional mechanical stability for installations where a high amount of vi bration such as from nearby heavy machinery is encountered SCREW SHOWN INSTALLED IN RECEIVER MODULE e SHOWN INSTALLED IN RECEIVER MODULE 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 27 Quantar Station Functional Manual ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
82. 1 27 Line 2 Customer 2 wire Phone Line Input Output Line 2 28 Line 3 Customer 4 wire Phone Line Input Line 3 29 Line 4 Customer 4 wire Phone Line Output Line 4 30 Aux RX Audio Output to external device 31 Open Open 32 GND Station Ground 33 14 2 VDC Out 14 2 V dc from Power Supply 1 Amp 34 Gen TX Data Modulation signal from Simulcast equipment 35 PL In Future Use 36 Aux Out 1 Failsoft Ind Customer defined transistor buffered output Note 1 37 Aux Out 2 RX Code Det Customer defined transistor buffered output Note 1 38 Aux Out 3 Customer defined transistor buffered output 39 Aux Out 4 Customer defined transistor buffered output 40 Aux Out 5 Customer defined transistor buffered output 41 Aux Out 6 v Customer defined transistor buffered output 42 Aux In 8 Customer defined transistor buffered input 43 Aux Out 7 RD Stat v N O contact of Relay A Note 1 44 Aux Out 8 pt N O contact of Relay B 45 Aux Out 9 pt N O contact of Relay C 46 Aux Out 10 contact of Relay D 47 Aux In 9 Ext PTT Opto isolated customer defined input Opto A 48 Aux In 10 Channel 1 Opto isolated customer defined input Opto B 49 Aux In 11 Channel 2 p Opto isolated customer defined input Opto C 50 Aux In 12 Channel 3 Opto isolated customer defined input Opto D Notes 1 Many o
83. 1 MHz reference and the VCO feedback The up down pulses from the PLL IC are fed to a charge pump which outputs a dc voltage proportional to the pulse widths This dc voltage is then low pass filtered and fed to the VCO as the CONTROL VOLT AGE Note that if a frequency change is requested by the microproces sor the low pass loop filter is momentarily bypassed to accelerate the frequency change vco The dc control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to a VCO which gen erates the 1st LO injection signal The VCO responds to the dc control voltage and generates the appropriate rf signal This signal is fed through a buffer amplifier and impedance matching and output to the 1st LO injection amplifier in the receiver front end circuitry A sample of the injection signal is returned to the PLL IC via a feedback buffer to serve as a VCO feedback signal 68P81086E76 D 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Receiver Front End Circuitry Custom Receiver IC Circuitry The receive rf input is fed from the antenna through a low pass filter to a 7 pole ceramic preselector filter which provides highly selective bandpass filtering The output of the preselector filter is then amplified image filtered and fed to one input of the 1st mixer The signal is mixed with the 1st LO injection signal generated by the synthesizer VCO cir cuitry to produce 73 35 MHz 1st signal The 1st i f signal is 2 pole bandpa
84. 148 MHz Range 1 or 156 MHz Range 2 turn the five tuning screws in CW until 1 8 protrudes past each of the tension nuts If the alignment frequency is less than or equal to 148 MHz Range 1 or 156 MHz Range 2 back out CCW the five tuning screws until 3 4 protrudes past each of the tension nuts Step 4 Using the torque driver and deep well socket tighten the five tension nuts on the adjustment screws to 6 in lIbs Step 5 Connect the test equipment as shown below PRESELECTOR ASSEMBLY RECEIVER X BOARD NUT S TUNING SCREW p 6 TO J ee TO DIP PEAK MONITOR 1 RF MILLIVOLTMETER OR POWER METER 5 RECEIVE 4 Test Equipment Setup for Preselector Field Tuning FROM SIGNAL GENERATOR 38 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting VHF Tuning Procedure Continued IMPORTANT When tuning for peak or dip turn the tuning screw 1 2 turn past the peak or dip to verify that you have obtained a true peak or dip After ensuring you have found true peak or dip turn the screw back to the location of the original peak or dip Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Tuning Procedure Step 1 Turn the station power supply ON to provide the active 509 termination Adjust the signal generator to the frequency calculated on page 40 Set the level to 5
85. 2 Continued 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Quantar Station Functional Manual Interpreting LED Indicators Several LED indicators are provided on the front panels of the modules that indicate specific operating conditions The service technician may observe these LEDs to obtain a quick status indication of the station equipment Figure 3 shows the location of all LED indicators provided on the sta tion equipment Table 1 lists each LED indicator along with a descrip tion of the status indicated by each LED Station On Station Fail Intcm AccD Control Ch Rx 1 Active Rx 2 Active Rx Fail Aux LED A lo A A A WL Fail 6 WL On WIRELINE INTERFACE MODULE FRONT PANEL OF STATION STATION CONTROL MODULE CONTROL MODULE FRONT PANEL Tx Lock Full PA Low Module Fail PA Fail Power On EXCITER MODULE FRONT PANEL POWER SUPPLY MODULE FRONT PANEL Figure 3 Quantar Station LED Indicators UHF Shown 6 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Table 1 Quantar Station LED Indicator Functions LED Location Status Definition GREEN when Exciter synthesizer is locked module fully functional OFF when TX Lock synthesizer is out of lock or F5V 14 2V or both are absent GREEN when transmitter is keyed
86. 4 Equipment Mounting Methods 1 4 4 4 Site Grounding and Lightning Protection page 5 Recommended Tools and Equipment page 6 Equipment Unpacking and Inspection 2 page 6 Physical Dimensions and Clearances page 7 continued on next page Motorola Inc 2000 Commercial Government and 68P81095E05 B All Rights Reserved Industrial Solutions Sector AGO EUR Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 Mechanical Installation page 14 Unpacking the Equipment page 14 Mounting Procedures 5 pardon bus betes asus deine dees page 20 stacking Gabinels 122e soe Babe WIS dita beaded Lus page 25 stacking Modular Racks l lutu edn AER ea kao du efe ae page 26 Anti Vibration EMI SCrews cau uta E Aer ERR Ree DOR dE REA page 27 Electrical Connections page 28 Power Supply Connections page 28 RE Cabling G
87. 6809 Con troller to the station backplane as shown in Figure 25 below 6809 CONTROLLER TSC CSC LINK CABLE INPUT Figure 25 Connecting Zone Controller Cable 44 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 45 Quantar Station Functional Manual Connecting Telephone Lines Introduction In conventional systems where the station is controlled by a remote console or in wide area systems utilizing comparators phone lines must be connected between the station and the remote equipment The phone lines may carry analog voice SECURENET encoded voice and or ASTRO encoded voice Also carried on the phone lines is one of two types of remote control signaling Tone Remote Control or ASTRO digital packets The following information defines the speci fications for the phone lines the location on the station backplane for phone line connections and which of the four 4 wireline circuits to use for various system types Telephone Line Specifications Most telephone companies recognize either 3002 or Type 5 as des ignations to define phone line types and associated electrical specifi cations Telephone lines meeting the specifications for either of these types are acceptable for use with the Quantar station The following table shows the specifications for 3002 and Type 5 phone line types Type 5 and
88. 68P81091E91 B 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA STATION CONTROL MODULE MODELS CLN6960A CLN6961A El DESCRIPTION The Models CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Modules SCM are described in this section general description identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional un derstanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Main tenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The SCM serves as the main controller for the station The SCM board contains a 68EN360 microprocessor a 56002 Digital Signal Processor and support circuitry which combine to provide signal processing and operational control over the other station modules The SCM also con tains the station operating software stored in FLASH memory and codeplug which define the personality of the station including system capabilities ASTRO SECURENET IntelliRepeater etc and operating parameters such as output power and operating frequency The CLN6961A provides conventional operation along with MRTI and 6809 trunking capabilities The CLN6960A is a full featured model and is required for use in IntelliRepeater applications Specific differences bet
89. 68P81096E59 B 1 1 11 15 99 Quantar Station Functional Manual Verifying Transmitter Circuitry Continued Step 3 Note Suspected faulty modules are shown ranked in order of most to least likelihood Step 4 Step 5 Note Suspected faulty modules are shown ranked in order of most to least likelihood Press the PTT button and observe LED indicators on Exciter Module front panel e f PA Low or PA Fail LED is lit suspect the following Power Amplifier Module failure Exciter Module failure Loose or bad Exciter to PA rf cable Loose or bad PA to antenna rf output cable PA rf output cable not properly terminated e If TX Lock LED is off suspect the following Faulty Station Control Module Faulty Exciter Module Faulty backplane Measure output power by pressing the PTT button and observing reading on in line wattmeter e output not at proper power as set for particular site adjust the output power as described in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 If PA output power OK set up R2001 for spectrum analyzer display Press the PTT button and observe the display The display should look similar to e If the display shows multiple carriers evenly spaced about the carrier suspect a faulty PA module or 5V IPA Module e If the display shows a solid carrier but off frequency suspect the following Faulty Exciter or Station Control Module Faulty external 5 MHz reference source e If the display shows a single
90. 81096 09 23 M MOTOROLA POWER SUPPLY MODULE INCLUDES MODELS CPN1047A 625W w o Battery Charger AC Input CPN1048A 625W with Battery Charger AC Input El DESCRIPTION The Models CPN1047A CPN1048A Power Supply Modules are described in this section A general description performance specifications identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The Models CPN1047A CPN1048A Power Supply Modules each ac cept an ac input 90 264 V ac 47 63 Hz and generate 28 6V dc 14 2V dc and 5 1V dc operating voltages to power the station mod ules Each power supply module is comprised of three circuit boards which provide several switching type power supply circuits power fac tor correction circuitry battery charger revert circuitry CPN1048A only and diagnostics and monitoring circuitry all contained within a slide in module housing The power supply module provides the following features e Auto ranging for input voltage and frequency circuitry automatically adjusts for input ranges of 90 264 V
91. 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS MICROWAVE LINK Install the station as described in the appropriate functional base station manual Figure 2 shows the connections between the station microwave equipment and console necessary to allow RA RT TRC control operation Perform the following procedures to make the wiring connections between the console and the Microwave Station 1 and between Microwave Station 2 and Station 3 MICROWAVE STATION3 STATION 2 LINE 1 MICROWAVE LINK MICROWAVE REMOTE STATION 1 CONSOLE E LEAD LANDLINE TO STATION WIRELINE AUDIO STATION TO LANDLINE WIRELINE AUDIO Figure 3 RA RT TRC Control Wiring Connections Microwave Link Console to Microwave Station 1 Wiring Connections Step 1 Connect the landline to station audio from the Note Referto the Microwave Station manu console to Microwave Station 1 al for details of making wireline connections Step 2 Connect the station to landline audio to the console to the Microwave Station 4 68P81090E98 A 9 1 00 RA RT Configuration TRC Control Microwave Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections Note the Microwave Station manu al for details of making wireline connections Note Phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the 8 position terminal connector Refer to the Installa
92. AE LUE Ra PA He hA eg page 3 Sense and Detect Circuit u uu d Ib beeen ree dua oes D ER Ry a o page 4 Cooling Fans Control Circuitry 4 page 6 STATION CONTROL CIRCUITRY STATION CONTROL MODULE CLN6960 CLN6961 68P81094E76 Description one cine i dein Pie QUPD REN page 1 General Description i d eL Cath a DE SR IL LV dads page 1 Overview of Circuitry e epe Y READ ER page 2 Controls Indicators and page 3 Functional Theory of Operation page 4 Host Microprocessor Host ASIC page 4 5 DRAM MEMON eU pne e ee Ep ea 5 External Line Interface Circuitry page 6 Digital Signal Processor DSP and DSP ASIC page 7 Station Reference Circultiy Pasa ma ap ed cea bigs ENG NET dx A CORREA page 8 HDLC Bus Conttol OIrcultby u Ju ua aquqa papua peed poet pep pip ides page 8 Audio Interface Circuitry a 4 ee scarce ond de sk
93. After the station equipment has been mechanically installed electrical connections must be made These include making power supply connections connecting antenna coax cables system cables and telephone lines Power Supply Connections CAUTION AC Input Power Connection Each station cage is shipped with an eight foot 3 conductor line cord Do not apply to Attach the receptacle end of the cord to the ac input plug located on at tre Make Sure tha the rear of the power supply module as shown in Figure 12 Plug the the ac power switch located on T gt the front panel ofthe Power Sup 3 prong plug into a 110 V ac grounded outlet If you wish to connect ply Module is turned to OFF and the station to a 220 V ac outlet you must obtain a line cord employing that the circuit breaker asso flexible cord with fittings approved by a safety testing agency ciated with the ac outlet is also in the end use country turned to OFF P O BACKPLANE CONNECTS AC OUTLET FERRITE RFI SUPPRESSOR Motorola Part No Note Ferrite bead required only for stations equipped with 7683477X02 CPN1047 or CPN1048 Power Supply Modules Figure 12 Connecting AC Line Cord 28 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation Power Supply Connections Continued Figure 13 DC Input Power Connections S
94. Assembly and Low Pass Filter Functional Operation Note The Triple Circulator Option is typi cally used in high density radio site applica tions where other co located transmitters near the frequency of the station can cause I M products The addition of the dual circu lator improves from gt 30dB to gt 75 The low pass filter reduces spurious emis sions to 90 CIRCULATOR TRANSMIT RF FROM POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE The Dual Circulator Assembly accepts transmit rf output power from the power amplifier module and provides 45 dB minimum of isolation between the power amplifier module and the transmit antenna The as sembly consists of two circulators each with a 500 load Each circula tor allows forward rf energy to pass through to the output while routing any reflected rf energy to the corresponding 502 load Refer to the block diagram shown in Figure 2 Most of the reflected energy is absorbed by the 509 load heat sink mounted connected to the second circulator A thermistor mounted on the heat sink provides a variable resistance signal proportional to the heat sink temperature This signal is routed to the Station Control Mod ule via the Peripheral Tray cabling harness If the heat sink temperature exceeds a preset threshold the Station Control Module enables PA cutback mode If the overtemperature condition persists the power amplifier is shut down completely CIRCULATOR LOW PASS FILTE
95. Battery Charger TRN7801A 600W Power Supply Assembly 24 V DC Input TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit TKN8786A Battery Temperature Sensor TRN5155A 10 Extension Cable w connectors and fuse block P TRN5155A 10 Extension Cable w connectors and fuse block CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFl Screws 2 ower CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 Supply CLN7261A AC Line Cord Ferrite RFI Suppressor CPN6086A Power Supply Front Panel w Screws X113AA 210W Power Supply 48 60 V DC Input TRN7803A 210W Power Supply Assembly 48 60 V DC Input TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit TRN5155A 10 Extension Cable w connectors and fuse block CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFl Screws 2 X113AB 600W Power Supply 48 60 V DC Input CPN1031B 600W Power Supply Assembly 48 60 V DC Input Option and Complement TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit TRN5155A 10 Extension Cable w connectors and fuse block TTN4068A Power Supply Front Panel and Screws CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 Omit Standard Wireline Interface Module WIM Wireline Add 8 Wire Wireline Interface Module WIM Interface CLN6956A 8 Wire Wireline Interface Board WIB Module TKN8731A WIM Cable Kit CLN6816A RFI Suppressor Add Duplexer Module 132 146 MHz Add Antenna Relay Antenna TRN7664A Antenna Relay Cables and Mounting Hardware Relay 0185417U01 Duplexer 132 146 MHz X182AC Duplexer Module UHF R1 TTNSOQSA Mi 0185417U04 Dupl
96. Board also contains Peak Current Limiting Circuitry and Over voltage Protection Circuitry e 14 V Supply Circuitry consists of switching type power supply that generates the 14 V dc supply voltage e 5 V Supply Circuitry consists of switching type power sup ply that generates the 5 V dc supply voltage e Reference Voltage Circuitry Generates 10V_SEC and 2 5V SEC supply voltages for use by local circuitry e Diagnostics Circuitry converts analog status signals to digi tal format for transfer to Station Control Module e Address Decode Circuitry performs address decoding to provide chip select signal for the A D converter e Startup Shutdown Control Circuitry Provides delay interval for shutdown of entire power supply module 68P81096E84 O 3 9 1 00 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual B PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the Model CPN1031B Power Supply Module Performance Specifications Table 1 CPN1031B Power Supply Module Performance Specifications Parameter Specification Weight 6 5 kg 14 3 Ibs Operating Temperature Range 30 to 60 no derating Input Voltage Range 43 2 V dc to 62 4 V dc Maximum Input Current 22 28 6 V dc 5 Steady State Output Voltages 14 2 V dc 5 5 0 V dc 5 286 125A Output Current Ratings 142 8 5 1 3A Total Output Power Rating No Derating 600 W
97. CIRCUITRY AC_FAIL FROM AC_FAIL EVERY DC TO DC TM FET CONVERTER BOARD SWITCHES Qe T UVLO DISABLE FET DRIVER BATT 12 24 BATTERY 12 24 SELECT RECOGNITION FROM DC TO DC CONVERTER BOARD Figure 4 CPN6074A Battery Charger Revert Board Functional Block Diagram 1 of 2 22 68 81096 09 11 15 99 CPN1049A CPN1050BPower Supply Modules FROM DC TO DC CONVERTER BOARD STATION CONTROL SPI BUS TO FROM MODULE CURRENT MODE CONTROLLER CIRCUITRY PWR_CUT VOLTAGE gt gt SCALING CIRCUITRY V BC RAW a OPERATIONAL SCALED AMPLIFIER VOLT RANGE VOLTAGE etra gt SCALING Le CIRCUITRY iUm l BATT_VOLT_SELECT REF gt A SPI BUS INTERFACE CIRCUITRY gt BATT_VOLT_RANGE BATT VOLT SELECT SPI BUS D A CONVERTER UVLO DISABLE 9 2 gt gt gt WATCHDOG SHUTDOWN CIRCUITRY BATT_WATCHDOG WATCHDOG gt TIMER CIRCUITRY o OVLO_LCKOUT gt MAIN_SD_SEC INVERTER gt FROM CIRCUITRY DC TO DC CONVERTER BOARD AC_FAIL VA_OUT OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER gt gt x 1 SENSE C LOCAL SUPPLIES CIRCUITRY 28V_RAW FROM REGULATOR DC TO DC CONVERTER BOARD Figure 4 CPN6074A Battery Charger Revert Board Functional Block Diagram 2 of 2 11 15 99 68
98. Cabinet Repeat Feature External Mode continued Trunked SMARTZONE or SMARTNET Analog Simulcast or Non Simulcast Voting Systems Step 1 Access the Wireline Configuration Screen Step 2 Set the Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat field to ENABLED Set the Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat field to 0 msec MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE BASE STATION PRODUCTS Page 1 of 2 VER XX XX XX CHANGE VIEW WIRELINE CONFIGURATION Use Up Down Arrow Keys to Select Wireline Operation Wireline Operation 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX Console Priority DISABLED OPTION Remote Control Type ASTRO TRC Input Line 1 Outbound Analog Link Timer 120 sec Comparator NONE OPTION Fall Back Cabinet Repeat ENABLED Fall Back Timer 0 msec Status Tone ENABLED Status Tone Frequency 2175 kHz Wireline Squelch DISABLED Rx Securenet ASTRO To Wireline ENABLED Equalization DISABLED Step 3 Access the 6809 Trunking Interface Screen Step 4 Set the Modulation Type to ANALOG MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE BASE STATION PRODUCTS VER XX XX XX CHANGE VIEW 6809 TRUNKING RSTAT Mode Normal Failsoft DISABLED Line TRC Encode DISABLED Failsoft Carrier Squelch DISABLED Dual CT Failsoft Only DISABLED Modulation ANALOG Trunking Tickle Source TX DATA LINE Trunking Tickle Source TOT 1 sec CSC Logical Channel Number 1 Rx Discriminator Type QUANTAR MICOR continued on next page
99. Continued 9 1 00 68P81095E05 B xix 800 MHz OPTION X250AA SELECTED IN STEP 3 800 MHz Quantar 20W Transmitter OPTION X750AA SELECTED IN STEP 3 800 MHz Quantar 100W Transmitter Source Option Description Source Option Description Kit Kit X250AA Quantar 800 MHz 20W Transmitter X750AA Quantar 800 MHz 100W Transmitter TLF1940A 20 W Power Amplifier Module 800 MHz TLF1930C 100 W Power Amplifier Module 800 MHz Option TKN8699A PA to Exciter RF Cable Option TKN8699A RF Cable from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X133AA Exciter Module 800 MHz X133AA Exciter Module 800 MHz CLF1510A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CLF1510A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X335AA Receiver Module 800 MHz X335AA Receiver Module 800 MHz CLF1530A Receiver Module Board Front Panel Hardware CLF1530A Receiver Module Board Front Panel Hardware CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X43AB Power Supply Assembly X43AA Power Supply Assembly CPN1049B 265W Power Supply AC input w o batte
100. Control Signals Various output control signals from the uP are fed to latches via the data bus These signals include PA KEY TX ENABLE and the control signals for the front panel LEDs Other control signals are provided to portions of the exciter module circuitry as well as to the Power Amplifier Module Exciter ID Resistor ROM A resistor network ROM provides exciter ID information to the uP This information defines in which band and range e g VHF Range 1 UHF 900 MHz etc the particular exciter is designed to operate Oscillator Circuitry The clock signal for the uP is generated by internal circuitry and an ex ternal 8 0000 MHz crystal circuit A D Converter The TX Power Control Circuitry consists of an D A converter and a cus tom Power Control IC Upon station power up the exciter sends data to the D A converter via the SPI bus to select the desired output power in Watts from the power amplifier The D A converter outputs a dc reference voltage proportional to the selected output power Power Control IC The Power Control IC generates a dc power control voltage V CONT which is fed to the power amplifier module to control the output power A forward power detect TX VF signal dc voltage proportional to the output power from the power amplifier is fed back to the Power Control IC The Power Control IC compares the TX VF signal with the POWER SELECT voltages from the A D converter and adjusts V CONT acco
101. DC Power Supply Module Functional Block Diagram Sheet 2 of 2 9 1 00 SPI BUS SPI BUS TO FROM STATION CONTROL MODULE 68 81085 12 11 M MOTOROLA POWER SUPPLY MODULE Model TRN7801A 600W 24 V DC Input 1 DESCRIPTION The Model TRN7801A Power Supply Module is described in this section A general description performance specifications identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional un derstanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Main tenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The Model TRN7801A Power Supply Module accepts an input of 24 V dc and generates 28 6V dc 5V dc and 14 2V dc operating volt ages to power the station modules The power supply module is com prised of several switching type power supply circuits and diagnostics and monitoring circuitry all contained within a slide in module housing The power supply module provides the following features e Internal voltage and current limiting circuitry continually monitors critical voltages and currents and shuts supply down if preset thresholds are exceeded e Temperature protection module contains built in
102. DETECT BUFFER IPA_VF Ls ge BUFFER 14V VOLTAGE 14 2V_REF DIVIDER gt 4 Y OMNI_VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VON DIVIDER DPA 1 gt die IPA P O gt gt ANALOG MULTIPLEXER THERMISTOR PA TEMP T gt BUFFER do E Figure 2 E P O P101 P102 gt P O LINE FILTER CIRCUITRY L M EN EA J TRANSMIT RF OUTPUT MULTIPLEXER OUTPUTS TO EXCITER MODULE TLD3110 25W Power Amplifier Module Functional Block Diagram 68 81086 23 7 Quantar VHF Station Functional Manual P O P101 32 OUTPUT MULTIPLEXER OUTPUTS TO EXCITER MODULE 33 COAXIAL CABLE FROM PWR CONTROL N POWER AMPLIFIER OUTPUT VOLTAGE P O CONNEDTOR RF INPUT OUTPUT FROM P102 LNE VECONT VOLTAGE TRANSLATOR ON CONNECTOR EXCITER FILTER gt MODULE CIRCUITRY REAR OF STATION i CURRENT LIMITER CONNECTOR BRACKET 35 Le CIRCULATOR N TYPE CONNECTOR HARMONIC 125W MAX Y gt gt FILTER lt lt 0 11 gt COUPLER TRANSMIT RF V OMNI J4100 13 D
103. DUPLEXERS OPTIONS 182 AB AJ 68P81086E71 Description eL REC herent eT er Pi axe LEE ES page 1 General DescriptoIT ie uy u patre e ed UE ie dre dE CDL CA eot pot ached Dane A t tog page 1 Adjustments and Inputs Outputs page 2 Performance Specifications page 3 Typical Mounting Configuration page 3 Field Tuning Procedure page 6 UHF DUPLEXER Options X182AC thru X182AF 68P81087E94 Description yu t EUER exe Re eS page 1 General Description onc EE hoes Bebe RD eu Ape PU paqu eR page 1 Inputs Oulpuls sns ashi akin Pi hac add SRM a Tu page 2 Performance lt page 3 Typical Mounting Configuration page 4 Field Tuning Procedure page 6 Field Tuning Overview oa usb q vee eee delet page 6 Required Test Equipment 1255 si Li a a eV redd ae page 6 Setting Up for Tuning Duplexer page 7 Duplexer Tuning 2 1 4
104. EFI Screws 2 X131AA Exciter Module VHF High Band Range 1 X131AB Exciter Module VHF High Band Range 2 CLD1270A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CLD1280A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X333AA Receiver Module VHF High Band Range 1 X333AB Receiver Module VHF High Band Range 2 CLD1250A Receiver Module Board Preselector Hardware CLD1260A Receiver Module Board Preselector Hardware CLN7334A Receiver Module Front Panel CLN7334A Receiver Module Front Panel TRN7799A VHF UHF Tuning Kit TRN7799A VHF UHF Tuning Kit CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X43AB Power Supply Assembly X43AB Power Supply Assembly CPN1049B 265W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CPN1049B 265W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor 6086 Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector 6086 Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC III CLN1614A Station Control Module CLN1614A Station Control Module TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker Options Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Options Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Inter
105. Exciter Module via ana log multiplexer and filter circuitry 68P81086E23 B 9 1 00 Quantar VHF Station Functional Manual Cooling Fans Control Circuitry 125 W Models Only ANL WARNING The cooling fans in the PA Mod ule are thermostatically con trolled and may come on at any time during station operation Keep fingers clear of fan blades Power Amplifier ID Resistor ROM The PA is equipped with a dual fan module to provide forced air cooling of the PA The fan module is controlled by a FAN ON signal from the Exciter Module which is fed to a driver circuit in the PA Module The Fan Driver Detect Circuitry controls the power to the fans via two feed thru pins in the PA chassis which mate with the power connector on the sli de in fan module The fans are turned on only when the temperature in the PA exceeds a set limit It is normal for the fans to cycle on and off during station operation The Fan Driver Detect Circuitry also monitors the current to the fans and feeds a dc detect voltage to the Fan Status Circuitry which outputs a status signal indicating whether the fan current is above or below a predetermined range The status signal FAN_ALARM is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry A resistor network ROM provides power amplifier ID information to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuits This in formation includes the
106. Figure 19 TX RX Antenna Cable Connection to Duplexer Module UHF 36 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation RF Cabling Connections Continued Duplexer Option continued STATION PERIPHERAL TRAY DUPLEXER MODULE CONNECT RF CABLE FROM SINGLE TX RX ANTENNA Figure 20 TX RX Antenna Cable Connection to Duplexer Module 800 900 MHz Triple Circulator Configuration Shown 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 37 Quantar Station Functional Manual Connecting System Cables Note IntelliRepeater networks may be ei ther D LAN or Ethernet Refer to page 40 for instructions on connecting the stations in an Ethernet network Note Options X148AA X150AA provide an IntelliRepeater LAN cable kit which in cludes a PhoneNet interface box an RJ 11 terminator and a length 10 25 or 50 of telephone cable with RU 11 connectors on each end Introduction Depending on the type of communications system and options vari ous system cables must be connected to the station backplane Make the connections as described in the following paragraphs IntelliRepeater D LAN Cabling Connections A typical Motorola ntelliRepeater trunking site is comprised of multiple IntelliRepeater capable stations connected together in a local area network One of the stations is assigned to act as the current active master and is responsible for all call processing and channel assign ments within the site The
107. INPUT TRANSIENT EMI FILTER 50 60 HZ PROTECTION pt i 7 b CIRCUITRY 110V 220V AC gt CIRCUITRY 57 ENN ied gt oo INPUT OUTPUT VOLTAGE OUTPUT VOLTAGE wee SENSE CURRENT SENSE SENSE LH OUTPUT V T CURRENT DETECT Y STARTUP DELAY CIRCUITRY A Y TOY BEE AC MONITOR a 67 KHZ CIRCUITRY 1 5 SECOND y Jun gt TIMER RELAY ON SYNC PULSE FROM WIDTH ee DC TO DC BOARD MODULATOR s v OUT SNS VIN SNS gt DRIVER POWER FET e 4 I OUT SNS TRANSISTORS TRANSISTORS V vcc GREEN vec VCC SUPPLY CIRCUITRY MODULE SD_MAIN FAIL VCC 400 VDC FROM DRIVER RED DC TO DC TRANSISTOR CONVERTER BOARD Y SYNC 67 KHZ BATTERY REVERT TRIGGER CIRCUITRY FROM EHE P HOUSEKEEPING DC TO DC CONVERTER PULSE TRANSFORMER APPROX 13 VDC BOARD WIDTH e gt MODULATOR E vcc 400 VDC gt BOOST_LOW TO gt 5V REF BATTERY CHARGER BOARD V Figure 2 CPN6065B AC to DC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram 11 15 99 68 81096 09 19 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual 14V MAIN SUPPLY CIRCUITRY SYNC GENERATOR BUFFER CIRCUITRY ISOLATION DIVIDE BY 2 5V SUPPLY CIRCUITRY SYNC_SEC 133 KHZ C BUFFER DRIVER Figure 3 20 68 81096 09 11 15 99 BUFFER gt BUFFER F PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR 1 PEAK AVERAGE CURRENT DETECT CIRCUITRY PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR 2 P
108. INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 2 68 81086 71 9 1 00 M UHF DUPLEXER MODULE Options X182AC 403 435 MHz X182AD 435 470 MHz X182AE 470 490 MHz X182AF 490 520 MHz DESCRIPTION Options 182 provide band dependent duplexer modules for use with Quantar and Quantro UHF sta tions This section provides a general description identification of adjustments and inputs outputs performance specifications and a typical mounting location detail While the duplexer module is considered tuning screws are provided for field tuning should replacement become necessary due to module failure or if re tuning is necessary due to a change in operating channels A single channel field tuning procedure is provided in this section General Description The duplexer module shown in Figure 1 allows a transmit and re ceive channel pair to share a common TX RX antenna Each duplexer module consists of six resonant cavities three for transmit and three for receive contained in a temperature compensated copper enclo sure designed to mount a standard EIA 19 equipment rack Each set of three cavities is designed and tuned to pass the respective transmit or receive channel frequency or bandwidths while providing maximum TX noise suppression at the RX frequency and maximum RX isolation at the TX frequency Figure 1 Typical UHF Duplexer Module Commercial Gov
109. Interface Board and other optional modules e SCC4 Used as RS 232 port for connections to external equipment such as a modem e SMC1 Used as RS 232 port for RSS communications 9 pin D type connector 20 on backplane e SMC2 Used as RS 232 port for RSS communications 9 pin D type connector located on SCM front panel Address and Data Buses The uP is equipped with a 28 line address bus used to access the non volatile memory DRAM memory and provide control via memory mapping for other circuitry in the SCM A 32 line data bus buffered for the non volatile memory is used to transfer data to from the SCM memory as well as other SCM circuitry SPI Bus The Host uP also controls the SPI bus a general purpose communi cations bus that allows the Host uP to communicate with other modules in the station continued 68 81094 76 9 1 00 CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Modules Host Microprocessor Continued Non Volatile Memory DRAM Memory Note Model CLN6961A contains a 512k x 32 DRAM SIMM Model CLN6960A contains a 2M x 32 DRAM SIMM for use in IntelliRepeater applications DRAM Controller The Host uP provides signals necessary to access and refresh the DRAM memory 25 MHz Clock Circuitry A crystal controlled 25 MHz clock circuit and buffer provide the 25 MHz clock signal to the Host uP Station Software FLASH Memory The station software resides in a FLASH SIM
110. Isolation total of 65 dB when combined with circulator built into power amplifier module 25W without cooling fan on 509 Load Maximum Power 90W with cooling fan on 50 kQ 25 G Thermistor Output 1 7 k Q 125 C Table 3 Performance Specifications for Low Pass Filter Operating Frequency 132 174 MHz Maximum RF Input Power 350W Rejection 55 dB min 264 600 MHz 68P81086E34 B 3 9 1 00 INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the dual circulator assembly input and output external connections CABLE HARNESS MATES WITH 10 PIN TRANSMIT OUTPUT CONNECTOR ON FROM STATION BACKPLANE LOW PASS FILTER TRANSMIT RF INPUT FROM POWER AMPLIFIER LOW PASS DUAL CIRCULATOR MODULE FILTER ASSEMBLY PERIPHERAL DC POWER COOLING FAN HEAT SINK THERMISTOR HEAT SINK TRAY FOR OUTPUT CIRCULATOR HEAT SINK TO CABLE HARNESS Figure 1 Dual Circulator Assembly and Low Pass Filter Mounted in Peripheral Tray Inputs and Outputs 4 68P81086E34 B 9 1 00 Triple Circulator Option FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the Dual Circulator Assembly and Low Pass Filter at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the func tions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block and interconnect diagram of the Dual Circulator
111. M MOTOROLA QUA N TAR Digital Capable Station For Conventional SECURENET ASTRO 6809 Trunking and ntelliRepeater Systems VHF 25W amp 125W UHF 25W 100W amp 110W 800 MHz 20W amp 100W 900 MHz 100W Instruction Manual 68 81095 05 COMPUTER SOFTWARE COPYRIGHTS The Motorola products described in this instruction manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program Accordingly any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Furthermore the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication estoppel or otherwise any license under the copyrights patents or patent applications of Motorola except for the normal non exclusive royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product EPS 34440 B COMMERCIAL WARRANTY STANDARD Motorola radio communications products are warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of ONE 1 YEAR except for crystals and channel elements wh
112. MHz Stations Functional Manuals THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68 81091 93 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA ASTRO MODEM CARD Option X437AA WIRELINE INTERFACE 4 WIRE VERSION SHOWN MODEM CARD CONNECTOR ASTRO MODEM CARD Figure 1 ASTRO Modem Card Installed on Wireline Interface Board DESCRIPTION Option X437AA provides a single ASTRO Modem Card for use with Quantar station products The ASTRO Modem Card provides the interface between the station and the wireline in systems using ASTRO 9 6 kbps signaling The card connects to the Wireline Interface Board as shown in Figure 1 Note that 8 wire Wireline Interface Boards are equipped with connectors for two ASTRO modem cards General Description Note The ASTRO modem card contains no jumpers or switches and requires no ad justments The card is auto configured upon station power up The modem card accepts ASTRO modem signaling from the wireline and converts the signal to detected data which is then fed to the Station Control Module for further processing Data from the Station Control Module is fed to the modem card which converts the signal to an ASTRO modem signal and outputs the signal to the wireline Refer to the Wireline Interface Board sections in this manual for block diagrams showing the interface between the ASTRO modem card and the wireline station Commercial Government and MOOR Inc 2 Industrial Solutions Sector 6
113. MOTOROLA STATION BACKPLANE BOARD MODEL TRN7480A DESCRIPTION The TRN7480A Station Backplane Board provides the electrical interconnections for the plug in modules of a Quantar station The board also provides the connectors necessary to interface the station to phone lines periph eral rf equipment and other communications and maintenance equipment This section provides a general de scription identification of inputs outputs and a pin out listing for all interface connectors including information on signal names functions and levels General Description The station backplane board mounted across the rear of the Quantar station card cage is constructed with connectors on both sides The connectors on one side mate with the various station plug in mod ules the connectors on the other side allow interface connections be tween the station and the phone lines peripheral rf equipment and other communications and maintenance equipment A metal shield mounts over the rear of the backplane board to provide protection for the circuit board runners and connector solder pads ESD protection and EMI RFI shielding as shown in Figure 1 This shield also provides a mounting location for the antenna connector bracket and the station grounding lug BACKPLANE BOARD PROTECTIVE METAL SHIELD Figure 1 Backplane Shown with Protective Metal Shield Removed ine 1889 Commercial Government Rights
114. Model S 1350 or equivalent e Dummy Load 509 station wattage or higher Verifying Transmitter Circuitry Procedure Step 1 Connect test equipment by performing Steps 1 3 shown in Figure 4 Step 2 Connect handset to RJ 11 connector on SCM front panel as shown 77 STATION CONTROL MODULE FRONT PANEL HANDSET PTT BUTTON y D222 i oo ES DAVAY 10 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting TO TO RECEIVE TRANSMIT ANTENNA ANTENNA ma ra A QUANTAR STATION REAR VIEW STATION TRANSMIT OUTPUT STATION RECEIVE INPUT Disconnect cable from transmit antenna to upper N Connect N to N cable between station type connector on bracket transmit output and in line wattmeter Connect wattmeter to dummy load IN LINE WATTMETER U MOTOROLA R2001 ANTENNA COMMUNICATIONS RF PORT SELECT KNOB ANALYZER PULL OUT A amp amp Had COMMUNICATIONS MOTOROLA input Be sure to pull RF PORT SELECT knob out to select antenna rf input Connect antenna to R2001 antenna 000000000000 000000 000000 o OSCILLOSCOPE MONITOR 59 0 v RF SECTION NEC o Figure 4 Test Equipment Setup for Verifying Transmitter Circuitry
115. PULSE FROM WIDTH ee DC TO DC BOARD MODULATOR s v OUT SNS VIN SNS gt DRIVER POWER FET e 4 I OUT SNS TRANSISTORS TRANSISTORS V vcc GREEN vec VCC SUPPLY CIRCUITRY MODULE SD_MAIN FAIL VCC 400 VDC FROM DRIVER RED DC TO DC TRANSISTOR CONVERTER BOARD Y SYNC 67 KHZ BATTERY REVERT TRIGGER CIRCUITRY FROM EHE P HOUSEKEEPING DC TO DC CONVERTER PULSE TRANSFORMER APPROX 13 VDC BOARD WIDTH e gt MODULATOR E vcc 400 VDC gt BOOST_LOW TO gt 5V REF BATTERY CHARGER BOARD V Figure 2 CPN6065B AC to DC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram 11 15 99 68P81095E88 A 19 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual 28V MAIN SUPPLY CIRCUITRY VCC_PRI 400 VDC MAIN_SD_PRI
116. Processing CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 Processing CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board TKN8731A WIM Cable TKN8731A WIM Cable CLN6816A RFI Suppressor CLN6816A RFI Suppressor C831AA Card Cage C831AA Card Cage TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket X249AW RF Cabling X249AW RF Cabling TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable TRN7663A AC Line Cord TRN7663A AC Line Cord X163AD Blank Panels X163AD Blank Panels TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware X430AA 12 Cabinet X430AA 12 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet
117. QUANTAR System Type CONVENTIONAL Station Type ANALOG ONLY Rx Freq Band 1 UHF_R2 438 470 MHz Tx Freq Band UHF_R2 438 470 MHz Rx Freq Band 2 NONE IR Freq Band NONE PA Power Rating 25 Watts Output limited to xxx Watts Power Supply AC LOW Battery Type NONE OPTIONS Wireline 8 WIRE WildCard ENHANCED Freq Ref INTERNAL STD Simulcast Operation DISABLED Set to MAIN for Main Station Coded Squelch DISABLED MRTI Interface DISABLED Set to ANB for Sandy Scanning Receiver Site Number 1 Le Station Main Standby MAIN F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP VALIDATE EXIT CONFIG Figure 4 Making Main Standby RSS Setting Step 4 Access the Wildcard Configuration menu screen and select State Action Configuration Press F4 to set the WildCard Tables to their default values This ensures that the tables for the Main Standby Feature are programmed with the factory values Note that any WildCard Tables that have been custom created by the customer will be deleted and that any customization of the default tables will be returned to the factory default values Re enter these if the functions are still required for this installation Step 5 Save the codeplug to the station Step 6 Repeat Steps 1 thru 4 for the other station 68P81095E89 O 5 2 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products 5 MAIN STANDBY OPERATION Three Modes of Main Standby Operation The Main Standby Feature offers th
118. RF load the base station equipment is certified to comply with Federal Com munications Commission FCC regulations pertaining to human exposure to RF radiation in accordance with the FCC Rules Part 1 section 1 1310 as published in title 47 code of federal regulations and procedures established in TIA EIA TSB92 Report On EME Evaluation for RF Cabinet Emissions Under FCC MPE Guidelines Compliance to FCC regulations of the final installation should be assessed and take into account site specific characteristics xxvi 68 81095 05 9 1 00 such as type and location of antennas as well as site accessibility of occupational personnel controlled environ ment and the general public uncontrolled environment This equipment should only be installed and maintained by trained technicians Licensees of the FCC using this equipment are responsible for insuring that its installation and operation comply with FCC regulations Part 1 section 1 1310 as published in title 47 code of federal regulations Whether a given installation meets FCC limits for human exposure to radio frequency radiation may depend not only on this equipment but also on whether the environments being assessed are being affected by radio frequency fields from other equipment the effects of which may add to the level of exposure Accordingly the overall exposure may be affected by radio frequency generating facilities that exist at the time the licensee s equipment is being in
119. Remote Control and WildCard I O connections Telephone line connections are easily made to the wireline circuitry via connectors on the rear of the station Switching Power Supply The Quantar station features a switching type power supply which ac cepts a wide range of ac inputs 90 280 V ac 47 63 Hz and gener ates the necessary dc operating voltages for the station modules The power supply continually monitors and adjusts the output voltages and requires no external adjustments or calibration 68P81096E56 A 9 1 00 Description Summary of Operating Features Standard Features The following are a few of the standard Quantar features Compact single cage design Extensive Self Test Diagnostics and Alarm Reporting FRU maintenance philosophy reduces down time Easily programmed via Radio Service Software Local or Remote Software downloading to FLASH memory Expansion and upgrades performed by module replacement and or software upgrade Highly reliable and accurate continuous duty transmitter circuitry Operates as ntelliRepeater trunking station Compatible with appropriate options with analog SECURENET ASTRO and ASTRO CAI digital signaling Versatile and reliable switching type power supply e Wide operating temperature range 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F Optional Hardware Features The following are a few of the Quantar station optional hardware fea tures Battery Revert
120. SCM front panel one high im pedance input located on the station backplane are provided to allow an nal 5 10 MHz source to be input to the 5 input to the PLL to perform frequen cy netting Refer to the Maintenance sec tion in this manual for recommended inter vals and procedures for netting the station reference HDLC Bus Control Circuitry The Station Reference Circuitry consists of a phase locked loop com prised of a high stability VCO and a PLL IC The output of the VCO is a 16 8 MHz signal which is fed to the DSP ASIC The ASIC divides the signal by 8 and outputs a 2 1 MHz signal which is separated and buff ered by a splitter and output to the Exciter Module and Receiver Module as 2 1 MHz REF The Station Reference Circuitry may operate in one of three modes e Normal Mode In this mode the control voltage is turned off via control voltage enable switch and the high stability VCO operates in an open loop mode stability of the VCO in this mode is 1 PPM per year e Manual Netting Mode Periodically an external 5 10 MHz Source is required to fine tune or net the 16 8 MHz reference signal In this mode the PLL compares the 5 10 MHz reference and a sample of the 16 8 MHz VCO output and generates up down pulses The Host uP reads the pulses via SPI bus and sends correction signals via SPI bus to the VCO to adjust the output frequency to 16 8 Mhz 0 3 ppm e High Stability Mode F
121. SUPPLY BOARD FEIS F 2 71 bi FILTER V V CIRCUITRY FILTER FILTER CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY 28 INVERTER CIRCUITRY gt V28 _RAW VIN _FLTRD SENSE2 gt TO J mates 1 2 DC OUTPUT VIN _FLTRD gt gt BOARD SYNC SYNC ex _ gt gt Ls TO L DC OUTPUT V BOARD VCC_PRI e LEGEND V_GATE_2 FROM POWER Primary Ground DC OUTPUT DRIVERS gt SONED FETS V Secondary Ground Figure 2 CPN6064B DC Input Board Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68P81096E84 O 13 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual INVERTERS A B CONTROL CIRCUITRY VCC_PRI VCC_PRI QG SHUTDOWN 1 Ls 67 KHZ PULSE S gt BUFFER c WIDTH E pcinpur esas MODULATOR BOARD 5V_REF 1 w PEAK CURRENT LIMITING CIRCUITRY Poet 281 RAW V GATE 1 OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION CIRCUITRY BUFFER gt AMPLIFIER Y SYNC PRI SHUTDOWN GENERATOR 67 KHZ BUFFER VEU a E s gt CIRCUITRY ISOLATION e PEAK AVERAGE REF 1 CIRCUITRY m CURRENT o gt DETECT PRI SHUT SEI 1 gt CIRCUITRY SHUT SEC a 133 KHZ T VCC_PRI V GATE 2 VCC_PRI 1 SENSE 2 14V DIAG om x as V GATE 2 PULSE TO gt BUFFER c WIDTH 9 DC INPUT MODULATOR BO
122. Soft Start Circuitry provides a gradually in creasing output signal to soft start the Pulse Width Modulators p o 14V Main Supply Circuitry This action minimizes the surge current when charging the output filter capacitors 14 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 CPN1049A CPN1050B265W Power Supply Modules 6 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION Battery Charger Revert Board The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6074A Battery Charger Revert Board circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the func tions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 4 for a block diagram of the Battery Charger Revert Board Note Model CPN1049A Power Supply Modules without battery charging capabilities are equipped with a CPN6078A External Charger Connect Board in place of the CPN6074A Battery Charger Revert Board The External Charger Connect Board provides a direct electrical path from the 14V Main Supply Circuitry p o the DC to DC Converter Board to the card edge connector used to connect to an external charger and battery The external char ger is responsible for 1 charging the external battery and 2 detecting an AC power fail condition and initiating battery revert mode Charger Supply Circuitry Overview The Charger Supply Circuitry is comprised of a switching type po
123. Station 3 to the E Lead signal on Microwave Station 2 as shown below An equivalent schematic circuit for the RD STAT and E LEAD signals is also shown MICROWAVE STATION 3 STATION 2 RD STAT E LEAD r S STATION 3 p MICROWAVE STATION 2 mm Edu x I 3 9K postat seo NT L L 22 ee ce 68 81090 99 9 1 00 RA RT Configuration E amp M Control Microwave Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections Cont d M Lead to EXT PTT Connection Station 2 to Station 3 Step 1 Connect the M Lead on the Microwave Station 2 to the EXT PTT signal on Station 3 as shown below An equivalent schematic circuit for the EXT PTT and M LEAD signals is also shown MICROWAVE STATION 3 STATION 2 5V EXT PTT EXT PTT M LEAD Note MLEAD output from Microwave Sta tion 2 goes low when transmitting signal on SSS SSS ee wireline This causes EXT PTT to activate and 5V STATION 3 MICROWAVE STATION 2 key Station 3 transmitter 100K EXT ge pur e 220 T _ y M LEAD Tl 220PF AUF T RM ena 22525 EI tg t rir 68P81090E99 A 7 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products 4 RSS PROGRAMMING Using the Quantar Quantro Radio Service Software RSS
124. Station Control Module Power Supply Module Volume Up Pushbutton Main Power On Off Switch Volume Down Pushbutton CSQ PL OFF Pushbutton squelch mode Intercom Pushbutton Handset Microphone Connector External Speaker Connector RSS Port Connector External 5 MHz Input BNC Connector Summary of LED Indicators Note Refer to the Troubleshooting section The following LED indicators are provided to indicate operating status of this manual for detailed descriptions and of the station The location of these controls and connectors is shown interpretation of the LED indicators in Figure 1 Summary of LED Indicators Station Control Power Supply Exciter hadi Module Module Module Module Station On Module Fail TX Lock WL On Station Fail Power On PA Full WL Fail Intcm Acc D PA Low Control Ch PA Fail LEDs visible on Rx 1 Active Station Control Rx 2 Active Module front Rx Fail panel Aux LED Commercial Government and Motorola Inc 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81096E58 A All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Station Functional Manual THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 68P81096E58 A 9 1 00 Operation STATION ON LED STATION FAIL LED INTCM ACC D CONTROL CH RX1 ACTIVE LED RX2 ACTIVE LED RX FAIL LED AUX LED NOTE FUNCTION OF LED INDICATORS IS DESCRIBED IN THE TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION IN
125. T bee owe page 7 Diagnostics CirCuilry cer Sewanee anaq ak haapa Dee e REP Meee EE page 8 Address Decode Circuitry page 8 600W POWER SUPPLY MODULE 48 60 V dc input 68P81096E84 Description e ll Ie nicae e tere MEE dp MES page 1 General Description uie ca etudes C ER Ge ws hid Leah OE UR d aetas page 1 Power Supply Module Simplified Block Diagram page 2 Overview Of GIPCUIITY S SE ir e RT EE e eee ae aR page 3 Performance Specifications page 4 Controls Indicators and page 5 Functional Theory of Operation DC Input Board page 6 Input Conditioning Circ ity p y Xe xu d p page 6 Inverter Circ itry A and B i3 pssqa a a e a nire Ee E bris page 7 Oup t Filler CIrcuitry nne Lui q suyukama b ERR PEST HS IRR IA UE pA et page 7 Functional Theory of Operation DC Output page 8 Inverters Control Circuitry page 8 142 V Supply CIICUllly i sda Er eee EA a eae page 9 F5 V Supply Circultty e e ep POP yv Ah page 9 Refer
126. TDM bus e Digitized voice audio from DSP to external speaker built in speaker or handset earpiece via Audio Interface Bus and Audio Interface Circuitry e Digitized voice audio data from DSP to Exciter Module modulation signals via Audio Interface Bus and Audio Interface Circuitry e 6809 MRTI transmit audio Digital Signal Processor DSP The DSP a 56002 operating at an internal clock speed of 60 MHz ac cepts and transmits digitized audio to from the various modules in the station The DSP provides address and data buses to receive transmit digitized audio via the DSP ASIC and to access the DSP program and signal processing algorithms contained in three 32K x 8 SRAM ICs Three additional 32K x 8 SRAM ICs are provided for data storage DSP ASIC The DSP ASIC operates under control of the DSP to provide a number of functions as follows e Interfaces with the DSP via the DSP address and data buses e Accepts 16 8 MHz signal from Station Reference Circuitry and outputs a 2 1 MHz reference signal used throughout the station e Provides interfaces for the HDLC bus TDM bus and serial bus used to communicate with the Receiver Module e Accepts digitized data from Receiver Module via DSP ASIC Inter face Circuitry e Provides interfaces for several A D and D A converters 68P81094E76 A 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Station Reference Circuitry Note Two BNC connectors one 50 0 input lo cated on
127. THIS MANUAL TX LOCK LED PA FULL LED PA LOW LED PA FAIL LED NOTE FUNCTION OF LED INDICATORS IS DESCRIBED IN THE TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION IN THIS MANUAL POWER SUPPLY MODULE FAIL LED POWER ON OFF LED POWER ON OFF SWITCH NOTE FUNCTION OF LED INDICATORS IS DESCRIBED IN THE TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION IN THIS MANUAL POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE I TIT EXCITER MODULE WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD BEHIND FRONT PANEL POWER SUPPLY MODULE STATION CONTROL MODULE EXTERNAL REFERENCE INPUT USED TO CONNECT AN EXTERNAL SOURCE OF 5 10 MHZ FOR CALIBRATION OF STATION REFERENCE OSCILLATOR HANDSET MICROPHONE CONNECTOR RJ 11 USED TO CONNECT TELEPHONE STYLE HANDSET WITH PTT BUTTON TMN6164 OR EQUIVALENT OR MICROPHONE WITH PTT BUTTON HMN1001A OR EQUIVALENT RECEIVER MODULE 1 s 55 NN WIRELINE FAIL LED WIRELINE ON LED EIA 232 RSS PORT CONNECTOR VOLUME UP PUSHBUTTON USED TO INCREASE THE VOLUME OF THE LOCAL SPEAKER EXTERNAL SPEAKER AND HANDSET EARPIECE IF LOCAL SPEAKER ON EACH DEPRESSION RAISES VOLUME LEVEL ONE OF 16 STEPS STOPS AT STEP 16 IF LOCAL SPEAKER OFF DEPRESS ONCE TO RAISE VOLUME LEVEL ONE STEP AND TURN ON LOCAL SPEAKER VOLUME DOWN PUSHBUTTON USED TO DECREASE THE VOLUME OF THE LOCAL SPEAKER EXTERNAL SPEAKER AND HANDSET EARPIECE EACH DEPRESSION LOWERS VOLUME LEVEL ONE
128. Transmitter TLF1800B 100 W Power Amplifier Module 900 MHz Option TKN8699A PA to Exciter RF Cable from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X134AA Exciter Module 900 MHz CLF1520A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X336AA Receiver Module 900 MHz CLF1540A Receiver Module Board Front Panel Hardware CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X43AA Power Supply Assembly CPN1047A 625W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor 6086 Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC III CLN1614A Station Control Module TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Options Kits X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module Internally Added CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel by Motorola CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 Order Processing X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board TKN8731A WIM Cable CLN6816A RFI Suppressor C831AA Card Cage TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket X249AW RF Cabling TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N typ
129. UHF R1 R2 and X676AP UHF R3 R4 Table 4 shows the electrical performance specifications for the low pass filter used in Options X676AN and 676 Performance Specifications Table 3 Performance Specifications for Dual Circulator Assemblies X676AN 403 475 MHz Operating Frequency X676AP 475 520 MHz Insertion Loss with low pass 1 15dB typ filter and cables 1 6dB max 45 dB min Isolation total of 60 dB when combined with circulator built into power amplifier module Operating Temperature Range 20 C to 70 Input Output Return Loss 19 1 dB min Terminations Female N Type Input and Output Impedance 50 Ohms 25W without cooling fan on 90W with cooling fan on 22 25 C 1 7 k Q 125 C 509 Load Maximum Power Thermistor Output Table 4 Performance Specifications for Low Pass Filter Operating Frequency 403 520 MHz Maximum RF Input Power 500W 68P81088E54 A 3 9 1 00 Quantar UHF Station Functional Manual INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the dual circulator assembly input and output external connections CABLE HARNESS MATES WITH 10 PIN TRANSMIT OUTPUT CONNECTOR ON FROM STATION BACKPLANE LOW PASS FILTER TRANSMIT RF INPUT FROM POWER AMPLIFIER LOW PASS DUAL CIRCULATOR MODULE FILTER ASSEMBLY PERIPHERAL DC POWER COOLING FAN HEAT SINK THERMISTOR HEAT SINK TRAY TO FOR OUTPUT COOLING CIRCULATOR HEAT SINK TO FAN CABLE HARNESS Figure 1 Dual Circulator Assembly
130. With the RSS program still running disconnect the RSS cable from Station 3 and connect it to Station 2 Access the RX Wireline Alignment screen and turn off the 1 kHz tone 10 68P81090E99 A 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA RA RT CONFIGURATION TRC CONTROL For Quantar and Quantro Stations OVERVIEW The RA RT TRC control configuration allows a Quantar Quantro station to be TRC controlled by a remote console using either a radio link or a microwave link in place of the usual wireline link This configuration is typically used in cases where the station is located in a relatively inaccessible location such as a mountain top where running phone lines is either impractical or impossible As shown in Figure 1A a pair of stations called station 1 and station 2 is used to substitute for the normal wireline connections between the repeater station and the console Figure 1B shows a microwave RA RT link STATION 3 STATION 2 d WIRELINE LINK REMOTE CONSOLE Figure 1 RA RT WITH RF LINK MICROWAVE STATION S arene MICROWAVE MICROWAVE WIRELINE LINK REMOTE CONSOLE Figure 1B RA RT WITH MICROWAVE LINK Figure 1 Typical RA RT Systems TRC Control eii ines Commercial Government and otorola ae 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81090E98 A All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schau
131. a power FET bridge which alternately gate the input dc voltage from the Input Conditioning Circuitry to the primary of the main isolation transformer The result is an induced voltage in the secondary windings of the transformer at 133 kHz rate Transformer Secondary Voltages The main isolation transformer has two secondary windings as fol lows e Module Fail Winding operates in conjunction with a half wave rectifier circuit to provide a dc signal Mod Fail to the A D converter p o Diagnostics Circuitry indicates that the main in verter circuitry is functioning properly e 28 V Winding operates in conjunction with a full wave rec tifier circuit to generate a 28 V dc supply voltage Overcurrent and overvoltage detect circuits monitor the circuit operation and if preset thresholds are exceeded generate a shutdown signal which is fed to the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main invert er 68 81090 44 9 1 00 TRN7801A Power Supply Module 14 2 V Inverter Circuitry Overview The 14 2 V inverter circuitry is comprised of a switching type power supply which generates a 14 2 V dc supply voltage This voltage is used as the 14 2 V supply voltage for the station modules via the backplane Switching Power Supply Operation The 14 2 V inverter switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 133 kHz The PWM output pulses control a power FET which repetitively gat
132. ac and 47 63 Hz no jumpers switches or other settings are required e Input transient and EMI protection MOV gas discharge and filter devices protect the power supply circuitry from ac line voltage transients and electro magnetic interference e Internal voltage and current limiting circuitry continually monitors critical voltages and currents and shuts supply down if preset thresholds are exceeded e Temperature protection module contains built in cooling fan supply shuts down if temperature exceeds preset threshold e Diagnostic monitoring critical internal parameters are con tinually monitored and reported to the Station Control Module which can automatically provide correction for certain operating conditions continued on next page Motorola Inc 1999 Commercial Government and All Rights Reseved Industrial Solutions Sector 68 81095 88 Printed U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 11 15 99 UP Quantar Station Products Functional Manual General Description continued e Fan Failure Protection Power Supply enters shutdown mode in event of cooling fan failure e Battery Reverse Polarity Protection Charger circuitry is pro tected against connecting the external battery in reverse polarity CPN1048 only e Auto Switchover to from Battery If AC input fails station is automatically switched over to battery operation when AC input is restored station is aut
133. and Low Pass Filter Mounted in Peripheral Tray Inputs and Outputs 4 68P81088E54 A 9 1 00 UHF Triple Circulator Option FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the Dual Circulator Assembly and Low Pass Filter at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the func tions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block and interconnect diagram of the Dual Circulator Assembly and Low Pass Filter Functional Operation Note The Triple Circulator Option is typi cally used in high density radio site applica tions where other co located transmitters near the frequency of the station can cause I M products The addition of the dual circu lator improves I M from gt 20dB to gt 50 The low pass filter reduces spurious emis sions to 90 The Dual Circulator Assembly accepts transmit rf output power from the power amplifier module and provides 45 dB minimum of isolation between the power amplifier module and the transmit antenna The as sembly consists of two circulators each with 500 load Each circula tor allows forward rf energy to pass through to the output while routing any reflected rf energy to the corresponding 502 load Refer to the block diagram shown in Figure 2 Most of the reflected energy is absor
134. and PA output power is at expected power level as set by technician via RSS during station alignment OFF when PA Full PA not keyed or PA keyed but PA output power is not at expected power level as set by technician via RSS during station alignment YELLOW when transmitter is keyed and PA output power is less than expected power level as set by technician via RSS during station alignment but not shut down for example during power cutback mode EXCITER MODULE PA Low OFF when PA not keyed or PA keyed and PA output power is at expected power level as set by technician via RSS during station alignment RED when No PA output power for example during PA shutdown mode LED status is latched thereby indicating status during current key or for previous key or High power models only Overdrive alarm is generated by Driver PA Note Any component associated with the PA could cause LED to light These include the 5V IPA Module the Driver PA Module the Final PA EA Fall Module and rf peripherals such as the circulator low pass filter etc FLASHING when PA is in Test Mode activated by technician via RSS when in Test Mode power cutback VSWR protection and open power loop protection are disabled OFF when PA output power is either at expected level or at specific cutback lev els any level other than shutdown LED status is latched thereby indicating sta tus during current key or for pr
135. and VCO Circuitry Note 800 MHz and 900 MHz Exciter Mod ules have only one VCO which operates over the entire 900 MHz range Introduction As mentioned previously the exciter module generates a low level modulated rf signal which is input to the power amplifier module The rf carrier is generated by a frequency synthesizer consisting of synthe sizer circuitry and VCO circuitry Functional operation of these circuits is as follows Phase Locked Loop The phase locked loop PLL IC receives frequency selection data from the microprocessor Once programmed the PLL IC compares a 2 1 MHz reference signal from the Station Control Module with a feed back sample of the VCO output Depending on whether the feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2 1 MHz reference cor rection pulses are generated The width of these correction pulses is dependent on the amount of difference between the 2 1 MHz reference and the VCO feedback The up down pulses from the PLL IC are fed to a charge pump which outputs a dc voltage proportional to the pulse widths This dc voltage is then low pass filtered and fed to the VCO as the CONTROL VOLT AGE Note that if a frequency change is requested by the microproces Sor the low pass loop filter is momentarily bypassed to accelerate the frequency change VCO The dc control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to dual VCOs which generate the rf carrier signal Within each band VH
136. back plane and Switching Power Supply Operation The 28V Main Supply Circuitry consists of two identical switching type power supplies operating in parallel Both supplies operate identi cally as follows A 133 kHz clock signal from the Sync Generator Cir cuitry is fed through a buffer to a Pulse Width Modulator PWM The PWM output pulses control a pair of power FETS via a driver to gate the 400 V dc from the AC to DC Converter Board to the primary of a power transformer The induced voltage in the transformer secondary is half wave rectified to charge the output filter circuitry resulting in an output voltage of 28 V dc Since each supply receives a 133 kHz clock signal that is 180 out of phase with the other each switching power supply alternately charges the output filter circuitry resulting in an effective charging rate of 266 kHz Protection Circuitry Peak Average Current Limiting Circuitry The peak current limiting circuitry accepts an output current feedback signal and a scaled 28V_RAW reference signal to control the PWMs This effectively maintains a constant output voltage for varying output current de mands The average current limiting circuitry monitors the 28 V dc output and generates a shutdown signal MAIN_SD_PRI if the average output cur rent reaches a predetermined limit Overvoltage Protection Circuitry This circuitry monitors the 28V output voltage and generates a shutdown signal MAIN
137. buffer driver to a Pulse Width Modulator PWM The 133 kHz PWM output pulses are fed 1 directly to the Buck FET Switch via a driv er and 2 to the Boost FET Switch via a Boost Switch Timer and Driver The two signals control the respective FET switches to control the Pow er Coil in the Charger Supply Circuitry so that it produces an approxi mately 12 to 16 V dc output to be filtered and charge the external battery Overview The Battery Revert Circuitry accepts various inputs and determines when to activate battery revert mode by turning on the Battery Revert FET Switches Battery Revert Mode will be activated or deactivated in the following conditions e Ifthe AC FAIL signal from the DC to DC Converter Board goes low indicating that AC power has failed the Battery Revert FET Switches will be turned on via the FET Driver e If the battery voltage is too low the Undervoltage Detect circuit detects the condition and disables the battery revert circuitry e Ifthe battery voltage is too high the Overvoltage Detect circuit detects the condition and disables the battery charger and the battery revert circuitry e Ifa fault condition exists 0 5V Overcurrent the shutdown detect circuitry detects the condition and disables the battery charger and the battery revert circuitry Overview The Current Mode Controller Circuitry performs two major functions e The PWR CUT signal from the DC to DC Converter Board is fed
138. custom IC which performs the 2nd down conversion filtering amplification and analog to digital conversion of the receive signal e Address Decode amp A D Converter Circuitry performs address decoding to provide board and chip select signals also con verts analog status signals to digital format for transfer to Station Control Module e Local Power Supply Regulation accepts 14 2V dc input and outputs 10V and 5V dc operating voltages Motorola Inc 2000 All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A Commercial Government and Industrial Solutions Sector 68 81086 28 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Quantro Station Products CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the receiver module controls indicators and all input and output external connections RECEIVER RF INPUT TO PRESELECTOR FROM RECEIVE ANTENNA PRESELECTOR TUNING SCREWS RECEIVER MODULE FRONT PANEL FRONT VIEW CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE REAR VIEW Figure 1 Quantar Quantro VHF Receiver Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 2 68P81086E28 B 9 1 00 TRD6361A F TRD6362A F Receiver Modules 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the receiver circuitry at a functional level The informa tion is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module
139. data and converts it to an analog audio sig nal The audio signal is fed to the gain adjust circuitry Under control of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain ad just OdB 6dB 12dB and 18 The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed thru a 2 pole low pass filter and into the inputs of two amplifiers The outputs of the amplifiers are fed to two transistors which are connected in a push pull configu ration to drive the primary of an audio transformer The audio signal is induced into the secondary and output to the landline system via ei ther the 50 pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector as bal anced audio JUMPERS IN POSITION gt IMPEDANCE SETTINGS 1 N gt 2n c o 4 7UF L 4 680 u ggg Note All jumpers removed for high impedance input output 68P81094E77 A 9 1 00 CLN6955A and CLN6957A Wireline Interface Boards Description of Audio Data Signal Paths Continued Note Depending on local codes and or customer preference phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the screw terminal connector on the station backplane Landline to Station signals are connected at Line 1 Audio Station to Land line signals are conn
140. eet Rr waya edat bare e nb ee oe page 1 Electrical Connections RF Link page 2 Console to Station 1 Wiring Connections page 2 Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections page 3 continued on next page 68P81095E05 B 9 1 00 Electrical Connections Microwave page 5 Console to Microwave Station 1 Wiring Connections page 5 Microwave Station 2 to Station Wiring Connections page 6 RSS Programming page 8 TX Wireline Alignment page 9 Station 1 TX Wireline Alignment page 9 Station 2 TX Wireline Alignment page 9 Station 3 TX Wireline Alignment page 10 FALL BACK IN CABINET REPEAT FEATURE 68P81095E96 OVervie Wire ure ek a paha ado UM eee tl at RR Ed page 1 Configuring the FBICR Feature page 4 MAIN STANDBY CONFIGURATION 68P81095E89
141. from the 28V Main Supply Circuitry this circuit passes the signal through the Soft Start Cir cuitry for a 1 second interval to allow the entire power supply module to shutdown The module then restarts if the on off switch is in On posi tion If the MAIN_SD_PRI signal is still active the shutdown process will repeat Startup Shutdown Delay Circuitry When the power supply module is first turned on the RELAY_ON sig nal is low and the output of the Startup Shutdown Delay Circuitry keeps the supply in shutdown mode After about 1 5 seconds RELAY ON goes high and the Startup Shutdown Delay Circuitry provides a 1 se cond delay before releasing the shutdown signal and allowing the pow er supply to operate When the power supply module is turned off the RELAY ON signal goes low and the Startup Shutdown Delay Circuitry keeps the supply in operating mode for 1 second to allow Battery Revert Mode to acti vate Soft Start Circuitry Each time the Soft Start Circuitry receives a startup signal i e MAIN SD is inactive and the output of the Startup Shutdown Delay Circuitry is high the Soft Start Circuitry provides a gradually in creasing output signal to soft start the Pulse Width Modulators p o 28V Main Supply Circuitry This action minimizes the surge current when charging the output filter capacitors 14 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 CPN1047A CPN1048A625W Power Supply Modules 6 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION
142. in other than its normal and customary manner b the product has been subject to misuse accident neglect or damage c unauthorized alterations or repairs have been made or unapproved parts used in the equipment This warranty extends only to individual products batteries are excluded Because each radio system is unique Motorola disclaims liability for range coverage or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty except by a separate written agreement signed by an officer of Motorola LICENSED PROGRAMS Motorola software provided in connection with this order is warranted to be free from re producible defects for a period of one 1 year All material and labor to repair any such defects will be provided free of charge for the full warranty period and SUBJECT TO THE DISCLAIMER IN BOLD FACE TYPE Non Motorola manufactured products are excluded from this warranty but subject to the warranty provided by their manufacturers a copy of which will be supplied to you on specific written request In order to obtain performance of this warranty purchaser must contact its Motorola salesperson or Motorola at the address first above shown attention Quality Assurance Department This warranty applies only within the United States EPS 48759 O FCC INTERFERENCE WARNING The FCC Requires that manuals pertaining to Class A and Class B computing devices must contain warnings about possible interference with local residential radio and T
143. kHz clock signal from the Sync Generator Circuitry is fed through a buffer to a Pulse Width Modulator PWM The PWM outputs a 133 kHz signal V GATE 1 or V GATE 2 which is fed to Inverter Circuitry A or Inverter Circuitry B located on the DC Input Board Since Inverter Circuitry A and Inverter Circuitry B each receives a 133 kHz V GATE signal that is 180 out of phase with the other each circuit alternately charges the output filter circuitry resulting in an effec tive charging rate of 133 kHz Protection Circuitry Peak Average Current Limiting Circuitry The peak current limiting circuitry accepts an output current feedback signal and a scaled 28V RAW reference signal to control the PWMs This effectively maintains a constant output voltage for varying output current de mands The average current limiting circuitry monitors the 28 V dc output and generates a shutdown signal PRI SHUTDOWN if the average output current reaches a predetermined limit Overvoltage Protection Circuitry This circuitry monitors the 28V RAW voltage and generates a shutdown signal PRI SHUT SEC to shut down the entire power supply module if the 28 V output voltage exceeds a preset threshold 8 68P81096E84 O 9 1 00 CPN1031B Power Supply Module 14 V Supply Circuitry 5 V Supply Circuitry Reference Voltage Circuitry Overview The 14 V Supply Circuitry is comprised of a switching type power supply which generates a
144. kg 14 3 Ibs Operating Temperature Range 30 to 60 no derating Input Voltage Range 90 to 264 V ac Input Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz Maximum Input Current 8 5 A 28 6 V dc 5 Steady State Output Voltages 14 2 V dc 5 5 0 V dc 5 28 6 12 5 Output Current Ratings 142 8 5 1 3A 625W Total Output Power Rating including 100W for battery charger All outputs 150 mV p p measured Output Ripple with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope at 25 6 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 CPN1047A CPN1048A625W Power Supply Modules CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the power supply module controls indicators and all input and output external connections POWER SUPPLY MODULE FRONT PANEL MODULE FAIL LED POWER ON LED STATION ON OFF SWITCH REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE AC INPUT CONNECTOR BLIND MATES WITH AC CONNECTOR ON BACKPLANE BATTERY CHARGER OUTPUT CONNECTOR CPN1048 R EXTERNAL CHARGER CONNECTOR CPN1047 Figure 1 CPN1047A CPN1048A Power Supply Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual 4 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OPERATION AC to DC Converter Board The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6065B AC to DC Converter Board circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the se
145. ll EM page 1 Electrical Connections ura xol serre REDI le ert mh t E page 2 Setting Wireline Impedance Jumpers page 4 RSS Programming os cs cece eee eine re eee ek ed eee page 5 Main Standby Operation page 6 Customizing Main Standby Operation page 8 FAST KEYUP FEATURE 68P80800A02 OVerVi eW co uwa fe pac tube denti press uttter ebbe tee page 1 Electrical Connections 2 RSS Programming 5 530 bus Al a ES dea Mote 4 Fast Keyup Performance page 5 DUAL CONTROL OF GATED ADDESS VIA TRC AND SAM 68P81096E11 OVerVIeW 2 Bae eed una peru reato utt nte ua Faldo hho A saree page 1 Station RSS Programming page 4 SAM RSS Programming page 8 INPUT OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXTERNAL CONTROLLERS 68P81096E86 OVervIeW o nsen ai ead bis ode eee hed NAMEN hae ee eed page 1 Electrical Connections page 2 Electrical Characteristics
146. nut on tuning screw 2 to at least 12 in Ib and fine tune tuning screw 2 for a PEAK Keep tuning probe in cavity U2 and adjust tuning screw 3 for a DIP Tighten tension nut on tuning screw 3 to at least 12 in Ib and fine tune tuning screw 2 for a DIP Insert tuning probe into cavity U3 Decrease output from signal generator to 5 dBm Adjust tuning screw 4 for a DIP Tighten tension nut on tuning screw 4 to at least 12 in Ib and fine tune tuning screw 4 for a DIP PRESELECTOR TUNING SCREW 2 gt ASSEMBLY i U2 TO STATION RECEIVE ANTENNA PORT U3 TUNING SCREW 3 m U4 TUNING SCREW 4 m a TO RECEIVER BOARD Location of Tuning Screws and Cavity Probe Holes 42 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 M MOTOROLA RECEIVER MODULE INCLUDES MODELS TRD6361A F Receiver Board 132 154 MHZ TFD6511A Preselector Filter 132 154 MHZ TRD6362A F Receiver Board 150 174 MHZ TFD6512A Preselector Filter 150 174 MHZ El DESCRIPTION The Quantar Quantro VHF High Band Receiver Modules are described in this section A general description identi fication of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Trou bles
147. of each IC closest to the center of the board Otherwise replace Station Control Module If LEDs 6 and 7 Rx 2 Active and Rx Fail respectively alter nately blink one of the start up tests has failed as indicated by one of the first three LEDs being turned on If LED 1 is turned on reseat the FLASH SIMM in its socket otherwise replace the FLASH SIMM If LED 2 or 3 is turned on check to make sure DRAM SIMMs are correct size for system application IntelliRepeater stations require one 8 Mbyte DRAM SIMM If correct size re seat the DRAM SIMMs in sockets Otherwise replace DRAM SIMMs If start up tests are run successfully all LEDs light and go off one by one and the Station Fail lights and stays on Step 3 replace Station Control Module If start up tests are run successfully all LEDs light and go out one by one and the Station Fail lights momentarily followed by all LEDs blinking perform a software download to FLASH memory as described in the Quantar Quantro RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Exciter Module LEDs Power Up Sequence Step 1 After Station Control Module passes all start up tests and becomes operational all four Exciter LEDs momen tarily light Step 2 The start up sequence tests now run and the LEDs go out top to bottom as each test is completed Step 3 Once PA FAIL is turned off the TX Lock LED is turned on This indicates that the module has passed all of the start
148. or the back plane connector contacts Any type of abrasive cleaning typically employed for cleaning non gold plated contacts can result in the re moval of the gold plating or bending of the connector contacts If cleaning of the gold plated contacts is required use a soft cloth dampened with alcohol to lightly wipe the contacts Be sure not to touch the contact surfaces with your fingers as finger oils and salts can contaminate the contact surfaces Cleaning Module Rails After a few module extraction insertion cycles wipe the module rails with a soft cloth to remove any oxidation or foreign material This ensur es a good ground connection between the module and the cage Power Down Station Before Removing Inserting Modules Before removing or inserting a module into the station cage and engag ing the backplane connector be sure to turn off the station power using the Power Supply Module On Off switch Important If the station is equipped with battery backup turning the On Off switch to OFF will not turn the station off You must also discon nect the battery revert cable from the station backplane Remember to reconnect the battery cable before restoring the station to operation Validating Repairs After replacing a faulty module with a known good module perform one of the following tests to validate the repair before leaving the site e If the faulty module was detected as the result of running station diagnostics via th
149. other stations act as voice channel repeaters under control of the current active master Cabling for an IntelliRepeater trunking site using a D LAN network con sists of making the LAN connections between each of the stations Make the cabling connections as follows Step 1 Select a station to be at one end of the network Note that the station need not be the station selected to serve as the current active master Step 2 Connect the 9 pin D type connector part of the Phone Net interface box to connector DLAN1 located on the station backplane as shown in Figure 21 Step 3 Install an RJ 11 terminator in one of the RJ 11 ports on the PhoneNet interface box The empty RJ 11 port at each end of the network must be terminated with an RJ 11 terminator Step 4 Select the end of the telephone cable with a ground wire and spade terminal attached Connect the RJ 11 con nector into the empty port of the PhoneNet interface box connect the spade lug to the station chassis screw as shown in Figure 21 Step 5 Install a PhoneNet interface box to the remaining stations in the ntelliRepeater network Step 6 Connect the stations together in a daisy chain fashion as shown in Figure 21 Remember to connect the ground wire and spade terminal to the station chassis screw on each station Step 7 Install an RJ 11 terminator in the empty RJ 11 port in the PhoneNet interface box on the last station in the net wor
150. relay turns on LED in opto coupler and pulls EXT PTT INT low This causes Station 2 transmitter to key up and routes Line 1 audio to the transmitter RD STAT Wireline Connections Connect the Line 1 audio from Station 2 to the Line 2 connections on Station 3 as shown below Connect the Line 2 audio from Station 2 to the Line 1 connections on Station 3 as shown below 8 POSITION TERMINAL CONNECTOR Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 2 50 TELCO Line 2 Pin3 CONNECTOR Line 2 Pin 4 Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 26 Line 2 Pin 2 Line 2 Pin 27 RDSTAT to EXT PTT Connection Station 3 to Station 2 Connect the RD STAT and signals from Station 3 to the EXT PTT and signals on Station 2 as shown below An equivalent schematic circuit for the RD STAT and EXT PTT signals is also shown STATION 3 STATION 2 50 PIN 50 TELCO TELCO 5V EXT PTT STATION 2 5V w 3 9K 3 9K 220PF 68P81090E99 A 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections Cont d Note RDSTAT INT signal goes high when Station 2 detects receive signal according to RX Activation parameter setting via RSS This energizes relay turns on LED in opto coupler and pulls EXT PTT INT low This causes Station 3 transmitter to key up and r
151. the SCM front panel Front Panel Connectors four connectors RSS Port DB 9 External Speaker RJ 11 Handset Microphone RJ 11 and 5 10 MHz External Input BNC are mounted on the front panel for interface with external equipment 68 81096 87 9 1 00 CLN1614A Station Control Module THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 68 81096 87 3 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the SCM controls indicators and all input and output external connections SNV1d3SV8 HLIM ILYN SHOLO3NNOO 3903 quvo HOLO3NNOOD 1 ZHIN 01 6 TVNH3 LX3 HOLO3NNOO 3NOHdOHOINW L3SQNVH HOLO3NNOO H3XV3ds 1VNH31X3 HOLO3NNOOD 1HOd SSH zee via NOLLNESHSNd a WOOSWAINI NOLLNEHSNd a 109198 HOTANOS NOLLNSHSnd 7 awmoa t ME SINMIOA SHOLVOIQNI G31 quvoa 7TOHINOD Station Control Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs Front View Figure 1 9 1 00 68P81096E87 O CLN1614A Station Control Module CONTROL BOARD r 5 o wo amp So 2 oos Su z Figure 2 Station Control Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs Rear View 68P81096E87 O 5 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPE
152. through a Voltage Scaling Circuit and reduces the battery charger output current during periods of heavy current draw by the station e The Voltage Scaling Circuitry accepts V BC RAW voltage feed back signal from battery VOLT RANGE BATT VOLT SELECT signals from the Station Control Module via the D A Converter which combine to set the charger output voltage in a range of 12 V dc to 16 V dc 16 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 CPN1049A CPN1050B265W Power Supply Modules SPI Bus Interface Circuitry This circuitry consists of a D A Converter that accepts digital signals from the Station Control Module and converts them to analog signals which control the operation of the Battery Charger Revert Board These signals e Control the charger voltage to the battery BATT_VOLT_RANGE and BATT_VOLT_SELECT e Disable the Undervoltage Detect Circuitry UVLO DISABLE to allow the station to continue operation even though the battery voltage is below the desired level e Provide a watchdog signal to refresh the Watchdog Timer Cir cuitry WATCHDOG Shutdown Circuitry This circuitry accepts four input signals and generates a shutdown sig nal to shut down the battery charger for certain input signal conditions A shutdown signal will be generated for any of the following conditions e The BATT WATCHDOG signal from the Station Control Mod ule is not present indicating that the Station Control Mod
153. to the rf outputs of the IPA DPA 25W and FPA 125W stages These dc signals IPA_VF DPA_VF and FPA_VF used for diagnostic purposes only are fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry Reflected Power Detect Circuitry The Harmonic Filter Coupler provides a dc voltage approximately pro portional to the reflected power at the output of the stage This dc signal TX_VR is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry The signal indicates the amount of potentially harmful re flected power at the PA output If the reflected power exceeds a set limit the Exciter Module will shut down the PA V_OMNI Detect Circuitry A voltage divider circuit provides a dc voltage approximately propor tional to the V_OMNI control voltage from the Voltage Translator amp Cur rent Limiter circuit This dc signal V OMNI is fed to the Exciter Mod ule via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry 14V Detect Circuitry A voltage divider circuit provides a dc voltage approximately propor tional to the 14 V dc input voltage from the station Power Supply Mod ule This dc signal 14 2V REF is fed to the Exciter Module via an ana log multiplexer and filter circuitry 28V Detect Circuitry 125W Only A voltage divider circuit provides a dc voltage approximately propor tional to the 28 V dc input voltage from the station Power Supply Mod ule This dc signal 28V REF is fed to the
154. to the board via a 4 wire dc input cable mounted on the station backplane Input Filler Circuitry The DC input voltage is fed to filtering circuitry This circuitry consists of filter capacitors that remove any ripple and or transients from the in put dc signal Front Panel On Off Switch Startup Delay Circuitry A rocker type switch located on the power supply module front panel allows the power supply and station to be turned on and off Note that the switch allows the output filter circuitry to slowly charge for approxi mately 1 5 seconds after switch is turned on through two diodes and resistors After the 1 5 second delay the relay turns on and provides the full dc input voltage to the output filter circuitry This 1 5 second pre charge delay period limits in rush current through the filter capacitors upon power up If the DC input is below approximately 43 2 V the relay will not be turned on and the power supply outputs will be disabled The red Module Fail LED on the front panel will light Output Filter Circuitry The DC input voltage is fed to filtering circuitry This circuitry consists of filter capacitors that remove any ripple or noise from the switching circuitry from the 28 V dc output 68P81096E84 O 9 1 00 CPN1031B Power Supply Module Inverter Circuitry and B Inverter Circuitry A and Inverter Circuitry B are identical switching type circuits that accept the gating signals V GATE 1 and
155. torque driver and deep well socket loosen the three tension nuts on the adjustment screws Step 4 Detune the preselector as follows Turn tuning screws 3 and 4 clockwise until they bottom out Be careful not to apply more than in Ibs of torque to prevent warping preselector cover and housing Step 5 Connect the test equipment as shown below PRESELECTOR ASSEMBLY r SX TENSION NUT E TUNING SCREW es TO Ses J y k RECEIVER 9 X BOARD TO DIP PEAK RF MILLIVOLTMETER OR POWER METER TO TUNING RECEIVE PROBE ANTENNA NN STATION RECEIVE INPUT Test Equipment Setup for Preselector Field Tuning FROM SIGNAL GENERATOR 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 41 Quantar Station Functional Manual Tuning Procedure Continued IMPORTANT When tuning for peak or dip turn the tuning screw turn past the peak or dip to verify that you have obtained a true peak or dip After ensuring you have found true peak or dip turn the screw back to the location of the original peak or dip Tuning Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Turn the station power supply ON to provide the active 509 termination Adjust the signal generator to the frequency calculated on page 40 Set the level to 5 dBm Insert tuning probe into cavity U2 and adjust tuning screw 2 for a PEAK Tighten tension
156. ule The amplified 1st i f signal is then 4 pole bandpass filtered and fed to the rf input of the custom receiver IC The custom receiver IC provides additional amplification filtering a second down conversion and finally analog to digital conversion of the 2nd i f signal The digital receive signal is then output via differential driver circuitry to the Station Control Board This data signal contains the necessary and Q quadrature information AGC information and other data transfer information required by the Station Control Module to process the receive signal Note that the recovered audio signal is in digital format throughout the equipment circuitry resulting in a more noise free linear receiver Analog audio is present only in the external speaker driver circuitry on the Station Control Board and on the Wire line Interface Board at the phone line connections to and from the equipment The remainder of the custom receiver IC circuitry consists of 2nd LO VCO circuitry and timing and tank circuits to support internal circuitry A serial bus allows data communications between the custom receiver IC and the DSP ASIC located on the Station Control Board This bus allows the DSP ASIC to control various current and gain settings es tablish the data bus clock rate program the 2nd LO and perform other control functions 68P81086E48 C 4 15 99 Quantar Quantro UHF Receiver Modules Address Decode and A D Converte
157. uses these signals to determine PA operating conditions and in response varies certain control signals to correct output power turn on cooling fans etc The sense and detect circuits are described in the following paragraphs Current Sensing Circuitry 25W IPA and DPA current sense circuitry comprised of two differential amplifiers and two sensing resistors meters the current being drawn by the IPA and the DPA and outputs two dc signals directly proportional to the IPA and DPA currents Circuit operation is described in the following paragraph In each of the current sense circuits a differential amplifier measures the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage directly proportional to the current through the resistor The dc voltage or DPA 1 is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filtering circuitry where it is used in calculating the current being drawn by the IPA or DPA Current Sensing Circuitry 100 110W IPA current sense circuitry comprised of a differential amplifier and a sensing resistor meters the current being drawn by the IPA and outputs a dc signal directly proportional to the IPA current Circuit operation is described in the following paragraph The differential amplifier measures the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage directly proportional to the IPA current The dc voltage 1 is fed to the Exciter Module an analog m
158. ushi Ae taut UC OU kuq on e aw page 9 Input Output Ports e sich hice IA DR ERR RE EINER eta s page 10 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry page 10 Front Panel LEDs and Switches page 11 Supply Voltages Circuitry page 11 STATION CONTROL MODULE CLN1614 68P81096E87 Description 3 sees lars rx Ir HE E ed ag d page 1 General Description ew RE XR UR ex e Re UTR d d d page 1 Overview of shell enr edu DLE hives ieee dees dant E NIS an haqa page 2 Controls Indicators and page 4 Functional Theory of Operation CLN7060A Control Board page 6 Host Microprocessor Host ASIC page 6 Non Volatile Memory uuu rbv Pel pred else Du IRIURE e px a page 7 DRAM Memory med RE m ama vr Iu er DRE ONE UN ae page 7 External Line Interface Circuitry page 8 Digital Signal Processor DSP and DSP ASIC page 9 Station Reference Circuitry u elk cad DET ra tena pU wen eee dae page
159. using the spectrum analyzer function DOES NOT It i ti nea e Torque driver capable of delivering 12 in Ibs of torque and 10 bly You must use this field tuning mm deep well socket procedure to obtain optimum e Tuning probe Motorola Part No 0180763D22 p o TRN7799A preselector performance tuning kit e Flat blade screwdriver Note The R2600 Communications Analyzer can both generate and measure simultaneously The R2001 may be used for either the generator or the monitor function but not both simultaneous ly When using R2001 as the signal generator rf signal must be taken from the Antenna port 36 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting VHF Tuning Procedure Calculating Proper Alignment Frequency Use one of the following two methods to calculate the alignment fre quency to be generated by the signal generator For stations with a single receive frequency calculate the frequency of the alignment signal as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 From the site documentation or the RSS determine the station receive frequency If the frequency is lt 148 MHz Range 1 or lt 156 MHz Range 2 subtract 250 kHz Otherwise note actual fre quency Example f station receive frequency is 134 575 MHz subtract 250 kHz since frequency is less than 143 MHz 134 575 MHz 250 kHz 134 325 MHz If Receiver Module is Range 1 determine the
160. voltages for use by local circuitry Diagnostics Circuitry converts analog status signals to digi tal format for transfer to Station Control Module Address Decode Circuitry performs address decoding to provide chip select signal for the A D converter Startup Shutdown Control Circuitry Provides delay inter vals for startup and shutdown of entire power supply module continued on next page 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual Overview of Circuitry Continued Battery Charger Revert Board CPN6074A Charger Supply Circuitry consists of switching type power supply that generates charging current for the external storage battery Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry consists of pulse width modulator boost switch timer and driver circuitry to provide vari able width pulses for the FET switches in the Charger Supply Circuitry Battery Revert Circuitry consists of signal monitoring circuit ry which turns on the Battery Revert FET Switches for certain in put signal conditions such as AC Fail Current Mode Controller Circuitry consists of current and voltage feedback signal monitoring circuitry which controls the Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry to maintain the desired charger output current and voltage SPI Bus Interface Circuitry consists of a D A converter which accepts charger control digital signals from the Station Control Module and converts t
161. 00 MHz Output Power Frequency 20W 100W Range Option Option 800 MHz X250AA NAME Not Available Option 900 MHz i EROAA Continued xiv 68P81095E05 B 9 1 00 If no other options are selected Motorola s Order Processing appends the appropriate stan dard options based on power and frequency band to complete the station equipment list The tables below show the completed equipment lists for the available options If additional options are desired they must be added to the initial order form Step 5 lists the available options and the impact each has on the standard equipment configuration VHF OPTION X330AA SELECTED IN STEP 3 VHF Range 1 25W Transmitter OPTION X330AA SELECTED IN STEP 3 VHF Range 2 25W Transmitter Source Option Description Source Option Description Kit Kit X330AA VHF High Band Ranges 1 amp 2 25W Transmitter X330AA VHF High Band Ranges 1 amp 2 25W Transmitter TLD3110B 25 W Power Amplifier Module VHF R1 amp R2 TLD3110B 25 W Power Amplifier Module VHF R1 amp R2 Option TKN8699A PA to Exciter RF Cable Option TKN8699A PA to Exciter RF Cable from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration
162. 027UF 033UF F 511 INTERFACE BOARD 2 i gt Jl 4 7UF 1 2 120 033UF 909 047UF gt lt _ gt e gt 4 7UF 3 120 033UF 909 068UF r 4 7UF als 4 680 033UF 909 AUF Note All jumpers removed for high impedance input output 68 81094 77 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Description of Audio Data Signal Paths Continued Note Depending on local codes and or customer preference phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the screw terminal connector on the station backplane Landline to Station signals are connected at Line 1 Audio Station to Land line signals are connected at Line 2 Audio For systems using dc remote control set jumpers JU1008 and JU1009 as shown below for 4 wire applications WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD 5223 4 WIRE DC RE Es o JU1008 JU1009 Four levels of gain adjustment are provided by circuitry on the WIB for Landline to Station and Station to Landline audio paths Addi tional fine level adjustments are performed in software in the Station Control Module WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD LINE 1 LINE 2 AUDIO AUDIO JU1010 n
163. 04 Use 03 04 06 and 07 as 1 ME REPEAT ACC 0004 07 shown The ID column reflects the MDC 1200 ID transmitted by OF aid the subscriber unit IDs 0001 OS s cenis thru 0004 are shown here as conchis examples You may choose 10 Eres other IDs as desired sve Select REPEAT ACC for IDs 01 thru 04 You MUST select RE FS F6 F7 8 F9 PEAT ACC Do not use the Re PRINT ADD DELETE ACTION peater Setup or Repeater PAGE MODE MODE EDIT Knockdown selections Figure 2 Making MDC 1200 SAM Decoder Selection RSS Settings continued on next page gt 68P81096E11 O 9 12 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products Step 3 Access the SAM Action Tables screen and program Tables 03 and 04 as shown in Figure 3 These Action Tables control the Gated Access functions enabled and disabled Note that if there is default data already entered when opening the tables overwrite the data with the data shown on the facing page continued on next page gt 10 68 81096 11 12 15 99 Dual Control of Repeater Access Via TRC and SAM Setting Action Table 03 Enable Gated Access MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE SAM with QUANTAR QUANTRO Use UP DOWN Arrows to Change Fields Page 01 of 04 ACTION TABLES ACTION TABLE 03 ACTION TABLE 03 of xx ACTION ADDRESS TARG BIT POLARITY 01 MANIBIT 004C 1 DISABLED ACTION WAIT TIME 0
164. 064A 100W UHF Range 4 El DESCRIPTION The Models TLE2731A TLE2732A TTE2061A TTE2062A TTE2063A and TTE2064A Power Amplifier Modules are described in this section A general description identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs functional block diagrams and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The Power Amplifier Module PA accepts a low level modulated rf signal from the Exciter Module and amplifies the signal for transmission via the site transmit antenna The output power is continually monitored and regulated by a feedback and control loop with a power output control voltage being generated by the transmitter control circuitry located in the Exciter Module These PA Modules are very similar in design and function with the major differences being the output power capabilities and operating frequency range Unless otherwise noted the information provided in this section applies to all three models Overview of Circuitry The PA contains the following circuitry Intermediate Power Amplifier IPA low level amplifier stage which is controlled by the transmi
165. 09 O 11 15 99 CPN1049A CPN1050B265W Power Supply Modules CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the power supply module controls indicators and all input and output external connections POWER SUPPLY MODULE FRONT PANEL MODULE FAIL LED POWER ON LED STATION ON OFF SWITCH REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE AC INPUT CONNECTOR BLIND MATES WITH AC CONNECTOR ON BACKPLANE BATTERY CHARGER OUTPUT CONNECTOR CPN1050 R O EXTERNAL CHARGER CONNECTOR CPN1049 Figure 1 CPN1049A CPN1050B Power Supply Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual 4 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OPERATION AC to DC Converter Board The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6065B AC to DC Converter Board circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the func tions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the AC to DC Converter Board Input Conditioning Circuitry Startup Delay Circuitry Introduction The AC to DC Converter Board accepts ac power from an external source typically a 110V or 220 240V ac wall receptacle AC power is connected to the board via a 3 wire line cord plugged into an ac rece
166. 10 HDLC Bus Control Circuitry page 10 Audio Interface Circuitry page 11 Input Output Ports ios EUER PIOS yet eee page 12 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry page 12 Supply Voltages Circuitry 13 continued next page 9 1 00 68P81095E05 B V Functional Theory of Operation CLN7098A LED Board page 14 Front 14 Front Panel Connectors s riere Ue RR p Reap eed een page 14 WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD 4 WIRE 68P81094E77 Description Jus M page 1 General Description 2 u at iM be eid eee p RR page 1 Overview Of Circuitiy uuu uw Au esi 1 Controls Indicators and page 2 Functional Theory of Operation page 3 Functional OVa W e o n ER bui oe eate Fe a ER ale dies ae idee d or ted page 3 Description of Audio Data Signal Pat
167. 1012 are placed as shown below WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD 8888 PER T1000 T1001 SECURENET POSITIONS Keel 0 c JU1011 JU1012 12KBPS SECURENET Modem Data Path Refer to Figure 6 12kbps SECURENET modem data signals are sent to from the station via 4 wire copper pairs and are processed by one of two 4 wire audio circuits on the WIB e Line 1 Audio amp Line 2 Audio e Line 3 Audio amp Line 4 Audio Both 4 wire circuits operate identically as follows Landline to Station 12kbps modem data is input to the primary of an audio transformer as balanced audio The signal is induced into the transformer secondary and fed to a buffer through jumper JU1010 placed in the 4 wire position as shown at the bottom of page 8 Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and secondary coils provide for selectable impedance matching For SECURENET sys tems place both jumpers in position 1 as shown in the illustration at the bottom of page 8 The buffer output is fed through a 3 pole low pass filter to a limiter which converts the modem signal to a data signal The output of the limiter is fed to the PASIC as serial data The PASIC sends the data to the microprocessor as 8 bit parallel data over the data bus The microprocessor sends the data to the micropro cessor in the Station Control Module over an interp
168. 10V regulator output also feeds two 5V regulators which output Custom Analog 5V and Custom Digital 5V dc operating voltages to supply the custom receiver IC In addition a 5V dc operating voltage is input at the backplane from the station power supply to supply Digi tal 5V to the remainder of the receiver board circuitry 68 81086 28 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68P81086E28 B 9 1 00 TRD6361A F TLD6362A F Receiver Board AGC RECEIVER FRONT END CIRCUITRY Paces RF INPUT OUTPUT FROM N TYPE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR ON Nee GET HIGH LOW BRACKET RF INPUT OUTPUT FROM 9 REAR OF STATION CONNECTOR BRACKET STATION CONTROL a TO MODULE 5 POLE FILTER INPUT 1ST N TYPE MINI UHF MINI UHF MINI UHF MIXER re CONNECTOR CONNECTORS CONNECTORS CONNECTORS u 5 POLE 6 Bags PR AMPLHEIER IMAGE 1STI F 2 POLE 4 POLE RECEIVE RF a gt 0 gt gt O PRESELECTOR gt O lt 4 aS CIRCUITRY FILTER BANDPASS gt BANDPASS gt FROM FILTER CIRCUITRY FILTER FILTER RX ANTENNA A 1STLO VCO FEEDBACK ADDRESS DECODE amp A D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY INJECTION CUSTOM AMPLIFIER RECEIVER 1 IC gt CIRCUITRY amp A1 CHIP 1ST LO INPUT SELECT 4 DECODE gt CHIP CIRCUITRY SELE
169. 182AC AD Min 3 MHz X182AE AF TX Noise Suppression at RX Freq 100 E FR 55 A 120 dB 182 AD RX Isolation at TX Freq 100 dB min EAE AD Maximum Input Power 250W Temperature Range 30 C to 60 G 54 H x 14 D x 19 W EIA Rack Mountable Input and Output Impedance 50 Ohms SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE Size 68P81087E94 A 3 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro UHF Station Functional Manuals 4 TYPICAL MOUNTING CONFIGURATION The duplexer module is typically mounted in the same rack or cabinet as the station and peripheral tray if equipped Figure 3 shows front and rear views of a typical repeater configuration in which a station triple circula tor option and duplexer option are installed in a single cabinet Also shown is a simplified interconnect diagram showing the receiver and transmitter paths to a single RX TX antenna 4 68 81087 94 9 1 00 UHF Duplexer Module CABINET STATION TRANSMIT OUTPUT STATION DUPLEXER wawa MODULE STATION RECEIVE OUTPUT CONNECT RF CABLE FROM SINGLE TX RX ANTENNA HERE FRONT VIEW CIRCULATOR CIRCULATOR POWER AMPLIFIER Qo MODULE SS J 50 OHM LOAD l HEAT SINK EI EAM NE eg ere RECEIVER lt w PE ME MEI 1 ns 9 a8 en T DUPLEXER a MODULE E REAR VIEW
170. 2 Quantar Station Troubleshooting Overview Procedure 2 Reported or Suspected Problem USING RSS DOWNLOAD STATION SOFTWARE TO FLASH MEMORY ON STATION CONTROL BOARD 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting CHECK CODE PLUG PROGRAMMING RSS USER S GUIDE 68P81085E35 gt PROCEDURE 2 Cont d e USING RSS READ THE STATION CODE PLUG AND VERIFY THAT PROGRAMMING IS COR RECT COMPARE TO CODE PLUG FILE ON PC FOR PARTICULAR STATION CODE PLUG PROGRAMMING CORRECT NO e RE PROGRAM STATION CODE PLUG BY DOWNLOADING CUSTOMER DATA FROM CODE PLUG FILE FOR PARTICU LAR STATION RSS USER S GUIDE 68P81085E35 e IF PROBLEM STILL EXISTS PROCEED TO INTERPRET STATUS REPORT INTERPRET STATUS REPORT RSS USER S GUIDE 68P81085E35 e USING RSS ACCESS THE STATUS REPORT SCREEN AND LOOK AT HISTORY OF ALARMS AND TIME STAMPS MODULE SUSPECTED OF BEING GO TO MODULE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ON PAGE 19 FAULTY RUN TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER TESTS e PERFORM VERIFYING TRANSMITTER CIRCUITRY TESTS Page 10 TO ISOLATE PROBLEM TO TRANSMITTER CIRCUITRY e PERFORM VERIFYING RECEIVER CIRCUITRY TESTS Page 14 TO ISOLATE PROBLEM TO RECEIVER CIRCUITRY REPLACE FAULTY MODULE AS DESCRIBED IN MODULE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES BEGINNING ON PAGE 19 Figure 2 Troubleshooting Procedure
171. 2 LINE 1 RF LINK REMOTE STATION 1 CONSOLE EXT PTT EXT PTT PTT CLOSURE Figure 2 RA RT E amp M Keying Wiring Connections RF Link Console to Station 1 Wiring Connections Step 1 Step 2 Note Phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the 8 position terminal connector Refer to the Installation section of the appropriate sta tion functional manual for more details on phone line connections Connect the landline to station audio from the console to the Line 1 connections on the backplane of Station 1 as shown below Connect the station to landline audio to the console to the Line 2 connections on the backplane of Station 1 as shown below 8 POSITION TERMINAL CONNECTOR Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 2 Line 2 Pin 3 Line 2 Pin4 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 26 Line 2 Pin 2 Line 2 Pin 27 68P81090E99 A 9 1 00 RA RT Configuration E amp M Control Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections Note Phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the 8 position terminal connector Refer to the Installation section of the appropriate sta tion functional manual for more details on phone line connections Note RDSTAT INT signal goes high when Station 3 detects receive signal according to RX Activation parameter setting via RSS This energizes
172. 2 WAIT 100 ACTION ADDRESS TARG BIT POLARITY 03 MANIBIT 004C 1 ENABLED ACTION 04 ACTION 04 Setting Action Table 04 Disable Gated Access MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE SAM with OUANTAR OUANTRO Use UP DOWN Arrows to Change Fields Page 01 of 04 ACTION TABLES ACTION TABLE 04 ACTION TABLE 04 of xx ACTION ADDRESS TARG BIT POLARITY 01 MANIBIT 004C 1 ENABLED ACTION ADDRESS TARG BIT POLARITY 02 004C 0 DISABLED ACTION WAIT TIME 03 WAIT 100 ACTION ADDRESS TARG BIT POLARITY 04 MANIBIT 004C 1 DISABLED ACTION 05 Use arrow keys to toggle to 03 Program Actions 01 03 as shown Use arrow keys to toggle to 04 Program Actions 01 04 as shown Figure 3 Programming the Action Tables for Gated Access Enable Disable 68 81096 11 12 15 99 11 Quantar Quantro Station Products Step 4 Access the SAM Action Tables screen and program Tables 06 and 07 as shown in Figure 4 These Action Tables control the Repeater Setup and Knockdown functions Note that if there is default data already entered when opening the tables overwrite the data with the data shown on the facing page End of This Procedure 1 2 68P81096E11 O 12 15 99 Dual Control of Repeater Access Via TRC and SAM Setting Action Table 06 Repeater Setup MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE SAM with
173. 2AB Ethernet Termination Kit X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware X430AA 12 Cabinet X430AA 12 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet 5040 Grommet TTN5040A Grommet X362AA Packing X362AA Packing TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet X436AA Instruction Manual X436AA Instruction Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual Continued 9 1 00 68P81095E05 B VHF OPTION X530AA SELECTED IN STEP 3 VHF Range 1 125W Transmitter OPTION X530AB SELECTED IN STEP 3 VHF Range 2 125W Transmitter Source Option Description Source Option Description Kit Kit X530AA VHF High Band Range 1 125W Transmitter X530AB VHF High Band Range 2 125W Transmitter TLD3101F 125 W Power Amplifier Module VHF R1 TLD3102F 125 W Power Amplifier Module VHF R2 Option TKN8699A PA to Exciter RF Cable Option TKN8699A PA to Exciter RF Cable from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X131AA Exciter Module VHF High Band Range 1 X131AB Exciter Module VHF
174. 3 DBM INTERMEDIATE OTO 10 W DRIVER 35W MAX FINAL 160W MAX POWER gt POWER POWER gt 50 OHM MOD EOM RF AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER LOAD EXCITER IPA DPA Y FPA zx zi ay MODULE FIAV 14V amp 8 P O IPA Y DPA N N Y amp amp BUFFER P101 P102 DETECT rae E CIRCUITRY ar dH 28V g 28V gt FPA P O DETECT P101 P102 gt CIRCUITRY TX_VF gt P O 28V BUFFER P101 P102 ne IPA DPA Y FPA RESISTOR ROM gt gt 14V CURRENT IPA CURRENT INDICATES PA TYPE SENSE DETECT SENSE P O CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY FPA DETECT FPA_VF ANALOG gt gt MULTIPLEXER BUFFER 14 2V_REF 14 vOLTAGE s DIVIDER DPA DETECT DPA VF Y Y Y gt MULTIPLEXER BUFFER IPA DETECT IPA_VF P O OHS LINE ry _ FILTER EXCITER MODULE OMNI_VOLTAGE BUFFER CIRCUITRY Y Y T VOLTAGE V OMNIS DIVIDER FPA I1 A L FPA_I1_B me DPA 1 ie P O IPA ANALOG MULTIPLEXER 28V VOLTAGE PBV REES DIVIDER gt THERMISTOR BUFFER PA TEMP N H T P O P101 FAN ON FAN ON FAN CURRENT MONITOR FAN FAN STATUS FROM z FAN DRIVER d STATUS ial P O EXCITER CIRCUITRY NODULE CIRCUITRY POWER AMPLIFIER _ CASTING y FAN POWER FAN POWER L gt MATES WITH A DUAL FAN L ASSEMBLY FAN RTN FAN RTN MOLEX TYPE CONNECTOR T Figure 3 TLF1930A 800 MHz and TLF1800A 900 MHz 100W Power Amplifier Module Functional Block Diagram
175. 3004 Hz 3 0 to 12 0 dB 3 0 to 12 0 dB Type 5 3002 Envelope Delay Distortion 804 to 2604 Hz 1750 usec 1750 usec Impulse Noise Threshold 71 dBrnCO Intermodulation Distortion R2 R3 Phase Jitter 20 300 Hz gt 10 Degrees 4 300 Hz gt 15 Degrees gt 25 Degrees gt 30 Degrees 68P81096E86 O 3 6 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products Aux TX Audio J17 Pin 5 The Aux TX Audio signal is an unbalanced 4709 impedance input to the station The input voltage range is 4 1 V to 4 1 V at 250 Hz to Note Inorder for J17 Pin 5 to support the 3 kHz The response curves for this signal are shown below Aux TX Audio signal you must edit the Wildcard Table as shown on page 11 Aux Tx Audio Magnitude Response 1dB DIV START 0 Hz STOP 10 000 Hz Aux Tx Audio Phase Response START 0 Hz STOP 10 000 Hz 4 68P81096E86 O 6 1 00 Input Output Specifications for External Controllers Aux PL Audio J17 Pin 5 The Aux PL Audio signal is an unbalanced 4709 impedance input to the station The input voltage range is 4 1 V to 4 1 V at 5 Hz to 3 kHz Note In order for J17 Pin 5 to support the The response curves for this signal are shown below Aux PL Audio signal you must edit the Wildcard Table as shown on page 12 Aux PL Audio Magnitude Response 1dB DIV START 0 Hz STOP 10 000 Hz Aux PL Audio Phase Response 10 DEG 10 DEG DIV 90 START 0 Hz ST
176. 4V_RAW VCC_SEC PULSE a SYNC SEC gt WIDTH DRIVER CURRENT RUD MODULATOR SENSE MAIN_SD_SEC 133 KHZ 133 KHZ OVERVOLTAGE anal E DETECT _ a BUFFER REF DRIVER REF gt CURRENT LIMIT gt gt DETECT CIRCUITRY 5V_REF gt 5V_REF gt 5V_DIAG 5V SUPPLY CIRCUITRY 28V_RAW gt POWER VCC SEC salt V_RAW 5 POWER FET Y Y Y YN FILTER SWITCH a 1 n i CIRCUITRY c gt 5V FET P O 133 KHZ Y Y be BACKPLANE JUL Y Y som CONNECTOR 133 KHZ E 24 pm gt WIDTH DRIVER CURRENT CU 25 5V DC MODULATOR SENSE TO OVERVOLTAGE STATION DETECT MODULES 30 REF gt 31 BACKPLANE REF L CURRENT LIMIT MAIN_SD_SEC DETECT CIRCUITRY k 5V_REF Figure 3 20 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 CPN6067A DC to DC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram 1 of 2 CPN1047A CPN1048APower Supply Modules BATTERY CHARGER CONTROL CIRCUITRY STARTUP SHUTDOWN CONTROL CIRCUITRY POWER_CUT PRI POWER_CUT_SEC I gt lt a BUFFER ISOLATION x To VCC PRI CIRCUITRY BATTERY CHARGER REVERT BOARD SHUTDOWN 1 MAIN SD PRI 1 SECOND gt SHUTDOWN SOFTSTART gt 4 L gt L gt G j
177. 5 CM 17 8 45 2 CM E UE o0o0000000000000 I III III 20 50 8 CM I de k 4 1 b 2 53 Hos Cn z 4 b 1 b 4 P 4 y MONA TING b cone P 4 t SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW 5 6 14 2 pe lt 14 2 CM I 2 65 9 CM I M eue Fi ae zd s 8 625 DIAMETER 9 PS 19 3 w _ 49 2 2 5 1 CM VIEWED 6 1 CM FROM i gt I i d 6109 T P 0 62 DIAMETER BASE MOUNTING DETAIL HOLES 4 Figure 7 60 Indoor Cabinet Dimensions 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 13 Quantar Station Functional Manual MECHANICAL INSTALLATION This section describes the procedures necessary to unpack and mechanically install the Quantar station equip ment A variety of mounting methods are possible depending on such factors as which type of cabinet or rack if any has been selected to house the station cage s whether stacking of cabinets is desired etc Procedures are provided for each of the cabinet rack types If it becomes necessary to remove any of the modules refer to the Module Replacement Procedures located in the Troubleshooting section of this manual for removal instruc
178. 68P81086E23 B 9 1 00 TLD3110 and TLD3101 TLD3102 Power Amplifier Modules 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the PA circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Functional block diagrams are provided in Figure 2 TLD3110 25 W and Figure 3 TLD3101 TLD3102 125 W As mentioned previously the four PA mod ules are similar in design and function The following theory of operation applies to all four modules except where noted RF Signal Path Output Power Control Note that V_OMNI does not control the output level of the DPA directly but serves as on off control for the DPA stage A low level modulated rf signal approximately 13 dBm from the Ex citer module is input to the PA module via a coax cable The signal is input to the IPA and amplified to approximately 0 to 10W depending on the dc power control voltage V_CONT from the Exciter Module The IPA output is fed to a DPA 25W or an FPA 125W where final am plification occurs The output of the DPA 85W maximum or FPA 160W maximum is fed to a circulator which passes the transmit signal to the harmonic filter coupler while routing all reflected power to a 509 load The output of the circulator is fed to the harmonic
179. 7 SYSTEM CONNECTOR 17 Pin 30 Aux RX Audio see note 3 Pin 38 Carrier Indication alternate see note 1 Pin 42 PTT alternate see note 2 Pin 43 Carrier Indication Pin 26 Linel Pin 47 PTT a a Line1 Notes see note 4 Pin 22 Pin 1 1 The default WildCard Tables define pins 18 and 43 as Carrier Indication and These pins provide a relay contact closure output If desired the WildCard Tables may be modified to provide the Carrier Indication signal on pin 38 as a transistor buffered output See Editing WildCard Tables on page 7 for details Pin5 Aux TX Audio Pin 18 Carrier Indication 2 The default WildCard Tables define pins 22 and 47 as PTT and These pins provide an opto coupled input If desired the WildCard Tables may be modified to provide the PTT signal on pin 42 as a transistor buffered input See Editing WildCard Tables on page 7 for details 3 Stations shipped from the factory are programmed with no signal at pin 30 In order to program this pin for Aux RX Audio refer to Editing WildCard Tables on page 7 4 Stations shipped from the factory are programmed with no signal at pin 5 Depending on the application this pin may be programmed for AUXPL Audio or Aux TX Audio In order to program this pin for AUXPL Audio or Aux TX Audio refer to Editing WildCard Tables on page 7
180. 81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation ETHERNET BNC CONNECTOR 22 T CONNECTOR TO BNC CONNECTOR 22 TERMINATOR STATION SELECTED TO BE AT TERMINATED END OF ETHERNET NETWORK STATION SELECTED TO BE AT ACCESS POINT OF ETHERNET NETWORK 10BASE 2 COAXIAL CABLING ETHERNET ACCESS TERMINATOR POINT CONNECT DIRECTLY TO PC DO NOT USE EXTENDER CABLE Figure 22 IntelliRepeater Trunking Site Ethernet Network Cabling Detail 68 81096 57 11 15 99 41 Quantar Station Functional Manual Connecting System Cables Continued 6809 Trunking Cabling Connections Connect the control cable from the 6809 Trunking Controller to the sta tion backplane as shown in Figure 23 below 6809 TRUNKING CONTROLLER CONTROL CABLE INPUT Figure 23 Connecting 6809 Trunking Controller Cable 42 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation Connecting System Cables Continued Zone Controller Cabling Connections Connect the control cable from the Zone Controller to the station back plane as shown in Figure 24 below ZONE CONTROLLER CONTROL CABLE INPUT Figure 24 Connecting Zone Controller Cable 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 43 Quantar Station Functional Manual Connecting System Cables Continued 6809 Controller TSC CSC Link Cabling Connections Connect the TSC CSC link cable broadcast box from the
181. 8P81086E38 A Batted USAS 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP M MOTOROLA PERIPHERAL TRAY Option X696AA CABLE i HARNESS LOW PASS FILTER DUAL CIRCULATOR ASSEMBLY PERIPHERAL TRAY Figure 1 Peripheral Tray with Internal Components 900 MHz Components Shown DESCRIPTION Option X696AA provides a peripheral tray and cable harness for use with Quantar station products This section provides a general description option complement and identification of inputs outputs The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and trouble shooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for de tailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The peripheral tray is comprised of a rack mount tray The tray shown in Figure 1 allows various ancillary equipment circulators filters etc to be housed and electrically connected to the station Sodu Commercial Government and Rights Hseved Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81086E37 B Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Station Products 2 OPTIONS COMPLEMENT Table 1 shows the contents for the Option X696AA Peripheral Tray option Option Complement Chart Table 1 Peripheral Tray Option X696AA Complement
182. 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro 900 MHz Receiver Module AGC RECEIVER FRONT END CIRCUITRY RF INPUT OUTPUT N TYPE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR AGS SERBE HIGH LOW BRACKET RF INPUT OUTPUT FROM 9 REAR OF STATION CONNECTOR BRACKET STATION CONTROL ri TO MODULE LO PASS FILTER 1ST N TYPE MINIS UHE MIXER 73 35 MHZ CONNECTOR CONNECTORS 7 POLE SRERMBUEIER IMAGE 1ST I F 2 POLE 4 POLE RECEIVE RF gt gt LO PASS CERAMIC TRY FILTER BANDPASS BANDPASS FROM FILTER PRESELECTOR CIRCU CIRCUITRY FILTER FILTER RX ANTENNA FILTER FILTER P O ADDRESS DECODE amp A D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY 1STLO VCO FEEDBACK CUSTOM 5 INJECTION RECEIVER _ AMPLIFIER C Y IC gt 7 CIRCUITRY 35 MHZ DIFF amp A1 CHIP 1ST LO INPUT 7325 SELECT E 1ST I F DATA DECODE gt STATOR CIRCUITRY ELECT ADDRESS P O CONTROL BUS REGULATOR P2802 FROM lt MODULE
183. 955 OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR eee NINE LINE 2 OUTBOUND SIGNAL ON USED FOR CANCELLATION STATION BACKPLANE PERIPHERAL AMPLIFIER ASIC 4 LINE 2 AUDIO GAIN CONTROL FROM PASIC FROM LANDLINE TO STATION AE JUMPER JUMPER 1 AND P m FIELD FIELD re DIA FROM STATION TO LANDLINE CONVERTER e AMPLIFIER PCM VOICE 2 POLE GAIN AES _ LOW PASS ADJUST pese Don FILTER CIRCUITRY TAON amp CONTROL MODULE TDM BUS STATION TO LANDLINE VOICE AUDIO PATH Figure 3 2 Wire Voice Audio Path Functional Block Diagram LANDLINE TO STATION VOICE AUDIO PATH P O 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR ELI coner CLN6955 JU1010 OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR PLACED IN CLN6955 IQLN6957 4 WIRE POSITION STATION BACKPLANE GAIN PCM VOICE ADJUST gt m AND DATA CIRCUITRY Es JUMPER JUMPER BUFFER STATION LINE 1 AUDIO CONTROL FROM LANDLINE gt FIELD FIELD AD MODULE TO STATION CONVERTER TDM BUS P O PERIPHERAL 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR ASIC CLN6955 OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR CLN6955 CLN6957 GAIN CONTROL ON FROM PASIC STATION BACKPLANE AMPLIFIER D A s CONVERTER 4 LINE 2 AUDIO JUMPER JUMPER a FROM STATION FELD FIELD 2 POLE GAIN ROM VOICE TO LANDLINE q LOW PASS ADJUST a OMS 4 UNA FILTER CIRCUITRY ON CONTROL MODULE BUS STATION TO LANDLINE VOICE AJDIO PATH Figure 4 4 Wire Voice Audio Path Functiona
184. A 3 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the SCM circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the SCM Host Microprocessor Overview The Host Microprocessor uP serves as the main controller for the SCM and station The uP an MC68EN360 running at a clock speed of 25 MHz controls the operation of the station as determined by the station software contained in a FLASH SIMM module and the station codeplug EEPROM Communications Buses The Host uP provides six general purpose serial communications buses as follows e SCC1 Used as Ethernet port for high speed communications either to connect to the Ethernet local network of an ntelliRe peater trunking site or to allow station software to be down loaded from a local PC into the FLASH memory e SCC2 Used as communications port to allow the station to connect into the local network of an ntelliRepeater trunking site external connections are provided by a 9 pin D type connec tor 19 located on backplane e SCC3 Used as the Interprocessor Communications Bus HDLC protocol to allow the Host uP to communicate with the Wireline
185. A CPN1048A625W Power Supply Modules Overview of Circuitry The power supply module is comprised of three circuit boards con nected together via cables These boards contain circuitry as follows AC to DC Converter Board CPN6065B Input Conditioning Circuitry consists of ac line transient protection EMI filtering front panel on off switch startup delayed relay and a full wave rectifier Startup Delay Circuitry provides a delay of approximately 1 5 seconds from time on off switch is turned on until the power supply becomes functional allows pre charge of high capacity filter capacitors to limit in rush current on power up Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry consists of switching type power supply that generates 400V dc for use by DC to DC Converter Board as well as providing power factor correction Battery Revert Trigger Circuitry Monitors 400 V dc and generates a signal to the Battery Charger Revert Board to acti vate battery revert if the 400 V dc fails or drops below approxi mately 350 V dc VCC Supply Circuitry consists of switching type power sup ply that generates the VCC supply voltage approximately 13V do for use by circuitry on AC to DC Converter Board and DC to DC Converter Board DC to DC Converter Board CPN6067A 28 V Main Supply Circuitry consists of switching type power supply that generates the 28 V dc supply voltage and provides primary secondary isolatio
186. ARD BACKPLANE 2 CONNECTOR QG SHUTDOWN 2 16 Mee 17 14 2V DC 14 2V 1o eoo STATION MODULES 22 VIA T 14V SUPPLY CIRCUITRY 28V RAW 23 BACKPLANE 29 te VCC SEC PONER TAN FILTER POWER FET YYYYN gt 14V 28V_RAW REGULATOR SWITCH CIRCUITRY FET 133 KHZ Y Y BUS Y 77 gt 14V_RAW VCC_SEC les P PULSE CROWBAR SYNC_SEC gt WIDTH DRIVER gt CURRENT CIRCUIT MODULATOR SENSE PRI SHUT SEC 133 KHZ OVERVOLTAGE ats 1 2 DETECT Jr gt BUFFER gt X DRIVER A REF Y CURRENT LIMIT gt DETECT CIRCUITRY 5V_REF gt gt 5V_REF Las 5V_DIAG 5V SUPPLY CIRCUITRY 28V_RAW gt POWER VCC SEC 5V_RAW POWER FET gt YYYYN A rele A FILTER 5V SWITCH CIRCUITRY 133 KHZ Y ii us L BACKPLANE Jur Y Y m CONNECTOR 133 KHZ BOSE mE 24 ey p dre CROWBAR WIDTH gt DRIVER gt CIRCUIT 25 5V MODULATOR SENSE TO OVERVOLTAGE STATION DETECT MODULES 30 VIA REF c 31 BACKPLANE REF gt CURRENT LIMIT PRI_SHUT_SEC DETECT CIRCUITRY 5V_REF Figure 3 14 68 81096 84 9 1 00
187. All outputs 50 mV p p measured with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope at 25 C High Frequency individual Output Ripple harmonic voltage limits in 10 kHz 100 MHz frequency band 28 6V 1 5 mV p p 14 2V 3 0 mV p p 5V 5 0mV p p Short Circuit Current 2 5A 3A 4 68P81096E84 O 9 1 00 CPN1031B Power Supply Module CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the power supply module controls indicators and all input and output external connections POWER SUPPLY MODULE FRONT PANEL B MODULE FAIL POWER ON LED STATION ON OFF SWITCH REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE DC EXTERNAL SOURCE INPUT CONNECTOR Figure 1 CPN1031B Power Supply Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 68P81096E84 O 9 1 00 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual n FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION DC Input Board The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6064B DC Input Board circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the DC Input Board Input Conditioning Circuitry Introduction The DC Input Board accepts dc power from an external source typical ly a bank of storage batteries DC power is connected
188. BM INTERMEDIATE OTO 10 W FINAL 160W MAX G POWER POWER gt a 50 OHM a a cerns RF AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER LOAD Es IPA FPA EY Sy EXCITER als a MODULE 14V a b IPA Y 8 Y BUFFER P101 P102 4 ud x 2 8 28V P O VF P101 P102 I FPA gt DETECT P O 28V CIRCUITRY BUFFER P101 P102 14V IPA FPA RESISTOR ROM gt A 414V CURRENT IPA CURRENT INDICATES PA TYPE SENSE DETECT SENSE P O CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY FPA DETECT FPA_VF ANALOG gt gt MULTIPLEXER BUFFER 14 2V_REF 14 VOLTAGE oe DIVIDER Y Y Y Y IPA DETECT IPA_VF P O gt x LINE FILTER BUFFER L __ 4 CIRCUITRY OMNI VOLTAGE VOLTAGE OMNIS DIVIDER FPA I1 A Ls FPA_I1_B Ls P O IPA 1 ANALOG E MULTIPLEXER 28V VOLTAGE 28V REFA DIVIDER gt E THERMISTOR BUFFER ee NI T SS 22 P O 3 a P101 FAN ON FAN ON FAN CURRENT MONITOR FAN FAN STATUS FROM FAN DRIVER PIO EXCITER CIRCUITRY gt STATUS T MODULE CIRCUITRY POWER AMPLIFIER _ 22 CASTING Y FAN POWER FAN POWER 1 gt MATES WITH DUAL L ASSEMBLY FAN RTN FAN RTN MOLEX TYPE CONNECTOR Figure 3 68 81086 23 9 1 00 TLD3101 TLD3102 125W Power Amplifier Module Functional Block Diagram T M MOTOROLA POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE MODELS TLE2731A 25W UHF Range 1 TLE2732A 25W UHF Range 2 TTE2061A 110W UHF Range 1 TTE2062A 110W UHF Range 2 TTE2063A 110W UHF Range 3 TTE2
189. BUFFER I FILTER H OUTPUTS 14V VOLTAGE 14 2M REF CIRCUITRY TO gt DIVIDER gt EXCITER MODULE c ee OMNI_VOLTAGE VOLTAGE DIVIDER DPA gt Ls Ld IPA P O gt gt ANALOG MULTIPLEXER THERMISTOR gt PA TEMP ge c BUFFER ED 22 Figure 2 TLE2731A TLE2732A 25W UHF Power Amplifier Module Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68P81088E44 B 7 Quantar UHF Station Functional Manual P O P101 32 33 COAXIAL CABLE FROM PWR CONTROL N POWER AMPLIFIER OUTPUT VOLTAGE P O CONNEDTOR RF INPUT OUTPUT FROM LINE V CONT CONNECTOR EXCITER P102 FILTER Eia VOLTAGE TRANSLATOR ON BRACKET MODULE CIRCUITRY amp RE INPUTOUTPUT REAR OF STATION CURRENT LIMITER CONNECTOR BRACKET 35 wq CIRCULATOR HARMONIC Y gt gt FILTER lt lt 0 11 COUPLER TRANSMIT RF V OMNI N 100 110W MAX OUTPUT J4100 13 DBM INTERMEDIATE OTO 15 W FINAL 150W MAX G POWER POWER gt gt gt 50 OHM a a cerns RF AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER LOAD Es IPA FPA EY Sy EXCITER a EH MODULE
190. CH 14 2V FILTER 5V VCCA FROM CIRCUITRY f REGULATOR ve ANALOG 5V BACKPLANE vec vec vec vec B 2 5V O O A PUSHBUTTON SWITCH SIGNALS P O I O PORT PO IN VOL UP VOL DOWN Ea INTERCOM ACCESS DISABLE tae ined E REGULATOR 5V OF 10V DIGITAL GROUND LOGICGND STATIC FROM vss m GROUND AUDIO GROUND lt b Figure 2 CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Module Functional Block Diagram 5 of 5 18 68P81094E76 A 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA STATION CONTROL MODULE MODEL CLN1614A El DESCRIPTION The Model CLN1614A Station Control Module SCM is described in this section A general description identifica tion of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the mod ule allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Trouble shooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The SCM serves as the main controller for the station Each SCM is comprised of two circuit boards Control Board and LED Board con tained in a single slide in housing The two boards are connected via a multi conductor ribbon c
191. CHARGE LO PASS CONTROL VOLTAGE g ry z PUMP gt LOOP gt 4 IMPEDANCE DOWN FILTER 2 5 TO 7 5 V DC 9 1V MATCHING FEEDBACK e B VCO CIRCUITRY LOWER 1 4 OF BAND gt OSCILLATOR gt 1 L BUFFER AMP m VCO FEEDBACK _ FEEDBACK lt BUFFER 2 1 MHZ REFERENCE L 4 15 99 68P81086E48 C Figure 2 Quantar Quantro UHF Ranges 1 thru 4 Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram M MOTOROLA RECEIVER MODULE Includes TRF6551G Receiver Board DESCRIPTION The Quantro Quantar 800 MHz Receiver Module is described in this section A general description identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are pro vided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshoot ing section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The Receiver Module provides the receiver functions for the Quantro Quantar 800 MHz station The receiver module is comprised of a Re ceiver Board and a ceramic preselector mounted on board all con tained within a slide in module housing The receiver module per forms highly selective bandpass filtering and dual down conversion of the station r
192. CK CONNECTOR 17 PIN CONNECTOR 17 PIN 4 w WrsusOIIOSWHIAlIuAII qW 4 Figure 1 Using Punch Block to Facilitate Wiring Connections 2 68P81095E89 O 2 15 99 Main Standby Configuration CONNECTOR 17 CONNECTOR 17 STATION A 50 PIN 50 PIN STATION B TELCO TELCO MAIN STANDBY AUX OUT 3 AUXIN 1 NOTE 1 NOTE 1 MAIN STANDBY AUXIN 1 AUX OUT 3 AUX IN 8 AUX OUT 8 CONTROL FOR EXTERNAL ANTENNA SWITCH AUX OUT 8 n AUX 8 OUT RELAY CONTACTS CLOSED WHEN STATION AIS MAIN OPEN WHEN STATION B IS MAIN SEE INSET FOR TYPICAL ANTENNA SWITCH WIRING GROUND RETURN FOR ANTENNA SWITCH AUX OUT 4 gt AUX IN 4 AUXIN 4 E SWITCHOVER HANDSHAKING SIGNALS ae AUX OUT 4 AUX IN 2 AUX IN 2 LINE 1 a LINE 1 LINE 1 gt LINE 1 LINE 2 gt T LINE 2 LINE 2 gt lt LINE 2 AUX OUT 9 AUX OUT 9 NOTE 4 NOTE 4 AUX OUT 9 AUX OUT 9 TX AUDIO MAIN STANDBY RX AUDIO FROM CONSOLE CONTROL TO CONSOLE NOTE 2 FROM EXTERNAL SOURCE NOTE 2 NOTE 3 TYPICAL ANTENNA SWITCH WIRING CONTROL FROM NOTES STATION A 1 AUX OUT 3 GND MAIN 3V STANDBY 1 2 CONNECTIONS TO CONSOLE SHOWN FOR 4 WIRE PHONE LINE IF 2 WIRE PHONE LINE ONLY CONNECTIONS TO LINE 2 AND ARE USED 3 IF MAIN STANDBY IS NOT TRC CONT
193. CT ADDRESS BUS REGULATOR FROM STATION VARIOUS CIRCUITRY CONTROL SIGNALS AD CUSTOM MODULE FROM 7 CONVER 5V DIGITAL BOARD RECEIVER BOARD TER REGULATOR SELECT TO BE MONITORED SOURCE e E DECODE E 14 2V 2 5 CIRCUITRY FROM BENE W 10V BACKPLANE REGULATOR SOURCE 5V CUSTOM gt REGULATOR ANALOG SPI BUS TO FROM SPI BUS CLOCK amp DATA SPI BUS CLOCK amp DATA SOURCE STATION 450 KHZ CONTROL FILTER gt CIRCUITRY VCO CIRCUITRY SYNTHESIZER CHIP CIRCUITRY pee 9 1V 14 4 MHZ VCO 410V TIMING gt BANDSHIFT SELECT 1 CIRCUITRY AUX1 7 CIRCUITRY y lt 9 SUPER 2ND LO RE FILTER TANK gt PHASE RRESGUENON E 49 1 V CIRCUITRY d LOCKED CHANGE z P2801 mE FILTER BYPASS IC ANALOG SWITCHES Y VCO CIRCUITRY UPPER 1 2 OF BAND 24 MHZ 2 1 MHZ Y 1 REF 65 BUFFER gt RIN OSCILLATOR gt BUFFER SCM AMP UP CIRCE LO PASS CONTROL VOLTAGE OUTPUT Eque LOOP gt 4 gt IMPEDANCE Vn DOWN FILTER 2 5 TO 7 5 V DC 9 1V MATCHING ED VCO CIRCUITRY LOWER OF BAND IN OSCILLATOR gt 1 L BUFFER AMP vco VCO FEEDBACK FEEDBACK BUFFER 2 1 MHZ REFERENCE
194. Cable TKN8731A WIM Cable CLN6816A RFI Suppressor CLN6816A RFI Suppressor C831AA Card Cage C831AA Card Cage TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket X249AW RF Cabling X249AW RF Cabling TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable TRN7663A AC Line Cord TRN7663A AC Line Cord X163AD Blank Panels X163AD Blank Panels TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware X430AA 12 Cabinet X430AA 12 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet TTN5040A Grommet TTN5040A Grommet X362AA Packing X362AA Packing TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet X436AJ Instruction Manual X436AJ Instruction Manual 68P81095E05 Quantar Station Functional Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual
195. DC TLN3377A ASTRO Modem Card TLN3265A 9 1 00 68 81095 05 XXV GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of the equipment described in this manual The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers of which we are aware You should follow these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe operation of the equipment in your operating environment General Safety Precautions Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in this manual be fore installing servicing or operating the equipment Retain these safety instructions for future reference Also all applicable safety procedures such as Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA requirements National Electrical Code NEC requirements local code requirements safe working practic es and good judgement must be used by personnel Refer to appropriate section of the product service manual for additional pertinent safety information Because of danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform any unautho rized modifications of equipment Identify maintenance actions that require two people to perform the repair Two people are required when repair has the risk of injury that would require one person to perform first aid or call for em
196. Dn Arrow Keys To Select Repeater Operation Repeater Operation Max Deviation Low Speed Deviation 17 0 Antenna Relay ENABLED Antenna Relay Delay 30 msec Call Sign Interval 15 min Startup On Last Active Channel DISABLED Startup Channel 1 ASTRO Fade Tolerance 3 FRAMES Sotto REPEATER ASTRO RDLAP Repeat DISABLED Wireline Drop Out Delay 0 sec ASTRO TX Filter WIDE PULSE ANALOG Simulcast Reverse Burst INTERNAL Securenet Rx Code Detect Fade Timer 80 msec Fade EOM Timer 80 msec REPEATER 92 Fast Key Up DISABLED Figure 5 M aking Repeater Operation RSS Setting continued on next page gt 68 81096 11 12 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products Step 5 Access the Multi Coded Squelch screen enter the desired number of users then set the secondary PL s User Access field to GATED as shown in Figure 6 Refer to the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for details on setting up users in the Multi Coded Squelch screen MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE BASE STATION PRODUCTS Use Up Dn Arrows To Move Press F5 To VER XX XX XX Add Or Modify Entry MAIN CHANGE VIEW VIEW CODEPLUG MCS Station Date MM DD YYYY Station Time HH MM SS Modify Entry 2 Tx User Type Freq Code Access Type Freq Code r 1 PL 1035 1 ENABLE Rx PL 1273 BE PL 1273 3A GATED PL 127 3 3A User Access GATED F1 F2 P
197. Dual 6 14 2 V 14 2 V 1 Amp if no connection to Connector 17 pin 33 Circulator Module 7 Spare Spare 7 EXT WM Ref Ground reference for External Wattmeter 8 5V 5 V dc 1 Amp if no connection to Connector 17 8 8 EXT WM Vr DC voltage proportional to External Wattmeter reflected power 9 Spare Not Used 9 EXT WM Vf DC voltage proportional to External Wattmeter forward power 10 GND Station Ground 10 GND Station Ground CONNECTOR 23 ANTENNA RELAY CONNECTOR 22 Pin Signal Input Output Function ETHERNET PORT Accepts 10 5 2 coaxial cable via T connector for 1 GND Station GND connections to an ntelliRepeater Ethernet network or to 2 ANT RLY KEYED A Switched 14 2 V to energize antenna relay download software via a locally connected PC running RSS 3 GND Station Gnd L CONNECTOR 15 MULTI PURPOSE RS 232 CONNECTOR 5 Pin Signal Input Output Function 1 Shield Gnd Station Ground AC INPUT 2 TxD3 Transmit Data Connects to 110V 220V AC source 3 RxD3 Receive Data via 3 wire line cord 4 RTS3 Request to Send 5 CTS3 Clear to Send 6 DSR3 Data Set Ready Signal Ground Station Ground 8 DCD3 Data Carrier Detect 9 OPEN 10 OPEN 11 OPEN 12 OPEN Q 13 Local Loopback 3 Not Used 14 OPEN CONNECTOR 24 BATTERY TEMPERATURE OPEN sal cis 17 RCLK Receive Clock Pi
198. E Duplexer modules shipped with stations are tuned at the factory If a duplexer must be replaced in the field the unit must be installed and tuned specifically to the transmit and receive frequency pair for the particular station Field Tuning Overview Note This tuning procedure is valid for chan nels with a bandwidth of 200 kHz or less If bandwidth is more than 200 kHz the duplexer must be tuned by the service depot Required Test Equipment The duplexer module is comprised of three low pass high notch ca vities and three high pass low notch cavities Each set of three cavi ties provides bandpass filtering for either the transmit rf signal or the receive rf signal In general the duplexer must be tuned so that the transmit cavity set passes the transmit signal and rejects the receive signal concurrently the receive cavity set must be tuned to pass the receive signal and reject the transmit signal Tuning is performed by injecting rf signals and making tuning adjust ments using the tuning rods and trimmer screws while monitoring for maximum or minimum readings on the rf millivoltmeter Field tuning the duplexer module requires the following general adjustments e Tune high pass low notch cavities for maximum pass and re ject response e Tune low pass high notch cavities for maximum pass and re ject response e Check high pass low notch and low pass high notch cavi ties for insert
199. E HEN RATER EPA CHENG Ede page 1 Inputs Outpuls i923 V Edu Bal EXE eu dE LES page 2 Functional Theory of Operation page 3 RA RT CONFIGURATION TRC CONTROL 68P81090E98 OVervIeW obicere ieu poe Pawan HUE RN EU D ax page 1 Electrical Connections RF Link page 2 Console to Station 1 Wiring Connections page 2 Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections page 3 Electrical Connections Microwave page 4 Console to Microwave Station 1 Wiring Connections page 4 Microwave Station 2 to Station Wiring Connections page 5 RSS Programmiihg e e Eee eden ua A den paci aR page 6 TX Wireline Alignment page 7 Station 1 TX Wireline Alignment page 7 Station 2 TX Wireline Alignment page 7 Station 3 TX Wireline page 8 RA RT CONFIGURATION M Keying 68P81090E99 OVervIeW z nia
200. EAT SINK Figure 2 Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Triple Circulator Option 68 81090 86 9 1 00 Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz Stations Functional Manuals THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68 81090 86 9h M MOTOROLA DUPLEXER MODULE Options X182AA 132 146 MHz X182AB 144 160 MHz X182AJ 158 174 MHz DESCRIPTION Options 182AA AB AJ provide band dependent duplexer modules for use with Quantar VHF stations This sec tion provides a general description identification of adjustments and inputs outputs performance specifications and a typical mounting location detail While the duplexer module is considered non repairable tuning screws are provided for field tuning should replacement become necessary due to module failure or if retuning is neces sary due to a change in operating channels A single channel field tuning procedure is provided in this section General Description The duplexer module shown in Figure 1 allows a transmit and re ceive channel pair to share a common TX RX antenna Each duplexer module consists of six resonant cavities three for transmit and three for receive contained in a temperature compensated copper enclo sure designed to mount in a standard EIA 19 equipment rack Each set of three cavities is designed and tuned to pass the respective transmit or receive channel frequency or bandwidths while providing maximum TX noise suppression at
201. ELS TLD3110A 25W 132 174 MHz TLD3101A 125W 132 154 MHz TLD3102A 125W 150 174 MHz 1 DESCRIPTION The Models TLD3110 and TLD3101 TLD3102 Power Amplifier Modules are described in this section A general description identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs functional block diagrams and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional un derstanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Main tenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The Power Amplifier Module PA accepts a low level modulated rf signal from the Exciter Module and amplifies the signal for transmission via the site transmit antenna The output power is continually monitored and regulated by a feedback and control loop with a power output control voltage being generated by the transmitter control circuitry located in the Exciter Module The Models TLD3110 and TLD3101 TLD3102 PA Modules are very similar in design and function with the major differences being the output power capabilities and operating frequency range Unless otherwise noted the in formation provided in this section applies to all three models Overview of Circuitry The PA contains the following circuitry Intermediate Power Ampl
202. ENABLED Status Tone Frequency 2175 kHz Wireline Squelch DISABLED Rx Securenet ASTRO To Wireline ENABLED Equalization DISABLED Step 3 Access the 6809 Trunking Interface Screen Step 4 Setthe Modulation Type to ASTRO or ANALOG MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE BASE STATION PRODUCTS VER XX XX XX CHANGE VIEW 6809 TRUNKING RSTAT Mode Normal Failsoft DISABLED Line TRC Encode DISABLED Failsoft Carrier Squelch DISABLED Dual CT Failsoft Only DISABLED Modulation Type ASTRO Trunking Tickle Source TX DATA LINE Trunking Tickle Source TOT 1 sec CSC Logical Channel Number 1 Rx Discriminator Type QUANTAR MICOR continued on next page Quantar Quantro Station Products External Mode continued Trunked SMARTZONE or SMARTNET ASTRO CAI VSELP continued Step 5 Connect a wire to pin 11 and pin 16 of System Connector 17 located on the station backplane To activate FBICR mode an external circuit customer provided must ground these pins CONNECTOR Note When pins 11 and 16 are grounded the station will enter FBICR operation The station will ig nore any wireline transmit activity ignore the EXT PTT line and assert the TSTAT line While in FBICR mode the station will transmit Fail soft beeps and the subscriber will give the Failsoft indication End of Procedure 9 1 0 68P81095E96 O 7 15 99 M MOTOROLA MAIN STANDBY CONFIGU
203. F R1 R2 UHF R1 R2 R4 and 800 MHz one VCO generates signals in the upper half of the band while the other VCO generates signals in the lower half of the band Only one VCO is active at a time Selection of the active VCO is provided by a BANDSHIFT signal from the PLL IC The active VCO responds to the dc control voltage and generates the appropriate rf signal This signal is fed through impedance matching amplification and filtering and is output to the RF Switch Circuitry A sample of the output is returned to the PLL IC to serve as a VCO feed back signal 68P81086E24 E 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry Continued RF Switch Circuitry Microprocessor Circuitry Modulation The active VCO receives an audio data modulation signal from the Sta tion Control Module via two low pass filters This modulation signal modulates the active VCO to produce a modulated low level rf carrier signal Low frequency modulation signals below the loop filter corner tend to be interpreted by the PLL as VCO frequency error A modulation compensation signal is added to the PLL control voltage to cancel out this effect and allow for low frequency modulation The modulated rf signal from the VCO is fed through an attenuator to an rf switch circuit Signal TX ENABLE from the microprocessor con trols the switch The rf signal is output to a mini UHF connector mounted in a rece
204. F 2 1 MHZ REF REFERENCE Bi OSCILLATOR TRANSMIT VCO amp REF MOD AUDIO ANTENNA r 45V is o N SWITCHING REGULATOR CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY 14 2V TX FORWARD POWER DETECT 7 28V EXCITER MODULE POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE POWER CONTROL VOLTAGE TX gt PA KEY POWER CONTROL Y Y SPI BUS gt CIRCUITRY TO FROM lt gt A MICROPROCESSOR E CIRCULATOR STATION CONTROL Rs INTERMEDIATE FINAL HARMONIC POWER AMPLIFIER C gt gt 8 FILTER gt lt gt AMPLIFIER SAAT VIH 100 110 125 W ONLY PA ONLY 50 OHM LOAD VCO amp REF MOD AUDIO Ons iS AE MODULATED RF SYNTHESIZER SWITCH gt lt C3 gt gt 2 1 MHZ REF CIRCUITRY gt 13 DBM Figure 3 Quantar Station Functional Block Diagram 9 1 00 68P81096E56 A 11 M MOTOROLA INSTALLATION For Quantar Stations and Ancillary Equipment VHF UHF 800 MHz and 900 MHz Contents 1 Pre Installation Considerations 2 3 Electrical Connections 28 Installation Overview 2 Power Supply Connections 28 Environmental Conditions at Intended Site 3 AC Input Power Connection 28 Equipment Ventilation 3 DC Input Power Connection MUS awas Move gti arte OY ae 29 AC Input Power Requirements 4 Ground Connection 30 Equipment Mountin
205. GPS1PPS gt INPUT A STATION REFERENCE CIRCUITRY APPS e Gr 1 PPS DRIVER 2 1 MHZ REF CIRCUITRY MODULE ZAME 2 1 MHZ FROM PES ASIC VIA BACKPLANE OUT SPLITTER gt 2 1 MHZ REF TO RECEIVER MODULE A ae 1 VIA BACKPLANE 5 10 BUFFER INPUT LD WAVESHAPING 10 MHZ AMPLIFIER TIMING CIRCUITRY 5 10 MHZ REF gt 5 OSCin SPI BUS LOOP P O RIBBON CABLE 3 E 1 ED BOARD P14 SPI BUS HIGH 16 8 MHZ TO ASIC STABILITY VCO ERON 3 PENDULUM 21 CONTROL VOLTAGE Lt gt ENABLE SWITCH INPUT CONTROL VOLTAGE gt lt V DOK FREQUENCY NET ENABLE s SPI BUS CLN1614A Station Control Module P O RIBBON CABLE popes HANDSET Pt AUDIO INTERFACE CIRCUITRY MICROPHONE LOCATED ON P14 LED BOARD 2 1 1 MIC AUDIO P O gt LOCAL AUDIO ASIC RIBBON CABLE 0301 P1 LOCATED ON E zm LED BOARD E
206. High Band Range 2 CLD1270A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CLD1280A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X333AA Receiver Module VHF High Band Range 1 X333AB Receiver Module VHF High Band Range 2 CLD1250A Receiver Module Board Preselector Hardware CLD1260A Receiver Module Board Preselector Hardware CLN7334A Receiver Module Front Panel CLN7334A Receiver Module Front Panel TRN7799A VHF UHF Tuning Kit TRN7799A VHF UHF Tuning Kit CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X43AA Power Supply Assembly X43AA Power Supply Assembly CPN1047A 625W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CPN1047A 625W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor 6086 Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector CPN6086A Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC III X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC III CLN1614A Station Control Module CLN1614A Station Control Module TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker Options Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Options Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Internally Added Internally Added by Motorola X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module by Motoro
207. ION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the receiver circuitry at a functional level The informa tion is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the receiver module Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry Introduction The synthesizer and VCO circuitry generate the 1st LO injection signal for the 1st mixer in the receiver front end circuitry Functional operation of these circuits is as follows Phase Locked Loop The phase locked loop PLL IC receives frequency selection data from the Station Control Module microprocessor Once programmed the PLL IC compares a 2 1 MHz reference signal from the Station Con trol Module with a feedback sample of the VCO output Depending on whether the feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2 1 MHz reference correction pulses are generated The width of these correction pulses is dependent on the amount of difference between the 2 1 MHz reference and the VCO feedback The up down pulses from the PLL IC are fed to a charge pump which outputs a dc voltage proportional to the pulse widths This dc voltage is then low pass filtered and fed to the VCO as the CONTROL VOLT AGE Note that if a frequency change is requested by the microproces sor the low pass loop filter is momenta
208. ITOR 9 9 v ay 0 TO STATION RECEIVE ANTENNA CONNECTOR Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 OSCILLOSCOPE INPUT STATION CONTROL MODULE x FRONT PANEL 2 i ii RJ 11 TO BNC i TEST CABLE E MOTOROLA PART NO i 2 AVAILABLE FROM ee MOTOROLA WASPD B 11 e Use Volume Up button increase volume maximum Measure the audio level using the R2001 e Audio level should measure approximately 75 to 1 5 V p p If not suspect faulty SCM Change R2001 injection signal level to VHF 25 uV 119 dBm UHF 35 uV 116 dBm 800 900 30 uV 117 5 dBm Measure the receiver SINAD The value should read 12 dB or greater If not tune the preselector VHF and UHF only and recheck SINAD If 12 dB SINAD cannot be achieved replace the Receiver Module This completes the Verifying Receiver Circuitry test pro cedure If all displays and measurements are correct the receiver circuitry may be considered to be operating properly Remove test equipment restore the station to normal service and return to the troubleshooting flow chart to resume troubleshooting sequence 16 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Verifying Receiver Circuitry Digital Only Stations IMPORTANT Performing this procedure requires that the station be taken out of service It is rec ommended that unless the station
209. Input Line 3 4 Line 4 Customer 4 wire Phone Line Output Line 4 5 Aux TX Audio Input from external device 6 Open Open 7 GND Station Ground 8 5 VDC Out 5V from Power Supply 1 Amp 9 Gen TX Data Modulation signal from Simulcast equipment Note 1 10 PL In Future Use 11 Aux In 1 Ext Failsoft Customer defined transistor buffered Input Note 1 12 Aux In 2 TX Inhibit Customer defined transistor buffered Input Note 1 13 Aux In 3 Ext TX Code Det 22 Customer defined transistor buffered Input Note 1 14 Aux In 4 RX WL Inhibit d Customer defined transistor buffered Input Note 1 15 Aux In 5 Duplex Enable pet Customer defined transistor buffered Input Note 1 16 Aux In 6 In Cabinet Repeat Customer defined transistor buffered Inpu Note 1 17 Aux In 7 Channel 4 Customer defined transistor buffered Input Note 1 18 Aux Out 7 RD Stat contact of Relay Note 1 19 Aux Out 8 contact of Relay 20 Aux Out 9 contact of Relay 21 Aux Out 10 pt N O contact of Relay D 22 Aux In 9 Ext PTT Dd Opto isolated customer defined input Opto A 23 Aux In 10 Channel 1 22 Opto isolated customer defined input Opto B 24 Aux In 11 Chanel 2 154 Opto isolated customer defined input Opto C 25 Aux In 12 Channel 3 Opto isolated customer defined input Opto D 26 Line 1 Customer 4 wire Phone Line Input Line
210. LN6955 OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR CLN6955 CLN6957 CLN6955 CLN6957 ON ON STATION BACKPLANE 4 WIRE CIRCUIT 1 STATION BACKPLANE AND LINE 2 AUDIO LINE 1 AUDIO gt gt 2 WIRE CIRCUIT lt FROM STATION TO LANDLINE FROM LANDLINE L 4 5 gt INCLUDES VARIABLE GAIN STAGES BUFFERS LINE DRIVERS lt OR L FROM LANDLINE TO STATION 2 WIRE CANCELLATION CIRCUITRY AND A D amp D A CONVERTERS AND FROM STATION TO LANDLINE vy 2 WIRE MISCELLANEOUS LINE ee INPUTS amp OUTPUTS DC REMOTE Y Y DETECTION CIRCUITRY _ tc a z 1 a lt y OPTO ISOLATED P INTERPROCESSOR 5 INPUT COMMUNICATIONS 9 oo SERIAL DATA BUS BUS TO FROM SC el E IE e ASTRO HDLC HDLC 7 MICROPROCESSOR 8 7 9 3 MODEM INTERFACE nl IN g TRANSISTOR gt CIRCUITRY STATION CONTROL sa COUPLED MODULE INPUTS e me y ero WIRELINE FAIL 1 cc 4 WIRELINE ON ul o 2 gt N O RELAY lt OUTPUT n a o xu OO PCM VOICE DATA B 2 m e EE ADDRESS LINES AND DATA ADDRESS BUS 128K X8 4 PERIPHERAL gt H TO FROM COUPLED 9 ASIC STATION CONTROL z A MODULE OUTPUTS VIA TDM BUS MICROPROCESSOR 128K X 8 DC REMOTE gt LNE2AUDO DETECTION 2 y FROM CIRCUITRY FLASH 50 PIN CONNECTOR
211. LS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the power supply module controls indicators and all input and output external connections POWER SUPPLY MODULE FRONT PANEL MODULE FAIL LED ON OFF SWITCH FRONT VIEW CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE DC INPUT CONNECTOR Figure 1 Power Supply Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 4 68 81085 12 9 1 00 TRN7802A TRN7803A Power Supply Modules n FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the power supply circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the power supply module Input Conditioning Circuitry Introduction The power supply module accepts dc power from an external source typically a bank of storage batteries DC power is connected to the module via a 4 wire dc input cable mounted on the satellite receiver or station backplane Transient and EMI Protection The dc input is fed to the power supply module circuitry via transient protection and EMI filter circuits The transient protection devices pro vide protection against voltage spikes by providing an effective short to ground under high voltage transient conditions The EMI filter pre vents elect
212. L_DIAG T gt ZI z MAIN SD SEC FAN FAULT DELAY P gt 2 5V_SEC DETECT FAN_FAIL_DIAG gt FAN_ON_DIAG gt BATT_T_DIAG BATT_T_DIAG FROM ae BATTERY BATT_CH_V_DIAG BATT_CH_V_DIAG CHARGER REVERT AID S SPI BUS CONVERTER AC GOOD DIAG AC GOOD DIAG gt gt 14V 14V L 1 14V_DIAG 14V_DIAG L 5V DIAG 5V DIAG gt gt 10V_SEC THERMISTOR MOUNTED ON HEATSINK MAIN_SD_SEC ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY HEATSINK TEMP DETECT CIRCUITRY HEATSINK_DIAG ADDRESS BUS FROM ADDRESS A STATION DECODE ENABLE ENABLE CONTROL CIRCUITRY gt BOARD 9 Figure 3 9 SPI BUS TO FROM STATION CONTROL MODULE CPN6079B DC to DC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram 2 of 2 11 15 99 68 81096 09 21 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual CHARGER SUPPLY CIRCUITRY D CARD EDGE CONNECTOR 14V_RAW eee m Kua UT CONVERTER SWITCH U FET SWITCHES BOARD m BOOST FET SWITCH V FET 7 DRIVER Z CHARGER OUTPUT CONTROL CIRCUITRY 5 lt y BATTERY BATTERY REVERT PATH TEMPERATURE BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR CIRCUITRY THERMISTOR A A BACKPLANE STORAGE BATTERY 133 KHZ JUL PULSE SYNC_SEC WIDTH FROM BUFFER MODULATOR 133 KHZ DC TO DC DRIVER DRIVER CONVERTER BOARD LEGEND T BATTERY CHARGE PATH LZ ee NP BATTERY REVERT PATH BATTERY REVERT
213. Line 4 Audio Both 4 wire circuits operate identically as follows Landline to Station balanced audio is input to the primary of an audio transformer The signal is induced into the transformer secondary and fed to a buffer through jumper JU1010 placed in the 4 wire position as shown below Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the pri mary and secondary coils provides for selectable impedance match ing Refer to the illustration below for impedance setting information The buffer output is fed to the gain adjust circuitry Under control of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides eight levels of gain adjust 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 and 40dB The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to an A D converter which digitizes the audio signal into a PCM output This output is fed serially to the PASIC which places the data in the proper TDM timeslot as in structed by the microprocessor in the Station Control Module and out put to the SCM on the TDM Bus Station to Landline audio is input to the PASIC in the form of PCM data on the TDM bus The PASIC extracts the data and feeds it to a D A con verter which takes the PCM data and converts it to an analog audio sig nal The audio signal is fed to the gain adjust circuitry Under control of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain ad just OdB 6dB 12dB and 18dB The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed thru a 2 pole lo
214. Low Pass Filter TYD4010A Low Pass Filter TRN7796A Fan Peripheral Tray TRN7796A Cooling Fan X676AB Add Triple Circulator 144 160 MHz X676AR Add Triple Circulator 900 MHz Same as X676AA except substitute TYD4002A Dual Circulator TLF7330A Dual Circulator TLN3391A 50 Ohm Load with Heat Sink X676AC Add Triple Circulator 158 174 MHz TLF7340A Low Pass Filter Same as X676AA except substitute TYD4003A Dual Circulator TRN7796A Fan Peripheral Tray Add Internal Ultra High Stability Oscillator CLN7012A BNC Terminator CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CLN1477A UHSO Module TTN5070C Board TTN5071A UHSO Housing and Front Panel TTN5072A 5 PPB Ovenized Element i Add Peripheral Tray Peripheral TRN7751A Quantar Peripheral Shelf Tray HSN1000 External Speaker TRN7738A External Speaker Hardware bracket and cable Miscellaneous HMN1001A Microphone Note that the external speaker and microphone are not options and must be ordered as line items on the STIC 1 order form 9 1 00 68P81095E05 B xxiii Product Maintenance Philosophy Scope of Manual FOREWORD Due to the high percentage of surface mount components and multi layer circuit boards the maintenance philosophy for this prod uct is one of Field Replaceable Unit FRU substitution The station is comprised of self contained modules FRUs which when determined to be faulty may be quickly and easily replaced with a known good module to b
215. M module 1M x 32 for CLN6960A 512k x 32 for CLN6961A The FLASH SIMM is accessed by the Host uP via the 28 line Host Buffered Address Bus and the 32 line Host Buffered Data Bus Codeplug EEPROM The data which determines the station personality resides in an 8K x 8 codeplug EEPROM Stations are shipped from the factory with generic default data programmed into the codeplug EEPROM Field program ming is performed during installation using the Radio Service Software RSS program to enter additional customer specific data such as site output power time out timer settings etc Each SCM contains a DRAM SIMM into which the station software code is downloaded and run The DRAM also provides short term storage for data generated required during normal operation Read and write operations are performed using the Host Buffered Address and Host Buffered Data buses The DRAM memory locations are sequentially refreshed by the column and row signals from the Host uP 68P81094E76 A 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products External Line Interface Circuitry IntelliRepeater DLAN Network Port A DLAN port is provided on the station backplane to allow the station to connect into the local network of an IntelliRepeater trunking site This DLAN port is provided by Host uP serial communication bus SCC2 SCC2 communicates with an RS 485 bus transceiver which provides DLAN and DLAN signals These signals are connected to a 9
216. Module 9 Accepts plug in Exciter Module 10 Accepts plug in Power Supply Module 11 Accepts plug in Power Amplifier Module 12 Not used 13 Not used 14 Provides interface for 6809 Trunking Controller and future MRTI Interface 15 Accepts TSC CSC Link cable from 6809 Trunking Controller 16 Not used 17 50 Telco System Connector accepts customer phone line connections access to customer defined inputs outputs Simulcast inputs etc connector located on backplane at rear of station 18 Provides dc power to external fan module for early model EPIC Station Control Modules limited production 19 DLAN1 DB 9 connector used in IntelliRepeater applications to form network between multiple stations connector located on backplane at rear of station mates with DB 9 to dual RJ11 PhoneNET adapter module see note above 20 EIA 232 asynchronous port used for connection to SMARTZ ONE controller wide area IntelliRepeater trunking system or for alternate RSS port in a non I ntelliRepeater trunking system 21 1 PPS input from GPS Receiver for ASTRO Simulcast systems 22 BNC connector which allows connection to an IntelliRepeater Ethernet network via a 1OBASE 2 coaxial Tconnector Also may be used to locally connect PC running RSS to download software to FLASH memory in Station Control Module 23 Antenna Relay 3 pin AMP type connector used to supply control signal to antenna relay module connector located on backplane
217. N TX DATA and on backplane 3 Lines 3 and 4 can be used with the Enhanced WildCard Option for customer specific applications in analog stations only The optional 8 wire Wireline Interface Module is required 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 49 Quantar Station Functional Manual Connecting V 24 Board Note Connecting to local DIU or ASTRO TAC Comparator requires a null modem cable and programming the station for Inter nal Clock Generation refer to the RSS User s Guide for details For Quantar Quantro Conventional stations hybrid links and SMARTZONE Trunking stations V 24 required connections to from the station are made using a V 24 Interface Board installed on the Wireline Interface Board This board Option X889AC allows connections to be made between external V 24 modem equipment and the station via an RJ 45 connector accessible on the front panel as shown below Make the connections and DIP Switch settings as shown in Figure 27 Note The cable connected to the V24 RJ 45 connector must a ferrite RFI suppressor installed This dor sialon applications suppressor is supplied by Motorola with each station and must be installed as shown below CONNECT TO RJ 45 CONNECTOR ON STATION CONTROL MODULE FRONT PANEL LESS THAN 1 INCH FERRITE RFI SUPPRESSOR 101 DIP Switch Settings Local Conn
218. N7334A Receiver Module Front Panel TRN7799A VHF UHF Tuning Kit TRN7799A VHF UHF Tuning Kit CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X43AA Power Supply Assembly X43AA Power Supply Assembly CPN1047A 625W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CPN1047A 625W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor 6086 Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector 6086 Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC III X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC III CLN1614A Station Control Module CLN1614A Station Control Module TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker Options Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Options Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Internally Added Internally Added by Motorola X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module by Motorola X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Processing CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 Processing CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFl Screws 2 X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board TKN8731A WIM
219. NTENNA FILTER INJECTION FILTER ADDRESS DECODE amp A D CONVERTER CIRCUITRY 1STLO VCO FEEDBACK CUSTOM 5 INJECTION RECEIVER AMPLIFIER C Y IC gt 77 A CIRCUITRY AO amp A1 CHIP 73 35 MHZ DIFF uj 1ST LO INPUT DE A DECODE gt CHIP TO CIRCUITRY SELECT STATION ADDRESS P O CONTROL BUS REGULATOR P2802 MODULE FROM STATION VARIOUS CIRCUITRY CONTROL SIGNALS AID S CUSTOM SYNTH MODULE FROM CONVERTER REGULATOR DIGITAL gt 78 N BOARD RECEIVER BOARD 5V SOURCE SELECT TO BE MONITORED DERS J DECODE E 14 2V 10V 10V 2 5 CIRCUITRY FROM 9 negutAron 4 BACKPLANE SOURCE CUSTOM CUSTOM DRIVER 5V RECEIVER SPI BUS ANALOG CIRCUITRY TO FROM SPI BUS CLOCK amp DATA SPIBUS CLOCK amp DATAJ REGULATOR 45V IC gt SOURCE STATION te CONTROL MODULE FILTER 5 CIRCUITRY Y SERIAL BUS SYNTHESIZER CHIP h l TO FROM SELECT CIRCUITRY CONTROL 14 4 MHZ MODULE TIMING gt CIRCUITRY 10V 8 2ND LO Y VCO P O PHASE FREQUENCY E 1 CIRCUITRY LOCKED CHANGE SUPER P2801 LOOP FILTER BYPASS FILTER IC ANALOG SWITCHES 2 1 MHZ 2 1 MHZ REF 65 BUFFER Rin FROM 2 1 MHZ SCM REFERENCE 9 1 V Y UE lt CHARGE LO PASS CONTROL VOLTAGE PUMP c LOOP gt gt OSCILLATOR gt IMPEDANCE gt DOWN FILTER 2 5 TO 7 5 V DC BUFFER MATCHING vco AMP FEEDBACK 1 gt Fin Y VCO FEEDBACK _ FEEDBACK lt E BUFFER
220. NVERTERS 50 TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6956 OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR CLN6956 CLN6958 ON STATION BACKPLANE Figure 2 9 1 00 68 81094 78 LINE 4 AUDIO gt gt C FROM STATION gt TO LANDLINE CLN6956A CLN6958A Wireline Interface Board Functional Block Diagram Quantar and Quantro Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68P81094E78 A 9 1 00 CLN6956A and CLN6958A Wireline Interface Boards Description of Audio Data Signal Paths Note Depending on local codes and or customer preference phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the screw terminal connector on the station backplane 2 wire audio connections are made at Line 2 Audio For systems using dc remote control set jumpers JU1008 and JU1009 as shown below for 2 wire applications WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD JU1008 JU1009 Four levels of gain adjustment are provided by circuitry on the WIB for Landline to Sta tion and Station to Landline audio paths Additional fine level adjustments are per formed in software in the Station Control Mod ule Note that a sample of the outbound signal is fed from one of the output transistors to the can cellation amplifier in the landline to station cir cuitry This signal is used to cancel the out
221. OF 16 STEPS STOPS AT STEP 0 IF LOCAL SPEAKER ON HOLD BUTTON IN FOR 2 SECONDS AND RELEASE TO LOWER VOLUME LEVEL ONE STEP AND TURN OFF LOCAL SPEAKER SQUELCH SELECT PUSHBUTTON USED TO SELECT BETWEEN PL CARRIER OR SQUELCH OFF WITH SQUELCH OFF EACH DEPRESSION OF PUSHBUTTON SELECTS SQUELCH IN FOLLOWING SEQUENCE C OFF gt CARRIER gt PL 3 _ INTERCOM PUSHBUTTON USED TO TOGGLE INTERCOM MODE WHEN INTERCOM MODE ENABLED TECHNICIAN AT SITE AND REMOTE CONSOLE OPERATOR MAY COMMUNICATE IN AN INTERCOM FASHION USING MICROPHONE HANDSET WITH PTT BUTTON NEITHER PARTY S AUDIO IS TRANSMITTED OVER THE AIR DESCRIPTION OF SPECIAL FUNCTIONS PUSHBUTTON COMBINATION FUNCTION STATION RESET PERFORMS WARM STATION RESET TAKES APPROXIMATELY VOLUME UP VOLUME DOWN amp INTERCOM 10 20 SECONDS TOGGLE TX KEY KEYS DEKEYS STATION TRANSMITTER WITHOUT PL NOTE THAT TX KEY TIMES OUT AFTER APPROXIMATELY 2 MINUTES INTERCOM amp VOLUME UP NOTE ACCESS DISABLE SELECT TOGGLES AC CESS DISABLE MODE WHEN IN ACCESS INTERCOM amp VOLUME DOWN DISABLE STATION MAY BE KEYED ONLY BY NOTE LOCAL MICROPHONE HANDSET INTERCOM amp VOLUME UP BUTTONS OR BY APPROPRI ATE FUNCTION KEY FROM RSS NOTE USE THE INTERCOM BUTTON AS A SHIFT KEY TO PERFORM MULTIPLE PUSH BUTTON FUNCTIONS FOR EXAMPLE PRESS AND HOLD INTERCOM THEN PRESS VOL UME UP TO TOGGLE TX KEY FUNCTION USED TO CONNECT AN BM PC OR C
222. OG LOCAL SUPPLIES CIRCUITRY 28V_RAW FROM gt REGULATOR SHUTDOWN CIRCUITRY betono CONVERTER BOARD BATT_WATCHDOG WATCHDOG REGULATOR gt TIMER CIRCUITRY o OVLO_LCKOUT 4 gt MAIN_SD_SEC INVERTER gt gt FROM CIRCUITRY DC TO DC CONVERTER BOARD AC_FAIL Figure 4 CPN6074B Battery Charger Revert Board Functional Block Diagram 2 of 2 11 15 99 68P81095E88 A 23 M MOTOROLA POWER SUPPLY MODULE INCLUDES MODELS TRN7802A 210W 12 24V DC Input TRN7803A 210W 48 60V DC Input El DESCRIPTION The Models TRN7802A TRN7803A Power Supply Modules are described in this section A general description performance specifications identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the satellite receiver or station General Description The Model TRN7802A Power Supply Module accepts an input of either 12 V dc or 24 V dc while the Model TRN7803A Power Supply Module ac cepts an input of either 48 V dc or 60 V dc Each module generates 5V dc and 14 2V dc operating voltages to power the satellite receiv er or station module
223. OMPATIBLE PC RUNNING RSS SOFTWARE TO PERFORM STATION ALIGNMENT OPTIMIZATION AND DIAGNOSTICS REQUIRES NULL MODEM CABLE MOTOROLA PART NO 30 80369E31 EXTERNAL SPEAKER CONNECTOR RJ 11 USED TO CONNECT 6W EXTERNAL SPEAKER HSN1000 Figure 1 Switches Pushbuttons Connectors and LED Indicators for Quantar Station UHF Shown 9 1 00 68P81096E58 A 3 M MOTOROLA ROUTINE MAINTENANCE For Quantar and Quantro Station and Ancillary Equipment INTRODUCTION This section provides routine maintenance recommendations for the Quantar and Quantro station and associated ancillary equipment Routine Maintenance Overview The Quantar and Quantro station and ancillary equipment have been designed with state of the art technology and operate under soft ware control thus requiring minimal routine maintenance Virtually all station operating parameters are monitored and self corrected by the Station Control Module making virtually all periodic adjustments and tuning unnecessary Providing that the equipment is installed in an area which meets the specified environmental requirements see Pre Installation planning for environmental specifications the only routine maintenance task required is the calibration of the station reference oscillator circuit and the optional UHSO if installed The calibration procedure is provided in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Note If the station equipment is installed in a
224. ONS BUS INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATIONS BUS HDLC ETHERNET CIRCUITRY ETHERNET CONNECTOR 22 ON BACKPLANE ETHERNET a CONVERTER CIRCUITRY ISOLATED ETHERNET GROUND SCC4 SMC1 7 2 SMC2 2 25 MHZ CLOCK TIMING CIRCUITRY ADDRESS RESET DATA SPI BUS 3 gt POWER UP RESET CONTROLLER CIRCUITRY MANUAL RESET gt BUFFERS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS HOST ADDRESS BUS 7 HANDSHAKING SIGNALS P O I O PORTS PO OUT amp PO IN 2 HANDSHAKING SIGNALS P O I O PORTS PO OUT amp PO IN 2 HANDSHAKING SIGNALS P O I O PORTS PO OUT amp PO IN EXTERNAL LINE INTERFACE CIRCUITRY 6 CONNECTOR 15 MULTI PURPOSE RS 232 DB 25 CONNECTOR ON BACKPLANE DB 9 CONNECTOR ON BACKPLANE RSS PORT DB 9 CONNECTOR ON SCM FRONT PANEL SYNC EIA 232 BUS 12 RECEIVERS 7 DRIVERS 5 CONNECTOR 20 ASYNC EIA 232 BUS y RECEIVERS P O 7 ra DRIVERS RIBBON CABLE P1 Pi LOCATED ON LED BOARD 1 RSS EIA 232 BUS 7 Ps RECEIVERS J A lt gt DRIVERS HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS BUFFERS 2 HOST ADDRESS BUS HOST BUFFERED ADDRESS BUS HOST ADDRESS BUS SPI BUS
225. OP 10 000 Hz 68P81096E86 O 5 6 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products Aux RX Audio J17 Pin 30 The Aux RX Audio signal is an unbalanced output from an operational amplifier with an output impedance of less than 59 The output voltage range is 0 to 6 6V P P at 0 to 6 kHz The response curves for this signal are shown below Aux RX Audio Amplitude Response 5275 2 2dB DIV START 0 Hz STOP 10 000 Hz X 5275 Hz Aux RX Audio Phase Response ka ni esee Y 17 80 DEG START 0 Hz STOP 10 000 Hz X 7000 Hz 68P81096E86 O 6 1 00 Input Output Specifications for External Controllers Carrier Indication J17 Pins 18 and 43 PTT J17 Pins 22 and 47 The Carrier Indication and Carrier Indication signal provides a relay closure output as shown below If desired the WildCard Tables may be edited to provide the Carrier Indication signal on J17 Pin 38 as a transistor buffered output Refer to Editing WildCard Tables on page 7 for details 5V I J17 Pin 18 ms ie Carrier Indication a Carrier Indication 17 43 e 3 9K Typical Relay Closure Output Circuit The PTT and PTT signal provides an opto isolated input as shown below If desired the WildCard Tables may be edited to provide the PTT signal on J17 Pin 42 as a transistor buffered input Refe
226. OUANTAR QUANTRO Use UP DOWN Arrows to Change Fields Page 01 of 04 ACTION TABLES ACTION TABLE 06 ACTION TABLE 06 of xx ACTION ADDRESS TARG BIT POLARITY 01 MANIBIT 004C ENABLED ACTION WAIT TIME 02 WAIT 100 ACTION ADDRESS TARG BIT POLARITY 03 MANIBIT 004C DISABLED ACTION 04 ACTION 04 Setting Action Table 07 Repeater Knockdown MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE SAM with OUANTAR OUANTRO Use UP DOWN Arrows to Change Fields Page 01 of 04 ACTION TABLES ACTION TABLE 07 ACTION TABLE 07 of xx ACTION ADDRESS TARG BIT POLARITY 01 MANIBIT 004C DISABLED ACTION WAIT TIME 02 WAIT 100 ACTION ADDRESS TARG BIT POLARITY 03 MANIBIT 004C ENABLED ACTION 04 ACTION 04 Use arrow keys to toggle to 06 Program Actions 01 03 as shown Use arrow keys to toggle to 07 Program Actions 01 03 as shown Figure 4 Programming the Action Tables for Repeater Setup Knockdown 68 81096 11 12 15 99 13 Quantar Quantro Station Products Notes 1 4 68P81096E11 O 12 15 99 M moroRoLA INPUT OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXTERNAL CONTROLLERS For Quantar and Quantro Stations I OVERVIEW The Quantar and Quantro stations can be connected to external third party controllers to accommodate various system applications Connections between the station and the external controller equipment typically involve the follow
227. OUTPUT CONTROL CIRCUITRY 5 lt y BATTERY BATTERY REVERT PATH TEMPERATURE BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR CIRCUITRY THERMISTOR A A BACKPLANE STORAGE BATTERY 133 KHZ JUL PULSE SYNC_SEC WIDTH FROM BUFFER MODULATOR 133 KHZ DC TO DC DRIVER DRIVER CONVERTER BOARD LEGEND T BATTERY CHARGE PATH LZ ee NP BATTERY REVERT PATH BATTERY REVERT CIRCUITRY AC_FAIL FROM AC_FAIL EVERY DC TO DC TM FET CONVERTER BOARD SWITCHES Qe T UVLO DISABLE FET DRIVER BATT 12 24 BATTERY 12 24 SELECT RECOGNITION FROM DC TO DC CONVERTER BOARD Figure 4 607 Battery Charger Revert Board Functional Block Diagram 1 of 2 22 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 CPN1047A CPN1048APower Supply Modules FROM DC TO DC CONVERTER BOARD SPI BUS TO FROM STATION CONTROL MODULE CURRENT MODE CONTROLLER CIRCUITRY PWR_CUT VOLTAGE gt c SCALING e CIRCUITRY VA_OUT V_BC_RAW gt OPERATIONAL SCALED AMPLIFIER UE VOLT RANGE VOLTAGE ae gt SCALING e CIRCUITRY x gt VOLT SELECT REF gt I SENSE A SPI BUS INTERFACE CIRCUITRY VOLT RANGE BATT VOLT SELECT gt A SPI BUS D A CONVERTER UVLO_DISABLE 9 2 gt gt BATT_WATCHD
228. OWER FET SWITCH PULSE WIDTH DRIVER MODULATOR CPN6079B DC to DC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram 1 of 2 DRIVER D DRIVER lt POWER FETS gt POWER FETS CURRENT LIMIT DETECT CIRCUITRY BUFFER ISOLATION CIRCUITRY gt FILTER CIRCUITRY FILTER CIRCUITRY P O BACKPLANE CONNECTOR 14 VDC 14V DC TO STATION MODULES 22 VIA 23 BACKPLANE 14V FILTER CIRCUITRY 14 RAW gt VCC_SEC 14V_DIAG Ls 5V_DIAG 5V P O BACKPLANE CONNECTOR STATION MODULES VIA BACKPLANE MAIN_SD_SEC CPN1049A CPN1050BPower Supply Modules BATTERY CHARGER CONTROL CIRCUITRY STARTUP SHUTDOWN CONTROL CIRCUITRY VCC_PRI AC_GOOD_DIAG SHETDOWIT 5 j MAIN_SD_PRI 1 SECOND 1 n SHUTDOWN SOFT START y _ AC_FAIL BUFFER ISOLATION DELAY CIRCUITRY FROM CIRCUITRY BATTERY REVERT CIRCUITRY SHUTDOWN 2 AC TO DC T gt CONVERTER BATTERY BOARD CHARGER REVERT A BOARD VCC_PRI 1 SECOND EN STARTUP SHUTDOWN AC TO DC DELAY CONVERTER CIRCUITRY BOARD REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUITRY DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY 5V_REF 14V_RAW REGULATOR P 14V_RAW gt gt gt MOD_FAI
229. Overview The diagnostics circuitry consists of an 11 channel A D converter which converts analog status signals from critical points in the power supply module to digital format for transfer to the Station Control Mod ule via the SPI bus Most of the status signals are generated by detect circuits to indicate the status of dc supply voltages and references Temperature Monitor and Control Circuitry A thermistor mounted on the power supply module heatsink provides a varying resistance input to the Heatsink Temp Detect Circuitry If the heatsink temperature exceeds a preset limit the circuitry generates a MAIN_SD_SEC shutdown signal which shuts down the entire power supply module HEATSINK_DIAG signal is also sent to the Station Control Module via the A D converter and SPI bus Fan Monitor and Control Circuitry The cooling fan in the power supply module is powered from the 14V Supply Circuitry and runs continuously If the fan fails the Fan Fault De tect circuit generates a fail signal FAN_FAIL_DIAG which is fed to the A D converter The fail signal also triggers a 50 second delay circuit which after 50 seconds generates a MAIN SD SEC signal which shuts down the entire power supply The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Module to use the address bus to select either the D A converter Battery Charger Re vert Board or the A D converter Diagnostics Circuitry for communica tions via the SPI bus Typical communic
230. PA cur rent The dc voltage 1 is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filtering circuitry where it is used in calculating the cur rent being drawn by the IPA FPA current sense circuitry comprised of two differential amplifiers and two sensing resistors meters the current being drawn by the FPA side A and side B and outputs two dc signals directly proportional to the currents for side A and side B Circuit operation is described in the following paragraph In each of the current sense circuits a differential amplifier measures the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage di rectly proportional to the current through the resistor The dc voltages FPA I1 and FPA 11 is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filtering circuitry where it is used in calculating the cur rent being drawn by the FPA side A or side B 68 81086 23 9 1 00 TLD3110 and TLD3101 TLD3102 Power Amplifier Modules Sense and Detect Circuitry Continued PA Temperature Sense A thermistor and buffer circuit provides a dc voltage proportional to the PA temperature This signal PA TEMP is fed to the Exciter Module which monitors the signal and reduces the PA output power by reduc ing the dc power control voltage V CONT if the PA temperature ex ceeds set limits IPA DPA and FPA Detect Circuitry Detection circuits provide a dc voltage approximately proportional
231. Power Supply Modules THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 9 1 00 68P81085E12 B 9 Quantar Satellite Receiver and Station Products INPUT CONDITIONING CIRCUITR MAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRY MAIN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER FRONT PANEL eniz ON OFF SWITCH AND CIRCUIT BREAKER i MOD FAIL DONT FILTER POWER FET 12 24 V DC D Eo o px CIRCUITRY g SWITCHES m TRN7802A PROTECTION 48 60 V DC CIRCUITRY PROTECTION M 14 2V BULK CONNECTOR i x bus TRN7803A 14 2V DC DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY 4 142 VDC 5 FILTERING e A SATELLITE CIRCUITRY 14 2V OVERVOLTAGE OR 67 KHZ DETECT STATION MODULES oe s 23 ae Y BACKPLANE E CURRENT DETECT gt 12V STARTUP BIAS REF gt 0 12V STARTUP BIAS 14 2V BULK vec Y 5 V INVERTER CIRCUITRY P O vec 5 CIRCU BACKPLANE CONNECTOR SOFTSTART pulse
232. Procedure continued Software on Single FLASH SIMM Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 EEPROM U655 Install replacement Station Control Board by sliding board into cage and firmly seating the board card edge connectors into the backplane Do not slam the board against the backplane or push any harder than necessary to seat the connectors Replace the front panel by pressing it into place and re placing the two screws Be sure the 2 wire cable from the local speaker is connected to the 3 pin connector at the bottom front of the Station Control Board If the connector is not keyed earlier models you may connect the 3 pin connector in either polarity Restore power to the station Post Replacement Optimization Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Replacement Station Control Modules are shipped with default data programmed into the codeplug EEPROM lo cated on board After replacing a Station Control Board you must download codeplug data unique to the particu lar station to the replacement board codeplug Simply re trieve the file from your archive and follow the instructions in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for saving data to the codeplug Note that if no archive codeplug file ex ists you may copy a codeplug from another station at the site and save it to this station Important When the RSS prompts you to Cro
233. Q Help Accept Can F8 CLEAR ACCNTNG F9 Set to ENABLED for primary PLs Set to GATED for secondary PLs Enter Users Here Secondary PL allowing non Local Subscribers to use repeater in emergency situations Primary PL for Local Users Figure 6 Entering Users and Setting to Gated 68 81096 11 12 15 99 Dual Control of Repeater Access Via TRC and SAM Step 6 Access the TRC Commands screen and program tones FT3 FT6 as shown in Figure 7 Refer to the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for details on programming the tones MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Enter Command or Use Tab Shift Tab BASE STATION PRODUCTS and Enter To Move Between Fields Page 1 of 3 VER XX XX XX MAIN CHANGE VIEWTRC COMMANDS Guard Tone MORE 2175 Hz FT1 2050 Hz MONITOR FT2 1950 Hz CHN 001 KEY FT3 1850 Hz RPT ON FT4 1750 Hz RPT OFF FT5 1650 Hz GATEACC ON MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Enter Command or Use Tab Shift Tab BASE STATION PRODUCTS and Enter To Move Between Fields Page 2 of 3 VER XX XX XX MAIN CHANGE VIEWTRC COMMANDS FT6 1550 Hz GATEACC OFF FT7 1450 Hz FT8 1350 Hz FT9 1250 Hz FT10 1150 Hz Figure 7 Programming TRC Tones FT3 FT6 End of This Procedure 68 81096 11 7 12 15 99 Quant
234. Quantar station can operate in Motorola s most advanced wide area trunking systems SMARTZONE The station can operate both as a remote voice chan nel and if necessary perform all call processing and channel assign ment tasks normally requiring a trunking controller 68P81096E56 A 9 1 00 Description THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 68P81096E56 A 5 9 1 00 Quantar Station Functional Manual 2 STATION COMPONENTS Figure 2 shows the Quantar station modules and components UHF shown 6 68P81096E56 A 9 1 00 Description FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW POWER AMPLIFIER POWER SUPPLY MODULE MODULE EXCITER MODULE STATION TRANSMIT STATION RECEIVE OUTPUT INPUT 5 STATION CAGE BACKPLANE SHIELD WIRELINE INTERFACE BOARD BEHIND FRONT PANEL STATION CONTROL RECEIVER MODULE MODULE BATTERY REVERT CABLE KIT OPTIONAL AC LINE CORD Figure 2 Quantar Station Components Front and Rear Views UHF Shown 9 1 00 68P81096E56 A 7 Quantar Station Functional Manual 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following functional theory of operation provides an overview of the station circuitry For a more thorough func tional description of a particular module refer to the functional sections located behind the tab STATION MOD ULES Refer to the block diagram in Figure 3 for the following functional theory of operation Transmitter Circuitry O
235. R OPTION X154AA RF OUTPUT TO TRANSMIT ANTENNA MATES WITH gt CONNECTOR ON PERIPHERAL TRAY CABLING HARNESS THERMISTOR 50K 25 C HEAT SINK Figure 2 Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Dual Circulator Assembly 68 81086 4 9 1 00 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 68P81086E34 B 9 1 00 M TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION Options X676AN UHF R1 R2 X676AP UHF R3 R4 1 DESCRIPTION Options X676AN and X676AP provide a dual circulator assembly and low pass filter for use with the Quantar UHF station The triple circulator option is comprised of the dual circulator assembly combined with the single circulator located in the station power amplifier module This combination provides 65 dB min of isolation between the Power Amplifier Module and the transmit antenna A low pass filter connects between the dual circulator output and the transmit antenna This section provides a general description option matrix chart identification of inputs outputs and functional theory of operation The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The dual circulator assembly consists o
236. RATION For Quantar and Quantro Stations I OVERVIEW The Main Standby configuration allows two Quantar Quantro stations to operate as a redundant pair If the Main station should fail due to hardware or software malfunction the Standby station will immediately take over and provide service Each station s operating mode Main or Standby is determined by a setting made using the Radio Service Software RSS Please note the following requirements restrictions that are applicable to the Main Standby feature e Main Standby feature is compatible with stations in Conventional systems only e Main Standby feature is not compatible with ASTRO signaling e The station must be equipped with an 8 wire Wireline Interface Module and the Enhanced Wildcard Option Ine fado Commercial Government and All Rights Reed Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81095E89 O Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 2 15 99 UP Quantar Quantro Station Products 2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Install both stations designating one as A and the other as B as described in the appropriate functional base station manual Make the wiring connections as shown in Figure 2 to allow Main Standby operation Hint Wiring connections between the two stations and with external equipment will be facilitated by using a standard telephone punch block Figure 1 shows how to connect the stations and punch block STATION B STATION A PUNCH BLO
237. RATION CLN7060A Control Board The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CLN7060A Control Board circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 3 for a block diagram of the CLN7060A Control Board Host Microprocessor Overview The Host Microprocessor uP serves as the main controller for the SCM and station The uP an MC68EN360 running at a clock speed of 25 MHz controls the operation of the station as determined by the station software contained in a FLASH SIMM module and the station codeplug EEPROM Communications Buses The Host uP provides five general purpose serial communications buses as follows e SCC1 Used as Ethernet port for high speed communications either to allow station software to be downloaded from a local PC into the FLASH memory e SCC3 Used as the Interprocessor Communications Bus HDLC protocol to allow the Host uP to communicate with the Wireline Interface Board and other optional modules e SCC4 Used as RS 232 port for connections to external equipment such as a modem e SMC1 Used as RS 232 port for RSS communications 9 pin D type connector 20 on backplane e SMC2 Used as RS 232 port for RSS communications 9 pin D type connector located on SCM front pane
238. ROLLED BY CONSOLE EXTERNAL Y SOURCE MUST BE PROVIDED TO GENERATE MAIN STANDBY CONTROL STATION A SIGNAL AS FOLLOWS N O k TRANSMIT 3V STATION A MAIN STATION B STANDBY v COM GND STATION A STANDBY STATION B MAIN Ze Le 4 AUX OUT 9 RELAY CLOSURES ARE PROVIDED TO INDICATE A POWER AMP STATION B FAILURE IN THE RESPECTIVE STATION Pe TRANSMIT TO CONNECTOR __ XI 17 PIN 32 Figure 2 Wiring Connections for Main Standby Configuration 68 81095 89 3 2 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products SETTING WIRELINE IMPEDANCE JUMPERS Set the impedance jumpers on the Wireline Interface Modules in Stations A and B as described in Table 1 Figure 3 shows the location of the jumpers Table 1 Wireline Impedance Jumpering for Main Standby Operation STATION A STATION B 2 Wire Connection 4 Wire Connection 2 Wire Connection 4 Wire Connection to Console to Console to Console to Console Jumpers in position on ition 1 on All jumpers removed All jumpers removed p T1001 M high impedance high impedance on T1001 T1000 and T1001 Jumper JU1010 in Jumper JU1010 in Jumper JU1010 in Jumper JU1010 in 2 wire position 4 wire position 2 wire position 4 wire po
239. SCRIPTION Options X676AA AC provide band specific dual circulator assemblies and low pass filters for use with Quantar VHF station The triple circulator option is comprised of the dual circulator assembly combined with the single circulator located in the station power amplifier module This combination provides 65 dB min of isolation be tween the Power Amplifier Module and the transmit antenna A low pass filter connects between the dual circulator output and the transmit antenna This section provides a general description option matrix chart identification of inputs outputs and functional theory of operation The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The dual circulator assembly consists of two rf circulators and a 50 Q load with heat sink all mounted on a 3 16 aluminum plate which is housed in the Peripheral Tray The tray is equipped with a cooling fan which directs air across the fins of the heat sink The rf output from the Power Amplifier Module connects to the input of the assembly while the output connects to an external low pass filter The output of the filter connects to the transmit antenna directly via antenna relay module or
240. SIC interfaces with the second 4 wire circuit Each PASIC and its associated circuitry function to provide the follow ing signal paths e 4 wire voice audio from landline to station and from station to landline e 2 wire voice audio upper PASIC only from landline to station and from station to landline 9 6kbps ASTRO modem data from landline to station and from station to landline e 12kbps SECURENET modem data from landline to station and from station to landline Description of Audio Data Signal Paths provided later in this section contains block diagrams of each of the major signal paths along with an explanation of the signal flows DC Remote Detection The WIB contains circuitry to monitor the Line 1 Audio and Line 2 Audio input lines and detect dc control currents The detection outputs x12 5mA 5 5 mA 2 5 mA and 2 5 mA are dc voltages nomi nally either 7V or 5V which are fed to an A D converter The conver ter serves as a comparator and interprets the inputs as highs and lows The data is then sent serially to the microprocessor Miscellaneous Inputs Outputs The following inputs and outputs are provided on the WIB These lines may be assigned various functions according to customer specifica tions e Four 4 optically coupled inputs e Eight 8 transistor coupled inputs e Four 4 relay closure outputs normally open contacts e Six 6 transistor coupled outputs Simulcast Processing Ci
241. SPEAKER YW AUDIO STATION AUDIO LOCAL 4 AMPLIFIER SPEAKER TX VOICE DATA Ls LOCAL SPKR ENABLE 1 P O WO PORT P1 OUT TX WIDEBAND AUDIO 6809 MRTI INTERFACE CIRCUITRY LEVEL SHIFTER NAC UMS EURO MULTIPLEXER AMPLIFIER i TRANSIENT MRTI TX AUDIO D A gt gt pul HEU ibus lt 5 e NOT LINE DRIVER MRTI TX AUDIO gt PROTECTION gt CONVERTER 0 AMPLIFIER SELECT INES _ s RX AUDIO P O PORT P1 OUT 1 MRTI RX AUDIO a 2 LINE DRIVER LEVEL SHIFTER TO FROM acon EDAIA WAVESHAPING D AMPLIFIER BUFFER J14 ON vm E FILTERING CONVERTER BACKPLANE TXDATA 4 4 D A LO PASS FILTER z CONVERTER 6809 3 0 6 KHZ En RX AUDIO RX AUDIO DIGITAL MRTI RX AUDIO MRTI RX AUDIO POT 6809 RX AUDIO 4 ADJUST 2 SPI BUS SPI BUS Figure 2 vco io AUDIO EXCITER MODULE REF MOR AUDIO EXCITER MODULE CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Module Functional Block Diagram 4 of 5 9 1 00 68 81094 76 17 Quantar and Quantro Station Products SUPPLY VOLTAGES CIRCUITRY FILTER BASKEN CIRCUITRY FRONT PANEL LEDS AND SWITCHES LED CONTROL LINES P O I O PORT OUT A 14 2 V STATION STATION INTCM ACC D CONTROL 1 ACTIVE RX 2 RX FAIL AUX LED ON
242. SPI BUS gt CONTROLLER LOCAL SPKR ENABLE gt 2 5 BUS SELECT DIGITAL POT ADJUST P O I O PORT P1 OUT z gt gt L 1 Figure CLN7060A Station Control Board Functional Block Diagram 4 of 5 9 1 00 68 81096 87 19 Quantar and Quantro Station Products SUPPLY VOLTAGES CIRCUITRY 5 V k FILTER FROM BACKPLANE CIRCUITRY INPUT OUTPUT PORTS CIRCUITRY A 414 2 V 14 2 V FILTER 5V VCCA FROM CIRCUITRY REGULATOR ANALOG 5V VARIOUS CONTROL LINES BACKPLANE TO SCM amp STATION CIRCUITRY LATCHES Nus HOST 2 VARIOUS INPUTS FROM SCM amp STATION CIRCUITRY BUFFERS VARIOUS CONTROL LINES SERIAL ID DATA FROM BACKPLANE DIGITAL GROUND BACKPLANE AUDIO GROUND LOGIC GND FROM STATIC GROUND Figure 3 CLN7060A Station Control Board Functional Block Diagram 5 of 5 20 68 81096 87 9 1 00 CLN1614A Station Control Module RIBBON CABLE CONNECTS TO CONTROL BOARD 1 FRONT PANEL LEDS AND SWITCHES 8 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 STATION STATION INTCM ACC D CONTROL RX 1 ACTIVE RX 2 ACTIVE RX FAIL AUX LED ON FAIL CH VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC Em Em ENS Em S O O O O LED CONTROL LINES P O I O PORT OUT PUSHBUTTON SWITCH SIGNALS P O I O PORT P0 IN FRONT PANEL CONNECTORS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BUS 7 gt
243. Spacing maximum Frequency Bandwidth vs 1 5 MHz 200 kHz Frequency Separation 2 5 MHz 600 kHz 3 5 MHz 800 kHz 4 5 MHz and above 1000 kHz EIA Rack Mountable Input and Output Impedance 50 Ohms SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE 68 81086 71 3 9 1 00 Quantar VHF Station Functional Manual 4 TYPICAL MOUNTING CONFIGURATION The duplexer module is typically mounted in the same rack or cabinet as the station and peripheral tray if equipped Figure 3 shows front and rear views of a typical repeater configuration in which a station triple circula tor option and duplexer option are installed in a single cabinet Also shown is a simplified interconnect diagram showing the receiver and transmitter paths to a single RX TX antenna 4 68P81086E71 B 9 1 00 Duplexer Module STATION TRANSMIT OUTPUT STATION E O STATION a te PERIPHERAL TRAY TRAY STATION RECEIVE OUTPUT RX INPUT TX OUTPUT CONNECTS TO SINGLE DUPLEXER MODULE i d amd EL dm E DUPLEXER 9 P o CABINET REAR VIEW TX RX ANTENNA POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE TX RF FROM d STATION DUPLEXER lt gt MODULE RECEIVER MODULE Figure 3 Typical Duplexer Mounting Configuration and Interconnect Diagram 9 1 00 68 81086 71 5 Quantar VHF Station Functional Manual FIELD TUNING PROCEDUR
244. Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Turn off station power refer to page 20 Remove the Wireline Interface Board as described on page 30 Unplug faulty ASTRO Modem Card from Wireline Inter face Board Inspect the label on the EPROM shown below If the date is 8 16 93 remove the EPROM and install it on the re placement board For all other dates the EPROM on the replacement board is compatible and need not be re placed EPROM a Pin 1 s Install replacement modem card Install Wireline Interface Board as described on page 30 Restore power to the station Post Replacement Optimization Procedure The ASTRO Modem Card requires no settings or adjustments The card is configured by the Station Control Module on station power up 34 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Replacing Backplane Board Replacement Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Turn off station power refer to page 20 Remove all modules boards from the station cage as de scribed on the previous pages Make sure that all modules boards are placed on properly grounded anti static surface Label all cables connected to the rear of the Backplane Board Disconnect all cables from the backplane Remove the eleven 11 Torx head screws which secure the metal shield and backplane board to the cage Remove the metal shield from the backplane sliding the two guide pins located at e
245. TABLE F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 8 9 SET PREV NEXT DEL PROGRAMMING ADDT L DEFAULT TABLE TABLE TABLE RULES CMDS 68P81096E86 O 6 1 00 11 Quantar Quantro Station Products Routing Aux PL Audio to J17 Pin 5 Program as shown Edit WildCard Table 4 as shown below in order to sum the signal at Aux TX Audio with the audio signal at Line 1 The signal input to the Aux TX Port can be either a PL signal a DPL signal or some other low speed digital signal The port is scaled so that an amplitude of 10 dBm pro vides a 20 deviation of the transmitted rf signal For example on a 25 kHz channel with 5 kHz maximum deviation the low speed signal input at 10 dBm results in 1 kHz deviation Note that the audio input at Line 1 must be aligned following the wireline alignment procedure located in the Radio Service Software RSS User s Guide MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE bag BASE STATION PRODUCTS M s of the State VER XX XX XX WILD CARD STATE ACTION CONFIG Description EXT PTT TABLE 4 OF 10 Jump to Table 4 STATE and CONDITION SETTINGS State Cond State Cond State INPUT 9 AUXPL TX ON KEY FROM WL INACTION AUXPL TX OFF DEKEY FROM WL F5 F6 F7 8 9 DEL PROGRAMMING ADDT L DEFAULT TABLE TABLE TABLE RULES CMDS F1 F2 F3 F4 HELP CHOICE ADD SET TO PREV NEXT LIST TABLE 12 68P81096E86 O 6 1 00
246. THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the PA circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Functional block diagrams are provided in Figure 2 TLE2731A and TLE2732A 25 W and Figure 2061 63 110 W and TTE2064A 100W As mentioned previously the five PA modules are similar in design and function The following theory of operation applies to all four modules except where noted RF Signal Path Output Power Control Note that V_OMNI does not control the output level of the DPA directly but serves as on off control for the DPA stage A low level modulated rf signal approximately 13 dBm from the Exciter module is input to the PA module via a coax cable The signal is input to the IPA and amplified to approximately 0 to 15W depending on the dc power control voltage V_CONT from the Exciter Module The IPA output is fed to a DPA 25W or an FPA 100 110W where final amplification occurs The output of the DPA 85W maximum or FPA 180W maximum is fed to a circulator which passes the transmit signal to the harmonic filter coupler while routing all reflected power to a 5002 load The output of the circulator is fed to the harmonic filter coupler This circuit provides highly selective bandpas
247. TX RX ANTENNA TX RF ial FROM STATION q L DUPLEXER MODULE lt MODULE Figure 3 Typical Duplexer Mounting Configuration and Interconnect Diagram 9 1 00 68P81087E94 A 5 Quantar and Quantro UHF Station Functional Manuals FIELD TUNING PROCEDURE Duplexer modules shipped with stations are tuned at the factory If a duplexer must be replaced in the field the unit must be installed and tuned specifically to the transmit and receive frequency pair for the particular station Field Tuning Overview Note This tuning procedure is valid for chan nels with a bandwidth of 200 kHz or less If bandwidth is more than 200 kHz the duplexer must be tuned by the service depot Required Test Equipment The duplexer module is comprised of three low pass high notch ca vities and three high pass low notch cavities Each set of three cavi ties provides bandpass filtering for either the transmit rf signal or the receive rf signal In general the duplexer must be tuned so that the transmit cavity set passes the transmit signal and rejects the receive signal concurrently the receive cavity set must be tuned to pass the receive signal and reject the transmit signal Tuning is performed by injecting rf signals and making tuning adjust ments using the resonator and notch adjusting screws while monitor ing for maximum or minimum readings on the rf millivoltmeter Field tun ing the duplexer mo
248. The following test equipment is required to perform the procedure Motorola R2001 Communications Analyzer or equivalent Telephone style handset with PTT switch TMN6164 or similar Female N type to Female N type coaxial cable RJ 11 to BNC cable Dummy Load 50 station wattage or higher required for re peater stations only Verifying Receiver Circuitry Procedure Step 1 Connect test equipment by performing Steps 1 3 shown in Figure 5 Step 2 Disable PL and carrier squelch by repeatedly pressing the PL CSQ Off button until receiver noise is heard thru the handset or external or internal speaker If no audio is heard suspect the following e Faulty Receiver Module e Faulty Station Control Module e R2001 is outputting a carrier signal Step 3 Set R2001 to generate a 5 uV 113 dBm FM signal at the Quantar receiver frequency modulated by a 1 kHz tone at 3 kHz deviation The 1 kHz tone should be audible thru the handset or internal or external speaker If no au dio is heard suspect the following Faulty Station Control Module 2 1 MHz reference Faulty Receiver Module Faulty antenna to Receiver preselector rf cable Faulty R2001 to station rf cable continued on page 16 14 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting TO RECEIVE ANTENNA 4 QUANTAR STATION REAR VIEW Disconnect cable from 4 receive antenna to lower N type connector on D DEL STATION RECEIVE br
249. V GATE 2 from the DC Output Board and generate a 133 kHz output signal This signal is fed to the Output Filter Circuitry which provides a 28 V dc supply voltage to the station and to the 5V and 14V Supply Circuits on the DC Output Board Output Filter Circuitry This circuitry consists of a series of filter capacitors that filter the 133 kHz signal from Inverter Circuits A and B to provide a 28 V dc sup ply voltage for use by the station modules via the backplane 68P81096E84 O 7 9 1 00 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual 5 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION DC Output Board The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6068A DC Output Board circuitry at a func tional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions per formed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 3 for a block diagram of the DC Output Board Inverters A B Control Circuitry Overview The Inverters A B Control Circuitry is comprised of two mirrored switch ing type circuits which generate the V_GATE_1 and V_GATE_2 signals used by the Inverter Circuitry A and Inverter Circuitry B located on the DC Input Board Switching Circuitry Operation The switching circuitry consists of two identical switching type circuits operating in parallel Both circuits operate identically as follows A 67
250. V reception This warning reads as follows NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer ence when the equipment is operated in a commercial or residential environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications M MOTOROLA Qu ANTAR t Commercial Government and IANI i Industrial Solutions Sector Digital Capable Station for Conventional SECURENET ASTRO 6809 Trunking and IntelliRepeater Systems VHF 25W amp 125W UHF 25W 100W amp 110W 800 MHz 20W amp 100W 900 MHz 100W Table of Contents Model Option Information 4 2 2 xi FOOWOT Lm xxiv General Safety 2 4 4 xxvi Performance Specifications xxviii DESCRIPTION Yana a UG UEFA Pisku peg IE ae ACE E 68P81096E56 Introduction sone RE WR A ire td 1 Compact Mechanical Design page 1 State of the Art Electrical Desi
251. VIEW 6809 TRUNKING RSTAT Mode Normal Failsoft ENABLED Line TRC Encode DISABLED Failsoft Carrier Squelch DISABLED Dual CT Failsoft Only DISABLED Modulation Type ASTRO Trunking Tickle Source TX DATA LINE Trunking Tickle Source TOT 1 sec CSC Logical Channel Number 1 Rx Discriminator Type QUANTAR MICOR End of Procedure 9 68P81095E96 O 7 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products External Mode Conventional Analog or Conventional ASTRO CAI Simulcast or Non Simulcast Voting Systems Step 1 Access the Wireline Configuration Screen Step 2 Set the Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat field to DISABLED MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Use Up Down Arrow Keys to Select s M RO TuS Wireline Operation CHANGE VIEW WIRELINE CONFIGURATION Wireline Operation 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX Console Priority DISABLED OPTION Remote Control Type ASTRO TRC Input Line 1 Outbound Analog Link Timer 120 sec Comparator NONE OPTION Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat DISABLED Fall Back Timer 0 Status Tone ENABLED Status Tone Frequency 2175 kHz Wireline Squelch DISABLED Rx Securenet ASTRO To Wireline ENABLED Equalization DISABLED Step 3 Connect a wire to pin 16 of System Connector 17 located on the station backplane To activate FBICR mode an external circuit customer provided must ground this pin CONNECTOR 17 End of Procedure 68P81095E96 O 7 15 99 Fall Back In
252. Version R09 05 00 or higher e RVN4110 Station Access Module SAM Radio Service Software RSS Version R01 01 or higher Commercial Government and All Rights Hessrjed Industrial Solutions Sector 68 81096 11 Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 12 15 99 UP Quantar Quantro Station Products Call Flow Prerequisites e MCS User Access is Enabled but not Gated e Analog Rptr Activation RSS Parameter set to SC e Local Subscribers are using Primary PL RF SIGNAL RECEIVED BY STATION IS CARRIER DETECTED NO YES IS VALID PL DETECTED NO REPEATER IS KNOCKED DOWN gt IS REPEATER SETUP YES START REPEAT CALL Figure 1 Typical Call Flow Chart Without Gated Access Incorporated 68 81096 11 12 15 99 Dual Control of Repeater Access Via TRC and SAM Call Flow Prerequisites e MCS User Access is set to Gated e Analog Rptr Activation RSS Parameter set to SC e Emergency conditions exist in which non Local Subscribers are using Secondary PL RF SIGNAL RECEIVED BY STATION IS CARRIER NS gt DETECTED YES IS VALID PL BS gt DETECTED YES NO IS GATED ACCESS OFF PL GATED ACCESS ENABLED YES NO REPEATER IS IS KNOCKED DOWN REPEATER gt SETUP YES START REPEAT CALL Figur
253. W ABZ89FC3774 125W ABZ89FC3773 UHF 25W 289 4797 FCC Designation FCC Rule Parts 22 74 80 110W ABZ89FC4798 i 800 20W ABZ89FC5775 100W ABZ89FC5776 900 100W ABZ89FC5767 Measurement Methods per TIA EIA 603 Specifications subject to change without notice XXX 68P81095E05 B 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA DESCRIPTION Figure 1 Quantar Station in 12 Cabinet UHF Shown INTRODUCTION The Motorola Quantar Station available in VHF UHF 800 MHz and 900 MHz provides conventional analog ASTRO ASTRO CAI SECURENET 6809 Trunking and IntelliRepeater capabilities in a compact software con trolled design The station architecture and microprocessor controlled Station Control Module allow for fast and reliable expansion and upgrading FLASH memory in the Station Control Module allows software downloads to be performed locally using serial or Ethernet port or remotely via modem Compact Mechanical Design The entire Quantar station is housed in a 5 rack unit high card cage weighing only 55 Ibs A single cage may be mounted in a 12 cabinet shown in Figure 1 or multiple cages may be mounted in standard telephone style equipment racks or various sizes of Motorola cabi nets Commercial Government and All Rights Hesrved Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81096E56 A Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Station Functional Manual
254. XTERNAL SPEAKER 1 6809 MRTI INTERFACE CIRCUITRY CODEC AUDIO MULTIPLEXER MIC AUDIO 7 p MRIEDCAUDIO TRANSIENT TX AUDIO MRTI TX AUDIO S V gt PROTECTION gt i AD MRTI RX AUDIO VARIOUS DIAGNOSTIC 1O CONVERTER LOOPBACK SIGNALS O L O 3 TO FROM TX DATA J140N lt a P O BACKPLANE RIBBON CABLE TXDATA a TXAUDIOINMUX 54i HANDSET 57 LED BOARD EARPIECE HANDSET DIGITIZED SIGNAL FROM DSP ASIC D A SPEAKER AUDIO i E CONVERTER gt l GE SL T 7 4 X AUDIO US DIGITIZED SIGNAL DSP 5 DD T gt lt YAN STATION AUDIO LOCAL 4 DK AMPLIFIER SPEAKER J TX VOICE DATA ASS L 1 A DATA TX WIDEBAND AUDIO T ANALOG SIMULCAST LEVEL SHIFTER FROM BACKPLANE me AMPLIFIER D A 2 LO PASS FILTER lt S x suia LINE DRIVER CONVERTER 0 6 2 AMPLIFIER e VCO MOD AUDIO gt 5 TO ro EXCITER MODULE LEVEL SHIFTER 1 EE WAVESHAPING AD AMPLIFIER A Spee reas _ FILTERING TX AUDIO CONVERTER D A DISC AUDIO OUT MUX gt gt TO BUFFER LO PASS FILTER gt EXCITER MODULE 9808 AMPLIFIER CONVERTER 0 6 KHZ y RX AUDIO 3 MRTI RX AUDIO DISC AUDIO d 22 t DIGITAL POT ADJUST FET AUDIO GATE TX WIDEBAND AUDIO OR TX VOICE DATA 4 4 gt J TX AUDIO IN MUX P O I O PORTPOOUT 7 s 1 TX AUDIO OUT MUX SPI BUS
255. Y OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the Antenna Relay Module at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 5 for a block and interconnect diagram of the Antenna Relay Module Functional Operation Note that with the relay de energized the antenna is connected to the Receiver Module To connect the antenna to the Power Amplifier Module the Station Con trol Module must energize the relay The Antenna Relay Module contains a relay with a set of normally open and normally closed contacts The relay coil is controlled by a signal from the Station Control Module to connect either the Receiver Module or the Power Amplifier Module to a single transmit receive antenna Re fer to the block diagram shown in Figure 2 TRANSMIT RECEIVE ANTENNA RECEIVER MODULE ANTENNA RELAY MODULE POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE ON BACKPLANE MATES WITH 3 PIN CONNECTOR 23 Figure 5 Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Antenna Relay Module 68P81086E22 B 9 1 00 Quantar Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68P81086E22 B 9 1 00 M TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION Options X676AA AC DE
256. _SD_SEC to shut down the entire power supply module if the 28 V output voltage exceeds a preset threshold 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 11 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual 14 V Supply Circuitry 5 V Supply Circuitry Overview The 14 V Supply Circuitry is comprised of a switching type power supply which generates a 14 2 V dc supply voltage This voltage is used as the 14 2 V supply voltage for the station modules via the backplane Switching Power Supply Operation The 14 V switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 133 kHz The PWM output pulses are fed through a driver to control a power FET which repetitively gates the 28V_RAW from the 28V Main Supply Circuitry to a power coil The result is a high induced voltage which charges the filter capacitors to approxi mately 14 2 V dc A current sense comparator provides a feedback signal to the PWM to maintain a constant output voltage Protection Circuitry An overvoltage detect circuit monitors the output voltage and if preset thresholds are exceeded turns on a FET crowbar circuit which im mediately discharges the output to protect other modules in the sta tion An overcurrent detect circuit monitors the current draw from the 14V Supply Circuitry and if a preset threshold is exceeded generates a MAIN_SD_SEC signal which shuts down the entire power supply mod ule The 5 V Supply Circuitry operates identic
257. a Relay Control When the MAIN station is operating in MAIN mode the relay driven output 8 is energized The use of this closure is left up to the user Typically a user will use this closure to drive an exter nal relay which connects the antenna to whichever station is operating in MAIN mode e Status Request Utilizing TRC function tone 14 the console operator can request which station is in MAIN mode One beep will be returned if the MAIN station is in MAIN mode and two beeps if the STANDBY station is in MAIN mode e Reset Utilizing TRC function tone 15 both stations will reset 6 68P81095E89 O 2 15 99 Main Standby Configuration THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 68 81095 89 7 2 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products n CUSTOMIZING MAIN STANDBY OPERATION Default Operation The Main Standby Feature is implemented using the Radio Service Software RSS WildCard Feature As shipped from the factory the RSS contains 21 WildCard Tables for the Main station and 20 WildCard Tables for the Standby station These tables contain default settings that define the basic operation of the Main Standby Feature i e control of Main and Standby status of two interconnected stations via pre defined Tone Remote Control function tones to provide backup redundancy in the event of a station failure Customizing Main Standby Operation Although all of the Main Standby WildCard Tables are user configurable via the RSS
258. able The Control Board contains a 68EN360 microprocessor a 56002 Digi tal Signal Processor and support circuitry which combine to provide signal processing and operational control over the other station mod ules The SCM also contains the station operating software stored in FLASH memory and codeplug which define the personality of the sta tion including system capabilities ASTRO SECURENET etc and op erating parameters such as output power and operating frequency The CLN1614A SCM provides conventional operation along with MRTI and 6809 trunking capabilities for use in Quantar and Quantro stations Motorola Inc 2000 All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A Commercial Government and Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81096E87 O 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar and Quantro Station Products Overview of Circuitry The SCM is comprised of two circuit boards connected together via a multi conductor ribbon cable These boards contain circuitry as fol lows Control Board CLN7060A Host Microprocessor 68EN360 uP which comprises the central controller of the SCM and station Non Volatile Memory consists of a FLASH SIMM module that contains the station operating software and data and an EEPROM that contains the station codeplug data DRAM Memory Dynamic RAM into which station software is downloaded and executed External Line Interface Circuitry provides interfac
259. ach end at the bottom of the shield from the backplane board Remove the backplane board Install the replacement Backplane Board and metal shield using the 11 Torx head screws removed previously re connect all cables and reinstall all modules boards Restore power to the station Post Replacement Optimization Procedure Using the RSS run a complete battery of diagnostics to exercise all boards and modules 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 35 Quantar Station Functional Manual 5 PRESELECTOR FIELD TUNING PROCEDURE The VHF and UHF Receiver Modules are comprised of a circuit board and a preselector assembly both secured in a slide in module housing The preselector assembly is a 3 pole UHF or a 5 pole VHF bandpass filter equipped with tuning slugs to adjust the passband corresponding to the operating frequency s of the station The preselector assembly must be field tuned if replaced in the field or if the station operating frequency s are modified The tuning procedure follows Required Test Equipment The following test equipment is required to properly tune the preselec tor assembly e RF Signal Generator Motorola R2600 Communications Ana lyzer R2001 Communications Analyzer see note or HP8656A signal generator or equivalent IMPORTANT e Dip Peak Monitor HP435B Power Meter or equivalent with HP84844A sensitive power head Boonton Model 92E with BNC Tuning for best SINAD response input or R2001 R2600
260. acket NUT MODI NW 497 COMMUNICATIONS ANALYZER COMMUNICATIONS 4 MOTOROLA SYSTEM ANALYZER S BAA Hoe joo 000000000000 000000 000000 o lt OSCILLOSCOPE MONITOR 0606 o Connect N to N cable between RF IN OUT station receive input and RF In Out connector on R2001 STATION CONTROL MODULE FRONT PANEL 6 HANDSET PTT BUTTON Y y D222 E oo o Connect handset RJ 11 jack on front panel of Station Control Module or connect External Speaker to RJ 11 jack or use built in W internal speaker Y nm d Figure 5 Test Equipment Setup for Verifying Receiver Circuitry 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 1 5 Quantar Station Functional Manual Verifying Receiver Circuitry Continued Note To measure SINAD the station must be programmed for mixed mode Analog Digital operation Incorrect read ing will result if programmed for Digital Only operation Note For VHF and UHF stations only referto 5 Preselector Field tuning Pro cedure in this section for procedures to tune the receiver preselector Step 4 If audio is heard connect the HANDSET RJ 11 jack to the Oscilloscope input BNC connector as shown below 4 MOTOROLA g m 9 OHAEH 9 9 9 ecu nun OSCILLOSCOPE MON
261. acking Cabinets Note It is recommended that if different sizes of cabinets are being stacked e g if a 30 cabinet is being stacked on top of a 46 cabinet the larger size cabinet should be placed on the bottom The 12 30 46 and 60 cabinets may be stacked on atop another to maximize use of site space Stacking kit TRN7750A contains the necessary bolts nuts and washers to stack one cabinet on another Remove the knockouts on the top of the lower cabinet and use the hardware as shown below to attach the upper cabinet UPPER NUT amp WASHER 4 EACH p KNOCKOUT RE MOVED ALL FOUR CORNERS BOLT amp WASHER 4 EACH LOWER CABINET 0 Tw The table below lists the stacking limits for the available cabinet sizes Cabinet Stacking Limits Cabinet Size Maximum Stacking Number 12 x 20 6 72 max height 30 x 20 3 90 max height 46 x 20 2 92 max height 60 Indoor Not Stackable 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 25 Quantar Station Functional Manual Stacking Modular Racks The 30 45 and 52 modular racks may be stacked one atop another to maximize use of site space Stacking kit TRN7750A contains the necessary bolts nuts and washers to stack one rack on another Use the hardware as shown below to attach the upper rack Note It is recommended that if different sizes of racks are being stacked e g if a 30
262. ackplane e Duplexer Option The duplexer option equips the station with a Duplexer Module which is typically mounted in the same rack or cabinet as the station Coax cables from the station Receiver and Power Amplifier Modules are connected to the Duplexer Module A single N type connector is provided for connection to a single RX TX antenna 32 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation RF Cabling Connections Continued TO RECEIVE ANTENNA Separate RX and TX Connectors Stations intended for separate transmit and receive antennas are shipped with the coax cables from the Power Amplifier and Receiver Modules connected to the bracket on the backplane as shown below Figure 16 Connect the rf cables from the transmit and receive antennas to the sta tion as shown below QUANTAR STATION REAR VIEW TO TRANSMIT ANTENNA STATION TRANSMIT OUTPUT STATION RECEIVE INPUT Figure 16 Separate RX and TX Antenna Connections 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 33 Quantar Station Functional Manual RF Cabling Connections Continued Antenna Relay Option Stations equipped with the antenna relay option are shipped with the antenna relay module installed in the bracket on the backplane with the rf cables from the Power Amplifier and Receiver Modules con nected as shown below Figure 17 Note that the 3 wire control cable from the antenna relay t
263. ain access to the four 4 bolts securing the station to the wooden skid Remove the bolts and nuts as shown a s STATION Q CABINET WOODEN CORRUGATED SKID RNER SUPPORTS E Cut band as shown Remove top packing spacer and corrugated corner supports Use hoist to lift the station from the skid Remove skid and return station to floor Replace anti static bag over station to provide protection during installation E Ej Figure 10 Unpacking Procedures for 30 46 shown and 60 Indoor Quantar Cabinets 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 1 9 Quantar Station Functional Manual Mounting Procedures Note Installing multiple cages one above the other is permitted as long as proper venti lation is maintained Refer to Equipment Ven tilation on page 3 for details Introduction Perform the following procedures to mechanically install the Quantar station equipment cages racks or cabinets Note that racks and cabi nets may house multiple Quantar station cages and some cabinets may be stacked one atop the other to maximize use of space Mounting Quantar Station Cage s in Customer Supplied Cabinet The Quantar station cage is designed to fit in a standard EIA 19 enclo sure Mounting screws M6 x 1 0 tapping are provided to secure the cage flanges to the customer supplied cabinet Mount the cage s as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
264. al Audio Circuitry via the Audio Interface Bus The signal is amplified filtered buffered and output thru the 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry to the external MRTI Mod ule via J14 on the station backplane 12 68 81096 87 9 1 00 CLN1614A Station Control Module Supply Voltages Circuitry The SCM contains on board regulator and filtering circuitry to gener ate the various operating voltages required by the SCM circuitry 14 2 V and 5V from the backplane are used as sources for the fol lowing supply voltage circuits e VCCA Supply Circuitry provides VCCA 5V for the Audio In terface Circuitry in the SCM e Filtering Circuitry filters the 14 2 V and 5V from the back plane to provide A and VCC respectively for the SCM digital cir cuitry 68 81096 87 9 1 00 1 3 Quantar and Quantro Station Products 4 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION CLN7098A LED Board The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CLN7098A LED Board circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 4 for a block diagram of the CLN7098A LED Board Front Panel LEDs and Switches Note LEDs Refer to the Troubleshooting section of this manual for complete details on the in Eight status LEDs
265. al power up Main Inverter Circuitry consists of switching type power sup ply that generates the 14 2V dc supply voltage 5 V Inverter Circuitry consists of switching type power sup ply that generates the 5 dc supply voltage Clock Generator Circuitry generates 267 kHz and 133 kHz clock signals used by pulse width modulators in the three invert er circuits Diagnostics Circuitry converts analog status signals to digital format for transfer to Station Control Module Address Decode Circuitry performs address decoding to pro vide chip select signals for the A D and D A converters 68P81085E12 B 9 1 00 TRN7802A TRN7803A Power Supply Modules P PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the Models TRN7802A and TRN7803A Power Supply Modules Performance Specifications Table 1 TRN7802A TRN7803A Power Supply Modules Performance Specifications TRN7802A 10 5 34 5 V dc 14 2 V dc 5 Steady State Output Voltages 54 V dc 5 14 2 Output Current Ratings 454 Total Output Power Rating no derating 225 W All outputs 50 mV p p measured with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope at 25 C High Frequency individual harmonic voltage limits in 10 kHz 100 MHz frequency band Output Ripple 14 2 V 1 5 mV p p 5V 5 mV p p Short Circuit Current 0 5 A avg max 68 81085 12 3 9 1 00 Quantar Satellite Receiver and Station Products CONTRO
266. alignment frequency as follows If frequency from Step 2 is lt 134 MHz then alignment frequency 133 75 MHz If frequency from Step 2 is gt 152 MHz then alignment frequency 152 MHz Otherwise use actual frequency from Step 2 If Receiver Module is Range 2 determine the alignment frequency as follows If frequency from Step 2 is lt 152 MHz then alignment frequency 151 75 MHz If frequency from Step 2 is gt 172 MHz then alignment frequency 172 MHz Otherwise use actual frequency from Step 2 For stations with multiple receive frequencies calculate the frequen cy of the alignment signal as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 From the site documentation or the RSS note the receive frequency for each channel supported by the station Calculate a midpoint frequency as follows Frid Frighest Fiowest 2 Using Fmia in place of the station receive frequency per form Step 2 thru Step 4 from above 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 37 Quantar Station Functional Manual VHF Tuning Procedure Continued Preparing Equipment Step 1 Make sure Receiver Module with Preselector Assembly is installed in a functional station cage equipped with a Power Supply Module Step 2 Remove the two Torx head screws from the Receiver Module front panel and remove the panel Step 3 Detune the preselector as follows If the alignment frequency calculated on the previous page is greater than
267. all times during station operation otherwise the synthesizers will fail to lock and the station will not transmit or receive TERMINATORS FRONT ACCESS 5 FO CONNECT 5 MHZ or 10 MHz REFERENCE INPUT 1 0 5 V RMS 50 OHMS CONNECT 5 MHZ or 10 MHz REFERENCE INPUT REAR ACCESS 2 5V P P MINIMUM gt 150 KILOHMS Figure 28 Connecting External 5 MHz or 10 MHz Reference Source to Single Station 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 51 Quantar Station Functional Manual Connecting External Reference continued Multi Drop Connections For sites with multiple stations that require a high stability reference signal a multi drop configuration may be used In this configuration a single source either an external signal source or a station equipped with a UHSO module provides the reference signal to all stations at the site Make the connections as shown in Figure 29 Note the following guidelines and requirements e maximum of six 6 Quantar stations mounted in same rack can be connected in a multi drop configuration e An Ultra High Stability Oscillator module UHSO must be installed in the bottom station only e RSS programming for bottom station must be set for INTERNAL HIGH STABILITY Freq Ref field on the Hard ware Configuration screen All other stations must be set for EX TERNAL 5 MHz Refer to the Radio Service Softwa
268. ally to the 14 V Supply Cir cuitry described above to generate a 5 1 V dc supply voltage This voltage is used as the 5 V supply voltage for the station modules via the backplane 12 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 CPN1047A CPN1048A625W Power Supply Modules Battery Charger Control Circuitry Reference Voltage Circuitry Diagnostics Circuitry The POWER_CUT_PRI signal from the Peak Average Current Detect Circuitry is buffered and fed to the Battery Charger Revert Board as POWER_CUT_SEC This signal reduces the current supplied by the battery charger circuitry to divert maximum power to the power supply outputs 28V 14V and 5V during times of heavy current draw The AC_FAIL signal from the AC to DC Converter Board is buffered and fed to 1 the diagnostics circuitry as AC_GOOD_DIAG and 2 the Battery Charger Revert Board as BATTERY_REVERT This signal acti vates battery revert mode This circuitry accepts 28V_RAW from the 28V Main Supply Circuit ry and generates 10V_SEC and 2 5V_SEC supply voltages for use by local circuitry Overview The diagnostics circuitry consists of an 11 channel A D converter which converts analog status signals from critical points in the power supply module to digital format for transfer to the Station Control Mod ule via the SPI bus Most of the status signals are generated by detect circuits to indicate the status of dc supply voltages and references Temperature Moni
269. and dc power lines must all be protected to pre vent lightning energy from entering the site building Although a comprehensive coverage of site grounding techniques and lightning protection is not within the scope of this instruction manual there are several excellent industry sources for rules and guidelines on grounding and lightning protection at communications sites Motorola recommends the following reference source Quality Standards FNE Installation Manual 68P81089E50 Quantar Equipment Grounding Guidelines The Quantar station cage is equipped with a single ground lug located on the rear panel of the cage Use this lug to connect the cage to the site ground point It is assumed that all telephone lines antenna cables and ac or dc power cabling has been properly grounded and lightning protected by following the rules and guidelines provided in the previously mentioned reference source 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Quantar Station Functional Manual Recommended Tools and Equipment In addition to the typical complement of hand tools the following tools and equipment are recommended for proper installation of the station equipment Equipment Unpacking and Inspection A six to eight foot wooden step ladder used to access the top of the 7 71 2 and 8 racks if applicable A block and tackle or suitable hoist is recommended to lift cabinets equipped with multiple stations and to stack cabinets or modular racks
270. and gain settings es tablish the data bus clock rate program the 2nd LO and perform other control functions 68P81086E76 D 9 1 00 Quantro Quantar 800 MHz Receiver Module Address Decode and A D Converter Circuitry Voltage Regulator Circuitry Address Decode Circuitry The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Board to use the address bus to select a specific device on a specific station board for control or data communications purposes via the SPI bus If the board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 thru A5 as the receiver module address it enables the chip select circuitry The chip select cir cuitry then decodes address lines AO and A1 and generates chip select signals for the PLL and A D converter and the SYNTH ADAPT signal to control the loop filter bypass switch in the synthesizer circuitry A D Converter Circuitry Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the receiver board are fed to the A D converter which converts them to a digital signal and upon request by the Station Control Module outputs the signal to the Station Control Module via the SPI bus The voltage regulator circuitry consists of 10V and two 5V regula tors The 10V regulator accepts a 14 2V dc input and generates a 10V dc operating voltage for the receiver board circuitry The 10V regulator output also feeds two 5V regulators which output Custom Analog 5V and Custom Digital 5V dc ope
271. ansformer secondary is half wave rectified to charge the output filter circuitry resulting in an output voltage of 14 V dc Since each supply receives a 133 kHz clock signal that is 180 out of phase with the other each switching power supply alternately charges the output filter circuitry resulting in an effective charging rate of 266 kHz Protection Circuitry Peak Average Current Limiting Circuitry The peak current limiting circuitry accepts an output current feedback signal and a scaled 14V_RAW reference signal to control the PWMs This effectively maintains a constant output voltage for varying output current de mands The average current limiting circuitry monitors the 14 V dc output and generates a shutdown signal MAIN_SD_PRI if the average output cur rent reaches a predetermined limit Overvoltage Protection Circuitry This circuitry monitors the 14V output voltage and generates a shutdown signal MAIN_SD_SEC to shut down the entire power supply module if the 14 V output voltage exceeds a preset threshold 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 11 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual 5 V Supply Circuitry Battery Charger Control Circuitry Reference Voltage Circuitry Overview The 5 V Supply Circuitry is comprised of a switching type power sup ply which generates a 5 V dc supply voltage This voltage is used as the 5 V supply voltage for the station modules via the backplane Swit
272. ansmitters without shields during normal operation Do not operate base station antennas in equipment rooms For installations outside of the U S consult with the applicable governing body and standards for RF energy human exposure requirements and take the necessary steps for compliance with local regulations References TIA EIA TSB92 Report On EME Evaluation for RF Cabinet Emissions Under FCC MPE Guidelines Global Engi neering Documents http global ihs com FCC OET Bulletin 65 Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electro magnetic Fields http www fcc gov oet rfsafety Motorola Standards and Guideline for Communications Sites Motorola manual 68P81089E50 IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measure of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields RF and Micro wave IEEE Std C95 3 1991 Publication Sales 445 Hoes Lane PO Box 1331 Piscattaway NJ 08855 1331 IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields 3 kHz to 300 GHz IEEE C95 1 1991 Publication Sales 445 Hoes Lane PO Box 1331 Piscattaway NJ 08855 1331 9 1 00 68P81095E05 B xxvii PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS General TX Sub Band Range RX Sub Band Range Number of Channels Channel Spacing Frequency Generation Power Supply Type Power Supply Input Voltage Power Supply Input Frequency Battery Revert T R Separation with
273. ar Quantro Station Products SAM RSS PROGRAMMING In order to support dual control of repeater access by TRC and SAM certain SAM parameters must be programmed using the Station Access Module SAM Radio Service Software RSS program Refer to the SAM RSS User s Guide 68P80309E35 for details on performing the following tasks Step 1 Connect a PC running the RSS program to the RSS port on the front panel of the SAM module and read the SAM codeplug Step 2 For DTMF operation access Page 03 of the SAM Decoder Selection screen and program the TARGET and ACT TBL settings as shown in Figure 1 These settings establish the keypad sequences and corresponding Action Tables for Repeater Setup Repeater Knockdown Gated Access Enable and Gated Access Disable Note that if there is default data already entered when opening the screen overwrite the data with the data shown below MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE sais ix SAM with QUANTAR QUANTRO nd np Page 03 of 03 i PE SAM DECODER SELECTION Set to ENABLED DTMF DECODER ENABLED SAM MODE 00 of 01 DTMF INPUT RECEIVER 1 DTMF DECODER TARGET TARGET ACT TBL OU RR 123 03 Enter Action Table numbers to 025 Seer os 456 04 correspond to keypad se 147 06 quences 01 thru 04 Use 03 369 07 04 06 and 07 as shown 05 Note that if table does not exist the RSS will prompt you OF rise eens ica to create o
274. ar UHF Station Functional Manual Cooling Fans Control Circuitry 100 110 W Models Only ANL WARNING The cooling fans in the PA Mod ule are thermostatically con trolled and may come on at any time during station operation Keep fingers clear of fan blades Power Amplifier ID Resistor ROM The PA is equipped with a dual fan module to provide forced air cooling of the PA The fan module is controlled by a FAN ON signal from the Exciter Module which is fed to a driver circuit in the PA Module The Fan Driver Detect Circuitry controls the power to the fans via two feed thru pins in the PA chassis which mate with the power connector on the slide in fan module The fans are turned on only when the temperature in the PA exceeds a set limit It is normal for the fans to cycle on and off during station operation The Fan Driver Detect Circuitry also monitors the current to the fans and feeds a dc detect voltage to the Fan Status Circuitry which outputs a status signal indicating whether the fan current is above or below a predetermined range The status signal FAN_ALARM is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry A resistor network ROM provides power amplifier ID information to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuits This information includes the band and range in which the PA is designed to operate e g UHF 800 MHz etc and the maximum output
275. are provided on the SCM front panel to provide visual terpretation of the LEDs indications of various station operating conditions The LEDs are con trolled by eight lines from I O Port PO Out Note Switches Refer to the Operation section of this man ual for complete details on the use of the pushbutton switches Four momentary contact pushbutton switches are provided on the SCM front panel to allow various station functions to be selected De pressing a pushbutton causes a high to be sent to the Host uP via Port PO In Front Panel Connectors Four connectors are provided on the SCM front panel to interface with external equipment e RSS Port DB 9 connector used for connection to a PC loaded with Radio Service Software RSS for configuring servicing the station e External Speaker Connector RJ 11 connector used for con nection to an external speaker Model HSN1000 e External Handset Microphone RJ 11 connector used for connection to an external handset Model TMN6164 or micro phone Model HMN1001 e 5 10 MHz Input BNC connector used for connection to an ex ternal source of 5 or 10 MHz to be used as a station reference 14 68 81096 87 9 1 00 CLN1614A Station Control Module THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 9 1 00 68 81096 87 15 Quantar and Quantro Station Products HOST MICROPROCESSOR HOST SUPPORT CIRCUITRY HOST MICROPROCESSOR SCC1 7 SERIAL COMMUNICATI
276. at rear of station 24 Battery Temperature 3 pin AMP type connector used to accept variable resistance proportional to temperature of co located storage batteries connector located on backplane at rear of station 25 Not used 26 Not used 27 RF Peripheral Tray 10 AMP type connector used to transfer signals to from components housed in externally mounted RF Peripheral Tray connector located on backplane at rear of station 28 Not used 29 Not used BNC input connector used to accept 5 10 MHz reference signal from external frequency standard for calibrating reference 30 oscillator in Station Control Module connector located on backplane at rear of station electrically isolated from BNC connector on front panel of Station Control Module to allow for multi drop configuration 31 Provides external 5V and 14 2 V dc power e g MRTI Modem etc PhoneNET is a registered trademark of Farallon Computing Inc 68P81086E33 F 11 15 99 Quantar Station Products Note Model CLN6955 WIB is designed for use in stations installed in locations where local codes permit phone line connections to either the 50 pin Telco connector I or the orange screw terminal connector D Model CLN6957 allows only connections to the orange screw terminal connector D Figure 2 TRN7480A Backplane Rear Connectors Pin Out Infor
277. ation operation The station LEDs provide a visual indication of the progress of the start up sequence and may be decoded to determine which test if any has failed The following describes the behavior of the LEDs upon powering up the station as well as how to decode the LEDs to isolate potential hard ware and software malfunctions Station Control Module LEDs Power Up Sequence Step 1 The Station Fail LED momentarily lights followed by all eight LEDs turning on Step 2 The start up sequence tests now run and the LEDs go out top to bottom as each test is completed Step 3 After Aux LED is turned off the Station Fail LED is turned on and for Conventional 6809 stations only the Intercom LED flashes while the station software and hardware are initialized Step 4 Onceinitialized the Station Fail and Intercom LEDs are turned off and the Station On LED green is turned on This indicates that the module has passed all the start up tests and is now operational continued on next page 54 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation Verifying Proper Operation Continued Station Control Module Failures e lf the Station Fail lights and stays on Step 1 check to see if the Station Control Module and Power Supply Module are seated properly in the backplane Also check to make sure that the EPROMs two 40 pin socket mounted ICs located on Station Control Board are seated properly and installed with pin 1
278. ations include reading status signals from the Diagnostics Circuitry and providing charger output control signals to the Battery Charger Revert Board 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 13 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual Startup Shutdown Control Circuitry Shutdown Delay Circuitry Upon receiving a shutdown signal MAIN SD PRI from the 14V Main Supply Circuitry this circuit passes the signal through the Soft Start Cir cuitry for a 1 second interval to allow the entire power supply module to shutdown The module then restarts if the on off switch is in On posi tion If the MAIN SD PRI signal is still active the shutdown process will repeat Startup Shutdown Delay Circuitry When the power supply module is first turned on the RELAY ON sig nal is low and the output of the Startup Shutdown Delay Circuitry keeps the supply in shutdown mode After about 1 5 seconds RELAY ON goes high and the Startup Shutdown Delay Circuitry provides a 1 se cond delay before releasing the shutdown signal and allowing the pow er supply to operate When the power supply module is turned off the RELAY ON signal goes low and the Startup Shutdown Delay Circuitry keeps the supply in operating mode for 1 second to allow Battery Revert Mode to acti vate Soft Start Circuitry Each time the Soft Start Circuitry receives a startup signal i e MAIN SD is inactive and the output of the Startup Shutdown Delay Circuitry is high the
279. attery Revert Mode CPN1050 only neither LED is lit The cooling fan will continue to run 1 0 68 81096 09 11 15 99 CPN1049A CPN1050B265W Power Supply Modules 5 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OPERATION DC to DC Converter Board The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6079B DC to DC Converter Board circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the func tions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 3 for a block diagram of the DC to DC Converter Board 14V Main Supply Circuitry Overview The 14V Main Supply Circuitry is comprised of two mirrored switch ing type power supplies which generate the 14 V supply voltage This voltage is used as the source for the 5V supply circuit as well as the 14V supply voltage for the station modules via the backplane and Switching Power Supply Operation The 14V Main Supply Circuitry consists of two identical switching type power supplies operating in parallel Both supplies operate identi cally as follows A 133 kHz clock signal from the Sync Generator Cir cuitry is fed through a buffer to a Pulse Width Modulator PWM The PWM output pulses control a pair of power FETS via a driver to gate the 400 V dc from the AC to DC Converter Board to the primary of a power transformer The induced voltage in the tr
280. atus signals to digital format for transfer to Station Control Module Local Power Supply Regulation accepts 14 2 V dc input and outputs 10V and 5V dc operating voltages Motorola Inc 1999 All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A Commercial Government and Industrial Solutions Sector 68 81086 48 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 4 15 99 UP Quantar Quantro Station Products CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the receiver module controls indicators and all input and output external connections RECEIVER RF INPUT TO PRESELECTOR FROM RECEIVE ANTENNA PRESELECTOR TUNING SCREWS RECEIVER MODULE FRONT PANEL FRONT VIEW CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE REAR VIEW Figure 1 UHF Receiver Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 2 68P81086E48 C 4 15 99 Quantar Quantro UHF Receiver Modules 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the receiver circuitry at a functional level The informa tion is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the receiver module Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry Introduction The synthesizer and VCO circuitry generate the 1st LO injection signal for the 1st mixer in
281. band and range in which the PA is designed to operate e g VHF Range 1 UHF 900 MHz etc and the maximum output power e g 25 W 125 W etc 68P81086E23 B 9 1 00 TLD3110 and TLD3101 TLD3102 Power Amplifier Modules COAXIAL CABLE POWER AMPLIFIER OUTPUT N TYPE CONNECTOR RF INPUT OUTPUT CONNECTOR BRACKET RF INPUT OUTPUT CONNECTOR BRACKET REAR OF STATION N TYPE CONNECTOR P O P101 32 gt 33 L PWR CONTROL N VOLTAGE o P O FROM LINE V_CONT EXCITER 102 gt FILTER VOLTAGE TRANSLATOR MODULE CIRCUITRY CURRENT UNITER o 35 gt LN J Y V OMNI V OMNI CIRCULATOR J4100 13 DBM INTERMEDIATE 0TO 10W DRIVER 35W MAX ANN HARMONIC 25W MAX gt m gt FILTER k lt lt MOPULATED AF AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER COUPLER FROY IPA DPA EXCITER IPA DPA MODULE 14V IPA Y v Y 1 DPA 50 OHM E LOAD EY A cy P O i 101 102 5 e PUFEER n e OPA SENSE DETECT DETECT Y mE CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY TX VF P BUFFER RESISTOR ROM P O Y INDICATES TYPE gt ANALOG MULTIPLEXER DETECT DPA V gt 7 7 IPA
282. bed by the 509 load heat sink mounted connected to the second circulator A thermistor mounted on the heat sink provides a variable resistance signal proportional to the heat sink temperature This signal is routed to the Station Control Mod ule via the Peripheral Tray cabling harness If the heat sink temperature exceeds a preset threshold the Station Control Module enables PA cutback mode If the overtemperature condition persists the power amplifier is shut down completely CIRCULATOR TRANSMIT RF FROM POWER AMPLIFIER CIRCULATOR LOW PASS FILTER C CY RF OUTPUT qeu ere 10 TRANSMIT ANTENNA MODULE MATES WITH gt CONNECTOR ON PERIPHERAL TRAY CABLING HARNESS THERMISTOR 22K 25 C HEAT SINK Figure 2 Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Triple Circulator Option 68P81088E54 A 9 1 00 Quantar UHF Station Functional Manual THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68P81088E54 A 9 1 00 M TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION Options X676AQ 800 MHz X676AR 900 MHz El DESCRIPTION Options X676AQ and X676AR provide a dual circulator assembly and low pass filter for use with the Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHzZ stations respectively The triple circulator option is comprised of the dual circulator assem bly combined with the single circulator located in the station power amplifier module This combination provides 65 dB min of isolat
283. below Note that the intervals are affected by the accuracy in PPM required either for FCC compliance or by the system requirements whichever is more stringent Table 1 Recommended Intervals for Calibrating Station Reference Oscillator After Initial One Year Calibration Desired Required Interval 1 0 PPM 821 824 MHz Public Safety Band Once yearly 0 1 PPM see note Once yearly Note 0 1 PPM accuracy requires the use of either the UHSO Option X873AA or an external 5 MHz source The UHSO option requires both the inter nal station reference oscillator and the UHSO to be calibrated once yearly us ing the RSS When using an external 5 MHz source the internal station refer ence oscillator must be calibrated once yearly using the RSS and the external source must be calibrated once yearly using the manufacturer s recommended procedure 2 68 81086E39 D 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA TROUBLESHOOTING For Quantar Station and Ancillary Equipment VHF UHF 800 MHz and 900 MHz El INTRODUCTION This section provides troubleshooting recommendations and procedures for the Quantar station and associated ancillary equipment Troubleshooting Overview The troubleshooting procedures and supporting diagrams provided in this section allow the service technician to isolate station faults to the module assembly level Defective modules are then replaced with known good modules to restore the station to proper operation
284. below approximately 350 V dc con sidered ac input failure a BOOST LOW signal is sent to the Battery Charger Revert Board via the DC to DC Converter Board to activate battery revert mode This circuitry consists of a switching type power supply which gener ates a 13 V dc supply voltage used as VCC by the local circuitry and the primary side of the DC to DC Converter Board The circuitry consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 67 kHz from DC to DC Converter Board The PWM output repetitively gates the 400 V dc from the Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry to the primary of the housekeeping transformer The result is an in duced voltage in the secondary winding which feeds a half wave rectifi er circuit The output is a 13 V dc VCC supply voltage 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual LED Status Indicators Two LEDs located on the power supply module front panel indicate module status as follows e AC On lights GREEN when On Off switch is On and the AC in put voltage is within operating range LED turns off when module is turned off ac power is removed or AC input voltage is below approximately 85 V rms e Module Fail lights RED when initially turning on or off the Pow er Supply this is normal and does not indicate a failure or when the DC to DC Converter Board is not functioning properly LED turns off when module is functioning properly Note When in B
285. ble routes the signal to an N type connector mounted on an rf input out put connector bracket located on the rear of the station A feedback and control loop configuration is used to regulate the PA output power The Harmonic Filter Coupler generates a dc voltage pro portional to the PA Module output power This voltage TX_VF is fed to the TX Power Control Circuitry in the Exciter Module The TX_VF voltage is compared to reference voltages to generate a dc power control volt age V_CONT The dc power control voltage V CONT is output from the Exciter Mod ule and fed through filtering circuitry in the PA to a voltage translation and current limiting circuit The output of this circuitry is V OMNI a dc voltage which controls the output power of the IPA Summary of Power Control Operation By controlling the output level of the IPA range of 0 to 10W the output power of the PA module is established The feedback and control loop TX_VF fed back to Excit er Module resulting in V CONT to control IPA output continually moni tors and maintains the proper output power from the PA 68 81091 91 9 1 00 Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz Stations Functional Manuals Sense and Detect Circuitry Introduction The PA is equipped with several sense and detect circuits to provide status signals to the Exciter Module In most cases the Exciter Module microprocessor uses these signals to determine PA operating condi tions and i
286. bound signal and allow the inbound signal to pass through the landline to station circuitry WIRELINE INTERFACE p cdd BOARD JU1010 4 2 Wire Voice Audio Path Refer to Figure 3 Voice audio signals sent to from the station via 2 wire copper pair are processed by the 2 wire audio circuit on the WIB Line 2 Audio The audio transformer in this circuit may have both inbound and outbound audio signals present simultaneously and therefore employs circuitry to pass audio in each direction while cancelling the alternate signal The 2 wire audio circuit operates as follows Landline to Station balanced audio is input to the primary of an audio trans former The signal is induced into the transformer secondary and fed to an amplifier Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and sec ondary coils provide for selectable impedance matching Refer to the illustra tion below for impedance setting information The amplifier sums the inbound and outbound signals and feeds one input to the cancellation amplifier The other input to this amplifier is the output signal only A cancellation of the outbound signal results and the output from this amplifier is the inbound signal only The signal is fed to a buffer through jumper JU1010 placed in the 2 wire position as shown below which feeds the gain adjust cir
287. card edge connector used to connect to an external battery located on the backplane may not be used as a secondary source of dc output power In order to prevent charging a battery with one or more dead cells the sup ply is designed to provide charging current only if the battery is above 21 5 V High Pow er Supplies or 10 5 V Low Power Sup plies Important Be sure to connect the battery cables exactly as shown in the illustration be low making certain to observe wire colors and polarities Storage Battery Connections Stations with a power supply module equipped with the battery char ger revert option offer the capability of reverting to battery backup pow er in the event of an ac power failure Connections associated with the battery charger revert feature are e Charger Revert Cable the station is shipped with a 4 wire cable terminated in a heavy duty 2 position connector cable kit TRN5155A shipped with station contains mating connector two 10 lengths of red and black 8 AWG gauge wires a fuse block and 60A fuse and crimp on ring lugs Make connections to the storage battery as shown in Figure 15 e Battery Temperature Cable thermistor TKN8786A and cable TKN8732A are shipped with charger style power supply cable with three wires carries a variable resistance signal from the thermistor which is mounted in close proximity to storage battery resistance
288. carrier moving erratical ly suspect Faulty Station Control Module Faulty Exciter Module Faulty PA Module continued on page 13 12 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Verifying Transmitter Circuitry Continued Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 If display OK set up R2001 to display modulation Using the handset push the PTT button and speak into the mouthpiece Verify that the display shows e f proper display is not obtained suspect faulty SCM or Exciter Module Set the R2001 for GEN MON MTR Press the PTT button and speak loudly in the mouthpiece to cause maximum deviation Display should read 5 kHz maximum e f proper display is not obtained suspect faulty SCM or Exciter Module This completes the Verifying Transmitter Circuitry test procedure If all displays and measurements are correct the transmitter circuitry may be considered to be operat ing properly Remove test equipment restore the station to normal service and return to the troubleshooting flow chart to resume troubleshooting sequence 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 13 Quantar Station Functional Manual Verifying Receiver Circuitry Analog Capable Stations IMPORTANT Performing this procedure requires that the station be taken out of service It is rec ommended that unless the station is already out of ser vice due to an equipment
289. cate module status as follows e AC On lights GREEN when On Off switch is On and the AC in put voltage is within operating range LED turns off when module is turned off ac power is removed or AC input voltage is below approximately 85 V rms e Module Fail lights RED when initially turning on or off the Pow er Supply this is normal and does not indicate a failure or when the DC to DC Converter Board is not functioning properly LED turns off when module is functioning properly Note When in Battery Revert Mode CPN1048 only neither LED is lit The cooling fan will continue to run 1 0 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 CPN1047A CPN1048A625W Power Supply Modules 5 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OPERATION DC to DC Converter Board The following theory of operation describes the operation of the CPN6067A DC to DC Converter Board circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the func tions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 3 for a block diagram of the DC to DC Converter Board 28V Main Supply Circuitry Overview The 28V Main Supply Circuitry is comprised of two mirrored switch ing type power supplies which generate the 28 V supply voltage This voltage is used as the source for the 14V and 5V supply circuits as well as the 28V supply voltage for the station modules via the
290. ch the PA is designed to operate e g VHF Range 1 UHF 900 MHz etc and the maximum output power e g 25 W 125 W etc 68 81091 91 9 1 00 TLF1930A TLF1940A TLF1880A TLF1800APower Amplifier Modules P O P101 PWR CONTROL N VOLTAGE 4 P O FROM LINE V CONT EXCITER P102 FILTER 254 VOLTAGE TRANSLATOR MODULE CIRCUITRY amp COAXIAL CABLE CURRENT LIMITER FROM o 35 POWER AMPLIFIER OUTPUT TO RF INPUT OUTPUT _ J gt N TYPE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR ON BRACKET Y RF INPUT OUTPUT REAR OF STATION CONNECTOR BRACKET V OMNI V OMNI m CIRCULATOR N TYPE 413 DBM INTERMEDIATE 0TO 10W DRIVER 35W MAX HARMONIC 25W MAX CONNECTOR MODULATED RF gt gt PERS gt gt FILTER gt C lt lt 0 2 gt lt FROM IPA DPA COUPLER TRANSMIT RF EXCITER Eu IPA 88 OUTPUT MODULE 14V IPA Y 14V Y DPA 50 OHM LOAD i cy z P101 P102 BUFFER 14V 1 DPA 8 TX_VR nad gt DETECT DETECT Y gt PIO CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY aa P101 P102 gt x BUFFER gt RESISTOR ROM P O Y INDICATES PA TYPE ANALOG
291. charger output voltage in a range of 21 V dc to 31 V dc 16 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 CPN1047A CPN1048A625W Power Supply Modules SPI Bus Interface Circuitry This circuitry consists of a D A Converter that accepts digital signals from the Station Control Module and converts them to analog signals which control the operation of the Battery Charger Revert Board These signals e Control the charger voltage to the battery BATT_VOLT_RANGE and BATT_VOLT_SELECT e Disable the Undervoltage Detect Circuitry UVLO DISABLE to allow the station to continue operation even though the battery voltage is below the desired level e Provide a watchdog signal to refresh the Watchdog Timer Cir cuitry WATCHDOG Shutdown Circuitry This circuitry accepts four input signals and generates a shutdown sig nal to shut down the battery charger for certain input signal conditions A shutdown signal will be generated for any of the following conditions e The BATT WATCHDOG signal from the Station Control Mod ule is not present indicating that the Station Control Module has failed or the station s Battery Type field has been pro grammed via RSS for NONE e The OVLO LCKOUT signal is high indicating that the battery voltage is too high e The MAIN SD SEC signal is low indicating that one of the vari ous monitoring points indicates a fault such as overcurrent condition for 14V or 5 V supplies overcurrent condi
292. ching Power Supply Operation The 5 V switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 133 kHz The PWM output pulses are fed through a driver to control a power FET which repetitively gates the 14V_RAW from the 14V Main Supply Circuitry to a power coil The result is a high induced voltage which charges the filter capacitors to approxi mately 5 V dc A current sense comparator provides a feedback sig nal to the PWM to maintain a constant output voltage Protection Circuitry An overvoltage detect circuit monitors the output voltage and if preset thresholds are exceeded turns on a FET crowbar circuit which im mediately discharges the output to protect other modules in the sta tion An overcurrent detect circuit monitors the current draw from the 5V Supply Circuitry and if a preset threshold is exceeded generates a MAIN_SD_SEC signal which shuts down the entire power supply mod ule The AC_FAIL signal from the AC to DC Converter Board is buffered and fed to 1 the diagnostics circuitry as AC_GOOD_DIAG and 2 the Battery Charger Revert Board as BATTERY_REVERT This signal acti vates battery revert mode This circuitry accepts 14V_RAW from the 14V Main Supply Circuit ry and generates 10V_SEC and 2 5V_SEC supply voltages for use by local circuitry 12 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 CPN1049A CPN1050B265W Power Supply Modules Diagnostics Circuitry Address Decode Circuitry
293. ckplane Landline to Station signals are connected at Line 1 Audio or Line 3 Audio Station to Landline signals are connected at Line 2 Audio or Line 4 Audio The WIB is equipped with two connectors to accept two plug in ASTRO modem cards one for each 4 wire modem data circuit 9 6KBPS ASTRO Modem Data Path Refer to Figure 5 9 6kbps ASTRO modem data signals are sent to from the station via 4 wire copper pairs and are processed by one of two 4 wire audio circuits on the WIB e Line 1 Audio amp Line 2 Audio e Line 3 Audio amp Line 4 Audio Both 4 wire circuits operate identically as follows Landline to Station modem data is input to the primary of an audio transformer as balanced audio The signal is induced into the trans former secondary and fed to a buffer through jumper JU1010 placed in the 4 wire position as shown at the bottom of page 8 Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and secondary coils pro vide for selectable impedance matching Refer to the illustration at the bottom of page NO TAG for impedance setting information The buffer output is fed to a modem a separate card which plugs into the WIB which converts the modem signal to detected data The data signal is then fed to the microprocessor over a serial bus The micropro cessor sends the data to the microprocessor in the Station Control Module over an interprocessor communications bus HDLC protocol Station to Landli
294. cooling fan which is thermostatically controlled supply shuts down if temperature exceeds preset threshold e Diagnostic monitoring critical internal parameters are con tinually monitored and reported to the Station Control Module which can automatically provide correction for certain operating conditions e Front panel On Off switch with built in 50A circuit breaker Motorola Inc 2000 i Commercial Government and 68P81090E44 A Printed USA Industrial Solutions Sector ace cat 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 Quantar Station Products El DESCRIPTION Continued Overview of Circuitry The power supply module contains the following circuitry Startup Inverter Circuitry provides VCC for power supply cir cuitry during initial power up Main Inverter Circuitry consists of switching type power sup ply that generates the 28V dc supply voltage 14 2 V Inverter Circuitry consists of switching type power supply that generates the 14 2V dc supply voltage 5 V Inverter Circuitry consists of switching type power sup ply that generates the 5 dc supply voltage Clock Generator Circuitry generates 67 kHz and 133 kHz clock signals used by pulse width modulators in the four inverter circuits Diagnostics Circuitry converts analog status signals to digital format for transfer to Station Control Module Address Decode Circuitry performs address decoding to pro vide chip sele
295. cription identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs functional block diagrams and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The Power Amplifier Module PA accepts a low level modulated rf sig nal from the Exciter Module and amplifies the signal for transmission via the site transmit antenna The output power is continually moni tored and regulated by a feedback and control loop with a power out put control voltage being generated by the transmitter control circuitry located in the Exciter Module The PA Modules described in this section are very similar in design and function with the major differences being the output power capabilities and operating frequency Unless otherwise noted the information pro vided in this section applies to all four models Overview of Circuitry The PA contains the following circuitry e Intermediate Power Amplifier IPA low level amplifier stage which is controlled by the transmitter control voltage from the Exciter Module provides an output of approximately 0 to 10W e Driver Power Amplifier DPA provides amplification 35W maximum o
296. ct signals for the A D and D A converters 68P81090E44 A 9 1 00 TRN7801A Power Supply Module 2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the Model TRN7801A Power Supply Module Performance Specifications Table 1 TRN7801A Power Supply Module Performance Specifications 85 042764 Operating Temperature Range 222 E Input Voltage Range 21 0 34 5 V dc 28 6 V dc 5 16A 28 6 V dc 5 12 8A derated 14 2 V dc 5 9A 5 1 V dc 5 9A Steady State Output Voltages Output Current Ratings Total Output Power Rating TUS All outputs 50 mV measured with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope at 25 High Frequency individual harmonic Output Ripple voltage limits 10 2 100 MHz frequency band 28 6V 1 5 mV p p 14 2V 3 0 mV 5V 5 0mV p p Short Circuit Current 0 5 A avg max 68P81090E44 A 3 9 1 00 Quantar Station Products CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the power supply module controls indicators and all input and output external connections POWER SUPPLY MODULE FRONT PANEL MODULE FAIL LED ON OFF SWITCH asss FRONT VIEW CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE DC INPUT CONNECTOR Figure 1 Power Supply Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 4 68 81090 44 9 1 00 TRN7801A Power Supply Module 4 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory
297. ctional Theory of Operation page 3 Synthesizer and VCO page 3 RE Switch Circuit Zeus ah p un NOTA sa E E rU DUE XE TE QE AUN page 4 Microprocessor page 4 TX Power Control Circuitry page 5 VHF POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE 25W 125W R1 amp R2 68P81086E23 Description i lad aa yy suqu nu epe page 1 General Description doct bac Mak u ua er uk ax peed page 1 Overview Of CIRCUITRY Hadid os Uus la USA page 1 Controls Indicators and page 2 Functional Theory of Operation page 3 Sigrial Path eut eed dite oru Set cA eoo e foc EL Eee qns page 3 Output Power Control ck ri ERG pees pee Saa sd a gus esia a page 3 Sense Detect Circuitry u unan wei eee bb daa ede ERE Wax eI page 4 Cooling Fans Control Circuitry page 6 UHF POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE R1 25W R2 110W 4 110 68P81088E44 Description y k ER aha ade Gee A Wa
298. ctor may be separated by simply pulling apart as shown Figure 26 Two Locations for Telephone Line Connections 68 81096 57 11 15 99 47 Quantar Station Functional Manual Connecting Telephone Lines Continued Note Stations equipped with a 4 wire Wireline Interface Board Model CLN6955 can support a single 4 wire or a single 2 wire telephone line connection Stations equipped with an 8 wire Wireline Interface Board Model CLN6956 can sup port two 4 wire or a single 2 wire tele phone line connection Refer to the Wireline Interface Board section in this manual for de tails 2 Wire 4 Wire Jumper Setting Wireline Interface Boards are shipped with the 2 wire 4 wire jumper JU1010 installed in the 4 wire position If required for your installation move the jumper to the 2 wire position Refer to the appropriate per model Wireline Interface Board section in this manual for jumper details Input Output Impedance Matching Jumper Settings Wireline Interface Boards are shipped with the input output impedance matching jumpers installed in the 600 positions If required for your installa tion move the jumpers to the desired positions Refer to the appropriate model Wireline Interface Board section in this manual for jumper details System Type vs Wireline Circuit Matrix The following table shows which of the four 4 wireline circuits to use for various system types
299. cuitry Under control of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides eight levels of gain ad just 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 and 40dB The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to an A D converter which digi tizes the audio signal into a PCM output This output is fed serially to the PAS IC which places the data in the proper TDM timeslot as instructed by the microprocessor in the SCM and output to the SCM on the TDM Bus Station to Landline audio is input to the PASIC in the form of PCM data on the TDM bus The PASIC extracts the data and feeds it to a D A con verter which takes the PCM data and converts it to an analog audio sig nal The audio signal is fed to the gain adjust circuitry Under control of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain ad just OdB 6dB 12dB and 18dB The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed thru a 2 pole low pass filter and into the inputs of two amplifiers The outputs of the amplifiers are fed to two transistors which are connected a push pull configu ration to drive the primary of an audio transformer The audio signal is induced into the secondary and output to the landline system via ei ther the 50 pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector as bal anced audio JUMPERS gt JI IN POSITION 1 027UF r IMPEDANCE SETTINGS 033UF F 511 Y Y Y 033UF
300. d FPA 100W only stages These dc signals IPA_VF DPA_VF and FPA_VF used for diagnostic purposes only are fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry Reflected Power Detect Circuitry The Harmonic Filter Coupler provides a dc voltage approximately pro portional to the reflected power at the output of the stage This dc signal TX_VR is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry The signal indicates the amount of potentially harmful re flected power at the PA output If the reflected power exceeds a set limit the Exciter Module will shut down the PA V_OMNI Detect Circuitry A voltage divider circuit provides a dc voltage approximately propor tional to the V_OMNI control voltage from the Voltage Translator amp Cur rent Limiter circuit This dc signal V OMNI is fed to the Exciter Mod ule via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry 14V Detect Circuitry A voltage divider circuit provides a dc voltage approximately propor tional to the 14 V dc input voltage from the station Power Supply Mod ule This dc signal 14 2V REF is fed to the Exciter Module via an ana log multiplexer and filter circuitry 28V Detect Circuitry 100W Only A voltage divider circuit provides a dc voltage approximately propor tional to the 28 V dc input voltage from the station Power Supply Mod ule This dc signal 28V REF is fed to the Exciter Module via an ana log multipl
301. d below DISCONNECT T CONNECTOR FROM CONNECTOR 222 TO NEXT STATION TO NEXT STATION Using a Torx 15 driver remove front panel and Station Control Board as described in Figure 6 The Station Control Board software must now be re moved from the old board and installed onto the replace ment board The software is contained on a single FLASH SIMM You must remove the FLASH SIMM from the re placement board and install the FLASH SIMM from the old board The following illustration shows the location of the FLASH SIMM 26 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Replacing Station Control Module for modules in IntelliRepeater Ethernet Networks Continued Note f the existing FLASH SIMM is faulty contact the System Support Center at 1 800 221 7144 to obtain a replacement part Note The replacement board must have the same model number as the faulty board e g CLN6960 If it does not contact the System Support Center at 1 800 221 7144 for instruc tions on how to proceed Note When inserting Station Control Board into cage place your thumbs on the BNC and D type connectors and firmly push the board into the backplane connector Alignment Procedures RX Wireline TX Wireline Squelch Adjust Battery Equalization if required Power Output Tx Deviation Gain Adjust Reference Modulation For ASTRO stations also perform RSSI and Simulcast ASTRO Launch Time Offset align ment Replacement
302. dBm Insert tuning probe into cavity H1 and adjust tuning screw 1 for a PEAK Leave tuning probe in cavity H1 and adjust tuning screw 2 for a DIP Insert tuning probe into cavity H2 and adjust tuning screw 3 for a DIP Insert tuning probe into cavity H3 and adjust tuning Screw 4 for a DIP Insert tuning probe into cavity H4 Decrease output from signal generator to 5 dBm Adjust tuning screw 5 for a DIP Then turn tuning screw 5 1 4 turn CCW Note that dip will not be as sharp for screw 5 as it was for screws 2 thru 4 PRESELECTOR ASSEMBLY TO E STATION RECEIVE ANTENNA H1 PORT 2 9 e He D 3 H 4 POl Ha i H5 REGENEN 5 E BOARD Location of Tuning Screws and Cavity Probe Holes 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 39 Quantar Station Functional Manual UHF Tuning Procedure Calculating Proper Alignment Frequency Use one of the following two methods to calculate the alignment fre quency to be generated by the signal generator For stations with a single receive frequency calculate the frequency of the alignment signal as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 From the site documentation or the RSS determine the station receive frequency Add 200 kHz If Receiver Module is Range 1 determine the alignment frequency as follows If frequency from Step 1 is gt 431 MHz then alignment frequency 431 MHz If frequency from Step 1 is lt 405 MHz then alignment f
303. dBm as shown on the R2001 display If no AG AS e e number is displayed consider isolation to be greater than 105 dB which exceeds the specification S OOOO O Q 2 Subtract the absolute number noted in Step 4 from the number noted in Step 2 The difference should be higher than 100 dB to meet specification for Isolation 50 OHM TERMINATOR Repeat Steps 1 5 for Low Pass High Notch cavities with the following exceptions 1 Set Frequency Generator and R2001 for Rx or Tx frequency whichever is HIGHER 2 Connect R2001 to Low Pass duplexer input cavity 1 3 Connect terminator to cavity 6 Attenuator set to 0 dB UHF Duplexer Module POST TUNING CHECKS Make sure all notch adjustment lock nuts 6 are tight o o o O o o ease sure all pass adjustment lock nuts 6 are tight Figure 5 Quantar Quantro UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure Sheet 3 of 3 68P81087E94 A 9 1 00 1 1 Quantro UHF Station Functional Manual THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 2 68P81087E94 A 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA DUPLEXER MODULE Options X182AG RX 806 824 MHz TX 851 869 MHz X182AH RX 896 902 MHz TX 935 941 MHz
304. des ant connector bracket TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket X249AW RF Cabling X249AW RF Cabling TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable TRN7663A AC Line Cord TRN7663A AC Line Cord X163AL Blank Panels X163AL Blank Panels TRN7695A Single Slot Wide Blank Panel TRN7695A Single Slot Wide Blank Panel TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware X430AA 12 Cabinet X430AA 12 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet TTN5040A Grommet 5040 Grommet X362AA Packing X362AA Packing TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet X436AH Instruction Manual X436AH Instruction Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual Continued 68P81095E05 B 9 1 00 OPTION X660AA SELECTED IN STEP 3 900 MHz 100W Transmitter Source Option Description Kit X660AA Quantar 900 MHz 100W
305. ds con nected together via cables These boards contain circuitry as follows DC Input Board CPN6064B e Input Conditioning Circuitry consists of dc filtering compo nents reverse polarity circuitry to protect power supply circuitry from reverse polarity connection to external DC source Startup Delay Circuitry Filter Circuitry to provide filtering of DC input voltage Reverse Polarity Circuitry to protect power supply circuit ry from reverse polarity connection to external DC source Startup Delay Circuitry to provide a delay of approximate ly 1 5 seconds from time on off switch is turned on until the power supply becomes functional allows pre charge of high capacity filter capacitors to limit in rush current on power up Filter Circuitry to provide filtering of DC output voltage e Inverter Circuitry and B consists of two inverter circuits that accept gating signals from the Inverters A B Control Circuit ry on DC Output Board to provide 133 kHz signal to Output Fil ter Circuitry and to the 5V and 14V Power Supply Circuits on DC Output Board Output Filter Circuitry consists of dc filtering components to filter the 28 V dc output voltage supplied to the station modules DC Output Board CPN6068A e Inverters A B Control Circuitry consists of switching type circuitry that generates the 133 kHz V GATE 1 and V GATE 2 signals to the nverter A and Inverter B circuitry on the DC Input
306. dule requires the following general adjustments e Tune high pass low notch cavities for maximum pass and re ject response e Tune low pass high notch cavities for maximum pass and re ject response e Check high pass low notch and low pass high notch cavi ties for insertion loss e Check high pass low notch and low pass high notch cavi ties for isolation Field tuning of the duplexer module requires the following test equipment e Motorola R2001 Communications Analyzer or equivalent RF Millivoltmeter Boonton 92E or equivalent RF Signal Generator HP8656B or equivalent 50 2 N type terminator Tuning tool 5 32 x 4 screwdriver N to N bullet connector UG29A U or equivalent 7 16 Nutdriver 7 16 Open End Wrench N to BNC Adapter UG349A U N to N Connector UG57B U 68 81087 94 9 1 00 UHF Duplexer Module Setting Up for Tuning Duplexer Perform the preliminary tasks shown in Figure 4 to prepare for tuning the duplexer module Disconnect N type connectors 12 and remove cables 6 from cavities ioi iei Piel ioi io 6 9 sl OG LOW PASS HIGH PASS HIGH NOTCH lt s LOW NOTCH CAVITIES CAVITIES For each cavity 6 use open end wrench and loosen locknuts 2 per cavity Figure 4 Preliminary Tasks Prior t
307. duplexer option Temperature Range ambient VHF 132 154 MHz R1 150 174 MHz R2 VHF 132 154 MHz R1 150 174 MHz R2 UHF 403 433 MHz R1 438 470 MHz R2 470 494 MHz R3 494 520 MHz R4 UHF 403 433 MHz R1 438 470 MHz R2 800 900 851 870 MHz 935 941 MHz 800 900 806 825 MHz 896 902 MHz 470 494 MHz R3 494 520 MHz R4 VHF 30 25 12 5 kHz UHF 800 12 5 25 kHz 900 12 5 kHz 12V 25W radios 24V 100W 110W and 125W radios VHF 21 5 MHz UHF 800 45 MHz 900 39 MHz 30 C to 60 C xxviii 68P81095E05 B 9 1 00 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Cont d Receiver VHF UHF 800 900 Frequencies 21 45 MHz 1st 73 35 MHz 1st 73 35 MHz 1st 73 35 MHz 1st 450 kHz 2nd 450 kHz 2nd 450 kHz 2nd 450 kHz 2nd Preselector Bandwidth VHF UHF 4 MHz 800 19 MHz 900 6 MHz Sensitivity 12 dB SINAD VHF 0 25 uV UHF 0 35 uV 800 900 0 30 uV Sensitivity 20 dB Quieting VHF 0 35 uV UHF 0 5 uV 800 900 0 42 uV VHF UHF 800 900 Adjacent Channel Rejection 90 dB 25 30 kHz 75 dB 12 5 kHz 70 dB 12 5 kHz 70dB 80 dB 23 5 kHz 85 dB 25 kHz 80 db 25 kHz VHF Intermodulation Rejection 85 dB 25 30 kHz 80 dB 30 kHz Spurious and Image Rejection 100 dB Wireline Output 20 dBm to 0 dBm 9 60 Rated System Deviation 1 kHz Audio Response Analog Mode Bl 6 dB per octave de emphasis 300 3000 Hz referenced to 1000 Audio Distortion Less t
308. dware CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware X430AA 12 Cabinet X430AA 12 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet 5040 Grommet TTN5040A Grommet X362AA Packing X362AA Packing TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet X436AA Instruction Manual X436AA Instruction Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual Continued 68P81095E05 B 9 1 00 OPTION X240AA SELECTED IN STEP 3 Quantar UHF Range 1 25W Transmitter OPTION X640AA SELECTED IN STEP 3 Quantar UHF Range 1 110W Transmitter Source Option Description Source Option Description Kit Kit X240AA Quantar UHF R1 25W Transmitter X640AA Quantar UHF R1 110W Transmitter TLE2731A 25 W Power Amplifier Module UHF R1 TTE2061A 110 W Power Amplifier Module UHF R1 Option TKN8699A PA to Exciter RF Cable Option TKN8699A RF Cable from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X132AA Exciter Module UHF R1 X132AA Exciter Module UHF R1 CLE1230A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CLE1230A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CHN6100A A
309. e 2 Typical Call Flow Chart With Gated Access Incorporated 68P81096E11 O 12 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products STATION RSS PROGRAMMING In order to support dual control of gated access by TRC and SAM certain station parameters must be programmed using the Quantar Quantro Radio Service Software RSS program Version 09 05 00 or higher Refer to the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for details on making these settings Step 1 Connect a PC running the Station RSS program to one of the two stations and read the station codeplug Step 2 Access the Hardware Configuration screen and set the Multi Coded Squelch field to MULTI PL ONLY to enable the Multi Coded Squelch feature as shown in Figure 3 MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE BASE STATION PRODUCTS VER XX XX XX MAIN SERVICE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION Please Enter The Serial Number Type Alphanumeric Punctuation Chars Serial Number Station Name Hardware Platform QUANTAR System Type CONVENTIONAL Station Type ANALOG ONLY Rx Freq Band 1 UHF_R2 438 470 MHz Tx Freq Band UHF_R2 438 470 MHz Rx Freq Band 2 NONE IR Freq Band NONE PA Power Rating 25 Watts Output limited to xxx Watts Set to MULTI PL ONLY Power Supply AC LOW Battery Type NONE OPTIONS Wireline 8 WIRE Freq Ref INTERNAL STD 9 1101 Operation DISABLED Multi Coded Squelch MULTI PL ONLY Interface DISABLED Scanni
310. e RSS run the diagnostics again after the repair is made to ensure that the replacement module passes all diagnos tic tests e If the faulty module was detected by an operational failure perform the operation to ensure that the repair corrected the reported de tected failure 20 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Replacing Power Amplifier Module Replacement Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Turn off station power refer to page 20 Using a Torx 15 driver remove anti vibration screw s if installed from top and or bottom of module front panel Disconnect mini UHF connector on rf cable connecting Exciter Module to Power Amplifier Module Slide the module out to the first stop Disconnect the N type connector rf output from the module from the lower left side of module Remove faulty module from cage Install replacement Power Amplifier Module by sliding module into cage about 2 inches from full insertion Con nect the rf output cable to the N type connector at the low er left side of the module Slide the module in completely and firmly seat the module connector into the backplane Do not slam the module against the backplane or push any harder than necessary to seat the connectors Now reconnect the rf cable from the Exciter Module Restore power to the station Post Replacement Optimization Procedure Perform the Power O
311. e between the SCM and external devices such as the RSS port an Ethernet port and miscellaneous backplane connectors Digital Signal Processor DSP and DSP ASIC Circuitry performs high speed processing of audio and signaling data signals Station Reference Circuitry generates the 2 1 MHz refer ence signal used throughout the station HDLC Bus Control Circuitry provides bus control to allow Host Microprocessor communications port SCC1 to communi cate with the Wireline Interface Board and other optional mod ules via the HDLC interprocessor communications bus Audio Interface Circuitry Comprised of a Local Audio ASIC that routes the various audio input signals such as microphone wireline and receiver audio to output devices such as external speaker built in local speaker and exciter modulation inputs Input Output Ports Circuitry two multi line output buses allow miscellaneous control signals to be sent to various circuits throughout the station two multi line input buses allow miscel laneous inputs to be received from throughout the station Supply Voltages Circuitry contains filtering and regulator circuitry which accepts 14 2 V and 5 V from backplane and generates the operating voltages required by the SCM circuitry LED Board CLN7098A Front Panel LEDs and Switches general purpose input out put ports control eight status LEDs and accept inputs from four momentary switches all located on
312. e coax cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable TRN7663A AC Line Cord X163AL Blank Panels TRN7695A Single Slot Wide Blank Panel TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware X430AA 12 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet TTN5040A Grommet X362AA Packing TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet X436AD Instruction Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual Continued 9 1 00 68P81095E05 B The following lists available options that may be selected in addition to the standard model and options described in Steps 1 thru 4 AVAILABLE HARDWARE OPTIONS FOR QUANTAR STATION Option Category AC Input Supplies DC Input Supplies X30AA 625W Power Supply with Battery Charger X121AA 210W Power Supply 12 24V DC Input CPN1048C 625W Power Supply Assembly w Battery Charger TRN7802A 210W Power Supply Assembly 12 24 V DC Input TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit TKN8732A Battery Charger Cable Kit TKN8786A Battery Temperature Sensor TRN5155A 10 Extension Cable w connectors and fuse block TRN5155A 10 Extension Cable w connectors and fuse block CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFl Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFl Screws 2 CLN7261A AC Line Cord Ferrite RFI Suppressor CLN7419A Power Supply Front Panel w Screws X30AB 265W Power Supply with Battery Charger X112AA 600W Power Supply 24V DC Input CPN1050E 265W Power Supply Assembly w
313. e data serially through a 3 pole low pass filter to the gain adjust circuitry Under control of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain adjust OdB 12dB and 18dB The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to the inputs of two amplifi ers The outputs of the amplifiers are fed to two transistors which are connected in a push pull configuration to drive the primary of an audio transformer The modem data signal is induced into the secondary and output to the landline system via either the 50 pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector as balanced audio 10 68 81094 77 9 1 00 CLN6955A and CLN6957A Wireline Interface Boards LANDLINE TO STATION VOICE AUDIO PATH 2 WIRE VOICE SIGNAL PATH CIRCUIT GAIN CONTROL FROM PASIC JU1010 Ps PLACED IN gt INBOUND 2 WIRE POSITION AMPLIFIER elisha o GAIN PCM VOICE INBOUND amp g gt gt ADJUST gt AND DATA OUTBOUND AMPLIFIER BUFFER CIRCUITRY STATION SIGNALS CONTROL P O AD MODULE 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR CONVERTER TDM BUS CLN6
314. e equipment must then be optimized before placing into operation An overview of the optimization tasks is as follows e Customize the station codeplug and saving the data to the station e Perform the following alignment tasks Rx Wireline Tx Wireline Receiver RSSI calibration Receiver Squelch Adjust Battery Equalization Reference Oscillator Simulcast ASTRO Launch Time Offset required for ASTRO Simulcast systems only e Perform post optimization checkout procedures such as verifying power output deviation etc For detailed instructions to perform these optimization tasks follow the procedures provided in Optimizing a New Installation located in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Commercial Government otorola 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector 68 81086 72 All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP M OPERATION DESCRIPTION This section describes the switches pushbuttons connectors and LED indicators provided on the Quantar station used during local operation of the station and servicing Summary of Switches Pushbuttons and Connectors The following switches pushbuttons and connectors are provided to allow the station to be operated and or serviced locally The location and function of these controls and connectors is shown in Figure 1 Switches Pushbuttons and Connectors
315. e output of the modem is fed to the gain adjust circuitry Under con trol of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain adjust OdB 6dB 12dB and 18dB The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed thru a 2 pole low pass filter and into the inputs of two amplifiers The outputs of the amplifiers are fed to two transistors which are connected a push pull configu ration to drive the primary of an audio transformer The modem data signal is induced into the secondary and output to the landline system via either the 50 pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector as balanced audio 68 81094 77 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Description of Audio Data Signal Paths Continued The Quantar station supports SECURENET transparent mode only Note Depending on customer preference phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the screw termi nal connector on the station backplane Landline to Station signals are connected at Line 1 Audio Station to Landline signals are connected at Line 2 Audio For SECURENET systems make sure jump ers JU1011 and JU1012 are placed as shown below WIRELINE 9938 INTERFACE BOARD T1000 T1001 SECURENET POSITIONS JU1011 JU1012 12KBPS SECURENET Modem Data Path Re
316. e technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Functional block diagrams are provided in Figure 2 TLF1940A 20 W and Figure 3 TLF1800A and TLF1930A 100 W As mentioned previously the four PA modules are similar in design and function The following theory of operation applies to all four modules except where noted RF Signal Path Output Power Control Note that V_OMNI does not control the output level of the DPA directly but serves as on off control for the DPA stage A low level modulated rf signal approximately 13 dBm from the Ex citer module is input to the PA module via a coax cable The signal is input to the IPA and amplified to approximately 0 to 10W depending on the dc power control voltage V_CONT from the Exciter Module On the 20W model the IPA output is fed to a DPA which provides final amplification On the 100W model the IPA output is fed to a DPA and then to an FPA which provides final amplification The output of the DPA 85W maximum or FPA 160W maximum is fed to a circulator which passes the transmit signal to the harmonic filter coupler while routing all reflected power to a 50Q load The output of the circulator is fed to the harmonic filter coupler This cir cuit provides highly selective bandpass filtering and couples the signal to an N type connector mounted to the module casting A coax ca
317. e via the SPI bus The 21 45 MHz or 73 35 MHz 1st i f signal is filtered and input to a cus tom receiver IC This component contains circuitry for 2nd injection and mixing amplification and A D analog to digital conversion re sulting in a digitized receive signal This signal is fed as differential data to the Station Control Module Introduction The Station Control Module SCM is the microprocessor based con troller for the station Major components include an MC68360 micro processor a 56002 Digital Signal Processor DSP and two ASIC de vices host and DSP The SCM operates as follows Station Control Module Operation The Host Microprocessor uP serves as the controller for the SCM op erating from the station software stored in FLASH memory This soft ware determines the system capabilities of the station analog ASTRO SECURENET etc The Host uP communicates with the station mod ules and the SCM circuitry via address and data buses an HDLC bus and a SPI bus External communications ports include a serial port SCM front panel and backplane and an Ethernet port backplane The DSP and DSP ASIC perform the necessary digital processing for the station audio and data signals The DSP circuitry interfaces with the Receiver Module receive audio the Exciter Module modulation sig nal the Wireline Interface Board wireline audio and external audio devices microphone handset external speaker and station l
318. eceive rf signal A custom receiver IC then performs an ana log to digital conversion of the received signal and outputs a differential data signal to the Station Control Module Overview of Circuitry The receiver module contains the following circuitry Frequency Synthesizer Circuitry consisting of phase locked loop and VCO generates the 1st LO injection signal Ceramic Preselector Filter provides 7 pole bandpass filter ing of the station receive rf input Receiver Front End Circuitry performs filtering amplification and the 1st down conversion of the receive rf signal Custom Receiver IC Circuitry consists of a custom IC which performs the 2nd down conversion filtering amplification and analog to digital conversion of the receive signal Address Decode amp A D Converter Circuitry performs address decoding to provide board and chip select signals also con verts analog status signals to digital format for transfer to Station Control Module Local Power Supply Regulation accepts 14 2V dc input and outputs 10V and 5V dc operating voltages Motorola Inc 2000 Commercial Government and All Rights Hasdrved Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81086E76 D Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar and Quantro Station Products CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the receiver module controls indicators and all input and output e
319. ected at Line 2 Audio The WIB is equipped with a connector to ac cept a plug in ASTRO modem card 9 6KBPS ASTRO Modem Data Path Refer to Figure 5 9 6kbps ASTRO modem data signals are sent to from the station via 4 wire copper pairs and are processed by the 4 wire audio circuit on the WIB Line 1 Audio amp Line 2 Audio The 4 wire circuit operates as follows Landline to Station modem data is input to the primary of an audio transformer as balanced audio The signal is induced into the trans former secondary and fed to a buffer through jumper JU1010 placed in the 4 wire position as shown at the bottom of page 8 Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and secondary coils pro vide for selectable impedance matching Refer to the illustration at the bottom of page 8 for impedance setting information The buffer output is fed to a modem a separate card which plugs into the WIB which converts the modem signal to detected data The data signal is then fed to the microprocessor over a serial bus The micropro cessor sends the data to the microprocessor in the Station Control Module over an interprocessor communications bus HDLC protocol Station to Landline modem data is input to the microprocessor from the Station Control Module microprocessor via the interprocessor com munications bus HDLC protocol The microprocessor feeds the data to the modem which converts the data to a modem signal Th
320. ection to Connection to Comparator Note 1 Microwave System Note 2 OFF ON ON OFF n a n a n a n a Position Note 1 External Transmit Clock located on the Wireline Configuration RSS screen must be set to DISABLED Note 2 External Transmit Clock located on the Wireline Configuration RSS screen must be set to ENABLED Figure 27 Making V 24 Board Connections 50 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation Connecting External Reference Overview Note For standalone stations equipped with an internal UHSO module make sure the In some cases e g Simulcast 900 MHZ etc the use of a frequency BNC connector 30 located on the back reference other than the internal reference oscillator located on the plane is terminated as shown below Station Control Board is required In these cases either internal Ultra High Stability Oscillator UHSO available as an option or an ex ternal 5 MHz or 10 MHz source typically from a rubidium based stan dard must be employed Without one of these sources connected the station synthesizers will not maintain the required stability Single Station Connections For stations without the internal UHSO option connect the output of an exter nal 5 MHz or 10 MHz reference source to one of two station connectors as shown in Figure 28 The external source must remain connected and pow ered at
321. ed 133 KHZ DC FAIL ALARM gt eb gt REF DCINPUT DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY vec REF DETECTORS COUPLER DC FAIL ALARM gt 28V BULK STARTUP ISOLATION 12V PULSE TRANSFORMER STARTUP BIAS Y 5 V INVERTER CIRCUITRY WIDTH p e gt CONNECTOR MODULATOR 1 X gt TRANSISTOR or 5V DC SWITCH 5v 25 TO 2E POWER FET gt STATION JIL SSS SWITCH MODULES VIA VCC FET 30 133 KHZ Y BI BACKPLANE mm y _ PULSE aes a WIDTH gt gt 5V OVERCURRENT CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUITRY TUNE SAIVER CROWBAR 67 KHZ OVERVOLTAGE TE DETECT 72 2 amp lt SURGE CURRENT REF 267 KHZ DELAY 133 KHZ 133 KHZ CLOCK JUL gps pee TEE GENERATOR gt 2 P gt gt gt REF gt CIRCUITRY 267 KHZ Figure 2 600W DC DC Power Supply Module Functional Block Diagram Sheet 1 of 2 10 68P81090E44 A 9 1 00 TRN7801A Power Supply Module DC FAIL ALARM STARTUP INVERTER CIRCUITRY 28V BULK r FROM 1 MAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRY ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY FROM STATION CONTROL BOARD DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY RIPPLE DETECT ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY gt gt p FET SWITCH FAN FAULT DETECT CIRCUITRY CONVERTER SPI BUS SPI BUS TO FROM STATION CONTROL MODULE Figure 2 600W DC DC Powe
322. ed based on the ambient temperature CPN1050 only e Limited In Rush Current Circuitry limits in rush current to less than 30 A in all conditions The Models CPN1049A and CPN1050B differ only in the inclusion of battery charger revert board CPN1050B only Unless otherwise noted the information provided in this section applies to both models Power Supply Module Simplified Block Diagram The illustration below provides a simplified block diagram of a Power Supply Module with battery charger showing how the three circuit boards interconnect A detailed block diagram and functional theory of operation for each board is provided later in this section beginning on page 8 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5V DC esa asa a oaa SUPPLY VOLTAGES AC INPUT AC TO DC 400 V DC DC TO DC 50 60 HZ CONVERTER CONVERTER TO 110V 220V AC BOARD BOARD 14 V DC STATION MODULES i VIA BACKPLANE BATTERY gt CHARGER REVERT 9 CONNECTS BOARD BATTERY CHARGING CURRENT 4 REVERT CURRENT 2 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 CPN1049A CPN1050B265W Power Supply Modules Overview of Circuitry The power supply module is comprised of three circuit boards con nected together via cables These boards contain circuitry as follows AC to DC Converter Board CPN6065B Input Conditioning Circuitry consists of ac line transient protection EMI filteri
323. eful near sources of high voltage The good ground provided by the wrist strap will also increase the danger of lethal shock from accidentally touching high voltage sources S BANANA JACK ONE ON EACH SIDE OF CAGE A DO NOT insert or remove station modules with power applied This may result in damage to the e Do not insert or remove modules with power applied Always modules turn off the station using the On Off switch located on the front of the Power Supply Module before inserting or removing mod ules e All spare modules should be kept in a conductive bag for storage and transporting When shipping modules to the repair depot always pack in conductive material 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 1 9 Quantar Station Functional Manual General Replacement Information Continued Care of Gold Plated Connector Contacts The connections between the modules and the station backplane board are made with gold plated card edge connector contacts to pro vide maximum reliability Gold plated materials do not form a non con ductive oxide layer and therefore should not require cleaning under normal conditions When the modules have been subjected to many extraction insertion cycles or if the station is operated in a dusty environment the contacts may require cleaning Do not use an eraser or any type of abrasive sub stance to clean either the module card edge connectors
324. ence Voltage Circuitry 4 page 9 Diagnostics Circuitry cemere euer ed rated oie eet page 10 Address Decode Citcuitty A Ey hiis hp dae grege page 10 Startup Shutdown Control Circuitry 11 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT ANTENNA RELAY OPTION ANTENNA RELAY Option X371AA 68P81086E22 Description y cepere eed cect ttp eee Cue Fue Bees n eee page 1 GeneraliD sctiption EI de URDU Gree vee PM iniit e EE tp ae page 1 Input and Output Connections page 2 Option page 3 continued on next page viii 68P81095E05 B 9 1 00 Performance lt page 3 Mounting Locations page 4 Functional Theory of Operation page 5 TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTIONS VHF TRIPLE CIRCULATOR OPTION Options X676AA AC 68P81086E34 Description s sassa page 1 General Description us arrsa supa ares RR Und we RE RM E SAE E Ae DIR page 1 Options
325. epeater ASTRO CAI VA VV YL LY VA VV LY VA VV Continued 9 1 00 68P81095E05 B xiii VHF The following tables show the available power and band options Output Power 25W 125W Frequency Range VHF High Band Range 1 Option 132 154 MHz Option X530AA VHF High Band igh 2 150 174 MHz X530AB NOTE Customer specified frequencies which are in the 150 154 MHz range are automatically assigned to Range 2 by Order Processing unless one of the following options is ordered X325 125W only Specifies Range 1 Exciter overrides automatic assignment to Range 2 where the transmit frequency is between 150 and 154 MHz X326 Specifies Range 1 Receiver overrides automatic assignment to Range 2 where the receive fre quency is between 150 and 154 MHz These options are typically used to ensure that the transmit and receive frequencies are in the required customer range this is required for use with a duplexer module UHF Output Power 25W 100W 110W Frequency Range UHF Range 1 Option Not Available Option 403 433 MHz X240AA X640AA UHF Range 2 Option Option 438 470 MHz X240AB Not Available UHF Range 3 Not Available Not Available Option 470 494 MHz X640AC UHF Range 4 Not Available Option Not Available 494 520 MHz x X640AD 800 9
326. equency set to Rx or Tx frequency whichever is LOWER Output level set to 10 dBm Figure 5 Quantar Quantro UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure Sheet 1 of 3 9 1 00 68P81087E94 A 9 Quantar and Quantro UHF Station Functional Manuals VERIFYING INSERTION LOSS Range setto 10 dBm BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER Connect test equipment as shown Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the millivoltmeter co zz 6 dB IN LINE PAD 50 OHM UG349A N TO BNC CONNECTOR Lg Connectthe duplexer cables and test equipment to the duplexer as shown Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the millivoltmeter Subtract the absolute number noted in Step 2 from the number noted in Step 4 The difference should be less than 1 3 dB to meet specification for Insertion Loss Repeat Steps 1 5 for Low Pass High Notch cavities with the following exceptions 1 Set Frequency Generator for Rx or Tx frequency whichever is LOWER 2 Connect Millivoltmeter to Low Pass duplexer input cavity 1 3 Connect terminator to cavity 6 HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR oooo ooo O o ooo ooo ooo do soot ooo ooo oo
327. er Amplifier Module 2 page 21 Replacing Exciter page 22 Replacing Power Supply Module page 23 Replacing Station Control page 24 Replacing Wireline Interface Board page 30 Replacing Receiver Module and or Preselector Assembly VHF and UHF page 32 Replacing Receiver Module 800 MHz and 900 MHz page 33 Replacing ASTRO Modem Card page 34 Replacing Backplane 22 35 Preselector Field Tuning Procedure page 36 Required Test Equipment 2 eie eed e eee ep d ver bey DUE uis page 36 VHF Tuning Procedure aus ee et ed at etn pac qu Not pe bere er page 37 UHF Tauning Procedure usus usa a tee een ee A eie dui DERE page 40 STATION MODULES RECEIVER MODULE VHF Ranges 1 and 2 Includes Preselector 68P81086E28 Description usss a lama Hea eee ea aa aes page 1 Generali Description nsn e Sere ag acha ma ete ad Cha ox COR x bte page 1 Overview Of CITGUIl
328. erating temperature 60 C It may be necessary to have air conditioning or other climate control equipment in stalled to satisfy the environmental requirements 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Quantar Station Functional Manual AC Input Power Requirements Note If you wish to connect the station to a 220 VAC outlet you must obtain a line cord employing HAR flexible cord with fittings approved by a safety testing agency in the end use country Equipment Mounting Methods Note Although cabinets can physically house multiple stations thermal limitations may reduce the maximum number of stations for a given cabinet size Consult Motorola System Engineering or the Product System Planner if you anticipate possible thermal li mitations The Quantar station is equipped with a multiple output dc power sup ply module various models available that operates from 90Vrms to 280Vrms 50 or 60 Hz ac input power automatic range and line fre quency selection A standard 3 prong line cord is supplied to con nect the power supply rear of station to the ac source It is recommended that a standard 3 wire grounded electrical outlet be used as the ac source The outlet must be connected to an ac source capable of supplying a maximum of 766 Watts For a nominal 110V ac input the ac source must supply 8 5 amperes and should be protected by a circuit breaker rated at 15 amperes For a nominal 220V ac input the ac source mus
329. ergency support An example would be work around high voltage sources A second person may be required to remove power and call for emergency aid if an accident occurs to the first person Note Use the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH lifting equation to deter mine whether a one or two person lift is required when a system component must be removed and re placed in its rack p If troubleshooting the equipment while power is applied be aware of the live circuits DO NOT operate the transmitter of any radio unless all RF connectors are secure and all connectors are properly terminated All equipment must be properly grounded in accordance with Motorola Standards and Guideline for Com munications Sites R56 68P81089E50 and specified installation instructions for safe operation p Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect if from overheating these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered p Only a qualified technician familiar with similar electronic equipment should service equipment Some equipment components can become extremely hot during operation Turn off all power to the equip ment and wait until sufficiently cool before touching Human Exposure Compliance This equipment is designed to generate and radiate radio frequency RF energy by means of an external antenna When terminated into non radiating
330. ernment and Inc 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81087E94 A Batted E oe 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Quantro UHF Station Functional Manuals ADJUSTMENTS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 2 shows the location of the adjustment screws and rf input and output connectors for the duplexer module LOWER FREQUENCY HIGHER FREQUENCY RF CONNECTOR RF CONNECTOR RX OR TX RX OR TX HIGHER FREQUENCY NOTCH LOWER FREQUENCY NOTCH TRIMMER SCREWS TRIMMER SCREWS gt VF gt ol 2 CHS ACH Ho GL 9 KJ k F LOWER FREQUENCY HIGHER FREQUENCY PASS RESONATORS PASS RESONATORS RX INPUT TX OUTPUT CONNECTS TO SINGLE RX TX ANTENNA Figure 2 Quantar Quantro UHF Duplexer Module Adjustment Screws and Input Output Connections 2 68P81087E94 A 9 1 00 UHF Duplexer Module 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the duplexer module Performance Specifications Table 1 Duplexer Performance Specifications Options X182AC AF Operating Frequency Model X182AC 403 435 MHz Model X182AD 435 470 MHz Model X182AE 470 490 MHz Model X182AF 490 520 MHz Insertion Loss Transmitter to Antenna 1 3 dB max Insertion Loss Antenna to Receiver 1 3 dB max Frequency Separation 5 MHz X
331. ersonnel to connect a PC loaded with the Radio Service Soft ware RSS and perform programming and maintenance tasks The RSS port may also be used to allow station software to be downloaded from a local PC into the FLASH SIMM module This RSS port is provided by Host uP serial communication bus SMC2 which communicates with the RSS terminal via EIA 232 Bus Receivers Drivers 68 81094 76 9 1 00 CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Modules Digital Signal Processor DSP and DSP ASIC Circuitry General All station transmit and receive audio data is processed by the DSP and related circuitry This circuitry includes the DSP IC the DSP ASIC and the DSP ASIC Interface Circuitry All audio signals input to or output from the DSP are in digitized format Inputs to the DSP circuitry are e Digitized receive signals from the Receiver Module e Audio from handset or microphone connected to appropriate SCM front panel connector signal is digitized by CODEC IC p o Audio In terface Circuitry before being sent to DSP via Audio Interface Bus e Digitized voice audio data from Wireline Interface Board and other optional modules via TDM bus e ASTRO modem data from Wireline Interface Board via HDLC bus e SECURENET modem data from Wireline Interface Board via HDLC bus e 6809 MRTI transmit audio Outputs from the DSP circuitry are e Digitized voice audio data from DSP to Wireline Interface Board and other optional modules via
332. es it is recommended that you mount the first cage in the lowest possible position in the rack then Note Installing multiple cages one above continue building towards the top with additional cages Mounting the other is permitted as long as proper venti Screws M6 x 1 0 tapping are provided with each cage to secure the lation is maintained Refer to Equipment Ven cage flanges to the standoff brackets tilation on page 3 for details 22 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation nd atl STANDOFF BRACKETS M6 X 1 0 TAPPING SCREWS 4 M6 X 1 0 TAPPING SCREWS Position standoff brackets at desired posi Partially install M6 x 1 0 tapping screws tion on rack as shown Secure to rack in bottom holes in brackets as shown using M6 x 1 0 tapping screws a e a P REST CAGE SCREWS Rest cage on lower two screws install Remove two screws used to support two M6 x 1 0 tapping screws in holes as cage and install in the upper two holes shown Tighten securely of the brackets Tighten securely Figure 11 Installation Procedure for Rack Standoff Brackets 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 23 Quantar Station Functional Manual Mounting Procedures Continued WARNING A fully equipped 8 rack ten Quantar cages weighs approxi mately 650 Ibs 245 kg Handle with extreme caution to avoid tip pin
333. es the 28 6 V dc from the Main In verter Circuitry to the filtering circuitry The result is a 14 2 V dc sup ply voltage Protection Circuitry An overvoltage detect circuit monitors the output voltage and if preset thresholds are exceeded generates a shutdown signal which is fed to the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main inverter Upon an overvol tage detection a FET crowbar circuit immediately discharges the out put to protect other modules in the station An overcurrent detect circuit monitors the current draw from the 14 2 V inverter circuit and if a preset threshold is exceeded shuts down the 14 2 V inverter If the overcurrent condition lasts for a preset length approx 50 msec the surge current delay circuit generates a shut down signal which is fed to the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main inverter 5 V Inverter Circuitry Overview The 5 V inverter circuitry operates identically to the 14 2 V inverter circuitry described above to generate a 5 V dc supply voltage This voltage is used as the 5 V supply voltage for the station modules via the backplane 68P81090E44 A 7 9 1 00 Quantar Station Products Diagnostics Circuitry Note The cooling fan in the Power Supply Module is thermostatically controlled and may on at any time during station op eration Failure of the fan to rotate continu ously does not indicate a failure of the module Address Decode Circuitr
334. eser pei ede e ee eae page 1 Power Supply Module Simplified Block Diagram page 2 Overview of Circuitry m a A Performance lt 6 Controls Indicators and page 7 Functional Theory of Operation AC to DC Converter Board page 8 Input Conditioning page 8 Startup Belay Oirc llry gt pupa eb PAR dowd page 8 Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry 9 Battery Revert Trigger Circuitry 1 page 9 Supply Circuitty usu sa eae pa sasa ai ERG Xr RE RR E PR page 9 LED Status Indicators Ee td Y eee qaqa Qupa page 10 Functional Theory of Operation DC to DC Converter page 11 14V Main Supply Circuitry 11 continued next page vi 68 81095 05 9 1 00 FEV Supply Circuilry ee ee ce pro ur RI ee ag en eee EO ee epe aq page 12 Battery Charger Control Circuitry
335. est equipment is required to perform the procedure e Motorola R2670 Communications Analyzer with ASTRO CAI Option or equivalent e PCrunning Radio Service Software RSS program e Female N type to Female N type coaxial cable Dummy Load 50 station wattage or higher required for re peater stations only Verifying Receiver Circuitry Procedure Step 1 Proceed to the procedure ASTRO Bit Error Rates Reports located in Chapter 4 of the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Follow the instructions for setting up the test equipment and initiating a BER report using the RSS Step 2 If the BER reading is above 5 suspect the following Faulty Station Control Module 2 1 MHz reference Faulty Receiver Module Faulty antenna to Receiver preselector rf cable Faulty R2670 to station rf cable Step 3 Change R2670 injection signal level to VHF 25 uV 119 dBm UHF 35 uV 116 dBm 800 900 30 uV 117 5 dBm continued on page 18 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 17 Quantar Station Functional Manual Verifying Receiver Circuitry Analog Capable Stations Continued Note For VHF and UHF stations only refer to 5 Preselector Field tuning Pro cedure in this section for procedures to tune the receiver preselector Step 4 Step 5 Note the receiver BER reading The BER reading should be 5 or less If not tune the preselector VHF and UHF only and recheck the BER reading If a reading of 5 or less cannot be achi
336. et to Rx or Tx frequency whichever is LOWER Output level set to 10 dBm e Set up test equipment as shown Use nut driver to adjust pass adjustment screw for cavity 4 to obtain a PEAK reading on the millivoltmeter Use open end wrench and tighten lock nut carefully making sure pass adjustment screw does not shift position Repeat steps 2 amp 3 for cavities 5 and 6 TUNING HIGH PASS RESONATORS BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER Range set to 10 dBm 6 dB EO OBN ERRE E 1 2 3 4 5 6 e e e el le e q dl e e Im L X X RESONATOR PASS ADJUSTMENT SCREW HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR AND LOCK NUT 0 0000 oo 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 0000 1 a Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency whichever is HIGHER Output level set to 10 dBm TUNING HIGH NOTCH LOOP ASSEMBLIES 6 dB IN LINE Range setto 10 dBm PAD 50 OHM 1 2 3 4 5 6 ge e BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER NOTCH ADJUSTMENT SCREW AND LOCK NUT o Set up test equipment as shown o o9 Use screwdriver to adjust notch lo adjustment screw for cavity 1 to obtain minimum reading the EESE P
337. etails on the use of the pushbutton switches Supply Voltages Circuitry LEDs Eight status LEDs are provided on the SCM front panel to provide visual indications of various station operating conditions The LEDs are con trolled by eight lines from I O Port Out Switches Four momentary contact pushbutton switches are provided on the SCM front panel to allow various station functions to be selected De pressing a pushbutton causes a high to be sent to the Host uP via I O Port PO In The SCM contains on board regulator and filtering circuitry to gener ate the various operating voltages required by the SCM circuitry 14 2 V and 5V from the backplane are used as sources for the fol lowing supply voltage circuits e 10V Regulator Circuitry provides 10 V dc and a 5 V refer ence voltage 1 2 of 10V for the Audio Interface Circuitry in the SCM e VCCA Supply Circuitry provides VCCA 5V and 2 5 V reference voltage 1 of VCCA for the Audio Interface Circuitry in the SCM e Filtering Circuitry filters the 14 2 V and 5V from the back plane to provide A and VCC respectively for the SCM digital cir cuitry 68P81094E76 A 9 1 00 11 Quantar and Quantro Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 2 68P81094E76 A CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Module THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 9 1 00 68P81094E76 A 13 Quantar and Quantro Station Products
338. eved replace the Receiver Module This completes the Verifying Receiver Circuitry test pro cedure If all displays and measurements are correct the receiver circuitry may be considered to be operating properly Remove test equipment restore the station to normal service and return to the troubleshooting flow chart to resume troubleshooting sequence 18 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting MODULE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES Station modules suspected of being faulty must be replaced with known good modules to restore the station to proper operation The following procedures provide instructions for replacing each of the station modules and performing any required post replacement adjustments or programming General Replacement Information Anti Static Precaution The station circuitry contains many C MOS and other static sensitive devices When servicing the equipment you must take precautionary steps to prevent damage to the modules from static discharge Com plete information on prevention of static protection is provided in Moto rola publication 68P81106E84 available through Motorola National Parts Some additional precautions are as follows e A wrist strap Motorola Part No RSX4015A or equivalent should be worn while servicing to minimize static buildup Ba N WARNING VAN nana jacks are built into the station cage for connection of the wrist strap When wearing Conductive Wrist Strap be car
339. evious key OFF during normal operation Module Fail Lights RED when module malfunction occurs such as shorted output current limit exceeded loss of communication with Station Control Module etc POWER SUPPLY MODULE GREEN with ac input power present and switch turned ON Power On OFF when ac input power absent or switch turned OFF 68P81096E59 B 7 11 15 99 Quantar Station Functional Manual LED Location Table 1 LED Name Quantar Station LED Indicator Functions continued Status Definition STATION CONTROL MODULE SCM Station On GREEN when SCM fully functional FLASHING when front panel switch press detected OFF for SCM failure Station Fail RED for SCM failure OFF when SCM fully functional no failure D YELLOW when station is in Intercom mode FLASHING once per second when station is in Access Disable Mode FLASHING twice per second when station is TX Inhibited OFF when station is not in Intercom mode Control Ch GREEN when station is control channel trunking systems only FLASHES each time station decodes ISW IntelliRepeater systems only OFF when station is not control channel trunking systems only RX 1 Active GREEN when Station Control Board is passing audio data receive path un muted from Receiver 1 The following conditions must be met Carrier at proper
340. exer UHF R1 0 Apio TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr X182AB Duplexer Module 144 160MHz 0185417U02 Duplexer 144 160 MHz X182AD Add Duplexer Module UHF R2 TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr 0185417005 Duplexer UHF R2 TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr X182AJ Add Duplexer Module 158 174 MHz 0185417U03 Duplexer 158 174 MHz Duplexer TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr X182AE Add Duplexer Module UHF R3 0185417006 Duplexer UHF R3 TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr X182AG Add Duplexer Module 800 MHz TDF6980A Duplexer 800 MHz TTN5008A Duplexer Hardware 4 screws X182AF Add Duplexer Module UHF R4 0185417U07 Duplexer UHF R4 TTN5008A Duplexer Mtg Hdwr X182AH Add Duplexer Module 900 MHz TDF6542A Duplexer 900 MHz Add ASTRO Modem TRN7668A ASTRO Modem Card TTN5008A Duplexer Hardware 4 screws xxii 68 81095 05 9 1 00 Option Category Option and Complement X676AP Add Triple Circulator UHF R3 and R4 X676AN Add Triple Circulator UHF R1 and R2 TLE9130A Dual Circulator TLE9120A Dual Circulator TLN3391A 50 Ohm Load with Heat Sink TLN3391A 50 Ohm Load with Heat Sink TLE9140A Low Pass Filter TLE9140A Low Pass Filter TRN7796A Fan Peripheral Tray TRN7796A Fan Peripheral Tray X676AQ Add Triple Circulator 800 MHz Add Triple Circulator 132 146 MHz TLF7320A Dual Circulator Circulator TYD4001A Dual Circulator TLN3391A 50 Ohm Load with Heat Sink TLN3391A 50 Ohm Load with Heat Sink TLF7340A
341. exer and filter circuitry 68 81091 91 9 1 00 Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz Stations Functional Manuals Cooling Fans Control Circuitry 100 W Models Only WARNING The cooling fans in the PA Mod ule are thermostatically con trolled and may come on at any time during station operation Keep fingers clear of fan blades Power Amplifier ID Resistor ROM The PA is equipped with a dual fan module to provide forced air cooling of the PA The fan module is controlled by a FAN ON signal from the Exciter Module which is fed to a driver circuit in the PA Module The Fan Driver Detect Circuitry controls the power to the fans via two feed thru pins in the PA chassis which mate with the power connector on the sli de in fan module The fans turned on only when the temperature in the PA exceeds a set limit It is normal for the fans to cycle on and off during station operation The Fan Driver Detect Circuitry also monitors the current to the fans and feeds a dc detect voltage to the Fan Status Circuitry which outputs a status signal indicating whether the fan current is above or below a predetermined range The status signal FAN ALARM is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry A resistor network ROM provides power amplifier ID information to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuits This in formation includes the band and range in whi
342. f a double rf circulator and a 50 Q load with heat sink all mounted on 3 16 aluminum plate which is housed in the Peripheral Tray The tray is equipped with a cooling fan which directs air across the fins of the heat sink The rf output from the Power Amplifier Module connects to the input of the assembly while the output connects to an external low pass filter The output of the filter connects to the transmit antenna directly via antenna relay module or via duplexer nU Commercial Government and no 2090 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81088E54 A All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar UHF Station Functional Manual OPTION COMPLEMENT Table 1 and Table 2 show the contents of the X676AN and X676AP Triple Circulator Options Option Complement Charts Table 1 X676AN Triple Circulator Option Complement Option Contents TLE9120A Dual Circulator TLN3391A 50Q Load w heatsink TRN7796A Cooling Fan TLE9140A Low Pass Filter Table 2 X676AP Triple Circulator Option Complement Option Contents TRN7796A Cooling Fan TLE9140A Low Pass Filter TLE9130A Dual Circulator xe7eap TLNS391A 50Q Load w heatsink 2 68P81088E54 A 9 1 00 UHF Triple Circulator Option 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 3 shows the electrical performance specifications for the dual circulator assemblies used in Options X676AN
343. f the IPA output e Final Power Amplifier FPA contained in 100W PA only pro vides final amplification of the IPA output provides an output of 160W maximum e Circulator provides PA module output isolation e Harmonic Filter Coupler suppresses harmonic radiation and couples the PA output to the transmit antenna connector also serves as a power meter e Sense and Detect Circuitry provides sense and detect signals for critical signal points throughout the circuitry signals are monitored by the Exciter Module ine Commercial Government and Rights Hasdrved Industrial Solutions Sector 68 81091 91 Printed U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz Stations Functional Manuals CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the PA controls indicators and all input and output external connections RF INPUT FROM EXCITER MODULE POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE FRONT PANEL RF OUTPUT COOLING 2 FANS HEAT SINK J P CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE Figure 1 Power Amplifier Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 100W Model Shown 2 68P81091E91 B 9 1 00 TLF1930A TLF1940A TLF1800APower Amplifier Modules 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the PA circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the servic
344. f the customer defined inputs and outputs have been preassigned wtih signal names and functions usually required in typical Trunking SECURENET and other systems These default preassignments have been made for customer convenience only and may be re assigned as necessary The preassigned signal names are shown in parentheses in the SIGNAL column Reassignment requires the use of the Wildcard Option 45V ey pf i oH EN OUTPUT 3 9K Typical Relay Closure Output Circuit 5V INPUT Typical Transistor Coupled Input Circuit 5V INPUT Typical Opto Coupled Input Circuit r OUTPUT 3 9K 4 3 Typical Transistor Coupled Output Circuit Figure 2 TRN7480A Backplane Rear Connectors Pin Out Information Sheet 2 of 11 15 99 68P81086E33 F 5 Quantar Station Products CONNECTOR 27 PERIPHERAL TRAY INTERFACE CONNECTOR 31 EXTERNAL DC POWER rins Signal Input Output Function Pin Signal Input Output Function 1 14 2V 142 V dc from Power Supply 1 Amp Max 1 GND Station Ground 2 GND Station Ground 2 Spare Not Used 3 ANT RLY KEYED A Switched 14 2 V to energize antenna relay if located Peripheral Tray 3 Spare Not Used 4 EXT 1 0 2 Future Use 4 Spare Not Used 5 EXT I O 1 Switched 14 2 V to energize Main Standby relay 5 Spare Not Used 6 EXT Circ Temp DC voltage proportional to temperature from sensor mounted
345. fer to Figure 6 12kbps SECURENET modem data signals are sent to from the station via 4 wire copper pairs and are processed by the 4 wire audio circuit on the WIB Line 1 Audio amp Line 2 Audio The 4 wire circuit operates as follows Landline to Station 12kbps modem data is input to the primary of an audio transformer as balanced audio The signal is induced into the transformer secondary and fed to a buffer through jumper JU1010 placed in the 4 wire position as shown at the bottom of page 8 Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and secondary coils provide for selectable impedance matching For SECURENET systems place both jumpers in position 1 as shown in the illustration at the bottom of page 8 The buffer output is fed through a 3 pole low pass filter to a limiter which converts the modem signal to a data signal The output of the limiter is fed to the PASIC as serial data The PASIC sends the data to the microprocessor as 8 bit parallel data over the data bus The microprocessor sends the data to the micropro cessor in the Station Control Module over an interprocessor communi cations bus HDLC protocol Station to Landline 12kbps modem data is input to the microproces sor from the Station Control Module microprocessor via the interpro cessor communications bus HDLC protocol The microprocessor feeds the data to the PASIC as 8 bit parallel data over the data bus The PASIC outputs th
346. filter coupler This cir cuit provides highly selective bandpass filtering and couples the signal to an N type connector mounted to the module casting A coax cable routes the signal to an N type connector mounted on an rf input out put connector bracket located on the rear of the station A feedback and control loop configuration is used to regulate the PA output power The Harmonic Filter Coupler generates a dc voltage pro portional to the PA Module output power This voltage TX VF is fed to the TX Power Control Circuitry in the Exciter Module The TX VF voltage is compared to reference voltages to generate a dc power control volt age V_CONT The dc power control voltage V_CONT is output from the Exciter Mod ule and fed through filtering circuitry in the PA to a voltage translation and current limiting circuit The output of this circuitry is V_OMNI a dc voltage which controls the output power of the IPA Summary of Power Control Operation By controlling the output level of the IPA range of 0 to 10W the output power of the PA module is established The feedback and control loop TX_VF fed back to Excit er Module resulting in V_CONT to control IPA output continually moni tors and maintains the proper output power from the PA 68P81086E23 B 9 1 00 Quantar VHF Station Functional Manual Sense and Detect Circuitry Introduction The PA is equipped with several sense and detect circuits to provide status s
347. frequency being received Carrier signal level is above threshold set in codeplug Squelch criteria met carrier PL DPL ASTRO secure etc Note that squelch criteria can be manually altered via RSS for testing purposes OFF when above conditions are not met for Receiver 1 RX 2 Active Indicates condition of Receiver 2 Same status definitions as RX 1 ACTIVE RX Fail RED when Receiver 1 and 2 are both non functional BLINKING ONCE PER SECOND when Receiver 1 is non functional BLINKING TWICE PER SECOND when Receiver 2 is non functional or when SAM Module or UHSO Module is non functional OFF when both Receiver 1 and 2 are functional or no receiver modules installed x A receiver module is considered non functional if a failure is detected during diagnostics run at time of power up or during normal operation Aux LED GREEN LED available for special application function All LEDs Flashing On and Off in Unison Station is in Software Download mode either initiated by the RSS or due to soft ware failure LEDs Flashing Up and Down in Stationhas received software files from RSS and is in process of downloading the software to FLASH memory in the Station Control Module Sequential Pattern GREEN when WIB fully functional WL On OFF for WIB failure WIRELINE INTERFACE GREEN when WIB fully functional BOARD WLOn G when ully
348. functional WIB OFF for WIB failure Both LEDs WIB is in Software Download mode operating software is being downloaded Blinking Rapidly into the FLASH memory on WIB from Station Control Module Notes 1 All LEDs momentarily light following station reset Volume Up Volume Down and Intercom buttons on SCM front panel pressed simultaneously or upon station power up 2 If no LED indicators are on make sure that ac power to the station power supply is present Check the circuit breaker at the ac source Check the ac line cord If no problem found suspect Power Supply Module 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Interpreting Alarm Alert Tones Note The alarm tones may also be routed to the console via the wireline and trans mitted over the air Refer to the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for details on enabling disabling these two alarm routing options Introduction Four station alarm conditions are reported with audio alert tones which are routed to the local speaker The alarms are also entered into the alarm log which can be accessed using the RSS refer to RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 The four alarm conditions are represented by a series of alarm tones from a single beep to four beeps Each beep is a 1200 Hz tone lasting 125 msec The alarm tones occur during a repeating 10 second win dow with 2 seconds between successive alarms when more than one alarm are active The fol
349. g A Cement dust from concrete floor ing is harmful to electronic equip ment and wiring Make sure that the rack and any co located equipment are protected prior to drilling holes in the concrete floor Use a tarpaulin cloth or plastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment The rack should be already covered with an anti static bag do not remove the bag at this time Use a vacuum while drilling the holes to minimize the spread of concrete dust Careful ly clean up any accumulated dust and debris from the anchor installation before uncovering the equipment Installing 7 777 and 8 Open Racks and 30 45 and 52 Modular Racks In a typical installation the rack is bolted to a concrete floor to provide stability The following procedure describes the steps necessary to bolt the rack to a concrete floor Be sure to check with local authorities to verify that the following procedure conforms to local building codes and regulations before permanently installing the rack Step 1 Step 2 Carefully align the rack at the desired anchoring location Use the rack mounting foot as a template and mark the location of the six open racks 34 1 9 cm or four modu lar racks 37 94 cm diameter mounting holes All four or six anchoring positions must be used Step 3 Move the rack aside drill holes in the concrete floor and install the mounting anchors RAM RD 56 anchors rec
350. g AC input cabling Coaxial cables to transmit and receive antennas Phone line connections System cables Perform a post installation functional checkout test of the equipment to verify proper installation Proceed to the Optimization procedures located behind the OPTIMIZATION tab to customize the station parameters per customer specifications e g operating frequency PL codes etc 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation Environmental Conditions at Intended Installation Site Important If the station is to be in stalled in an environment which is unusu ally dusty or dirty and thus does not meet the air quality requirements the air used to cool the station modules must be treated using appropriate filtering de vices Dust or dirt accumulating on the in ternal circuit boards and modules is not easily removed and can cause such mal functions as overheating and intermittent electrical connections Equipment Ventilation The Quantar station may be installed in any location suitable for elec tronic communications equipment provided that the environmental conditions do not exceed the equipment specifications for tempera ture humidity and air quality These are Operating Temperature Range 30 C to 60 C Humidity not to exceed 95 relative humidity 50 C Air Quality For equipment operating in an environmentally controlled environment with the station cage s
351. g type power supply which gener ates a 12 V dc supply voltage used by the power supply module cir cuitry as VCC at the time of initial power up When all supply voltages have stabilized this circuit is overridden by 14 2 V BULK which con tinues to supply VCC to the module circuitry The circuitry consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 133 kHz internal circuitry provides clock signal during initial power up The PWM out put pulses control a transistor switch which repetitively gates voltage to the primary of the startup isolation transformer The result is an induced voltage in the secondary winding which feeds two half wave rectifier circuits One circuit provides the 12 V dc Startup Bias voltage used by the module cir cuitry as initial VCC and the other provides a BULK DETECT signal used by the Diagnostics Circuitry to generate the AC FAIL signal 68P81090E44 A 5 9 1 00 Quantar Station Products Main Inverter Circuitry Overview The main inverter circuitry is comprised of a switching type power supply which generates a 28 6 V dc supply voltage This voltage is used as the source for the 14 2 V and 5 V inverter circuits in the pow er supply module as well as the 28 V supply voltage for the station modules via the backplane Switching Power Supply Operation The main inverter switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 67 kHz The PWM output pulses control
352. g Methods 4 Storage Battery Connections 31 Site Grounding and Lightning Protection 5 Recommended Tools and Equipment 6 RF Cabling Connections 32 Equipment Unpacking and Inspection 6 oa Nae es dede 32 Physical Dimensions and Clearances 7 2 Separate RX TX Connectors 33 Quantar Cage without Cabinet 7 Antenna Relay Option 34 Quantar Cages Installed 7 71 and 8 Racks 8 Duplexer Option 35 Quantar Cages Installed in Modular Racks 9 veg AZ 12 x 20 Cabinet 10 30 x 20 Cabinet 11 Connecting System Cables 38 46 x20 Cabinet 12 IntrodU ctlOD zeli E 38 60 Indoor Cabinet 13 IntelliRepeater D LAN Cabling Connections 38 IntelliRepeater Ethernet Cabling Connections 40 6809 Trunking Cabling Connections 42 Zone Controller Cabling Connections 43 6809 Controller TSC CSC Link Connections 44 Connecting Telephone Lines 46 2 Mechanical Installation 14 INtrOdUCtION SE shades ee he 46 Telephone Line Specifications 46 Unpacking the EQUIDINGUE
353. g station power up and when performing the reference oscillator calibration procedure using the RSS The dc steering voltage is also scaled and buffered to provide a steer ing voltage sample which is fed to one of the A D converter inputs p o Diagnostics Circuitry 68P81088E08 A 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Address Decode Circuitry Diagnostics Circuitry The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Board to use the address bus to select a specific device on a specific station board for control or data communications purposes via the SPI bus If the board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 thru A5 as the UHSO module address it enables the chip select circuitry The chip select cir cuitry then decodes address lines A0 and A1 and generates chip select signals for the D A and A D converters Various dc voltages and sample signals are input to an A D converter which converts the signals to a binary representation The data is then sent to the Station Control Module via the SPI bus for monitoring and diagnostics purposes 68P81088E08 A 9 1 00 Option X873AA UHSO Module BACKPLANE CONNECTOR 10 V REGULATOR CIRCUITRY mom
354. gn page 2 Summary of Operating Features page 3 Multiple System Capability page 4 Station Components page 6 Functional Theory of Operation page 8 Transmitter Circuitry Operation page 8 Receiver Circuitry Operation page 9 Station Control Circuitry Operation page 9 Wireline Interface Board Operation page 10 Power Supply Module 4 page 10 INSTALLATION 2 240604 Ob 68P81096E57 Pre Installation Considerations page 2 Installation OVerVIeW so y eon ia Syed bel whe OLX ean page 2 Environmental Conditions at Intended Site page 3 Equipment Ventlatior iih rne ER tz ree Rn page 3 AC Input Power Requirements page
355. gnals into from the TDM time division multiplex bus that connects from the WIB to the Station Control Module e DC Remote Detection circuitry provides current sensing and detection for dc remote control of station e Simulcast Processing Circuitry circuitry is provided for sum ming and control of Simulcast PL and reverse burst tones Motorola Inc 2000 Commercial Government and Rights Hasdrved Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81094E78 A Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar and Quantro Station Products CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the WIB jumpers indicators and all input and output external connections MATES WITH CABLE TO ORANGE TERMINAL STRIP 2 WIRE 4 WIRE SELECT ACCESSIBLE ON REAR OF STATION FLASH JUMPER MEMORY LINE 1 AUDIO CIRCUIT TRANSFORMER AND IMPEDANCE MATCHING JUMPERS LINE 2 AUDIO CIRCUIT TRANSFORMER AND IMPEDANCE MATCHING JUMPERS WL FAIL LED EAT WL ON LED DC REMOTE CONTROL 2 WIRE 4 WIRE JUMPERS CARD EDGE CONNECTORS MATE WITH BACKPLANE Figure 1 Wireline Interface Board Jumpers Indicators and Inputs Outputs CLN6956A Shown 68P81094E78 A 9 1 00 CLN6956A and CLN6958A Wireline Interface Boards 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the WIB circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the ser
356. gt 3 PENDULUM CONTROL VOLTAGE ENABLE SWITCH CONTROL VOLTAGE DOK FREQUENCY NET ENABLE P O I O PORT P1 OUT SPI BUS SPI BUS 3 CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Module INPUT OUTPUT PORTS CIRCUITRY HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS SS FROM HOST MICROPROCESSOR PORT PO OUT ex 32 VARIOUS CONTROL LINES LATCHES TO SCM amp STATION CIRCUITRY PORT P1 OUT O PORT PO IN VARIOUS INPUTS 7 m 5 32 FROM SCM amp STATION J CIRCUITRY I O PORT IN BUFFERS 32 SERIALIDDATA reg FROM is BACKPLANE AUDIO INTERFACE CIRCUITRY EXTERNAL SPEAKER HANDSET MICROPHONE CODEC IC MULTIPLEXER MRTI TX AUDIO v a gt T FOR FUTURE USE A D L See Be gt CONVERTER EXTERNAL SPEAKER V AUDIO VARIOUS DIAGNOSTIC h 3 gt LOOPBACK SIGNALS _ o a SELECT LINES LEVEL SHIFTER HANDSET P O I O PORT P1 OUT AMPLIFIER EARPIECE HANDSET DIGITIZED SIGNAL FROM DSP ASIC D A SPEAKER AUDIO CONVERTER su AUDIO INTERFACE BUS DIGITIZED SIGNAL TO DSP ASIC LOCAL
357. h function tone initiates a Status Request Standby 10 68 81095 89 2 15 99 Main Standby Configuration e Select Alternate Function Tone to Initiate a Reset to Both Stations default is FT15 Main Modify TRC Tone field to change which function tone initiates a Status Reset Standby 68P81095E89 O 11 2 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 2 68P81095E89 O 2 15 99 M MOTOROLA FAST KEYUP FEATURE For Quantar and Quantro Stations OVERVIEW The Fast Keyup Feature allows Quantar and Quantro stations to be keyed up by an external device such as a Data Controller in approximately 12 milliseconds Quantar VHF and Quantro UHF or 10 milliseconds all other stations Note that normal keyup time using the station s PTT input is approximately 50 msecs In order to implement this feature three signals TX Audio RX Audio and PTT must be connected between the station and the external device Also an RSS parameter setting must be made to properly configure the feature s operation This manual provides step by step instructions for performing these tasks Note The Fast Keyup Feature applies only to non Simulcast Analog Conventional stations Giese dre odd Commercial Government and All Rights RNa Industrial Solutions Sector 68P80800A02 A Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Quantro Station Products
358. h feeds the gain adjust circuitry Under control of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides eight levels of gain ad just 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 and 40 dB The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to an A D converter which digi tizes the audio signal into a PCM output This output is fed serially to the PAS IC which places the data in the proper TDM timeslot as instructed by the microprocessor in the SCM and output to the SCM on the TDM Bus Station to Landline audio is input to the PASIC in the form of PCM data on the TDM bus The PASIC extracts the data and feeds it to a D A con verter which takes the PCM data and converts it to an analog audio sig nal The audio signal is fed to the gain adjust circuitry Under control of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain ad just OdB 6dB 12dB and 18dB The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed thru a 2 pole low pass filter and into the inputs of two amplifiers The outputs of the amplifiers are fed to two transistors which are connected in a push pull configuration to drive the primary of an audio transformer The audio signal is induced into the second ary and output to the landline system via either the 50 pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector as balanced audio UMPERS gt IMPEDANCE T T IN POSITION AGUE WIRELINE SETTINGS 1
359. han 396 1000 Hz VHF UHF 800 900 50 dB 25 30 kHz 45dB 12 5kHz 45 dB 12 5 kHz 45 db 45 dB 12 5 kHz 50 dB 25 kHz 50 dB 25 kHz Frequency Stability FCC Designation FCC Rule Part 15 ABZ89FR4796 800 ABZ89FR5757 FM Noise 300 3000 kHz band width 9 1 00 68 81095 05 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Cont d Transmitter VHF UHF 800 Power Output 6 25W 5 25W 5 20W 25 125W 25 110W 20 100W Electronic Bandwidth Full sub band 20 dB single circulator standard on all PAs 65 dB triple circulator requires triple circulator option 50 dB single circulator standard on all PAs Intermodulation Attenuation 50 dB single circulator standard all PAs 20 dB single circulator standard on all PAs 70 dB triple circulator requires triple circulator option Spurious and Harmonic Emissions Attenuation 90 dB VHF UHF and 800 5 kHz 25 kHz Deviation 2 5 kHz 12 5 kHz 4 kHz SECURENET coded 2 4 kHz SECURENET coded Audio Sensitivity 35 dBm to 0 dBm variable 1 3 dB from 6 dB per octave pre emphasis 300 3000 Hz referenced to Audio Response Analog Mode 1000 Hz at line input Less than 2 1000 Hz 60 rated system deviation 45 dB nominal 12 5 2 FM Noise 300 3000 Hz bandwidth 50 dB nominal 25 30 2 Frequency Stability VHF UHF 800 1 ppm 900 0 1ppm VHF 25
360. he duplexer module removed from the station rack or cabinet Be sure to make note of the transmit and receive frequencies for the particular station before beginning Ifthe duplexer module is tuned according to instructions and does not meet specifications for return loss insertion loss and or isolation you must return the duplexer for repair 68P81086E71 B 9 1 00 Duplexer Module TUNING LOW PASS RESONATORS BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER Range set to 10 dBm co Set test equipment as shown 1 Push or pull tuning rod for cavity 1 to obtain a PEAK reading on the 55 LOOP millivoltmeter ASSEMBLIES Use allen wrench and tighten locking EE j whichever is LOWER Output level set to 10 dBm screw 1 Repeat steps 2 3 for cavities 2 T CONNECTOR HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR IN LINE PAD 50 OHM E a S a 8 8802 ALLEN L IJ LOCKING SCREW Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency RESONATOR TUNING cdi ROD TUNING HIGH PASS RESONATORS BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER Range set to 10 dBm
361. hese signals to analog dc volt ages to control various operating characteristics of the battery charger circuitry Shutdown Circuitry consists of signal monitoring circuitry which shuts down the battery charger for certain input signal conditions such as loss of BATT WATCHDOG signal from the Station Control Module Local Supplies Circuitry Accepts 14V RAW from DC to DC Converter Board and generates VCC 10V and 5V sup ply voltages for use by local circuitry 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 CPN1049A CPN1050B265W Power Supply Modules THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 68P81096E09 O 5 11 15 99 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual B PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the Models CPN1049A and CPN1050B Power Supply Modules Performance Specifications Table 1 CPN1049A CPN1050B Power Supply Modules Performance Specifications Parameter Specification Weight 6 5 kg 14 3 Ibs Operating Temperature Range 30 to 60 no derating Input Voltage Range 90 to 264 V ac Input Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz Maximum Input Current 8 5 A 14 2 V dc 5 Steady State Output Voltages 5 0 V dc 5 14 2 125A Output Current Ratings 454 9A 265W Total Output Power Rating including 100W for battery charger All outputs 150 mV p p measured Output Ripple with 20 MHz BW oscilloscope at 25 6 68P81096E
362. hooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description Overview of Circuitry The Receiver Module provides the receiver functions for the Quantar VHF station Each receiver module is comprised of a Preselector Filter Assembly and a Receiver Board all contained within a slide in module housing The receiver module performs highly selective bandpass filtering and dual down conversion of the station receive rf signal A custom receiver IC then performs an analog to digital conversion of the received signal and outputs a differen tial data signal to the Station Control Module The Models TFD6511 TFD6512 Preselector Filter Assemblies and the TRD6361 TRD6362 Receiver Boards differ only in the range of opera tion Models TFD6511 TRD6361 operate in VHF Range 1 132 154MHz Models TFD6512 TRD6362 operate in VHF Range 2 150 174 2 Unless otherwise noted the information provided in this section applies to all models The receiver module contains the following circuitry e Frequency Synthesizer Circuitry consisting of a phase locked loop and VCO generates the 1st LO injection signal e Preselector Filter Assembly provides 5 pole bandpass filter ing of the station receive rf input e Receiver Front End Circuitry performs filtering amplification and the 1st down conversion of the receive rf signal e Custom Receiver IC Circuitry consists of a
363. hs page 7 WIRELINE INTERFACE MODULE 8 WIRE 68P81094E78 Description co ey peri ghee Pe yee page 1 General Description vei a RAE E EG eR Dem br qub de LUNA page 1 Overview of Circu i herad cs ne te ewes MEER ash usq papash aq ususi kusaq page 1 Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs page 2 Functional Theory of Operation page 3 Functional Overview eed ea een Gea hee eee page 3 Description of Audio Data Signal Paths page 7 STATION BACKPLANE BOARD 68P81086E33 224252025 h page 1 General Description beg SEO 1 Location of Backplane Connectors page 2 Backplane Connectors page 3 STATION POWER SUPPLY MODULES 265W POWER SUPPLY MODULE input 68P81096E09 Description co eposeg ity wie ce ed eb eec gr ela He ee page 1 General Descriptiori eese kir emer uem Rr rer
364. iate rf signal This signal is fed through a buffer amplifier and impedance matching and output to the 1st LO injection amplifier in the receiver front end circuitry A sample of the injection signal is returned to the PLL IC via a feedback buffer to serve as a VCO feedback signal 68P81086E48 C 4 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products Preselector Filter Assembly Receiver Front End Circuitry Custom Receiver IC Circuitry The preselector filter assembly provides 3 poles of bandpass filtering for the receive rf input signal The filter assembly is mounted to the front of the receiver module housing and provides mini connectors for input from the receive antenna and output to the receiver board Tuning screws are provided for filter tuning Refer to the Troubleshooting sec tion in this manual for instructions on tuning the preselector assembly The receive rf input is fed from the antenna through the 3 pole pres elector assembly to the receiver board The signal is low pass filtered amplified image filtered and fed to one input of the 1st mixer The sig nal is mixed with the 1st LO injection signal generated by the synthe sizer VCO circuitry to produce 73 35 MHz 1st i f signal The 1st i f signal is 2 pole bandpass filtered and fed to an amplifier The amplifier gain high or low is determined by an AGC switch circuit that is controlled by an AGC select signal from the Station Control Mod
365. ich are warranted for a period of ten 10 years from the date of shipment Parts including crystals and channel elements will be replaced and labor will be provided free of charge for the full warranty period Thereafter purchaser must pay for the labor involved in repairing the product or replacing the parts at the prevailing rates together with any transportation charges to or from the place where warranty service is provided This express warranty is extended by Motorola Communications and Electronics Inc 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg Illinois 60196 to the original purchaser only and only to those purchasing for purpose of leasing or solely for commercial industrial or governmental use THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WHICH ARE SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW In the event of a defect malfunction or failure to conform to specifications established be seller or if appropriate to specifications accepted by Seller in writing during the period shown Motorola at its option will either repair or replace the product or refund the purchase price thereof and such action on the part of Motorola shall be the full extent of Motorola s liability hereunder This warranty is void if a the product is used
366. iding module into cage and firmly seating the module connector into the backplane Do not slam the module against the back plane or push any harder than necessary to seat the con nectors Now reconnect the rf cable from the Power Am plifier Module Restore power to the station Post Replacement Optimization Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Perform the TX Deviation Gain Adjust alignment proce dure located in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Perform the Reference Modulation alignment procedure located in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 For ASTRO Simulcast systems only perform the ASTRO Simulcast Launch Time Offset alignment proce dure located in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 22 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Replacing Power Supply Module Replacement Procedure Step 1 Turn off station power refer to page 20 Step 2 Using a Torx 15 driver remove anti vibration screw s if installed from top and or bottom of module front panel Step 3 Remove faulty module from cage Step 4 Install replacement Power Supply Module by sliding mod ule into cage and firmly seating the module connector into the backplane Do not slam the module against the backplane or push any harder than necessary to seat the connectors Step 5 Restore power to the station Post Replacement Optimization Procedure Replacement Power Supply Modules are factory aligned Therefore no post replacemen
367. ier in the landline to station cir cuitry This signal is used to cancel the out bound signal and allow the inbound signal to pass through the landline to station circuitry JU1010 2 Wire Voice Audio Path Refer to Figure 3 Voice audio signals sent to from the station via 2 wire copper pair are processed by the 2 wire audio circuit on the WIB Line 2 Audio The audio transformer in this circuit may have both inbound and outbound audio signals present simultaneously and therefore employs circuitry to pass audio in each direction while cancelling the alternate signal The 2 wire audio circuit operates as follows Landline to Station balanced audio is input to the primary of an audio trans former The signal is induced into the transformer secondary and fed to an amplifier Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the primary and sec ondary coils provide for selectable impedance matching Refer to the illustra tion below for impedance setting information The amplifier sums the inbound and outbound signals and feeds one input to the cancellation amplifier The other input to this amplifier is the output signal only A cancellation of the outbound signal results and the output from this amplifier is the inbound signal only The signal is fed to a buffer through jumper JU1010 placed in the 2 wire position as shown below whic
368. ifier IPA low level amplifier stage which is controlled by the transmitter control voltage from the Exciter Module provides an output of approximately 0 to 10W Driver Power Amplifier DPA contained in 25W PA only provides final amplification of the IPA output provides an output of 35W maxi mum Final Power Amplifier FPA contained in 125W PA only pro vides final amplification of the IPA output provides an output of 160W maximum Circulator provides PA module output isolation Harmonic Filter Coupler suppresses harmonic radiation and couples the PA output to the transmit antenna connector also serves as a power meter Sense and Detect Circuitry provides sense and detect signals for critical signal points throughout the circuitry signals are monitored by the Exciter Module ine tao Commercial Government and All Rights Renod Industrial Solutions Sector 68 81086 23 Printed U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar VHF Station Functional Manual 2 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the PA controls indicators and all input and output external connections RF INPUT FROM EXCITER MODULE POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE FRONT PANEL RF OUTPUT FRONT VIEW COOLING FANS HEAT SINK CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE Figure 1 Power Amplifier Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 125 W Model Shown 2
369. ignals to the Exciter Module In most cases the Exciter Module microprocessor uses these signals to determine PA operating condi tions and in response varies certain control signals to correct output power turn on cooling fans etc The sense and detect circuits are de scribed in the following paragraphs Current Sensing Circuitry 25W IPA and DPA current sense circuitry comprised of two differential am plifiers and two sensing resistors meters the current being drawn by the IPA and the DPA and outputs two dc signals directly proportional to the IPA and DPA currents Circuit operation is described in the follow ing paragraph In each of the current sense circuits a differential amplifier measures the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage di rectly proportional to the current through the resistor The dc voltage IPA or DPA 1 is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filtering circuitry where it is used in calculating the current being drawn by the IPA or DPA Current Sensing Circuitry 125W IPA current sense circuitry comprised of a differential amplifier and a sensing resistor meters the current being drawn by the IPA and out puts a dc signal directly proportional to the IPA current Circuit opera tion is described in the following paragraph The differential amplifier measures the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage directly proportional to the I
370. iltering a second down conversion and finally analog to digital conversion of the 2nd i f signal The digital receive signal is then sent via differential driv er circuitry to the Station Control Board This data signal contains the necessary and Q quadrature information AGC information and other data transfer information required by the Station Control Module to pro cess the receive signal Note that the recovered audio signal is in digi tal format throughout the station circuitry resulting in a more noise free linear receiver Analog audio is present only in the external speak er driver circuitry on the Station Control Board and on the Wireline Inter face Board at the phone line connections to and from the station The remainder of the custom receiver IC circuitry consists of timing and tank circuits to support the internal oscillator 2nd LO synthesizer cir cuitry and 2nd 1 circuitry A serial bus allows data communications between the custom receiver IC and the DSP ASIC located on the Station Control Board This bus allows the DSP ASIC to control various current and gain settings es tablish the data bus clock rate program the 2nd LO and perform other control functions 68P81091E92 B 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro 900 MHz Receiver Module Address Decode and A D Converter Circuitry Voltage Regulator Circuitry Address Decode Circuitry The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Board to u
371. in the upper half of the band while the other VCO generates signals in the lower half of the band Only one VCO is active at a time Selection of the active VCO is provided by a BANDSHIFT signal from the PLL IC The active VCO responds to the dc control voltage and generates the appropriate rf signal This signal is fed through a buffer ampifier and impedance matching and output to the 1st LO injection amplifier in the receiver front end circuitry A sample of the injection signal is returned to the PLL IC via a feedback buffer to serve as a VCO feedback signal 68P81086E28 B 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products Preselector Filter Assembly Receiver Front End Circuitry Custom Receiver IC Circuitry The preselector filter assembly provides 5 poles of bandpass filtering for the station receive rf input signal The filter assembly is mounted to the front of the receiver module housing and provides mini UHF con nectors for input from the receive antenna and output to the receiver board Tuning screws are provided for filter tuning Refer to the Trou bleshooting section in this manual for instructions on tuning the pres elector assembly The receive rf input is fed from the antenna through the 5 pole pres elector assembly to the receiver board The signal is low pass filtered amplified image filtered and fed to one input of the 1st mixer The sig nal is mixed with the 1st LO injection signal generated b
372. ine and receiver audio to out put devices such as external speaker built in local speaker and exciter modulation inputs Input Output Ports Circuitry two 32 line output buses al low miscellaneous control signals to be sent to various circuits throughout the station two 32 line input buses allow miscella neous inputs to be received from throughout the station Front Panel LEDs and Switches general purpose input out put ports control eight status LEDs and accept inputs from four momentary switches all located on the SCM front panel Supply Voltages Circuitry contains filtering and regulator circuitry which accepts 14 2 V and 5 V from backplane and generates the operating voltages required by the SCM circuitry 68 81094 76 9 1 00 CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Modules CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the SCM controls indicators and all input and output external connections CARD EDGE CONNECTORS MATE WITH BACKPLANE Z nra a s RJ 11 LED INDICATORS PUSHBUTTON VOLUME DOWN PUSHBUTTON PUSHBUTTON INTERCOM PUSHBUTTON EIA 232 4 RSS PORT CONNECTOR 1 CONNECTOR RJ 11 CONNECTOR CONNECTOR VOLUME UP SQUELCH SELECT EXTERNAL 5 10 MHZ INPUT Figure 1 Station Control Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs CLN6960A shown 68P81094E76
373. ing primary interface signals available on the station backplane System Connector 17 e Line 1 and Line 1 Aux TX Audio or Aux PL Audio Aux RX Audio Carrier Indication and Carrier Indication PTT and PTT To facilitate making connections between the station and external controller this section provides electrical characteristics frequency response curves and other interface details for the primary interface signals Note When the WildCard option is purchased required to configure inputs outputs for connection to an external controllers and is then enabled via the RSS the pre defined functionality of the signals on System Connector J17 as shown in the Backplane section of this manual e g J17 Pin 22 is Ext PTT J17 Pin 11 is Ext Failsoft etc is lost In order to restore the pre defined signals you must press F4 SET TO DEFAULT on any of the WildCard RSS screens Doing so automatically creates a set of WildCard Tables that now determine J17 s signal functionality The Editing WildCard Tables section page 8 may now be used to change the signal functionality as desired Gina inst Commercial Government and All Rights Hesorved Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81096E86 O Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 6 1 00 UP Quantar Quantro Station Products ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Figure 1 shows the pin out locations of the primary interface signals available on System Connector 1
374. ing the relay to turn on the power supply If the AC input is below approximately 85 V rms the relay will not be turned on and the power supply outputs will be disabled The red Module Fail LED on the front panel will light 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 CPN1049A CPN1050B265W Power Supply Modules Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry Battery Revert Trigger Circuitry VCC Supply Circuitry Overview The Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry is comprised of a switch ing type power supply which generates a 400 V dc voltage This volt age is fed to the DC to DC Converter Board to be used as the source for the 14V and 5V Supply Circuits Switching Power Supply Operation The switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 67 kHz The PWM output pulses are fed through driv er transistors to control three power FETs which rapidly switch the To roid Power Coil to ground The result is a high induced current which charges the filter capacitors to approximately 400 V dc Note that the PWM output pulses are also controlled by voltage and current feedback signals These feedback signals allow the average ac line current over switching cycles to be sinusoidal and in phase with the ac input voltage i e power factor corrected A comparator monitors the 400 V dc from the output of the Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry and a 5V reference signal If the 400 V dc voltage should drop
375. iodically an external 5 10 MHz Source is required to fine tune or net the 16 8 MHz reference signal In this mode the PLL compares the 5 10 MHz reference and a sample of the 16 8 MHz VCO output and generates up down pulses The Host uP reads the pulses via SPI bus and sends correction signals via SPI bus to the VCO to adjust the output frequency to 16 8 Mhz 0 3 ppm e High Stability Mode For some systems e g Simulcast systems the free running stability of the VCO is unacceptable for optimum system performance Therefore an external 5 10 MHz source is connected permanently to one of the BNC connectors In this mode the PLL compares the 5 10 MHz refer ence and a sample of the 16 8 MHz VCO output and generates a dc correction voltage The control voltage enable switch is closed allowing the control voltage from the PLL to adjust the high stability VCO frequency to 16 8 Mhz 0 3 ppm The VCO operates in this closed loop mode and is continually being fre quency controlled by the control voltage from the PLL The HDLC Bus Control Circuitry provides high impedance buffering and data routing for the Interprocessor Communications Bus a serial data bus implementing HDLC protocol This bus allows the Host uP to communicate with the microprocessor located on the Wireline Inter face Board and other optional modules via an interprocessor commu nications bus 10 68 81096 87 9 1 00 CLN1614A Station Control Mod
376. ion RD STAT TABLE 8 OF 10 Jump to Table 8 STATE and CONDITION SETTINGS State Cond State Cond State RX QUAL MET ACTION INACTION SET OUTPUT CLR OUTPUT Change from 7 to 3 Fl F2 F3 F4 FS F6 F7 F8 F9 HELP CHOICE ADD SET TO PREV NEXT DEL PROGRAMMING ADDT L LIST TABLE DEFAULT TABLE TABLE TABLE RULES CMDS 8 68P81096E86 O 6 1 00 Input Output Specifications for External Controllers Changing PTT to J17 Pin 42 The WildCard Tables are programmed in the factory to provide PTT and on J17 Pins 22 and 47 as opto isolated input Modify Wild Card Table 4 as shown below to move PTT to J17 Pin 42 as a transis tor buffered input When PTT is asserted the station will gate audio from Line 1 to the transmitter Follow the alignment instructions for the Wireline to set proper deviation level MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE me BASE STATION PRODUCTS A LL of the State VER XX XX XX WILD CARD STATE ACTION CONFIG Description EXT PTT TABLE 4 OF 10 Jump to Table 4 STATE and CONDITION SETTINGS State Cond State Cond State INPU ACTION INACTION KEY FROM WL DEKEY FROM WL Change from 9 to 8 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 HELP CHOICE ADD SET TO PREV NEXT DEL PROGRAMMING ADDT L LIST TABLE DEFAULT TABLE TABLE TABLE RULES CMDS 68P81096E86 O 9 6 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products Routing Aux RX Audio to J17 Pin 30 P
377. ion between the Power Amplifier Module and the transmit antenna low pass filter connects between the dual circulator output and the transmit antenna This section provides a general description option matrix chart identification of inputs outputs and functional theory of operation The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The dual circulator assembly consists of a double rf circulator and a 50 Q load with heat sink all mounted on 3 16 aluminum plate which is housed in the Peripheral Tray The tray is equipped with a cooling fan which directs air across the fins of the heat sink The rf output from the Power Amplifier Module connects to the input of the assembly while the output connects to an external low pass filter The output of the filter connects to the transmit antenna directly via antenna relay module or via duplexer nU Commercial Government and no 2090 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81090E86 B All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz Stations Functional Manuals OPTION COMPLEMENT Table 1 and Table 2 show the content
378. ion loss e Check high pass low notch and low pass high notch cavi ties for isolation Field tuning of the duplexer module requires the following test equipment e Motorola R2001 Communications Analyzer or equivalent RF Millivoltmeter Boonton 92E or equivalent RF Signal Generator HP8565 or equivalent 509 N type terminator Male to Females N Type connector UG 107B U or equiv Slotted screwdriver 3 32 allen wrench Tuning tool thin blade N to N bullet connector UG29A U or equivalent N to BNC Adapter UG349A U N to N Connector UG57B U 68 81086 71 9 1 00 Duplexer Module Setting Up for Tuning Duplexer Perform the preliminary tasks shown in Figure 4 to prepare for tuning the duplexer module Disconnect N type connector from each cavity 6 For each cavity unscrew and remove trimmer screw dust covers 9 TRIMMER Le i Use allen wrench and loosen tuning rod locking screws 6 LOW PASS HIGH PASS HIGH NOTCH LOW NOTCH CAVITIES CAVITIES Figure 4 Preliminary Tasks Prior to Tuning Duplexer 68 81086 71 7 9 1 00 Quantar VHF Station Functional Manual Duplexer Tuning Procedure The duplexer field tuning procedures are provided in Figure 5 The pro cedures are most easily performed with t
379. ire X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board TKN8731A WIM Cable TKN8731A WIM Cable CLN6816A RFI Suppressor CLN6816A RFI Suppressor C831AA Card Cage C831AA Card Cage TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket X249AW RF Cabling X249AW RF Cabling TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable TRN7663A AC Line Cord TRN7663A AC Line Cord X163AD Blank Panels X163AD Blank Panels TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Hardware X430AA 12 Cabinet X430AA 12 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet THN6700A 12 x 20 Cabinet TTN5040A Grommet TTN5040A Grommet X362AA Packing X362AA Packing TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet TBN6625A Packing for 12 Cabinet X436AJ Instructi
380. is a high induced current which charges the filter capacitors to approximately 400 V dc Note that the PWM output pulses are also controlled by voltage and current feedback signals These feedback signals allow the average ac line current over switching cycles to be sinusoidal and in phase with the ac input voltage i e power factor corrected A comparator monitors the 400 V dc from the output of the Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry and a 5V reference signal If the 400 V dc voltage should drop below approximately 350 V dc con sidered an ac input failure a BOOST_LOW signal is sent to the Battery Charger Revert Board via the DC to DC Converter Board to activate battery revert mode This circuitry consists of a switching type power supply which gener ates a 13 V dc supply voltage used as VCC by the local circuitry and the primary side of the DC to DC Converter Board The circuitry consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 67 kHz from DC to DC Converter Board The PWM output repetitively gates the 400 V dc from the Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry to the primary of the housekeeping transformer The result is an in duced voltage in the secondary winding which feeds a half wave rectifi er circuit The output is a 13 V dc VCC supply voltage 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual LED Status Indicators Two LEDs located on the power supply module front panel indi
381. is already out of ser vice due to an equipment malfunction this procedure be performed during off peak hours so as to minimize the disruption of service to the system subscribers To take the equipment out of service use the Access Disable function described in the Operation section of this manual IMPORTANT Note that if station operates as a repeater the transmit output from the station must be connected to a dummy load to prevent over the air broadcast during receiver testing Introduction While most module faults can be detected by running the station diag nostics provided by the RSS the following procedure provides a more traditional method of troubleshooting the receiver circuitry This procedure allows the service technician to make minor adjustments and verify proper operation of the station receive circuitry including e Receiver Module e Power Supply Module e 2 1 MHz reference oscillator circuitry e Receiver related circuitry in the Station Control Module SCM In general the receiver circuitry is exercised by injecting and measur ing test pattern signals using a Motorola R2670 Communications Ana lyzer or equivalent and analyzing the Bit Error Rate using the RSS In correct measurement values indicate a faulty module s measure ment values within the acceptable range verify proper operation of the above listed modules and circuitry Required Test Equipment The following t
382. is comprised of both non intrusive equipment not taken out of service and intrusive requir ing the equipment be temporarily taken out of service tests that allow the technician to troubleshoot reported or suspected equipment mal functions An overview of the procedure is shown in the flow chart Figure 2 on page 4 How to Use These Troubleshooting Procedures Perform the following basic steps in order to efficiently troubleshoot the Quantar station equipment Step 1 Select the appropriate troubleshooting procedure flow chart Procedure 1 or Procedure 2 Step 2 Perform the tasks given in the selected flow chart Tasks requiring additional explanation are marked with page ref erences Locate the additional information perform the tasks if any and return to the flow chart Step 3 Once the faulty module has been identified proceed to Module Replacement Procedures beginning on page 19 Troubleshooting gt PROCEDURE 1 ROUTINE SITE VISIT OBSERVE LED INDICATORS MONITOR ALARM TONES Pages 6 amp 9 e OBSERVE LED INDICATORS ON STATION MODULE FRONT PANELS e MONITOR ALARM ALERT TONES FROM LOCAL SPEAKER GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING MODULE SUSPECTED PROCEDURE 2 FLOW CHART OF BEING FAULTY INTERPRET STATUS REPORT RSS USER S GUIDE 68P81085E35 e USING RSS ACCESS THE STATUS REPORT SCREEN AND LOOK AT HISTORY OF ALARMS AND TIME STAMPS
383. is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filtering circuitry where it is used in calculating the current being drawn by the IPA or DPA FPA current sense circuitry comprised of two differential amplifiers and two sensing resistors meters the current being drawn by the FPA side A and side B and outputs two dc signals directly proportional to the currents for side A and side B Circuit operation is described in the following paragraph In each of the current sense circuits a differential amplifier measures the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage di rectly proportional to the current through the resistor The dc voltages FPA I1 and FPA 11 B is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filtering circuitry where it is used in calculating the cur rent being drawn by the FPA side A or side B 68 81091 91 9 1 00 TLF1930A TLF1940A TLF1800APower Amplifier Modules Sense and Detect Circuitry Continued PA Temperature Sense A thermistor and buffer circuit provides a dc voltage proportional to the PA temperature This signal PA_TEMP is fed to the Exciter Module which monitors the signal and reduces the PA output power by reduc ing the dc power control voltage V_CONT if the PA temperature ex ceeds set limits IPA DPA and FPA Detect Circuitry Detection circuits provide a dc voltage approximately proportional to the rf outputs of the IPA DPA an
384. is proportional to battery temperature and is used by diagnostic circuitry in power supply module Make thermistor connections as shown in Figure 15 P O CABLE CONNECTORS TRN5155A SHIPPED INSTALLED BATTERY CHARGER ABLE KIT RED 8AWG BLACK 8AWG BATTERY 5 TEMPERATURE 2j SENSO Y FUSE BLOCK AND 60A FUSE BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR CABLE P O BACKPLANE STORAGE BATTERY Figure 15 Making Connections to Storage Battery 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 31 Quantar Station Functional Manual RF Cabling Connections Introduction The transmit and receive antenna rf connections may be made in one of three fashions depending on the options ordered with the station and system application e Separate TX and RX Connectors A bracket located on the rear of the station holds two N type connectors one for RX and one for TX Coax cables from the receive and transmit antennas must be connected to these N type connectors e Single Antenna with Antenna Relay Option An antenna relay module is mounted on the rear of the station Coax cables from the station Receiver and Power Amplifier Modules are con nected to the antenna relay module A single N type connector is provided for connection to a single RX TX antenna The relay module is controlled by a signal from the Station Control Module via a 3 wire cable connected between the antenna relay mod ule and a 3 pin connector located on the b
385. k 38 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation PHONENET CONNECTOR PLUGS INTO DLAN 1 ON STATION BACKPLANE 2 PHONE NET CONNECTOR P O X148 150AA DLAN CABLE OPTIONS N CONNECT SPADE TERMINAL TO CHASSIS SCREW STATIONS AT ENDS OF NETWORK MUST HAVE TERMINATOR PLUG INSTALLED TO TO CHASSIS NEXT SCREW koa PREVIOUS STATION Figure 21 IntelliRepeater Trunking Site D LAN Network Cabling Detail 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 39 Quantar Station Functional Manual Connecting System Cables Continued Note IntelliRepeater networks may be ei ther D LAN or Ethernet Refer to page 38 for instructions on connecting the stations in a D LAN network Note A coaxial cable and a T connector is provided with each IntelliRepeater station shipped from the factory A site termination kit Option X843AB provides two terminators a Fconnector to serve as the network access point and a circular insulating pad IntelliRepeater Ethernet Cabling Connections Cabling for an ntelliRepeater trunking site using an Ethernet network consists of making the 10BASE 2 coaxial cabling connections be tween each of the stations Make the cabling connections as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Connect a T connector to BNC connector 22 on the backplane of each station in the network Select two stations one at each end of the network One wi
386. l Address and Data Buses The yP is equipped with a 28 line address bus used to access the non volatile memory DRAM memory and provide control via memory mapping for other circuitry in the SCM A 32 line data bus buffered for the non volatile memory is used to transfer data to from the SCM memory as well as other SCM circuitry SPI Bus The Host uP also controls the SPI bus a general purpose communi cations bus that allows the Host uP to communicate with other modules in the station continued 68 81096 87 9 1 00 CLN1614A Station Control Module Host Microprocessor Continued Non Volatile Memory DRAM Memory DRAM Controller The Host uP provides signals necessary to access and refresh the DRAM memory 25 MHz Clock Circuitry A crystal controlled 25 MHz clock circuit and buffer provide the 25 MHz clock signal to the Host uP Station Software FLASH Memory The station software resides in a 512k x 32 FLASH SIMM module The FLASH SIMM is accessed by the Host uP via the 28 line Host Buffered Address Bus and the 32 1 Host Buffered Data Bus Codeplug EEPROM The data which determines the station personality resides in an 8K x 8 codeplug EEPROM Stations are shipped from the factory with generic default data programmed into the codeplug EEPROM Field program ming is performed during installation using the Radio Service Software RSS program to enter additional customer s
387. l Block Diagram 9 1 00 68P81094E77 A Quantar and Quantro Station Products LANDLINE TO STATION DATA SIGNAL PATH P O 50 TELCO CONNECTOR JU1010 CLN6955 PLACED IN 4 WIRE OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR POSITION CLN6955 CLN6957 ON STATION BACKPLANE ol gt m LINE 1 AUDIO gt BUFFER FROM LANDLINE 7j GS de z eden RD TOSTATION MICROPROCESSOR L P O DATA 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR SERIAL BUS TO FROM CLN6955 S x STATION OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR ASTRO CONTROL CLN6955 CLN6957 MODEM MODULE ON STATION BACKPLANE GAIN CONTROL A d y FROM PASIC HDLC BUS d LINE 2 AUDIO JUMPER JUMPER FROM STATION FIELD FIELD 4 TO LANDLINE c 2 GAIN N lt AMPLIFIER LOW PASS P ADJUST ES gt FILTER CIRCUITRY E STATION TO LANDLINE DATA SIGNAL PATH Figure 5 9 6kbps ASTRO Modem Data Signal Path Functional Block Diagram LANDLINE TO STATION DATA SIGNAL PATH 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6955 OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR ie CLN6955 CLN6957 o ON STATION BACKPLANE E sus
388. l DELAY CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY SHUTDOWN 2 gt VCC_PRI AC_GOOD_DIAG Mi l FAIL gt BUFFER ISOLATION FROM CIRCUITRY BATTERY_REVERT 1 SECOND AC TO DC T RELAY_ON STARTUP CONVERTER gt FROM BOARD BATTERY ARD SHUTDOWN CHARGER REVERT SONUESTER DELAY BOARD OR CIRCUITRY REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUITRY DIAGNOSTICS CIRCUITRY 5V_REF 28V_RAW REGULATOR P 14V_RAW gt gt L MOD_FAIL_DIAG dee 77 T sosEcowp MAIN_SD_SEC FAN FAULT DELAY gt 2 5V_SEC DETECT FAN_FAIL_DIAG L FAN_ON_DIAG L BATT_T_DIAG BATT_T_DIAG FROM gt BATTERY 1 CH V DIAG CH V DIAG RAE A D SPI BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS CONVERTER TO FROM STATION CONTROL E AC GOOD DIAG GOOD DIAG 9 MODULE Ls L 28V 28V Ls 1 14V_DIAG 14V_DIAG Ls w 5V_DIAG 5V_DIAG L Ls L 10V_SEC THERMISTOR MOUNTED ON HEATSINK MAIN_SD_SEC ADDRESS DECODE CIRCUITRY DETECT CIRCUITRY HEATSINK_DIAG FROM P O ADDRESS BUS ADDRESS A STATION DECODE ENABLE ENABLE CONTROL CIRCUITRY gt BOARD 9 Figure 3 CPN6067A DC to DC Converter Board Functional Block Diagram 2 of 2 11 15 99 68P81095E88 A 21 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual CHARGER SUPPLY CIRCUITRY D CARD EDGE CONNECTOR 28V_RAW eee m Kua Um sd CONVERTER SWITCH U FET SWITCHES BOARD m BOOST FET SWITCH V FET 7 DRIVER CHARGER
389. la X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Processing CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 Processing CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board TKN8731A WIM Cable TKN8731A WIM Cable CLN6816A RFI Suppressor CLN6816A RFI Suppressor C831AA Card Cage C831AA Card Cage TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket X249AW RF Cabling X249AW RF Cabling TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable TRN7663A AC Line Cord TRN7663A AC Line Cord X163AD Blank Panels X163AD Blank Panels TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit X842AB Ethernet Termination Kit CLN6885A Ethernet Termination Har
390. lace and re placing the two screws Be sure the 2 wire cable from the local speaker is connected to the 3 pin connector at the bottom front of the Station Control Board If the connector is not keyed earlier models you may connect the 3 pin connector in either polarity Restore power to the station Post Replacement Optimization Procedure Step 1 Alignment Procedures e RX Wireline e TX Wireline e Squelch Adjust e Battery Equalization if required e Power Output e Tx Deviation Gain Adjust e Reference Modulation For ASTRO stations also perform RSSI and Simulcast ASTRO Launch Time Offset align ment For 6809 Trunking stations also perform Step 2 TDATA alignment Step 3 Replacement Station Control Modules are shipped with default data programmed into the codeplug EEPROM located on board After replacing a Station Control Board you must download codeplug data unique to the particular station to the replacement board codeplug Simply retrieve the file from your archive and follow the instructions in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for saving data to the codeplug Note that if no archive codeplug file exists you may create a new codeplug by copying the training cp codeplug file supplied with the RSS and then program it as necessary to meet the particular station s requirements Calibrate the reference oscillator station reference by performing the procedure in the Routine Maintenance section of thi
391. le N Type 50 Ohms SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE 68P81091E93 B 9 1 00 Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz Stations Functional Manuals TYPICAL MOUNTING CONFIGURATION The duplexer module is typically mounted in the same rack or cabinet as the station and peripheral tray if equipped Figure 3 shows front and rear views of a typical repeater configuration in which a station triple circula tor option and duplexer option are installed in a single cabinet Also shown is a simplified interconnect diagram showing the receiver and transmitter paths to a single RX TX antenna 4 68P81091E93 B 9 1 00 800 MHz and 900 MHz Duplexer Modules CABINET z STATION RECEIVE RF INPUT E TO RECEIVER MODULE lt IEEENEL STATION PERIPHERAL PERIPHERAL TRAY DUPLEXER MODULE 2 gt gt DUPLEXER MODULE NN Nm k A TRANSMIT RF OUTPUT 1 FROM PA VIA RF CABLE FROM R SINGLE TX RX ANTENNA HERE 8 E moe 4 elt 8 TRIPLE CIRCULATOR AND LOW PASS FILTER REAR VIEW TX RX ANTENNA POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE TX RF FROM d STATION DUPLEXER lt a gt MODULE RECEIVER MODULE Figure 3 Typical Duplexer Mounting Configuration and Interconnect Diagram 9 1 00 68 81091 93 5 Quantar 800 MHz and 900
392. lgonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 11 15 99 UP Quantar Station Functional Manual PRE INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS A good installation is important to ensure the best possible performance and reliability of the station equipment Vital to a good installation is pre installation planning Planning the installation includes considering the mounting location of the equipment in relation to input power antenna s and telephone interfaces Also to be considered are site environmental conditions the particular mounting method several available and required tools and equipment The following paragraphs provide additional details on these and other pre installation consider ations Important If this is your first time installing this type of equipment it is highly recommended that you completely read the entire Installation section before beginning the actual installation Installation Overview The following information is intended to serve as an overview for install ing the Quantar station and ancillary equipment Step by step pro cedures for each of the major tasks are then provided beginning in paragraph 2 Plan the installation paying particular attention to environmental conditions at the site ventilation requirements and grounding and lightning protection Unpack and inspect the equipment Mechanically install the equipment at the site Make necessary electrical and cabling connections including the followin
393. ll be the terminated end of the Ethernet network the other will be the access point of the Ethernet network Place a terminator on one end of the T connector on the station selected to be at the terminated end of the net work as shown in Figure 22 Using the supplied 10BASE 2 coaxial cables connect the stations together in a daisy chain fashion as shown in Figure 22 Create a network access point by connecting the last sta tion to a T connector and terminating the other end This T connector serves as the access point for the Ethernet network This T connector may be used to connect a PC to the network to download station software to the FLASH memory in each of the ntelliRepeater stations Insulate each T connector by folding the circular insulat ing pad around the connector and pressing it together until it sticks to itself holding it in place Important Ethernet networks utilize a floating ground In order to eliminate possible data corruption resulting from multiple ground points in the network the network should be grounded at only one point This is typically accomplished at the terminated end of the network by us ing a terminator with an attached ground wire Attach the ground wire to the station chassis Make sure that the oth er T connectors and cables in the network are not grounded to any station either intentionally or accidental ly by using the circular insulating pads on every T con nector 40 68P
394. lowing two examples illustrate the timing of the alarm tones Example 1 Single Alarm 3 beeps sso ee Ue bua qe RC hee repeats 3 10 Second Window Example 2 Multiple Alarms 1 and 4 beep beep repeats 2seconds 1 Alarm 4 10 Second Window The alarm tone definitions are as follows Alarm Condition Name Number of Beeps Alarm Condition Description Alarm is reported when station loses ac line power and reverts to battery backup Alarm is cleared when station receives ac power 1 Battery Revert Alarm is reported when PA fails to key up to full output power Alarm is cleared upon successful keyup to full power 2 PA Fail Alarm is reported when either TX or RX synthesizers fail to lock Alarm is cleared when both synthesizers lock 3 Synthesizer Alarm is reported when battery charging voltage is above 34 5 V 100 W stations or 17 25 V 20 W stations Alarm is cleared when voltage returns to normal range 4 Overvoltage 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Quantar Station Functional Manual Verifying Transmitter Circuitry IMPORTANT Performing this procedure requires that the station be taken out of service It is rec ommended that unless the station is already out of ser vice due to an equipment malfunction this procedure be
395. m shown in Figure 2 10V Regulator Circuitry 5 MHz Oscillator Circuitry Control Circuitry A series pass regulator circuit accepts 14 2 V from the backplane and generates a 10 V dc supply voltage This 10 V is used to power the ovenized 5 MHz element as well as other circuitry on the UHSO board A sealed ovenized 5 MHz element provides a highly stable 5 MHz refer ence output This output is fed to the Station Control Module via the backplane and is used to control the reference oscillator circuitry lo cated on the SCM board to maintain improved frequency accuracy A sample of the 5 MHz signal is fed to one of the A D converter inputs p o Diagnostics Circuitry The ovenized element also generates a 8V dc voltage This 8V is used to power the buffers associated with the steering voltage and al lows the steering voltage and ovenized element to track eliminating the need for additional temperature compensation The 8V dc volt age is also scaled and buffered to provide a 8V sample which is fed to one of the A D converter inputs p o Diagnostics Circuitry The control circuitry accepts 12 bits of data from the Station Control Module via the SPI bus and outputs a corresponding dc voltage This voltage is scaled and buffered and output as a dc steering voltage which controls the frequency output of the 5 MHz oscillator Note that this is not a closed feed back loop system The 12 bits are sent only durin
396. m 9001 T1000 T1001 4 Wire Voice Audio Path Refer to Figure 4 Voice audio signals sent to from the station via 4 wire copper pairs are processed by the 4 wire audio circuit on the WIB Line 1 Audio amp Line 2 Audio The 4 wire circuit operates as follows Landline to Station balanced audio is input to the primary of an audio transformer The signal is induced into the transformer secondary and fed to a buffer through jumper JU1010 placed in the 4 wire position as shown below Note that jumper fields in parallel with both the pri mary and secondary coils provide for selectable impedance matching Refer to the illustration below for impedance setting information The buffer output is fed to the gain adjust circuitry Under control of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides eight levels of gain adjust 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 and 40 dB The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to an A D converter which digitizes the audio signal into a PCM output This output is fed serially to the PASIC which places the data in the proper TDM timeslot as in structed by the microprocessor in the Station Control Module and out put to the SCM on the TDM Bus Station to Landline audio is input to the PASIC in the form of PCM data on the TDM bus The PASIC extracts the data and feeds it to a D A con verter which takes the PCM
397. main inverter if overtemperature condition is detected e Fan Control Circuitry compares signal from thermistor to ref erence voltage to generate a fan control signal to turn on cooling fan mounted in power supply module also generated is a FAN ON status signal which is sent to Station Control Board via A D converter and SPI bus Note that a Fan Fault Detect circuit accepts a pulsed feedback signal from the cooling fan to indicate whether the fan is function ing when turned on by Fan Control Circuitry a FAN FAIL status signal is sent to Station Control Board via A D converter and SPI bus Status LED Indicators Two LEDs located on the power supply module front panel indicate module status as follows e On lights GREEN when power supply module is turned on and functioning properly LED turns off when module is turned off in put power is removed or module startup circuitry is in fail mode e Module Fail lights RED when power supply module is in fail mode or when a failure in another station module causes exces sive current drain on any of the power supply output voltages LED turns off when module is functioning properly The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Board to use the address bus to select the A D converter Diagnostics Circuitry for communications via the SPI bus Typical communications include reading status signals from the Diagnostics Circuitry 68P81085E12 B 9 1 00 TRN7802A TRN7803A
398. malfunction this procedure be performed during off peak hours so as to minimize the disruption of service to the system subscribers To take the equipment out of service use the Access Disable function described in the Operation section of this manual IMPORTANT Note that if station operates as a repeater the transmit output from the station must be connected to a dummy load to prevent over the air broadcast during receiver testing Introduction While most module faults can be detected by running the station diag nostics provided by the RSS the following procedure provides a more traditional method of troubleshooting the receiver circuitry This proce dure is useful in the event that the RSS is not at hand or for some reason cannot be utilized PC malfunction etc This procedure allows the service technician to make minor adjustments and verify proper operation of the station receive circuitry including e Receiver Module e Power Supply Module e 2 1 MHz reference oscillator circuitry e Receiver related circuitry in the Station Control Module SCM In general the receiver circuitry is exercised by injecting and measur ing signals using a Motorola R2001 Communications Analyzer or equivalent Incorrect measurement values indicate a faulty module s measurement values within the acceptable range verify proper opera tion of the above listed modules and circuitry Required Test Equipment
399. mation Sheet 1 of 3 4 68P81086E33 F 11 15 99 TRN7480A Station Backplane CONNECTOR 20 EA ee Alternate RSS Port Pin Signal Input Output Function 1 DCD1 Data Carrier Detect 2 RXD1 Receive Data 3 TXD1 Transmit Data 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 5 SIGNAL GND Station Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready 7 RTS1 Request to Send 8 CTS1 Clear to Send 9 Ring Indicator Not used CONNECTOR 18 EPIC Fan Control Early Models Only Pin Signal Input Output Function 1 FAN GND Ground for external fan 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FAN 14 2 V dc for external fan 9 CONNECTOR 19 DLAN1 CONNECTOR 14 6809 TRUNKING MRTI CONNECTOR 21 1 PPS 1 PPS clock signal from GPS Receiver for ASTRO Simulcast application TTL levels 50 ohms CONNECTOR 30 5 10 MHZ INPUT Accepts external 5 or 10 MHz Frequency Standard for Calibrating Station Reference Oscillator located in Station Control Module 5 MHz injection level 1 0 5 V RMS High Impedance Input CONNECTOR 25 BATTERY CHARGER OUTPUT Two RED top and two BLACK bottom wires to battery revert connector mounted on station cage Pin Signal Input Output Function 1 Shield Gnd Station Ground 2 WFI Future use 3 WFI Future use 4 DLAN1 Differential Data 5 DLAN1 Differential Data
400. mburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Quantro Station Products ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS RF LINK Install stations 1 2 and 3 as described in the appropriate functional base station manual Figure 2 shows the connections between the stations necessary to allow RA RT TRC control operation Perform the following procedures to make the wiring connections between the console and Station 1 and between Stations 2 and 3 STATION 3 STATION 2 RF LINK RD STAT STATION 1 REMOTE CONSOLE RD STAT LINE 2 LINE 1 Figure 2 RA RT TRC Control Wiring Connections RF Link Console to Station 1 Wiring Connections Step 9 Connect the landline to station audio from the console to the Line 1 connections on the backplane of Station 1 as shown below Step 10 Connect the station to landline audio to the console to the Line 2 connections on the backplane of Station 1 as shown below Note Phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the 8 position terminal connector Refer to the Installation section of the appropriate sta tion functional manual for more details on phone line connections 8 POSITION TERMINAL CONNECTOR Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 2 Line 2 Pin 3 Line 2 Pin4 50 PIN TELCO CONNECTOR Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 26 Line 2 Pin 2 Line 2 Pin 27 2 68P81090E98 A 9 1 00 RA RT Configuration TRC Co
401. method is described as follows Note Make sure the Automatic Line Control parameter is disabled for Stations 1 2 and 3 Station 1 TX Wireline Alignment Perform standard TX Wireline alignment procedure located in RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Station 2 TX Wireline Alignment Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Connect the RSS to Station 3 and access the RX Wireline Alignment screen Set the RX wireline level and Save it Note that the wireline level is typically set to 6 dBm Press F2 to turn on the 1 kHz tone Do not exit this screen With the RSS program still running disconnect the RSS cable from Station 3 and connect it to Station 2 Now exit the RX Alignment screen Access the TX Wireline Alignment screen and press F8 to save the alignment value Station 3 is providing the 1 kHz alignment tone Exit the TX Wireline Alignment screen With the RSS program still running disconnect the RSS cable from Station 2 and connect it to Station 3 Access the RX Wireline Alignment screen and turn off the 1 kHz tone 68P81090E98 A 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products Station 3 TX Wireline Alignment Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Connect the RSS to Station 2 and access the RX Wireline Alignment screen Set the RX wireline level and Save it Note that the wireline level is typically set to 6 dBm P
402. millivoltmeter Reduce the range on the millivoltmeter as necessary to reach true minimum reading HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR e Use open end wrench and tighten lock nut carefully making sure notch adjustment screw does not shift position Repeat steps 2 amp 3 for cavities 2 and 3 0000 00 ool 000 ca 0000 0000 0000 p 1 0000 0000 000 0000 s I Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency whichever is HIGHER Output level set to 10 dBm TUNING LOW NOTCH LOOP ASSEMBLIES BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER Range set to 10 dBm 0000000 co 5 6 e e n oa Use screwdriver to adjust notch b adjustment screw for cavity 4 to obtain a minimum reading on the millivoltmeter Reduce the range on 6 dB IN LINE PAD NOTCH ADJUSTMENT SCREW 50 OHM AND LOCK NUT Set up test equipment as shown the millivoltmeter as necessary to reach true minimum reading HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR Use open end wrench and tighten lock nut carefully making sure notch adjustment screw does nol shift ssss 229 position s 5 S650 220 g 9 Repeat steps 2 amp 3 for cavities 5 L J and 6 Fr
403. n 14 V Supply Circuitry consists of switching type power supply that generates the 14 V dc supply voltage from 28 V dc supply voltage 5 V Supply Circuitry consists of switching type power sup ply that generates the 5 V dc supply voltage from 28 V dc supply voltage Battery Charger Control Circuitry Provides buffering for sig nals related to battery charging revert operation Reference Voltage Circuitry Generates 10V_SEC and 2 5V_SEC supply voltages for use by local circuitry Diagnostics Circuitry converts analog status signals to digi tal format for transfer to Station Control Module Address Decode Circuitry performs address decoding to provide chip select signal for the A D converter Startup Shutdown Control Circuitry Provides delay inter vals for startup and shutdown of entire power supply module continued on next page 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual Overview of Circuitry Continued Battery Charger Revert Board CPN6074B Charger Supply Circuitry consists of switching type power supply that generates charging current for the external storage battery Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry consists of pulse width modulator boost switch timer and driver circuitry to provide vari able width pulses for the FET switches in the Charger Supply Circuitry Battery Revert Circuitry consists of signal monitoring circuit r
404. n In a typical Simulcast scenario the station responsible for the major coverage area is set for FBICR and any adjacent stations are subsequently disabled e Automatic and External modes are mutually exclusive i e a station may not be configured for both modes 68P81095E96 O 3 7 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products CONFIGURING THE FBICR FEATURE Depending on the system type and whether you wish to configure for automatic or external operation the FBICR feature must be configured by using the RSS only or a combination of RSS programming and external wiring connections Each configuration scenario is described on the following pages Automatic Mode Conventional Analog or Conventional ASTRO CAI Simulcast or Non Simulcast Voting Systems Step 1 Access the Wireline Configuration Screen Step 2 Set the Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat field to ENABLED Step 3 Enter the desired delay time in msecs in the Fall Back Timer field MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Use Up Down Arrow Keys to Select BASE STATION PRODUCTS Wireline Operation Page 1 of 2 VER XX XX XX P CHANGE VIEW WIRELINE CONFIGURATION Wireline Operation 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX Console Priority DISABLED OPTION Remote Control Type ASTRO TRC Input Line 1 Outbound Analog Link Timer 120 sec Comparator NONE OPTION Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat ENABLED Fall Back Timer XXX msec Status Tone ENABLED Status Tone Frequency 2175 kHz Wi
405. n Signal Input Output Function 18 OPEN 19 OPEN 1 GND Station Ground 20 DTR3 Data Terminal Ready 2 BATT TEMP Pp Variable resistance proportional to battery temperature 21 OPEN from sensor near storage batteries 22 OPEN 3 GND Station Ground 23 OPEN 24 OPEN 25 Remote Loopback 3 Not Used Figure 2 TRN7480A Backplane Rear Connectors Pin Out Information Sheet of 6 68P81086E33 F 11 15 99 M MOTOROLA ANTENNA RELAY MODULE Option X371AA DESCRIPTION Option X371AA provides an antenna relay module for use with Quantar and Quantro station products This section provides a general description option complement identification of inputs outputs and functional theory of oper ation The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshoot ing section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description This antenna relay module allows a single antenna to be used for both transmit and receive functions base station applications only The an tenna relay is controlled by a signal from the Station Control Module to connect the antenna to either the Power Amplifier Module transmit or Receiver Module receive The antenna relay module is mounted on an angle bracket provided on the rear of the stati
406. n supply shuts down if temperature exceeds preset threshold Diagnostic monitoring critical internal parameters are con tinually monitored and reported to the Station Control Module which can automatically provide correction for certain operating conditions Fan Failure Protection Power Supply enters shutdown mode in event of cooling fan failure Auto Recovery from Shutdown Power Supply automatically recovers from shutdown mode if the cause of the shutdown no longer exists Limited In Rush Current Circuitry limits in rush current to less than 30 A in all conditions Motorola Inc 2000 Commercial Government and All Rights H served Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81096E84 O Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Station Products Functional Manual Power Supply Module Simplified Block Diagram The illustration below provides a simplified block diagram of a Power Supply Module showing how the two circuit boards interconnect A de tailed block diagram and functional theory of operation for each board is provided later in this section beginning on page 6 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 V DG Levee DC INPUT DC INPUT Vin DC output 14VDC eae SES xm t BOARD BOARD STATION MODULES i BACKPLANE 68P81096E84 O 9 1 00 CPN1031B Power Supply Module Overview of Circuitry The power supply module is comprised of two circuit boar
407. n response varies certain control signals to correct output power turn on cooling fans etc The sense and detect circuits are de scribed in the following paragraphs Current Sensing Circuitry 20W IPA and DPA current sense circuitry comprised of two differential am plifiers and two sensing resistors meters the current being drawn by the IPA and the DPA and outputs two dc signals directly proportional to the IPA and DPA currents Circuit operation is described in the follow ing paragraph In each of the current sense circuits a differential amplifier measures the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage di rectly proportional to the current through the resistor The dc voltage or DPA 1 is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filtering circuitry where it is used in calculating the current being drawn by the IPA or DPA Current Sensing Circuitry 100W IPA and DPA current sense circuitry comprised of two differential am plifiers and two sensing resistors meters the current being drawn by the IPA and the DPA and outputs two dc signals directly proportional to the IPA and DPA currents Circuit operation is described in the follow ing paragraph In each of the current sense circuits a differential amplifier measures the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage di rectly proportional to the current through the resistor The dc voltage IPA or DPA 1
408. nal Manual Replacing Wireline Interface Board Note later model board CLNxxxx be used to replace both later model boards and earlier model boards TRNxxxx However earlier model boards cannot be used to re place later model boards Later model boards support either EPROMs or FLASH earlier model boards support only EPROMs Note existing EPROM or FLASH SIMM is faulty contact the System Support Center at 1 800 221 7144 to obtain replacement parts The version of software contained in the re placement devices must match that of the faulty devices Note Use an Extraction Tool Motorola Part No 01 80386A04 to remove the firm ware devices Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Replacement Procedure Turn off station power refer to page 20 Using a Torx 15 driver remove anti vibration screw s if installed from top and or bottom of module front panel Remove Station Control Module front panel and Wireline Interface Board as described in Figure 6 Set all jumpers on replacement board to match those on the faulty board These include input output impedance matching jumpers 2 wire 4 wire select jumper and dc re mote control selection jumpers The Wireline Board software must now be removed from the old board and installed onto the replacement board The software is contained on either two EPROMS earlier version boards or two FLASH ICs
409. nally Added Internally Added by Motorola X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module by Motorola X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Processing CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 Processing CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board TKN8731A WIM Cable TKN8731A WIM Cable CLN6816A RFI Suppressor CLN6816A RFI Suppressor C831AA Card Cage C831AA Card Cage TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket TRN7494A Duplex Interface includes ant connector bracket X249AW RF Cabling X249AW RF Cabling TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable TKN8753A Receiver mini UHF to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable 9126 Transmitter N type to N type coax cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable X187AA Domestic Power Cable TRN7663A AC Line Cord TRN7663A AC Line Cord X163AD Blank Panels X163AD Blank Panels TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel TRN7696A Dual Slot Wide Blank Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X84
410. nd packed in a cardboard container with corru gated corner braces and a cardboard pallet Unpack as described in Figure 9 1 6 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation Cut band at bottom of carton Unfold cardboard flaps from cardboard pallet and remove cardboard cover CARDBOARD iu COVER p CARDBOARD CUT BAND FLAPS CARDBOARD CORNER BRACE 4 Cut band and remove cardboard corner braces CUT BAND lt PLASTIC CARDBOARD BAG PALLET Remove plastic bag STATION IN 12 x 20 CABINET Figure 9 Unpacking Procedures for Quantar Station Cages Shipped 12 x 20 Cabinets 68 81096 57 11 15 99 17 Quantar Station Functional Manual Unpacking the Equipment Continued Unpacking 30 x 20 Cabinet 46 x 20 Cabinet and 60 Indoor Cabinet These cabinet styles are shipped mounted to a wooden skid secured with corrugated corner braces held by a plastic strap and covered with a cardboard cover Unpack the equipment as described in Figure 10 68P81096E57 A 18 11 15 99 Installation R dbeard f tati Remove anti static bag Do not discard PIENE COVP IMON STANON bag It will be re installed to protect equipment during installation CARDBOARD COVER gt 5 gt 2 PACKING SPACER Depending cabinet type either open or remove front and rear doors to g
411. nd the DSP ASIC located on the Station Control Board This bus allows the DSP ASIC to control various current and gain settings es tablish the data bus clock rate program the 2nd LO and perform other control functions 68 81086 28 9 1 00 TRD6361A F TRD6362A F Receiver Modules Address Decode and Converter Circuitry Voltage Regulator Circuitry Address Decode Circuitry The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Board to use the address bus to select a specific device on a specific station board for control or data communications purposes via the SPI bus If the board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 thru A5 as the receiver module address it enables the chip select circuitry The chip select cir cuitry then decodes address lines A0 and A1 and generates chip select signals for the PLL and A D converter and the SYNTH ADAPT signal to control the loop filter bypass switch in the synthesizer circuitry A D Converter Circuitry Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the receiver board are fed to the A D converter which converts them to a digital signal and upon request by the Station Control Board outputs the signal to the Station Control Board via the SPI bus The voltage regulator circuitry consists of 10V and two 5V regula tors The 10V regulator accepts a 14 2V dc input and generates a 10V dc operating voltage for the receiver board circuitry The
412. ne 08 007 Enter desired keypad se 10 quences for TI Gated Access Enable 123 Gated Access Disable 456 Repeater Setup 147 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Repeater Knockdown 369 HELP PRINT ADD DELETE ACTION EXIT Keypad sequences are MODE EDIT shown here as examples You may choose other sequences as desired Figure 1 Making DTMF SAM Decoder Selection RSS Settings continued on next page gt 8 68 81096 11 12 15 99 Dual Control of Repeater Access Via TRC and SAM For MDC 1200 operation access Page 02 of the SAM Decoder Selection screen and program the OPCODE ID and ACT TBL settings as shown in Figure 2 These settings establish the IDs and corresponding Action Tables for Repeater Setup Repeater Knockdown Gated Access Enable and Gated Access Disable Note that if there is default data already entered when opening the screen overwrite the data with the data shown below MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE SAM with QUANTAR OQUANTRO Use UP DOWN Arrows to Change Fields Page 02 of 03 Set to ENABLED SAM DECODER SELECTION BINARY DECODER MDC1200 SAM MODE 00 of 01 BINARY INPUT RECEIVER 1 BINARY DECODER TARGETZ OPCODE ID ACT TBL gt Ol REPEATACC 0001 03 Enter Action Table numbers to REPEAT ACC 0002 04 correspond to IDs 0001 thru 03 REPEATACC 0003 06 00
413. ne modem data is input to the microprocessor from the Station Control Module microprocessor via the interprocessor com munications bus HDLC protocol The microprocessor feeds the data to the modem which converts the data to a modem signal The output of the modem is fed to the gain adjust circuitry Under con trol of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain adjust OdB 6dB 12dB and 18 The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed thru a 2 pole low pass filter and into the inputs of two amplifiers The outputs of the amplifiers are fed to two transistors which are connected a push pull configu ration to drive the primary of an audio transformer The modem data signal is induced into the secondary and output to the landline system via either the 50 pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector as balanced audio 68P81094E78 A 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Description of Audio Data Signal Paths Continued The Quantar station supports SECURENET transparent mode only Note Depending on customer preference phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the screw termi nal connector on the station backplane Landline to Station signals are connected at Line 1 Audio or Line3 Audio Station to Land line signals are connected at Line 2 Audio or Line 4 Audio For SECURENET systems make sure jump ers JU1011 and JU
414. nect the RSS to Station 3 and access the RX Wireline Alignment screen Set the RX wireline level and Save it Note that the wireline level is typically set to 6 dBm Press F2 to turn on the 1 kHz tone Do not exit this screen With the RSS program still running disconnect the RSS cable from Station 3 and connect it to Station 2 Now exit the RX Alignment screen Access the TX Wireline Alignment screen and press F8 to save the alignment value Station 3 is providing the 1 kHz alignment tone Exit the TX Wireline Alignment screen With the RSS program still running disconnect the RSS cable from Station 2 and connect it to Station 3 Access the RX Wireline Alignment screen and turn off the 1 kHz tone 68P81090E99 A 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products Station 3 TX Wireline Alignment Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Connect the RSS to Station 2 and access the RX Wireline Alignment screen Set the RX wireline level and Save it Note that the wireline level is typically set to 6 dBm Press F2 to turn on the 1 kHz tone Do not exit this screen With the RSS program still running disconnect the RSS cable from Station 2 and connect it to Station 3 Now exit the RX Alignment screen Access the TX Wireline Alignment screen and press F8 to save the alignment value Station 2 is providing the 1 kHz alignment tone Exit the TX Wireline Alignment screen
415. ng front panel on off switch startup delayed relay and a full wave rectifier Startup Delay Circuitry provides a delay of approximately 1 5 seconds from time on off switch is turned on until the power supply becomes functional allows pre charge of high capacity filter capacitors to limit in rush current on power up Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry consists of switching type power supply that generates 400V dc for use by DC to DC Converter Board as well as providing power factor correction Battery Revert Trigger Circuitry Monitors 400 V dc and generates a signal to the Battery Charger Revert Board to acti vate battery revert if the 400 V dc fails or drops below approxi mately 350 V dc VCC Supply Circuitry consists of switching type power sup ply that generates the VCC supply voltage approximately 13V do for use by circuitry on AC to DC Converter Board and DC to DC Converter Board DC to DC Converter Board CPN6079B 14 V Supply Circuitry consists of switching type power supply that generates the 14 V dc supply voltage and provides primary secondary isolation 5 V Supply Circuitry consists of switching type power sup ply that generates the 5 V dc supply voltage from 14 V dc supply voltage Battery Charger Control Circuitry Provides buffering for sig nals related to battery charging revert operation Reference Voltage Circuitry Generates 10V_SEC and 2 5V_SEC supply
416. ng Receiver Site Number 1 Main Standby MAIN F7 F8 F9 VALIDATE CONFIG Figure 3 Making Multi Coded Squelch RSS Setting continued on next page gt 4 68 81096 11 12 15 99 Dual Control of Repeater Access Via TRC and SAM Step 3 Access Page 1 of the Channel Information screen and set the Analog Rptr Access field to MDC TONE as shown in Figure 4 to enable the Station Access Module SAM MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE BASE STATION PRODUCTS Page 1 of 2 VER XX XX XX MAIN CHANGE VIEWCHANNEL INFORMATION Please Enter A Channel Number Valid Range Is 1 to 1 Channel Number 0 000000 MHz 0 000000 MHz Rx1 Frequency Rx2 Frequency Modulation Type Tx Rated Deviation Receive Channel BW Call Sign Call Sign Over Wireline Access Code Table Analog Rx Activation Analog Rptr Activation Analog Rptr Hold In Analog Rptr Access 1 CHANNEL 1 OF 1 Tx Frequency 0 000000 MHz Tx Idle Frequency 0 000000 MHz ANALOG 5 00 kHz WIDE 25 30 kHz Channel Spaci z Channel Spacing Set to MDC TONE DISABLED 1 OFF OFF OFF MDC TONE Figure 4 M Step 4 shown in Figure 5 aking Analog Rptr Access RSS Setting Access the RF Configuration Data screen and set the Repeater Operation field for REPEATER as BASE STATION PRODUCTS VER XX XX XX MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE CHANGE VIEW RF CONFIGURATION Use Up
417. ng either PCM voice information for 4 wire or 2 wire operation or 12kbps se cure data 12kbps SECURENET operation and routing the information to the proper destination i e from landline to station and from station to landline Details of the signal paths are provided in Description of Audio Data Signal Paths later in this section 68 81094 77 3 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Functional Overview Cont d Refer to Figure 2 Audio Data Circuits Each WIB contains circuitry for one 4 wire audio data circuit one 2 wire audio data circuit one 9 6kbps ASTRO data circuit and one 12kbps SECURENET data circuit As shown in the block diagram the PASIC and its associated circuitry function to provide the following sig nal paths e 4 wire voice audio from landline to station and from station to landline e 2 wire voice audio from landline to station and from station to landline 9 6kbps ASTRO modem data from landline to station and from station to landline e 12kbps SECURENET modem data from landline to station and from station to landline Description of Audio Data Signal Paths provided later in this section contains block diagrams of each of the major signal paths with an ex planation of the signal flows DC Remote Detection The WIB contains circuitry to monitor the Line 1 Audio and Line 2 Audio input lines and detect dc control currents The detection outputs 12 5
418. nnect cable mini UHF connector connected to Receiver Board Remove nine 9 Torx head screws securing Re ceiver Board to module housing Note location of foam insulating pad beneath VCO portion of Receiv er Board Remove faulty board and replace with known good board Be sure to position the foam insulating pad noted in previous step behind the VCO Secure board using Torx head screws removed pre viously Reconnect rf cable to mini UHF connector on board Step 6 If Preselector Assembly is being replaced Disconnect cables mini UHF connectors from as sembly Remove faulty Preselector Assembly by removing two 2 Torx head screws securing assembly to mod ule housing Install known good assembly and secure using Torx head screws removed previously Reconnect rf cables to mini UHF connectors continued on next page 32 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Replacing Receiver Module and or Preselector Assembly and UHF Continued Replacement Procedure Continued Step 7 Install repaired Receiver Module by sliding module into cage about 2 inches from full insertion Connect the rf in put cable to the mini UHF connector on the Preselector Assembly Step 8 Slide the module in completely and firmly seat the module connector into the backplane Do not slam the module against the backplane or push any harder than necessary to seat the connectors Step 9
419. nterface Bus e Digitized voice audio data from Wireline Interface Board and other optional modules via TDM bus e ASTRO modem data from Wireline Interface Board via HDLC bus e SECURENET modem data from Wireline Interface Board via HDLC bus e 6809 MRTI transmit audio Outputs from the DSP circuitry are e Digitized voice audio data from DSP to Wireline Interface Board and other optional modules via TDM bus e Digitized voice audio from DSP to external speaker built in speaker or handset earpiece via Audio Interface Bus and Audio Interface Circuitry e Digitized voice audio data from DSP to Exciter Module modulation signals via Audio Interface Bus and Audio Interface Circuitry e 6809 MRTI transmit audio Digital Signal Processor DSP The DSP a 56002 operating at an internal clock speed of 60 MHz ac cepts and transmits digitized audio to from the various modules in the station The DSP provides address and data buses to receive transmit digitized audio via the DSP ASIC and to access the DSP program and signal processing algorithms contained in three 32K x 8 SRAM ICs Three additional 32K x 8 SRAM ICs are provided for data storage DSP ASIC The DSP ASIC operates under control of the DSP to provide a number of functions as follows e Interfaces with the DSP via the DSP address and data buses e Accepts 16 8 MHz signal from Station Reference Circuitry and outputs a 2 1 MHz reference signal used throughout the station e Pro
420. nti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X334AA Receiver Module UHF R1 X334AA Receiver Module UHF R1 CLE1190A Receiver Module Board Preselector Hardware CLE1190A Receiver Module Board Preselector Hardware CLN7334A Receiver Module Front Panel CLN7334A Receiver Module Front Panel TRN7799A VHF UHF Tuning Kit TRN7799A VHF UHF Tuning Kit CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X43AB Power Supply Assembly X43AA Power Supply Assembly CPN1049B 265W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CPN1047A 625W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor 6086 Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector 6086 Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC II X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC III CLN1614A Station Control Module CLN1614A Station Control Module TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker Options Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Options Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Internally Added Internally Added by Motorola X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module by Motorola X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel
421. ntrol Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections Note Phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the 8 position terminal connector Refer to the Installation section of the appropriate sta tion functional manual for more details on phone line connections Note RDSTAT INT signal goes high when Station 3 detects receive signal according to RX Activation parameter setting via RSS This energizes relay turns on LED in opto coupler and pulls EXT PTT INT low This causes Station 2 transmitter to key up and routes Line 1 audio to the transmitter RD STAT Wireline Connections Connect the Line 1 audio from Station 2 to the Line 2 connections on Station 3 as shown below Connect the Line 2 audio from Station 2 to the Line 1 connections on Station 3 as shown below 8 POSITION TERMINAL CONNECTOR Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 2 50 TELCO Line 2 Pin3 CONNECTOR Line 2 Pin 4 Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 26 Line 2 Pin 2 Line 2 Pin 27 RDSTAT to EXT PTT Connection Connect the RD STAT and signals from Station 3 to the EXT PTT and signals on Station 2 as shown below An equivalent schematic circuit for the RD STAT and EXT PTT signals is also shown STATION 3 STATION 2 50 PIN 50 PIN TELCO TELCO 5V EXT PTT 3 9K 3 9K 220PF 68P81090E98 A
422. number In some cases the connector number is stamped into the metal shield covering the rear of the backplane board The connectors which accept the plug in modules are not marked Table 1 lists each connector and its assigned number Figure 2 provides pin out information for all connectors located on the rear of the backplane board As shown each connector pin is defined by signal name input or output with reference to connector to from location and a brief description of the signal function Note that pin out information for any connectors intended for future applications is not shown Also note that in the To From column the source or destination of the signal is given as a connector number followed by a pin number The first number preceded by a represents the assigned connector number followed by the specific connector pin number Table 1 Assigned Connector Number vs Function Location Information Connector Function Location 1 Not used 2 Accepts plug in Receiver Module 1 3 Not used 4 Accepts plug in Receiver Module 2 5 Accepts bottom card edge connector of plug in Wireline Interface Board 6 Accepts top card edge connector of plug in Wireline Interface Board 7 Accepts bottom card edge connector of plug in Station Control Module 8 Accepts top card edge connector of plug in Station Control
423. numbers for the three modular Three sizes of modular racks are available for mounting Quantar station rack sizes for Quantar stations are cages and ancillary equipment Figure 3 shows the physical dimen 30 X741AA sions for all three rack sizes shown is 52 modular rack with five maxi 45 X742AA mum Quantar cages installed 30 racks hold 3 cages and 45 racks 52 X743AA hold 4 cages maximum Recommended clearance front and rear is 36 minimum for servicing access Refer to Equipment Ventilation on Page 3 for recommended ventilation clearances 37 DIA 94 CM I M MM ul 2 0 52 7 CM 5 0 CM 17 94 14 45 56 4 3 56 CM i k Y VIEWED e i FROM TOP seas 5 19 4 19 2 15 25 I eso 88 8 CM 0 CENTER 19 2 mM S i RACK CENTER us 24 4 e O E QUANTAR Y Y CAGE a d FRONT UANTAR AGE MOUNTING FOOT TOP DETAIL 30 RACK 31 2 79 2 CM QUANTAR 45 RACK CAGE 45 2 114 75 CM 52 RACK 50 4 QUANTAR 128 1 CM CAGE QUANTAR CAGE u SIDE VIEW Figure 3 Dimensions and Clearances for 30 45 and 52 Modular Racks 68P81096E57 A 9 11 15 99 Quantar Station Functional Manual Physical Dimensions and Clearances Continued 12 x 20
424. o Tuning Duplexer 68P81087E94 A 7 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro UHF Station Functional Manuals Duplexer Tuning Procedure The duplexer field tuning procedures are provided in Figure 5 The pro cedures are most easily performed with the duplexer module removed from the station rack or cabinet Be sure to make note of the transmit and receive frequencies for the particular station before beginning Ifthe duplexer module is tuned according to instructions and does not meet specifications for return loss insertion loss and or isolation you must return the duplexer for repair 68P81087E94 A 9 1 00 UHF Duplexer Module Set up test equipment as shown Use nut driver to adjust pass adjustment screw for cavity 1 to obtain a PEAK reading on the millivoltmeter Use open end wrench and tighten lock nut carefully making sure pass adjustment screw does not shift position Repeat steps 2 amp 3 for cavities 2 and 3 6 dB IN LINE PAD 50 OHM TUNING LOW PASS RESONATORS BOONTON 92E RF MILLIVOLTMETER Range set to 10 dBm 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 ee e e e e S oo o o 22 G Z RESONATOR PASS ADJUSTMENT SCREW HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR AND LOCK NUT 000 0000 0000 oo oo 00 Cc 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 L I Frequency s
425. o connector 23 located on the backplane has been installed Connect the single transmit receive antenna rf cable to the center N type connector on the antenna relay module TO SINGLE TRANSMIT RECEIVE ANTENNA ra QUANTAR STATION REAR VIEW STATION TRANSMIT OUTPUT FROM POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE ANTENNA RELAY CONTROL CABLE STATION RECEIVE INPUT TO RECEIVER MODULE Figure 17 RF and Control Cable Connections for Station Equipped with Antenna Relay 34 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation RF Cabling Connections Continued Duplexer Option The Duplexer Option may be installed with or without the Triple Circula tor Option In either configuration connect the rf cable to from the single TX RX antenna to the Duplexer Module as shown in Figure 18 for Figure 19 for or Figure 20 for 800 900 MHz CONNECT RF CABLE FROM SINGLE TX RX ANTENNA STATION PERIPHERAL TRAY DUPLEXER MODULE Figure 18 TX RX Antenna Cable Connection to Duplexer Module VHF Triple Circulator Configuration Shown 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 35 Quantar Station Functional Manual RF Cabling Connections Continued Duplexer Option continued STATION DUPLEXER MODULE i aem 8 a s Boh B d vr SINGLE TX RX ANTENNA h z mo _ 99 14 CONNECT RF CABLE FROM i ts
426. o each of the PASICs to provide control and to input and output 12kbps SECURENET data Three serial bus links are provided and managed by the uP Two of these are dedicated to interfacing with two plug in modem cards for 9 6kbps ASTRO applications The other serial link is used to interface with the microprocessor in the Station Control Module using HDLC pro tocol Peripheral Application Specific IC PASIC Two PASICs are provided on the WIB to interface with the various audio data circuits One PASIC interfaces with the 4 wire 2 wire circuitry and the other PASIC interfaces with the second 4 wire circuit In gen eral each PASIC is responsible for accepting either PCM voice informa tion for 4A wire or 2 wire operation or 12kbps secure data 12kbps SECURENET operation and routing the information to the proper desti nation i e from landline to station and from station to landline De tails of the signal paths are provided in Description of Audio Data Sig nal Paths later in this section 68P81094E78 A 3 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Functional Overview Cont d Refer to Figure 2 Audio Data Circuits Each WIB contains circuitry for two 4 wire audio data circuits one 2 wire audio data circuit two 9 6kbps ASTRO data circuits and two 12kbps SECURENET data circuits As shown in the block diagram the upper PASIC interfaces with the 2 wire 4 wire circuitry and the lower PA
427. ocal speaker The 2 1 MHz Reference Oscillator generates the reference signal used by the Receiver and Exciter Modules 68P81096E56 A 9 1 00 Quantar Station Functional Manual Wireline Interface Board Operation Note The WIB is offered in 4 wire and 8 wire models The WIB shown in the block diagram is a simplified 4 wire model Refer to the functional sections located behind tab WIRELINE CIRCUITRY for details on both models Power Supply Module Operation Introduction The Wireline Interface Board WIB serves as the interface between the customer telephone lines and the station In general the WIB pro cesses and routes all wireline audio signals between the station and the landline equipment such as consoles modems etc Landline to station and station to landline audio signals are connected to the WIB via copper pairs at the rear of the station Wireline Interface Board Operation The WIB contains a microprocessor two FLASH memory ICs which contain the WIB operating software downloaded by the SCM and an ASIC device to process and route the various audio signals Analog SECURENET and ASTRO signals are processed as follows e Analog signals are converted to digital signals and routed to the SCM via the TDM time division multiplex bus e ASTRO and ASTRO CAI data signals are processed by an ASTRO modem card daughter board plugged into the WIB and sent to from the SCM via the HDLC bus The
428. odule UHF Range 3 TLN3373A Receiver Module UHF Range 4 TLN3374A Receiver Module 800 MHz TLN3315A Receiver Module 900 MHz TLN3316A Exciter Module VHF Range 1 TLN3252A Exciter Module VHF Range 2 TLN3253A Exciter Module UHF Range 1 TLN3305A Exciter Module UHF Range 2 TLN3306A Exciter Module UHF Range 3 TLN3375A Exciter Module UHF Range 4 TLN3376A Exciter Module 800 MHz TLN3307A Exciter Module 900 MHz TLN3308A Power Amplifier Module VHF 25W R1 amp R2 TLN3255A Power Amplifier Module VHF 125W R1 TLN3379A Power Amplifier Module VHF 125W R2 TLN3254A Power Amplifier Module UHF R1 25W TLN3443A Power Amplifier Module UHF R2 110W TLN3446A Power Amplifier Module UHF R4 100W TLN3450A Power Amplifier Module 800 MHz 20W TLN3441A Power Amplifier Module 800 MHz 100W TLN3442A Power Amplifier Module 900 MHz 100W TLN3299A Station Control Module Conventional 6809 CLN1293A Station Control Module Conventional 6809 EPIC II CLN1621A Station Control Module nte liRepeater CLN1294A 4 Wire Wireline Interface Module CLN1295A 8 Wire Wireline Interface Module CLN1296A Power Supply Module 625W AC TLN3259A Power Supply Module 625W AC w charger TLN3260A Power Supply Module 265W AC TLN3261A Power Supply Module 265W AC w charger TLN3262A Power Supply Module 210W 12 24 V DC TLN3264A Power Supply Module 210W 48 60 V DC TLN3378A Power Supply Module 600W 24 V DC TLN3263A Power Supply Module 600W 48 60 V
429. oe rob URS eLU ee a Did eh lang ees QE EET page 1 Routine Maintenance Overview page 1 Recommended Test Equipment page 1 TROUBLESHOOTING eee oO RE TUER E Ee 68P81096E59 Introduction nc D a y cag ik ke Vee Ee xe dut page 1 Troubleshooting Overview page 1 Recommended Test Equipment page 1 Listof lest EQuipment id acd hacks ater m eu bee ee pud eg x page 1 Troubleshooting Procedures page 2 Troubleshooting Overview hn page 2 Interpreting LED Indicators tia ex rdi Reha CRUS Pared oie exce Re eras ed page 6 Interpreting Alarm Alert Tones 2 page 9 Verifying Transmitter page 10 Verifying Receiver Circuitry page 14 continued on next page ii 68 81095 05 9 1 00 Module Replacement Procedures page 19 General Replacement Information page 19 Replacing Pow
430. of phase locked loop and VCO generates the 1st LO injection signal Ceramic Preselector Filter provides 7 pole bandpass filter ing of the station receive rf input Receiver Front End Circuitry performs filtering amplification and the 1st down conversion of the receive rf signal Custom Receiver IC Circuitry consists of a custom IC which performs the 2nd down conversion filtering amplification and analog to digital conversion of the receive signal Address Decode amp A D Converter Circuitry performs address decoding to provide board and chip select signals also con verts analog status signals to digital format for transfer to Station Control Module Local Power Supply Regulation accepts 14 2V dc input and outputs 10V and 5V dc operating voltages Commercial Government and Inc 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81091E92 B Banca n 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Quantro Station Products 2 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the receiver module controls indicators and all input and output external connections RECEIVER RF INPUT FROM RECEIVE ANTENNA FRONT PANEL FRONT VIEW CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE Figure 1 Quantar Quantro 900 MHz Receiver Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 2 68P81091E92 B 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro 900 MHz Receiver Module 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERAT
431. of operation describes the operation of the power supply circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the power supply module Input Conditioning Circuitry Introduction The power supply module accepts dc power from an external source typically a bank of storage batteries DC power is connected to the module via a 4 wire dc input cable mounted on the station backplane Transient and EMI Protection The dc input is fed to the power supply module circuitry via transient protection and EMI filter circuits The transient protection devices pro vide protection against voltage spikes by providing an effective short to ground under high voltage transient conditions The EMI filter pre vents electrical noise generated by the power supply module from in terfering with other equipment connected to the same dc source Front Panel On Off Switch A toggle type switch located on the power supply module front panel allows the power supply and satellite receiver to be turned off by re moving the dc input voltage The switch controls a built in circuit break er rated at 50A to provide overload protection for the power supply and station circuitry Startup Inverter Circuitry This circuitry consists of a switchin
432. ol Circuitry a FAN FAIL status signal is sent to Station Control Board via A D converter and SPI bus Status LED Indicators Two LEDs located on the power supply module front panel indicate module status as follows e Power On lights GREEN when power supply module is turned on and functioning properly LED turns off when module is turned off in put power is removed or module startup circuitry is in fail mode e Module Fail lights RED when power supply module is in fail mode or if a failure in another station module causes excessive current drain on any of the power supply output voltages LED turns off when module is functioning properly The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Board to use the address bus to select the A D converter Diagnostics Circuitry for communications via the SPI bus Typical communications include reading status signals from the Diagnostics Circuitry 68 81090 44 9 1 00 TRN7801A Power Supply Module THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 9 1 00 68P81090E44 A 9 Quantar Station Products INPUT CONDITIONING CIRCUITRY MAIN INVERTER CIRCUITRY MAIN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER
433. omatically switched back to power sup ply operation CPN1048 only e Auto Recovery from Shutdown Power Supply automatically recovers from shutdown mode if the cause of the shutdown no longer exists e Software Controlled Battery Charging Voltage The battery charging voltage and current is controlled based on the ambient temperature CPN1048 only e Limited In Rush Current Circuitry limits in rush current to less than 30 A in all conditions The Models CPN1047A and CPN1048A differ only in the inclusion of battery charger revert board CPN1048A only Unless otherwise noted the information provided in this section applies to both models Power Supply Module Simplified Block Diagram The illustration below provides a simplified block diagram of a Power Supply Module with battery charger showing how the three circuit boards interconnect A detailed block diagram and functional theory of operation for each board is provided later in this section beginning on page 8 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 V DC Sa cce TO SUPPLY VOLTAGES AC INPUT AC TO DC 400VDC DC TO DC 14 V DC 50 60 HZ T CONVERTER CONVERTER TO 110V 220V AC BOARD BOARD 28 V DC STATION MODULES VIA BACKPLANE lt BATTERY gt CHARGER REVERT 9 CONNECTS BOARD BATTERY CHARGING CURRENT 4 REVERT CURRENT 2 68 81095 88 11 15 99 CPN1047
434. ommended per instructions provided with the anchors Make sure that none of the anchors comes in contact with the reinforcing wire mesh buried in the concrete the rack must be electrically isolated from any other equipment or materials at the site Step 4 Align the rack with the installed anchors and lightly secure the rack to the floor using the proper mounting hardware Do not tighten the mounting hardware at this time Step 5 Check the vertical plumb of the rack Also check that the top is level Use shims flat washers or flat aluminum plates as necessary under the rack mounting foot to achieve vertical plumb and horizontal level Step 6 Tightly secure the rack to the floor anchors making sure that it remains vertically plumb and horizontally level After all debris is removed and cement dust is cleared away remove whatever protective covering has been placed on the equipment including the anti static bag Step 7 Mounting 30 x 20 46 x 20 and 60 Indoor Cabinets Each cabinet bottom is pre drilled with four 4 mounting holes to al low attachment to the site floor If installing on a concrete floor use the cabinet as a template mark the hole locations and follow the proce dures given for anchoring equipment racks page 24 If installing on a wooden floor use lag bolts and washers customer supplied to se cure the cabinet to the floor 24 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation St
435. on Manual X436AJ Instruction Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual 68 81095 05 Quantar Station Functional Manual Continued xviii 68P81095E05 B 9 1 00 OPTION X640AC SELECTED IN STEP 3 Quantar UHF Range 3 110W Transmitter OPTION X640AD SELECTED IN STEP 3 Quantar UHF Range 4 100W Transmitter Source Option Description So rc Option Description Kit Kit X640AC Quantar UHF R3 110W Transmitter X640AD Quantar UHF R4 100W Transmitter TTE2063A 110 W Power Amplifier Module UHF R3 TTE2064A 100 W Power Amplifier Module UHF R4 Option TKN8699A PA to Exciter RF Cable Option TKN8699A RF Cable from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane from Initial TRN7480A Station Interconnect Board Backplane Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel Sales Order TRN7708A PA Module Front Panel CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X132AC Exciter Module UHF R3 X132AD Exciter Module UHF R4 CLE1250A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CLE1260A Exciter Module Board and Hardware CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X334AC Receiver Module UHF R3 X334AD Receiver Module UHF R4 CLE1210A Receiver Module Board Preselector Hardware CLE1220A Receiver Module Board Preselector Hardware CLN7334A Receiver Module Front Panel CL
436. on card cage Figure 1 Typical Antenna Relay Module Body Commercial Government and Rights Industrial Solutions Sector 68 81086 22 Printed U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Station Products INPUT AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS Figure 2 shows the antenna relay module input and output external connections CONNECTS TO STATION TRANSMIT RF OUTPUT FROM POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE att CONNECTS TO TRANSMIT RECEIVE ANTENNA MATES WITH CONNECTOR 23 ON STATION BACKPLANE CONNECTS TO STATION RECEIVE RF INPUT TO RECEIVER MODULE ANTENNA RELAY CONTROL CABLE 30 85431U01 Figure 2 Antenna Relay Module Inputs Outputs 68P81086E22 B 9 1 00 Antenna Relay Module 3 OPTION COMPLEMENT Table 1 shows the contents for the Option X371AA antenna relay module Option Complement Chart Table 1 Antenna Relay Option X371AA Complement Moi Description Includes miscellaneous hardware and antenna relay module Motorola Part No 80 84033T02 TRN7664A n PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 2 shows the electrical performance specifications for the antenna relay used in Options X371AA AC Performance Specifications Table 2 Performance Specifications for Antenna Relay Operating Frequency DC 4 GHz Maximum Input Power 500W Coil Specifications Pull in voltage 9 5V dc voltage 2V dc Re
437. onnections iere stubs e biet sv edu page 32 Connecting System Cables page 38 Connecting Telephone Lines page 46 Connecting V 24 50 Connecting External Reference page 51 Post Installation page 54 Applying hi bee DIR a pee NU RR S pU IIa UR RE ERE pe page 54 Verifying Proper Operation page 54 Proceeding to Optimization page 56 OPTIMIZATION OPTIMIZATION tre Veo QQ 68 81086 72 Description screen a eee ER n 1 OPERATION OPERATION Gb alus M een eee 68P81096E58 Description o n ee ee eee akka he sh EN page 1 Summary of Switches Pushbuttons and Connectors page 1 Summary of LED Indicators page 1 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 68P81086E39 Introd ction c
438. op where running phone lines is either impractical or impossible As shown in Figure 1 a pair of stations called station 1 and station 2 is used to substitute for the normal wireline connections between the repeater station and the console Figure 1B shows a microwave RA RT link STATION 3 STATION 2 d WIRELINE LINK REMOTE CONSOLE Figure 1 RA RT WITH RF LINK MICROWAVE STATION 2 STATION S MICROWAVE MICROWAVE 1 WIRELINE LINK REMOTE CONSOLE Figure 1B RA RT WITH MICROWAVE LINK Figure 1 Typical RA RT Systems E amp M Keying eii ines Commercial Government and otorola ae 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81090E99 A All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Quantro Station Products ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS RF LINK Install stations 1 2 and 3 as described in the appropriate functional base station manual Figure 2 shows the connections between the stations necessary to allow RA RT E amp M keying operation Perform the following procedures to make the wiring connections between the console and Station 1 and between Stations 2 and 3 STATION 3 STATION 2 LINE 1 LINE 2 RD STAT EXT PTT RD STAT EXT PTT RD STAT EXT PTT EXT PTT RD STAT LINE
439. or all modules in the station General Description The X873AA Option provides an Ultra High Stability Oscillator Module which significantly increases the frequency accuracy of the station s in ternal frequency reference circuitry located on the Station Control Module The UHSO module is designed to slide into the 2nd receiver slot of the station card cage and is powered by the station power sup ply via the backplane The module consists of a sealed ovenized element voltage regulator circuitry and control and diagnostics circuitry Motorola Inc 2000 Commercial Government and All Rights Reserved Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81088E08 A Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar and Quantro Station Products 2 IDENTIFICATION OF INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the UHSO Module input and output external connections UHSO MODULE FRONT PANEL FRONT VIEW CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE REAR VIEW Figure 1 UHSO Module Inputs and Outputs 2 68P81088E08 A 9 1 00 Option X873AA UHSO Module 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the UHSO Module circuitry at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to the block diagra
440. or some systems e g Simulcast systems the free running stability of the VCO is unacceptable for optimum system performance Therefore an external 5 10 MHz source is connected permanently to one of the BNC connectors In this mode the PLL compares the 5 10 MHz refer ence and a sample of the 16 8 MHz VCO output and generates a dc correction voltage The control voltage enable switch is closed allowing the control voltage from the PLL to adjust the high stability VCO frequency to 16 8 Mhz 0 3 ppm The VCO operates in this closed loop mode and is continually being fre quency controlled by the control voltage from the PLL The HDLC Bus Control Circuitry provides high impedance buffering and data routing for the Interprocessor Communications Bus a serial data bus implementing HDLC protocol This bus allows the Host uP to communicate with the microprocessor located on the Wireline Inter face Board and other optional modules via an interprocessor commu nications bus 68 81094 76 9 1 00 CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Modules Audio Interface Circuitry General The Audio Interface Circuitry interfaces external analog audio inputs and outputs with the DSP circuitry External Audio Sources A multiplexer under control of the Host uP is used to select one of eight possible external audio input sources four for diagnostic loopback sig nals two for future use one for 6809 MRTI transmit audio and one fo
441. outes Line 1 audio to the transmitter RDSTAT to EXT PTT Connection Station 2 to Station 3 Step 1 Connect the RD STAT and signals from Station 2 to the EXT PTT and signals on Station 3 as shown below An equivalent schematic circuit for the RD STAT and EXT PTT signals is also shown STATION 3 EXT PTT 39K 3 9K 220PF STATION 2 RD STAT STATION 2 3 9K RDSTAT INT 68P81090E99 A 9 1 00 RA RT Configuration E amp M Control ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS MICROWAVE LINK Install the station as described in the appropriate functional base station manual Figure 2 shows the connections between the station microwave equipment and console necessary to allow RA RT E amp M keying operation Perform the following procedures to make the wiring connections between the console and the Microwave Station 1 and between Microwave Station 2 and Station 3 MICROWAVE STATION 3 STATION 2 MICROWAVE LINK MICROWAVE REMOTE RD STAT STATION 1 CONSOLE LANDLINE TO STATION WIRELINE AUDIO RD STAT E LEAD lt PTT CLOSURE STATION TO LANDLINE WIRELINE AUDIO Figure 3 RA RT E amp M Keying Wiring Connections Microwave Link Console to Microwave Station 1 Wiring Connections Step 1 Connect the landline to station audio from the Note Refer to the Microwave S
442. p tacle mounted on the station backplane into which the entire power supply module slides blind mate connection Transient and EMI Protection The ac line input is fed to the AC to DC Converter Board circuitry via transient protection and EMI filter circuits The transient protection de vices provide protection against voltage spikes by providing an effec tive short to ground under high voltage transient conditions The EMI filter prevents electrical noise generated by the power supply module from interfering with other equipment connected to the same ac line cir Cuit Front Panel On Off Switch Relay Circuitry A rocker type switch located on the power supply module front panel allows the power supply and station to be turned on and off Note that the switch allows the filter circuitry p o Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry to slowly charge for approximately 1 5 seconds after switch is turned on through two diodes and resistors After the 1 5 second delay the relay turns on and provides an ac input to the bridge rectifier This 1 5 second pre charge delay period limits in rush current through the filter capacitors upon power up Rectifier Circuitry The ac line voltage via the relay is rectified by a full wave bridge rectifi er and fed to the Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry This circuitry monitors the ac input from the on off switch and pro vides a 1 5 second delay when switch is turn on before energiz
443. p 4 from the number noted in Step 2 The difference should be higher than 75 dB to meet specification for Isolation Repeat Steps 1 5 for Low Pass High Notch cavities with the following exceptions 1 Set Frequency Generator and R2001 for Rx or Tx frequency whichever is HIGHER 2 Connect Signal Generator to Low Pass duplexer input cavity 1 3 Connect terminator to cavity 6 HP8656B SIGNAL GENERATOR 0 0000 00 ool ooo 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 NO an R2001 COMMUNICATIONS ANALYZER L ame males 4 3 Attenuator set to 0 dB Duplexer Module POST TUNING CHECKS Make sure all locking screws are tight Re install dust covers on all trimmer capacitors LOCKING SCREW i Make sure all tuning rod locking screws 6 are tight b m Figure 5 Quantar VHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure Sheet 4 of 4 68 81086 71 9 1 00 1 1 Quantar VHF Station Functional Manual THIS PAGE
444. particularly dusty envi ronment precautions must be taken to filter the air used for forced cooling of the station Excessive dust drawn across and into the station circuit modules by the cooling fans can adversely affect heat dissipa tion and circuit operation In such installations be sure to clean or re place external filtering devices periodically Refer to Pre Installation Planning in the Installation section of this manual for recommended fil tering techniques Body Commercial Government and Rights Hseved Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81086E39 D Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar and Quantro Station Products RECOMMENDED SCHEDULE The circuit device s responsible for determining the station reference frequency exhibit slight variations in their operating characteristics over time infant aging Approximately 90 of the component aging process occurs during the first year of operation After the initial one year period the device s remain stable for a substantially longer period of time Therefore it is recommended that the station reference oscillator be calibrated after one year of operation and thereafter less often as prescribed in a recommended schedule of periodic calibration Station Reference Calibration Schedule After performing the initial one year calibration procedure periodic cali bration is required according to the schedule shown
445. pecific data such as site output power time out timer settings etc Each SCM contains a 512k x 32 DRAM SIMM into which the station soft ware code is downloaded and run The DRAM also provides short term storage for data generated required during normal operation Read and write operations are performed using the Host Buffered Ad dress and Host Buffered Data buses The DRAM memory locations are sequentially refreshed by the column and row signals from the Host uP 68 81096 87 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products External Line Interface Circuitry Ethernet Port An Ethernet port is provided via a BNC connector on the station back plane which allows the station to connect into the Ethernet local net work of an IntelliRepeater trunking site The Ethernet port may also be used to allow station software to be downloaded from a local PC into the FLASH SIMM module This Ethernet port is provided by Host uP se rial communication bus SCC1 General Purpose RS232 Serial Port A general purpose RS 232 communications port is provided by Host uP serial communication bus SCC4 This port is available at a DB 25 connector 15 located on the station backplane and may be used to connect external equipment e g an external modem RSS Port Backplane A 9 pin D type connector 20 is provided on the station backplane to allow service personnel to connect a PC loaded with the Radio Ser vice Software RSS
446. pect the equipment as soon as possible after delivery If any part of the equipment has been damaged in transit immediately report the extent of the damage to the transportation company 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation Physical Dimensions and Clearances Quantar Cage without Cabinet Figure 1 shows the dimensions and recommended clearances for a single Quantar station cage T eo u 9735 CM g FRONT 19 47 5 CM SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW MINIMUM 6 FROM WALL OR OTHER EQUIPMENT FOR VENTILATION RECOMMENDED 30 FOR SERVICING ACCESS U MINIMUM 6 MINIMUM 6 FROM WALL FROM WALL OR OTHER lt lt OR OTHER EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT FOR FOR VENTILATION VENTILATION FRONT RECOMMENDED 36 FOR SERVICING ACCESS CLEARANCES Figure 1 Quantar Station Cage Dimensions and Clearances 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Quantar Station Functional Manual Physical Dimensions and Clearances Continued Model numbers for the three rack sizes Quantar Cages Installed 7 712 and 8 Racks Three sizes of racks are available for mounting Quantar station cages
447. ped to a Motorola repair depot for further troubleshooting and repair to the component level Because the Quantar station is computer controlled and employs state of the art digital signal processing tech niques many of the troubleshooting procedures require the use of the Motorola supplied Radio Service Software RSS The RSS is run on a PC or compatible with RS 232 communication port capability The RSS allows the technician to access alarm log files run diagnostics and set up the equipment for various audio and rf tests Com plete details on the operation of the RSS are provided in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Troubleshooting Overview Introduction Two procedures are provided for troubleshooting the Quantar station and ancillary equipment Each procedure is designed to quickly identi fy faulty modules which may then be replaced with known good mod ules to restore proper station operation Procedure 1 Routine Site Visit Functional Checkout Procedure 1 consists of a series of non intrusive tests that can be quick ly run during a routine site visit This procedure allows the technician to verify the proper station operation without taking the station out of service An overview of the procedure is shown in the flow chart Figure 1 on page 3 Procedure 2 Troubleshooting A Reported Suspected Problem Procedure 2 should be used when an equipment problem has been either reported or is suspected This procedure
448. peration Introduction The Transmitter Circuitry is comprised of the Exciter Module and the Power Amplifier PA Module These modules combine to produce the modulated amplified rf signal which is transmitted via the site transmit antenna Exciter Module Operation The Exciter Module is a microprocessor controlled module which gen erates a modulated rf signal at the desired transmit frequency and sends this signal to the PA for amplification The circuitry operates as follows The synthesizer VCO accepts frequency programming data from the Station Control Module via the SPI bus and generates an rf carrier sig nal at the specified frequency The modulation audio signal from the SCM modulates the carrier resulting in a modulated rf signal at ap proximately 13 dBm which is fed to the PA The TX Power Control Circuitry accepts an output power detect voltage from the PA and compares this signal to a reference voltage represent ing the desired output power Based on the comparison a power con trol voltage is generated to control the output power from the PA This feedback and control loop continually monitors the output power and adjusts the control voltage to maintain the proper output power from the PA Power Amplifier Module Operation The modulated rf signal from the Exciter Module is input to the Intermediate Power Amplifier IPA in the PA After amplification to ap proximately 0 10 W depending on power control voltage f
449. performed during off peak hours so as to minimize the disruption of service to the system subscribers To take the equipment out of service use the Access Disable function described in the Operation section of this manual Introduction While most module faults can be detected by running the station diag nostics provided by the RSS the following procedure provides a more traditional method of troubleshooting the transmitter circuitry This pro cedure is uselul in the event that the RSS is not at hand or for some reason cannot be utilized PC malfunction etc This procedure allows the service technician to make minor adjust ments and verify proper operation of the station transmit circuitry in cluding e Exciter Module Power Amplifier Module Power Supply Module 2 1 MHz reference oscillator circuitry Transmitter related circuitry on the Station Control Board SCM In general the transmitter circuitry is exercised by injecting and mea suring signals using a Motorola R2001 Communications Analyzer or equivalent Incorrect measurement values indicate a faulty module s measurement values within the acceptable range verify proper opera tion of the above listed modules and circuitry Required Test Equipment The following test equipment is required to perform the procedure e Motorola R2001 Communications Analyzer or equivalent e Telephone style handset with PTT switch TMN6164 or equiv e In Line Wattmeter Motorola
450. power e g 25 W 110 W etc 68P81088E44 B 9 1 00 TLE2731A TLE2732A TTE2061A 64A Power Amplifier Modules P O P101 32 gt 33 L PWR CONTROL N VOLTAGE 4 P O FROM LINE V CONT EXCITER P102 FILTER ci VOLTAGE TRANSLATOR MODULE CIRCUITRY COAXIAL CABLE aj CURRENT LIMITER FROM 35 gt POWER AMPLIFIER OUTPUT TO RF INPUT OUTPUT SNJ J gt N TYPE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR ON BRACKET Y RF INPUT OUTPUT REAR OF STATION CONNECTOR BRACKET V OMNI V OMNI CIRCULATOR N TYPE J4100 13 DBM INTERMEDIATE 0TO 15W DRIVER 35W MAX ANN HARMONIC SSW MODULATED RF 6 AMPLE La gt gt FILTER gt C3 lt 0 ie lt FROM IPA DPA N M COUPLER TRANSMIT RF EXCITER IPA DPA ES OUTPUT MODULE 14V IPA Y v Y A DPA 50 OHM s LOAD EY i 101 102 BUFFER 14V 2o CURRENT PA DPA Y x 5 SENSE DETECT DETECT 2t CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY P101 P102 BUFFER Ls RESISTOR ROM P O y INDICATES PA TYPE ANALOG MULTIPLEXER DPA DETECT DPA V gt 7 7 IPA DETECT BUFFER IPA_VF Ls ge UNE MULTIPLEXER
451. r as well as local users via the same local repeater if they have been assigned with a secondary PL and have their MCS User Access set to GATED Additionally the repeat mode setup or knocked down and gated access mode enabled or disabled may be controlled by both a console operator or a subscriber unit Note that Gated User Access is disabled upon station reset Gated Access must be enabled via over the air transmissions to the SAM module or via TRC tones from the console The following table shows how the repeater access and gated access functions may be controlled to provide access to local and visiting subscribers Refer also to Figure 1 showing a typical repeater access call flow chart before Gated Access is employed and Figure 2 showing a repeater access call flow chart after Gated Access is incorporated Gated Repeater Up Down Subscriber Operation Local subscribers primary PL will repeat Enabled Up e Emergency subscribers secondary PL and MCS User Access set to GATED will repeat Enabled Down e No subscribers will repeat Disabled Up e Only local subscribers primary PL will repeat Disabled Down e No subscribers will repeat In order to perform the procedures in this section you must program certain parameters in the Quantar or Quantro station and the Station Access Module SAM In order to do this you will need the following software programs e RVN5002 Quantar Quantro Radio Service Software RSS
452. r handset or microphone audio The selected audio source signal is converted to a digital signal by the A D portion of the CODEC IC and sent to the DSP ASIC via the Audio Interface Bus The DSP circuitry pro cesses the signal and routes it to the desired destination External Audio Destinations Digitized audio from the DSP circuitry is input to the D A portion of the CODEC IC and is output to one of four external devices e External Speaker connects to RJ 11 jack located on SCM front panel e Handset Earpiece Microphone connects to RJ 11 jack NS located on SCM front panel e Local Built In Speaker internal speaker and 2 W audio am plifier may be switched on off and volume controlled by using volume up 72 and down D buttons on SCM front panel e J14 on Station Backplane 6809 MRTI receive audio output to external MRTI Module Exciter Modulation Signals Digitized audio data intended to be transmitted from the station is out put from the DSP circuitry to a D A converter via the TX Voice Audio sig nal p o the Serial Synchronous Interface bus connected between the DSP and the DSP ASIC The digitized signal is converted to analog level shifted and amplified and fed to a 0 6 kHz filter The output of the filter is then fed to one of the inputs of a multiplexer The output of the multiplexer is fed to two individual digitally controlled potentiometers each of which is adjusted by the Host
453. r Circuitry Voltage Regulator Circuitry Address Decode Circuitry The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Board to use the address bus to select a specific device on a specific station board for control or data communications purposes via the SPI bus If the board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 thru A5 as the receiver module address it enables the chip select circuitry The chip select cir cuitry then decodes address lines AO and A1 and generates chip select signals for the PLL and A D converter and the SYNTH ADAPT signal to control the loop filter bypass switch in the synthesizer circuitry A D Converter Circuitry Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the receiver board are fed to the A D converter which converts them to a digital signal and upon request by the Station Control Module outputs the signal to the Station Control Module via the SPI bus The voltage regulator circuitry consists of 10V and three 5V regula tors The 10V regulator accepts a 14 2V dc input and generates a 10V dc operating voltage for the receiver board circuitry The 10V regulator output also feeds three 5V regulators Two of the regulators provide Custom Analog 5V and Custom Digital 5V dc operating voltages to supply the custom receiver IC The third regula tor provides Synth 5V to supply the synthesizer circuitry In addition a 5V dc operating voltage is input at the backplane from
454. r Supply Module Functional Block Diagram Sheet 2 of 2 9 1 00 68P81090E44 A 11 M MOTOROLA POWER SUPPLY MODULE CPN1031B 600W 48 60V DC Input El DESCRIPTION The Model CPN1031B Power Supply Module is described in this section A general description performance specifications identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional un derstanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Main tenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The Models CPN1031B Power Supply Module accepts a dc input of ei ther 48 V dc or 60 V dc and generates 28 6V dc 14 2V dc and 5 1V dc operating voltages to power the station modules The power supply module is comprised of two circuit boards which provide sever al switching type power supply circuits and diagnostics and monitor ing circuitry all contained within a slide in module housing The power supply module provides the following features Internal voltage and current limiting circuitry continually monitors critical voltages and currents and shuts supply down if preset thresholds are exceeded Temperature protection module contains built in cooling fa
455. r to Edit ing WildCard Tables on page 7 for details J17 Pin 22 39K PTT gt T T 220PF J17 Pin 47 tT T 220PF OAUF 2 Typical Opto Coupled Input Circuit 68P81096E86 O 6 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products EDITING WILDCARD TABLES You must edit certain WildCard Tables in order to cause certain signals to appear on specific pins on the System Connector J17 Instructions for modifying these WildCard Tables are provided in this section The WildCard Tables are programmed in the factory to provide e Carrier Indication and on J17 Pins 18 and 43 as a relay contact closure output e PTT and on J17 Pins 22 and 47 as opto isolated input If desired the WildCard Tables may be modified to change the connector pin number and signal interface as follows e Carrier Indication on J17 Pin 38 as a transistor buffered output e PTT on J17 Pin 42 as a transistor buffered input Changing Carrier Indication Signal to J17 Pin 38 The WildCard Tables are programmed in the factory to provide Carrier Indication and on J17 Pins 18 and 43 as a relay contact closure output Modify WildCard Table 8 as shown below to move the Carrier Indication signal to J17 Pin 38 as a transistor buffered output MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE 221 BASE STATION PRODUCTS of the State VER XX XX XX WILD CARD STATE ACTION CONFIG Descript
456. rack mounted the airborne particulates level must not exceed 25 ug m For equipment operating in an area which is not en vironmentally controlled station cage s cabinet mounted the airborne particulates level must not exceed 90 ug m Important Rack mounted stations must be protected from drip ping water from overhead pipes air conditioning equipment etc Seri ous damage to station components could occur if proper protection is not provided Two of the station modules the power amplifier and power supply modules are equipped with cooling fans thermostatically controlled that are used to provide forced convection cooling The air flow is front to back allowing several station cages to be stacked within a rack or cabinet When planning the installation observe the following ventila tion guidelines e Customer supplied cabinets must be equipped with ventilation slots or openings in the front for air entry and back or side pan els for air to exit If several station cages are installed in a single cabinet be sure ventilation openings surround each cage to al low for adequate cooling e All cabinets must have at least 6 inches of open space between the air vents and any walls or other cabinets This allows ade quate air flow e When multiple cabinets each equipped with several station cages are installed in an enclosed area make sure the ambient temperature of the room does not exceed the recommended maximum op
457. ral the WIB processes and routes all voice and or data signals between the station equipment and the landline equipment e g a control center modem etc As shown in the block diagram in Figure 2 the WIB contains a micro processor with RAM and EPROM a Peripheral Application Specific IC PASIC one 4 wire audio circuit and one 2 wire audio circuit Also provided are a dc remote decoding circuit Simulcast processing cir cuitry and miscellaneous I O circuits All of these circuits are described in the following paragraphs Microprocessor Circuitry The WIB microprocessor uP provides overall control of the WIB oper ation provides two serial bus links and communicates with the micro processor in the Station Control Module The WIB operating code and other parameters are stored in two 256k x 8 FLASH ICs Short term storage is provided by two 128k x 8 RAM ICs The uP data bus is connected to each of the PASICs to provide control and to input and output 12kbps SECURENET data Two serial bus links are provided and managed by the uP One of these is dedicated to interfacing with a plug in modem card for 9 6kbps ASTRO applications The other serial link is used to interface with the microprocessor in the Station Control Module using HDLC protocol Peripheral Application Specific IC PASIC One PASIC is provided on the WIB to interface with the various audio data circuits In general the PASIC is responsible for accepti
458. rating voltages to supply the custom receiver IC and Synthesizer IC In addition a 5V dc operating voltage is input at the backplane from the station power supply to supply Digital 5V to the remainder of the receiver board circuitry 68P81086E76 D 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68P81086E76 D 9 1 00 Quantro Quantar 800 MHz Receiver Module AGC ORACLE RECEIVER FRONT END CIRCUITRY Da RF INPUT OUTPUT CONNECTOR CONNECTOR AGC SELECT HIGH LOW BRACKET RF INPUT OUTPUT FROM 9 REAR OF STATION CONNECTOR BRACKET STATION CONTROL TO MODULE LO PASS FILTER 4ST N TYPE MINI UHE MIXER CONNECTOR CONNECTORS 73 35 MHZ 7 POLE PREAMPLIFIER IMAGE 1ST 1 2 POLE 4 POLE RECEIVE RF gt gt LO PASS CERAMIC CIRCUITRY FILTER BANDPASS BANDPASS FROM FILTER PRESELECTOR CIRCUITRY FILTER FILTER RX A
459. rcuitry Summing and gating circuitry is provided on the WIB to allow PL tones reverse burst and TX audio GEN TX DATA to be combined and output to the VCO in the Exciter Module after signal processing by the SCM to direclty modulate the rf carrier The simulcast circuitry is controlled by the Station Control Board microprocessor via the WIB microproces sor and upper PASIC on the WIB 68 81094 78 9 1 00 CLN6956A and CLN6958A Wireline Interface Boards 50 TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6956 OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR CLN6956 CLN6958 ON STATION BACKPLANE 4 WIRE CIRCUIT 1 50 TELCO CONNECTOR CLN6956 OR SCREW TERMINAL CONNECTOR CLN6956 CLN6958 ON STATION BACKPLANE e AND LINE 2 AUDIO LINE 1 AUDIO gt 2 WIRE CIRCUIT lt gt La FROM STATIG TO LANDLINE FROM LANDLINE J b d a 4 WIRE TO STATION gt INCLUDES VARIABLE GAIN STAGES BUFFERS LINE DRIVERS lt gt Euh EN 2 WIRE CANCELLATION CIRCUITRY AND A D amp D A CONVERTERS AND FROM STATION TO LANDLINE YY 2 WIRE MISCELLANEOUS LINE 2 AUDIO ME INPUTS amp OUTPUTS DC REMOTE EY DETECTION CIRCUITRY u
460. rcuitry continually monitors critical voltages and currents and shuts supply down if preset thresholds are exceeded Temperature protection module contains built in cooling fan supply shuts down if temperature exceeds preset threshold Diagnostic monitoring critical internal parameters are con tinually monitored and reported to the Station Control Module which can automatically provide correction for certain operating conditions continued on next page Motorola Inc 1999 Commercial Government and All Rights Reseved Industrial Solutions Sector 68 81096 09 Printed U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 11 15 99 UP Quantar Station Products Functional Manual General Description continued e Fan Failure Protection Power Supply enters shutdown mode in event of cooling fan failure e Battery Reverse Polarity Protection Charger circuitry is pro tected against connecting the external battery in reverse polarity CPN1050 only e Auto Switchover to from Battery If AC input fails station is automatically switched over to battery operation when AC input is restored station is automatically switched back to power sup ply operation CPN1050 only e Auto Recovery from Shutdown Power Supply automatically recovers from shutdown mode if the cause of the shutdown no longer exists e Software Controlled Battery Charging Voltage The battery charging voltage and current is controll
461. rcuits monitor the circuit operation and if preset thresholds are exceeded generate a shutdown signal which is fed to the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main inverter 68P81085E12 B 9 1 00 TRN7802A TRN7803A Power Supply Modules 5 V Inverter Circuitry Overview The 5 V inverter circuitry is comprised of a switching type power supply which generates a 5 V dc supply voltage This voltage is used as the 5 V supply voltage for the satellite receiver or station modules via the backplane Switching Power Supply Operation The 5 V inverter switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 133 kHz The PWM output pulses control a power FET which repetitively gates the 14 2 V dc from the Main In verter Circuitry to the filtering circuitry The result is a 5 V dc supply voltage Protection Circuitry An overvoltage detect circuit monitors the output voltage and if preset thresholds are exceeded generates a shutdown signal which is fed to the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main inverter Upon an overvol tage detection a FET crowbar circuit immediately discharges the out put to protect other modules in the satellite receiver or station An overcurrent detect circuit monitors the current draw from the 5 V inverter circuit and if a preset threshold is exceeded shuts down the 5 V inverter If the overcurrent condition lasts for a preset length ap prox 50 msec the surge curren
462. rd ingly to obtain the selected output power This feedback and control loop continually monitors the TX VF signal and adjusts V CONT to maintain a constant output power at the selected level Monitoring of Loop Status A sample of the dc power control voltage V CONT is fed back to the uP via the analog multiplexer to allow the uP to monitor the status of the power control loop Inability of the power amplifier to output the se lected power as indicated by V CONT going to the maximum level results the uP re programming the A D converter to select a lower output power level If after two reductions in selected power the power amplifier still cannot output the selected power the uP initiates shut down mode by selecting O Watts and turning the rf switch OFF 68P81086E24 E 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68 81086 24 9 1 00 Exciter Board MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUITRY
463. re User s Guide 68P81085E35 for details on RSS programming 52 68 81096 57 11 15 99 Installation TERMINATOR CONNECT TO EXTERNAL REFERENCE INPUT BNC CONNECTOR CONNECTOR 0909907D01 COAXIAL CABLE 0112004Z17 QUANTAR STATION WITH UHSO MODULE INSTALLED T 55 es WEA WAN SZ S QUAS y NN amp WAY WN 2 2 2 53 Figure 29 Multi Drop Connections of Reference Source to Multiple Stations 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Quantar Station Functional Manual POST INSTALLATION CHECKOUT After the station equipment has been mechanically installed and all electrical connections have been made you may now apply power and check for proper operation prior to optimizing the station Applying Power Before applying power to the station make sure all modules and boards are securely seated in the appropriate connectors on the back plane and that all rf cables are securely connected Step 1 Turn ON the circuit breaker controlling the ac outlet that is supplying power to the station Power Supply Module Step 2 Turn the station power ON using the rocker switch located on the Power Supply Module front panel Verifying Proper Operation Introduction Upon turning the station power ON a start up sequence begins which performs certain tests and initialization before entering normal st
464. ree modes of switching from MAIN to STANDBY and from STANDBY to MAIN e Automatic or Hot Switchover Whenever one of the modules fails in the MAIN station the MAIN sta tion will automatically set itself to STANDBY and will signal its companion station to set itself to MAIN The MAIN station will not automatically switch to STANDBY unless it is connected to its companion station and the companion station has not indicated a failure mode To disable automatic switchover mode refer to page 8 e Tone Remote Control Switchover Sending function tone 4 to the stations will force the MAIN station to STANDBY mode and the STANDBY station to MAIN mode Sending function tone 5 to the stations will force the MAIN station back to MAIN mode and the STANDBY station back to STANDBY mode If either station has detected a module failure neither switchover will occur To change the particular function tones that trigger these events refer to 9 e External Control Switchover An external control device may be connected to Input 2 on Connector 17 located on backplane of both stations to initiate a Main to Standby or a Standby to Main switchover to occur Grounding this signal causes the MAIN station to go to STANDBY mode and the STANDBY station to go to MAIN mode Pulling this signal high causes the STANDBY station to go to MAIN mode and the MAIN station to go to STANDBY mode Additional Functions Provided by the Main Standby Feature e Antenn
465. reline Squelch DISABLED Rx Securenet ASTRO To Wireline ENABLED Equalization DISABLED 1 2 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 EXIT of Procedure 4 68 81095 96 7 15 99 Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat Feature Automatic Mode continued Trunked SMARTZONE or SMARTNET ASTRO CAI VSELP Simulcast Systems Only Note While in FBICR mode the station will transmit Failsoft beeps and the subscriber will give the Fail soft indication Step 1 Access the Wireline Configuration Screen Step 2 Set the Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat field to ENABLED No Fall Back Timer setting is required MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Use Up Down Arrow Keys to Select BASE STATION PRODUCTS Wireline Operation Page 1 of 2 VER XX XX XX CHANGE VIEW WIRELINE CONFIGURATION Wireline Operation 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX Console Priority DISABLED OPTION Remote Control Type ASTRO TRC Input Line 1 Outbound Analog Link Timer 120 sec Comparator NONE OPTION Fall Back Cabinet Repeat ENABLED Status Tone ENABLED Status Tone Frequency 2175 kHz Wireline Squelch DISABLED Rx Securenet ASTRO To Wireline ENABLED Equalization DISABLED Step 3 Access the 6809 Trunking Interface Screen Step 4 Make sure the Failsoft field is set to ENABLED and set the Modulation Type to ASTRO or ANALOG MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE BASE STATION PRODUCTS dd p MEE E VER XX XX XX CHANGE
466. requency 405 MHz Otherwise use actual frequency from Step 1 If Receiver Module is Range 2 determine the alignment frequency as follows If frequency from Step 1 is gt 468 MHz then alignment frequency 468 MHz If frequency from Step 1 is lt 440 MHz then alignment frequency 440 MHz Otherwise use actual frequency from Step 1 If Receiver Module is Range 3 or 4 determine the align ment frequency as follows If frequency from Step 1 is gt 518 MHz then alignment frequency 518 MHz If frequency from Step 1 is lt 472 MHz then alignment frequency 472 MHz Otherwise use actual frequency from Step 1 For stations with multiple receive frequencies calculate the frequen cy of the alignment signal as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 From the site documentation or the RSS note the receive frequency for each channel supported by the station Calculate a midpoint frequency as follows Frid Frighest Fiowest 2 Using Fmiq in place of the station receive frequency per form Step 1 thru Step 4 from above 40 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting UHF Tuning Procedure Continued Preparing Equipment Step 1 Make sure Receiver Module with Preselector Assembly is installed in a functional station cage equipped with a Power Supply Module Step 2 Remove the two Torx head screws from the Receiver Module front panel and remove the panel Step 3 Using the
467. ress F2 to turn on the 1 kHz tone Do not exit this screen With the RSS program still running disconnect the RSS cable from Station 2 and connect it to Station 3 Now exit the RX Alignment screen Access the TX Wireline Alignment screen and press F8 to save the alignment value Station 2 is providing the 1 kHz alignment tone Exit the TX Wireline Alignment screen With the RSS program still running disconnect the RSS cable from Station 3 and connect it to Station 2 Access the RX Wireline Alignment screen and turn off the 1 kHz tone 68P81090E98 A 9 1 00 M MOTOROLA FALL BACK IN CABINET REPEAT FEATURE For Quantar and Quantro Stations OVERVIEW Feature Description The Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat FBICR feature provides limited backup communications capabilities in Simulcast Option U764 and Non Simulcast Voting Option X269 systems in which the link to the Comparator has been lost phone line disruption cable disconnection etc Figure 1 and Figure 2 illustrate typical scenarios in which the FBICR mode is activated Note that in these examples automatic FBICR mode is assumed refer to Automatic and External Modes below for details Note The FBICR feature is supported only for Station RSS Release R10 03 00 and later Automatic and External Modes The FBICR feature may be configured for either automatic or external modes depending on system types as explained later Automatic mode is configured b
468. rical noise generated by the power supply module from in terfering with other equipment connected to the same dc source Front Panel On Off Switch and Breaker A toggle type switch located on the power supply module front panel allows the power supply and satellite receiver or station to be turned off by removing the dc input voltage The switch controls a built in cir cuit breaker rated at 30A for TRN7802A 10A for TRN7803A to provide overload protection for the power supply and satellite receiver or sta tion circuitry Startup Inverter Circuitry This circuitry consists of a switching type power supply which gener ates a 12 V dc supply voltage used by the power supply module cir cuitry as VCC at the time of initial power up When all supply voltages have stabilized this circuit is overridden by 14 2 V BULK which con tinues to supply VCC to the module circuitry The circuitry consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 133 kHz internal circuitry provides clock signal during initial power up The PWM out put pulses control a transistor switch which repetitively gates voltage divided down 400 V dc from the Input Conditioning Circuitry to the primary of the startup isolation transformer The result is an induced voltage in the second ary winding which feeds two half wave rectifier circuits One circuit provides the 12 V dc Startup Bias voltage used by the module circuitry as initial VCC and the other p
469. rily bypassed to accelerate the frequency change vco The dc control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to a VCO which gen erates the 1st LO injection signal The VCO responds to the dc control voltage and generates the appropriate rf signal This signal is fed through a buffer amplifier and impedance matching and output to the 1st LO injection amplifier in the receiver front end circuitry A sample of the injection signal is returned to the PLL IC via a feedback buffer to serve as a VCO feedback signal 68P81091E92 B 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products Receiver Front End Circuitry Custom Receiver IC Circuitry The receive rf input is fed from the antenna through a low pass filter to a 7 pole ceramic preselector filter which provides highly selective bandpass filtering The output of the preselector filter is then amplified image filtered and fed to one input of the 1st mixer The signal is mixed with the 1st LO injection signal generated by the synthesizer VCO cir cuitry to produce 73 35 MHz 1st signal The 1st i f signal is 2 pole bandpass filtered and fed to an amplifier The amplifier gain high or low is determined by an AGC switch circuit that is controlled by an AGC select signal from the Station Control Mod ule The amplified 1st i f signal is then 4 pole bandpass filtered and fed to the rf input of the custom receiver IC The custom receiver IC provides additional amplification f
470. ring the equipment back to normal operation The faulty module must then be shipped to the Motorola System Support Center for further troubleshooting and repair to the component level This manual is intended for use by experienced technicians familiar with similar types of equipment In keeping with the maintenance phi losophy of Field Replaceable Units FRU this manual contains func tional information sufficient to give service personnel an operational understanding of all FRU modules allowing faulty FRU modules to be identified and replaced with known good FRU replacements The information in this manual is current as of the printing date Changes which occur after the printing date are incorporated by In struction Manual Revisions SMR These SMRs are added to the man uals as the engineering changes are incorporated into the equipment 68P81095E05 B 9 1 00 Service and Replacement Modules For complete information on ordering FRU replacement modules or instructions on how to return faulty modules for repair contact the Sys Motorola System Support Center tem Support Center see sidebar 1311 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 The following FRU replacement modules are available 1 800 221 7144 Receiver Module VHF Range 1 TLN3250A Int l 1 847 576 7300 Receiver Module VHF Range 2 TLN3251A FAX 1 847 576 2172 Receiver Module UHF Range 1 TLN3313A Receiver Module UHF Range 2 TLN3314A Receiver M
471. ro Radio Service Software RSS program make the following codeplug data changes to allow proper RA RT operation Refer to the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for details on making codeplug programming changes Table 1 Codeplug Data Changes for RA RT Operation RF Link Configuration Equipment Data Parameter RSS User s Guide Location Change command for Guard Tone from typically MORE to KEY Programming the TRC Commands Data p o Chapter 4 Station 1 Leave all other commands empty Programming the Wireline Configuration Data p o Chapter 4 Programming the Wireline Configuration Data Station 3 Enable TX Notch Filter p o Chapter 4 Disable TX Notch Filter Note Make sure console is programmed for 240 msec HLGT On SECURENET systems increase to 360 msec Table 2 Codeplug Data Changes for RA RT Operation Microwave Link Configuration Equipment Data Parameter RSS User s Guide Location Programming the Wireline Configuration Data Station 3 Enable TX Notch Filter p o Chapter 4 Note Make sure console is programmed for 240 msec HLGT On SECURENET systems increase to 360 msec 6 68P81090E98 A 9 1 00 RA RT Configuration TRC Control 5 TX WIRELINE ALIGNMENT You may align the TX Wireline levels as described in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 which requires the use of an external signal generator or you may use the station to generate the alignment tone This
472. rocessor communi cations bus HDLC protocol Station to Landline 12kbps modem data is input to the microproces sor from the Station Control Module microprocessor via the interpro cessor communications bus HDLC protocol The microprocessor feeds the data to the PASIC as 8 bit parallel data over the data bus The PASIC outputs the data serially through a 3 pole low pass filter to the gain adjust circuitry Under control of the PASIC the gain control circuitry provides four levels of gain adjust OdB 12dB and 18dB The output of the gain adjust circuitry is fed to the inputs of two amplifi ers The outputs of the amplifiers are fed to two transistors which are connected in a push pull configuration to drive the primary of an audio transformer The modem data signal is induced into the secondary and output to the landline system via either the 50 pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector as balanced audio 10 68 81094 78 9 1 00 CLN6956A and CLN6958A Wireline Interface Boards LANDLINE TO STATION VOICE AUDIO PATH 2 WIRE VOICE SIGNAL PATH CIRCUIT GAIN CONTROL
473. rogram as shown Edit or add WildCard Table 9 in order to route the Aux RX Audio signal to J17 Pin 30 MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE BASE STATION PRODUCTS WILD CARD STATE ACTION CONFIG Enter a Description of the State VER XX XX XX Condition Description ENABLERX AUDIO TABLE 9 OF 10 Jump to Table 9 STATE and CONDITION SETTINGS State Cond State Cond State COLD RESET OR WARM RESET INACTION NULL 2 F4 5 F6 F7 F8 F9 ADD SET TO PREV NEXT DEL PROGRAMMING ADDT L HELP CHOICE LIST TABLE DEFAULT TABLE TABLE TABLE RULES CMDS 10 68P81096E86 O 6 1 00 Input Output Specifications for External Controllers Routing Aux TX Audio to J17 Pin 5 Program as shown Edit WildCard Table 4 in order to route the Aux TX Audio signal from J17 Pin 5 to the transmitter Alignment is fixed so that a 1 kHz tone at 10 dBm at the input provides 60 deviation For example on a 25 kHz channel with 5 kHz maximum deviation a 10 dBm input results in 3 kHz deviation MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE n BASE STATION PRODUCTS D MM E of the State VER XX XX XX WILD CARD STATE ACTION CONFIG Description EXT PTT TABLE 4 OF 10 Jump to Table 4 STATE and CONDITION SETTINGS State Cond State Cond State INPUT 9 INACTION AUXTX TX ON AUXTX TX OFF KEY FROM WL DEKEY FROM WL F1 HELP CHOICE ADD LIST
474. rom Exciter Module the signal is fed to a Driver or a Final module depending on station s maximum output power The gain of the IPA stage is con trolled by the power control voltage from the Exciter Module The modulated rf signal is amplified by the Driver and or Final and is output to the site transmit antenna via a circulator and a harmonic filter coupler The coupler consists of a calibrated wattmeter which feeds a dc voltage proportional to the output power to the TX Power Control Circuitry in the Exciter Module to serve as the feedback signal in the power control loop 8 68P81096E56 A 9 1 00 Description Receiver Circuitry Operation Station Control Module Operation Introduction The Receiver Circuitry accepts receive rf signals from the site receive antenna performs filtering and dual conversion and outputs a digi tized receive signal to the Station Control Module Receiver Module Operation The receive signal is input from the site receive antenna to a multi pole preselector filter which provides highly selective bandpass filtering The filtered signal is then amplified and fed to the rf input of the 1st mix er which mixes the signal with an injection signal generated by the syn thesizer VCO resulting in a 21 45 MHz VHP or a 73 35 MHz UHF 800 900 1st i f intermediate frequency signal The injection signal frequency is determined by frequency programming data from the Sta tion Control Modul
475. ront panel and Station Control Board as described in Figure 6 The Station Control Board software must now be re moved from the old board and installed onto the replace ment board The software is contained on either two or four EPROMS earlier version boards or a single FLASH SIMM later version boards You must remove the EPROMs or FLASH SIMM from the replacement board and install the EPROMs or FLASH SIMM from the old board The following illustrations show the locations of the EPROMs and FLASH SIMM EPROMS 17 16 17 16 Software on Two EPROMs U653 U654 32 1 Software on yr Four EPROMs Uer 24 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Replacing Station Control Module Conventional 6809 Continued Replacement Procedure continued Software on Single FLASH SIMM Step 5 Note When inserting Station Control Board into cage place your thumbs on the BNC and D type connectors and firmly push the board into the backplane connector Step 6 Step 7 EEPROM 0655 Install replacement Station Control Board by sliding board into cage and firmly seating the board card edge connectors into the backplane Do not slam the board against the backplane or push any harder than necessary to seat the connectors Replace the front panel by pressing it into p
476. rovides a BULK DETECT signal used by the Diagnos tics Circuitry to generate the DC FAIL signal 68P81085E12 B 5 9 1 00 Quantar Satellite Receiver and Station Products Main Inverter Circuitry Overview The main inverter circuitry is comprised of a switching type power supply which generates a 14 2 V dc supply voltage This voltage is used as the source for the 5 V inverter circuit in the power supply module as well as the 14 2 V supply voltage for the satellite receiver or station modules via the backplane Switching Power Supply Operation The main inverter switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 67 kHz The PWM output pulses control a power FET bridge which alternately gate the input dc voltage from the Input Conditioning Circuitry to the primary of the main isolation transformer The result is an induced voltage in the secondary windings of the transformer at 133 kHz rate Transformer Secondary Voltages The main isolation transformer has two secondary windings as fol lows e Module Fail Winding operates in conjunction with a half wave rectifier circuit to provide a dc signal Mod Fail to the A D converter p o Diagnostics Circuitry indicates that the main in verter circuitry is functioning properly e 14 2 V Winding operates in conjunction with a full wave rectifier circuit to generate a 14 2 V dc supply voltage Overcur rent and overvoltage detect ci
477. rs near the frequency of the station can cause I M products The addition of the dual circu lator improves I M from gt 20dB to gt 50 The low pass filter reduces spurious emis sions to 90 The Dual Circulator Assembly accepts transmit rf output power from the power amplifier module and provides 45 dB minimum of isolation between the power amplifier module and the transmit antenna The as sembly consists of two circulators each with 500 load Each circula tor allows forward rf energy to pass through to the output while routing any reflected rf energy to the corresponding 502 load Refer to the block diagram shown in Figure 2 Most of the reflected energy is absorbed by the 509 load heat sink mounted connected to the second circulator A thermistor mounted on the heat sink provides a variable resistance signal proportional to the heat sink temperature This signal is routed to the Station Control Mod ule via the Peripheral Tray cabling harness If the heat sink temperature exceeds a preset threshold the Station Control Module enables PA cutback mode If the overtemperature condition persists the power amplifier is shut down completely CIRCULATOR TRANSMIT RF FROM POWER AMPLIFIER CIRCULATOR LOW PASS FILTER C CY RF OUTPUT qeu ere 10 TRANSMIT ANTENNA MODULE MATES WITH gt CONNECTOR ON PERIPHERAL TRAY CABLING HARNESS THERMISTOR 22K 25 C H
478. rvice technician a basic understanding of the func tions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the AC to DC Converter Board Input Conditioning Circuitry Startup Delay Circuitry Introduction The AC to DC Converter Board accepts ac power from an external source typically a 110V or 220 240V ac wall receptacle AC power is connected to the board via a 3 wire line cord plugged into an ac recep tacle mounted on the station backplane into which the entire power supply module slides blind mate connection Transient and EMI Protection The ac line input is fed to the AC to DC Converter Board circuitry via transient protection and EMI filter circuits The transient protection de vices provide protection against voltage spikes by providing an effec tive short to ground under high voltage transient conditions The EMI filter prevents electrical noise generated by the power supply module from interfering with other equipment connected to the same ac line cir Cuit Front Panel On Off Switch Relay Circuitry A rocker type switch located on the power supply module front panel allows the power supply and station to be turned on and off Note that the switch allows the filter circuitry p o Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry to slowly charge for approximately 1 5 seconds after switch is turned on through two diodes and re
479. ry chrg CPN1047A 625W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor CPN6086A Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector 6086 Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC III X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC III CLN1614A Station Control Module CLN1614A Station Control Module TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Options Kits X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module Options Kits X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module Internally Added CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Internally Added CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel by Motorola CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 by Motorola CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 Order Order Processing X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire Processing X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 wire CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board CLN6955A Wireline Interface Board TKN8731A WIM Cable TKN8731A WIM Cable CLN6816A RFI Suppressor CLN6816A RFI Suppressor C831AA Card Cage C831AA Card Cage TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 TRN7479A Card Cage Assembly 12 X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly X142AA Duplex Interface Assembly TRN7494A Duplex Interface inclu
480. s Each power supply module is comprised of sev eral switching type power supply circuits and diagnostics and moni toring circuitry all contained within a slide in module housing The power supply module provides the following features e Internal voltage and current limiting circuitry continually moni tors critical voltages and currents and shuts supply down if pre set thresholds are exceeded e Temperature protection module contains built in cooling fan which is thermostatically controlled supply shuts down if tem perature exceeds preset threshold e Diagnostic monitoring critical internal parameters are contin ually monitored and reported to the Station Control Module which can automatically provide correction for certain operating conditions e Front panel On Off switch with built in circuit breaker 30A for TRN7802A 10A for TRN7803A The Models TRN7802A and TRN7803A differ only in the required dc in put voltage Unless otherwise noted the information provided in this section applies to both models Commercial Government and A Motels Inc 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81085E12 B Printed S BLUT 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar Satellite Receiver and Station Products El DESCRIPTION Continued Overview of Circuitry The power supply module contains the following circuitry Startup Inverter Circuitry provides VCC for power supply cir cuitry during initi
481. s IPA_VF DPA_VF and FPA_VF used for diagnostic purposes only are fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry Reflected Power Detect Circuitry The Harmonic Filter Coupler provides a dc voltage approximately proportional to the reflected power at the output of the stage This dc signal TX_VR is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry The signal indicates the amount of potentially harmful reflected power at the PA output If the reflected power exceeds a set limit the Exciter Module will shut down the PA V_OMNI Detect Circuitry A voltage divider circuit provides a dc voltage approximately proportional to the V_OMNI control voltage from the Voltage Translator amp Current Limiter circuit This dc signal V_OMNI is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry 14V Detect Circuitry A voltage divider circuit provides a dc voltage approximately proportional to the 14 V dc input voltage from the station Power Supply Module This dc signal 14 2V_REF is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry 28V Detect Circuitry 100 110W Only A voltage divider circuit provides a dc voltage approximately proportional to the 28 V dc input voltage from the station Power Supply Module This dc signal 28V REF is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filter circuitry 68P81088E44 B 9 1 00 Quant
482. s filtering and couples the signal to an N type connector mounted to the module casting A coax cable routes the signal to an N type connector mounted on an rf input output connector bracket located on the rear of the station A feedback and control loop configuration is used to regulate the PA output power The Harmonic Filter Coupler generates a dc voltage proportional to the PA Module output power This voltage TX_VF is fed to the TX Power Control Circuitry in the Exciter Module The TX_VF voltage is compared to reference voltages to generate a dc power control voltage V_CONT The dc power control voltage V CONT is output from the Exciter Module and fed through filtering circuitry in the PA to a voltage translation and current limiting circuit The output of this circuitry is V OMNI a dc voltage which controls the output power of the IPA Summary of Power Control Operation By controlling the output level of the IPA range of 0 to 15W the output power of the PA module is established The feedback and control loop TX VF fed back to Exciter Module resulting in V CONT to control IPA output continually monitors and maintains the proper output power from the PA 68P81088E44 B 9 1 00 Quantar UHF Station Functional Manual Sense and Detect Circuitry Introduction The PA is equipped with several sense and detect circuits to provide status signals to the Exciter Module In most cases the Exciter Module microprocessor
483. s manual Perform the alignment procedures listed in the sidebar as described in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 25 Quantar Station Functional Manual Replacing Station Control Module for modules in IntelliRepeater Ethernet Networks Replacement Procedure Step 1 Note f ihe Physical Address and or the IP Step 2 Address cannot be read contact the System Support Center at 1 800 221 7144 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Note Use an Extraction Tool Motorola Part No 01 80386A04 to remove the firm ware devices If the module is capable of communicating with the RSS connect the PC to the RSS port start the RSS program and save the codeplug from the station to a file on the PC hard disk This will allow the codeplug information to be downloaded to the codeplug located on the replacement Station Control Board If the module cannot communicate with the RSS an archive file if available of the particular station codeplug may be downloaded If no archive code plug file exists you must program the codeplug as de scribed in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Using the RSS read the P Address and Physical Address assigned to the station and jot them down From the RSS Main Menu go to Service Ethernet Parameters to read the P Address and the Physical Address Turn off station power refer to page 20 Disconnect the station from the Ethernet LAN as de scribe
484. s of the X676AQ and X676AR Triple Circulator Options Option Complement Charts Table 1 X676AQ Triple Circulator Option Complement Option Contents TLF7320A Dual Circulator TLN3391A 50Q Load w heatsink 797088 TRN7796A Cooling Fan TLF7340A Low Pass Filter Table 2 X676AR Triple Circulator Option Complement Option Contents TRN7796A Cooling Fan TLF7340A Low Pass Filter TLF7330A Dual Circulator X676AR TLN3391A 500 Load w heatsink 2 68 81090 86 9 1 00 Triple Circulator Option 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 3 shows the electrical performance specifications for the dual circulator assemblies used in Options X676AQ 800 MHz and X676AR 900 MHz Table 4 shows the electrical performance specifications for the low pass filter used in Options X676AQ and X676AR Performance Specifications Table 3 Performance Specifications for 800 MHz and 900 MHz Dual Circulator Assemblies X676AQ 850 870 MHz Operating Frequency X676AR 935 941 MHz Insertion Loss with low pass 1 15dB typ filter and cables 1 6dB max 45 dB min Isolation total of 60 dB when combined with circulator built into power amplifier module Operating Temperature Range 20 C to 70 Input Output Return Loss 19 1 dB min Terminations Female N Type Input and Output Impedance 50 Ohms 25W without cooling fan on 90W with cooling fan on 22 25 C 1 7 k Q 125 C 509 Load Maximum Power Thermistor Ou
485. s up to six 6 Quantar stations 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation Site Grounding and Lightning Protection A GED Proper site grounding and light ning protection are vitally impor tant considerations Failure to provide proper lightning protec tion may result in permanent damage to the radio equipment Site Grounding and Lightning Protection Recommendations One of the most important considerations when designing a communi cations site is the ground and lightning protection system While prop er grounding techniques and lightning protection are closely related the general category of site grounding may be divided as follows Electrical Ground Ground wires carrying electrical current from cir cuitry or equipment at the site is included in the category of electrical ground Examples include the ac or dc electrical power used to source equipment located at the site telephone lines and wires or cables con nected to alarms or sensors located at the site RF Ground This type of ground is related to the transmission of ra dio frequency energy to earth ground An example of rf grounding is the use of shielding to prevent or at least minimize the leakage of un wanted rf transmissions from communications equipment and cables Lightning Ground Providing adequate lightning protection is critical to a safe and reliable communications site Telephone lines rf trans mission cables and ac
486. se the address bus to select a specific device on a specific station board for control or data communications purposes via the SPI bus If the board select circuitry decodes address lines A2 thru A5 as the receiver module address it enables the chip select circuitry The chip select cir cuitry then decodes address lines AO and A1 and generates chip select signals for the PLL and A D converter and the SYNTH ADAPT signal to control the loop filter bypass switch in the synthesizer circuitry A D Converter Circuitry Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the receiver board are fed to the A D converter which converts them to a digital signal and upon request by the Station Control Module outputs the signal to the Station Control Module via the SPI bus The voltage regulator circuitry consists of 10V and two 5V regula tors The 10V regulator accepts a 14 2V dc input and generates a 10V dc operating voltage for the receiver board circuitry The 10V regulator output also feeds two 5V regulators which output Custom Analog 5V and Custom Digital 5V dc operating voltages to supply the custom receiver IC and Synthesizer IC In addition a 5V dc operating voltage is input at the backplane from the station power supply to supply Digital 5V to the remainder of the receiver board circuitry 68P81091E92 B 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68P81091E92 B
487. selector Filter Assembly uu s a u tied ahi Ev RE Dun EE ruere Re page 4 Receiver Front End Circuitry page 4 Custom Receiver IC Circuitry page 4 Address Decode and A D Converter Circuitry page 5 Voltage Regulator Circuitry page 5 RECEIVER MODULE 800 MHz 68P81086E76 Description ik RIDES ET eee ERR ee ees heed page 1 General Description ons Ip RETOUR RI E E ERE Led vede Pme page 1 Overview of Circultly cabelas etd eee bet ea NE page 1 Controls Indicators and page 2 Functional Theory of Operation page 3 Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry page 3 Receiver Front End Circuitry page 4 continued on next page 9 1 00 68P81095E05 B iii Custom Receiver IC Circuitry page 4 Address Decode and A D Converter Circuitry page 5 Voltage Regulator Circuitry
488. sistance 1009 10 20 Contacts Specifications Type SPDT Actuation Failsafe Pull in time 20 msec max Drop out time 10 msec max Temperature Range 30 C to 80 G 68P81086E22 B 3 9 1 00 Quantar Station Products MOUNTING LOCATIONS In order to provide alternative routing for the antenna rf cable the Antenna Relay Module may be installed in two positions on the rf input output bracket Stations equipped with the antenna relay module option are shipped with the antenna relay module installed as shown in Figure 3 allowing the rf cable to be routed out the side of the cabinet or rack If desired the bracket may be turned 90 counterclockwise to allow the cable to be routed toward the bottom of the cabinet or rack as shown in Figure 4 FROM ANTENNA RELAY POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE MODULE STANDARD MOUNTING POSITION MATES WITH RF CABLE TRANSMIT RECEIVE ANTENNA _ FROM E RECEIVER amp nmm CONTROL CABLE MODULE CONNECTED TO BACKPLANE Figure 3 Standard Mounting Position for Antenna Relay Module ANTENNA RELAY MODULE m AED OPTIONAL CONTROL CABLE MOUNTING Er CONNECTED TO POSITION L L i MATES WITH RF CABLE TRANSMIT RECEIVE ANTENNA FROM RECEIVER MODULE FROM POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE Figure 4 Optional Mounting Position for Antenna Relay Module 4 68P81086E22 B 9 1 00 Antenna Relay Module FUNCTIONAL THEOR
489. sistors After the 1 5 second delay the relay turns on and provides an ac input to the bridge rectifier This 1 5 second pre charge delay period limits in rush current through the filter capacitors upon power up Rectifier Circuitry The ac line voltage via the relay is rectified by a full wave bridge rectifi er and fed to the Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry This circuitry monitors the ac input from the on off switch and pro vides a 1 5 second delay when switch is turn on before energizing the relay to turn on the power supply If the AC input is below approximately 85 V rms the relay will not be turned on and the power supply outputs will be disabled The red Module Fail LED on the front panel will light 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 CPN1047A CPN1048A625W Power Supply Modules Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry Battery Revert Trigger Circuitry VCC Supply Circuitry Overview The Boost Power Factor Correction Circuitry is comprised of a switch ing type power supply which generates a 400 V dc voltage This volt age is fed to the DC to DC Converter Board to be used as the source for the 28V 14V and 5V Supply Circuits Switching Power Supply Operation The switching power supply consists of a pulse width modulator PWM running at 67 kHz The PWM output pulses are fed through driv er transistors to control three power FETs which rapidly switch the To roid Power Coil to ground The result
490. sition JUMPERS IN POSITION gt 3 WIRELINE IMPEDANCE 4 7UF A SETTINGS 1 027UF 7 511 gt Jl 150 i LINE 2 2 047UF gt lt u AUDIO 1 l T1000 T1001 gt 4 7UF 3 120 4 u gog T1001 gt lind 4 4 Jl e e TT 4 033UF F 2 909 AUF Note All jumpers removed for high impedance input output Figure 3 Wiring Connections for Main Standby Configuration 4 68P81095E89 O 2 15 99 Main Standby Configuration RSS PROGRAMMING In order to enable the Main Standby Feature the following two tasks must be performed using the Quantar Quantro Radio Service Software RSS program Refer to the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for details on performing the following tasks Step 1 Connect PC running the RSS program to one of the two stations and read the station codeplug Step2 Access the Hardware Configuration screen and set the Main Standby field for MAIN for station designated as Main or STANDBY for station designated as standby as shown in Figure 4 Step 3 Perform all other RSS programming tasks to configure the station as described in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE BASE STATION PRODUCTS VER XX XX XX MAIN SERVICE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION Please Enter The Serial Number Type Alphanumeric Punctuation Chars Serial Number Station Name Hardware Platform
491. sizer Circuitry consisting of a phase locked loop and VCO generates a modulated rf signal at the transmitter carrier frequency e Transmitter Power Control generates a dc control voltage which controls the output power of the power amplifier module e RF Switch allows the microprocessor to turn on off the exciter output signal to the power amplifier module OMotorol Inc 2000 Commercial Government and Rights Hasdrved Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81086E24 E Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar and Quantro Station Products CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the exciter module controls indicators and all input and output external connections RF OUTPUT TO POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE TX LOCK LED PA FULL LED ls FRONT PANEL FRONT VIEW CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE REAR VIEW Figure 1 Exciter Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 2 68P81086E24 E 9 1 00 Exciter Boards 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the exciter circuitry at a functional level The informa tion is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the exciter module Synthesizer
492. ss filtered and fed to an amplifier The amplifier gain high or low is determined by an AGC switch circuit that is controlled by an AGC select signal from the Station Control Mod ule The amplified 1st i f signal is then 4 pole bandpass filtered and fed to the rf input of the custom receiver IC The custom receiver IC provides additional amplification filtering a second down conversion and finally analog to digital conversion of the 2nd i f signal The digital receive signal is then sent via differential driv er circuitry to the Station Control Board This data signal contains the necessary and Q quadrature information AGC information and other data transfer information required by the Station Control Module to pro cess the receive signal Note that the recovered audio signal is in digi tal format throughout the station circuitry resulting in a more noise free linear receiver Analog audio is present only in the external speak er driver circuitry on the Station Control Board and on the Wireline Inter face Board at the phone line connections to and from the station The remainder of the custom receiver IC circuitry consists of timing and tank circuits to support the internal oscillator 2nd LO synthesizer cir cuitry and 2nd 1 circuitry A serial bus allows data communications between the custom receiver IC and the DSP ASIC located on the Station Control Board This bus allows the DSP ASIC to control various current
493. ss in the module front cover An rf cable connects the exciter output to the power amplifier module Introduction The microprocessor uP serves as the main controller for the exciter module circuitry The uP provides the following functions Communications with Station Control Module Data communications between the exciter uP and the Station Control Module uP is performed via a serial peripheral interface SPI bus This bus allows the SCM uP to interrogate the exciter uP to obtain status and alarm information and to issue commands to the exciter uP to se lect frequency and output power The SPI bus is also used to allow the exciter uP to send data to the synthesizer PLL IC to select frequency and the D A Converter IC to control output power Monitoring External Signals The exciter uP accepts input signals from various sources including portions of the exciter circuitry and from the power amplifier module These signals are input to the uP through analog multiplexers where they are monitored The levels on these status lines are used by the uP to control the operation of the exciter circuitry and to report to the SCM uP EPROM The uP operating program and various algorithms for frequency and output power control are stored in an EPROM The uP accesses the EPROM via an address bus and a data bus 68P81086E24 E 9 1 00 Exciter Boards Microprocessor Circuitry Continued TX Power Control Circuitry Output
494. ssload the other stations at the site answer NO Using the RSS navigate to Service Ethernet Parame ters and change the P Address and Physical Address to the addresses you read in Step 2 on page 26 Calibrate the reference oscillator station reference by performing the procedure in the Routine Maintenance section of this manual Perform the alignment procedures listed in the sidebar as described in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Turn off station power refer to page 20 Reconnect the T connector from the Ethernet LAN Restore power to the station 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 27 Quantar Station Functional Manual THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 28 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 Troubleshooting Remove the two screws from top and bottom of Station Control Module front panel STATION CONTROL MODULE FRONT PANEL STATION CONTROL BOARD TORX SCREWS e e Tip back on the panel to pry the Station Control Board out of the backplane connectors Partially remove front panel and position the board extraction tab on the bottom rail of the cage and slide the panel to the left until the lip of the tab is positioned behind the cutout in the Station Control Board EXTRACTOR TAB BEHIND BOARD CUTOUT Remove Station Control Board from cage Figure 6 Removal Procedure for Station Control Board Quantar VHF Station Shown 11 15 99 68 81096 59 29 Quantar Station Functio
495. stalled or even by equipment installed later Therefore the effects of any such facilities must be considered in site selection and in determining whether a particular installation meets the FCC requirements FCC OET Bulletin 65 provides materials to assist in making determinations if a given facility is compliant with the human exposure to RF radiation limits Determining the compliance of transmitter sites of various complexities may be accomplished by means of computational methods For more complex sites direct measurement of the power density may be more expedient Additional information on the topic of electromagnetic exposure is contained in the Motorola Standards and Guideline for Communications Sites publication Persons responsible for installation of this equipment are urged to consult the listed reference material to assist in determining whether a given installa tion complies with the applicable limits In general the following guidelines should be observed when working in or around radio transmitter sites All personnel should have electromagnetic energy awareness training All personnel entering the site must be authorized Obey all posted signs Assume all antennas are active Before working on antennas notify owners and disable appropriate transmitters Maintain minimum feet clearance from all antennas Do not stop in front of antennas Use personal RF monitors while working near antennas p Never operate tr
496. station operates in transparent mode only and does not perform encryption or decryption of the ASTRO or ASTRO CAI signal e SECURENET encoded signals are processed by the ASIC sent to from the microprocessor via the data bus and sent to from the Station Control Module microprocessor via the HDLC bus The station operates in transparent mode only and does not perform encryption or decryption of the SECURENET signal The WIB also contains the I O circuitry used with the WildCard Option Refer to the Quantar Quantro RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 for more information on the WildCard Option The Power Supply Module is a switching type power supply which ac cepts an ac input 90 280 V ac 47 63 Hz and generates the neces sary dc operating voltages for the station modules Stations rated at 20 25 W output power are equipped with Power Supply Modules which generate 5 and 14 2 V dc Stations rated at 100 110 125 W output power are equipped with Power Supply Modules which gener ate 5 14 2 V and 28 V dc 10 68P81096E56 A 9 1 00 Description INPUT
497. t NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 4 PROGRAM ENABLE HOST MICROPROCESSOR SPI BUS FROM HOST MICROPROCESSOR FROM HOST MICROPROCESSOR HOST ADDRESS BUS HOST DATA BUS DRAM MEMORY CAS SELECT LINES FROM HOST MICROPROCESSOR RAS SELECT LINES FROM HOST MICROPROCESSOR DRAM ADDRESS MULTIPLEXERS DRAM SIMM CAS RAS A A gt gt gt gt SPI BUS 9 1 00 68 81094 76 Figure 2 CLN6960A CLN6961A Station Control Module Functional Block Diagram 2 of 5 15 Quantar and Quantro Station Products HDLC BUS CONTROL CIRCUITRY HDLC BUS a F a y 6 CONTROL 3 TO FROM FROM HOST MICROPROCESSOR SPI BUS Figure 2 CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Module Functional Block Diagram 3 of 5 16 CIRCUITRY DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR DSP DSP ASIC HOST BUFFERED DATA BUS HOST ADDRESS BUS ahem BUFFERS 3 68 81094 76 ADDRESS HOST PORT 6 DSP DATA BUS SERIAL SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE BUS INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATIONS BUS HDLC DATA DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR DSP 10 MHZ TIMING CIRCUITRY 9 1 00 PROGRAM MEMORY
498. t delay circuit generates a shutdown signal which is fed to the softstart circuitry to shutdown the main invert er 68P81085E12 B 7 9 1 00 Quantar Satellite Receiver and Station Products Diagnostics Circuitry Note The cooling fan in the Power Supply Module is thermostatically controlled and may come on at any time during satellite receiver or station operation Failure of the fan to rotate continuously does not indi cate a failure of the module Address Decode Circuitry Overview The diagnostics circuitry consists of a 11 channel A D converter which converts analog status signals from critical points in the module to digital format for transfer to the Station Control Module via the SPI bus Most of the status signals are generated by detect circuits to indi cate the status of dc supply voltages and references Temperature Monitor and Control Circuitry A thermistor mounted on the power supply module heatsink provides a varying resistance input to several detect and control circuits as fol lows e Heatsink Status Detect compares signal from thermistor to reference voltage to generate an output proportional to heatsink temperature signal is sent to Station Control Board via A D con verter and SPI bus e Detect compares signal from thermistor to refer ence voltage to generate a high temperature signal if preset threshold is exceeded signal is sent to softstart circuitry to shut down
499. t from the DSP circuitry to a D A converter via the TX Voice Audio sig nal p o the Serial Synchronous Interface bus connected between the DSP and the DSP ASIC The digitized signal is converted to analog level shifted and amplified and fed to a 0 6 kHz filter The output of the filter is then fed to one of the inputs of a multiplexer The output of the multiplexer is fed to two individual digitally controlled potentiometers each of which is adjusted by the Host uP via the SPI Bus and output to the Exciter Module as modulation signals VCO MOD AUDIO and REF MOD AUDIO 68 81096 87 9 1 00 11 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Input Output Ports 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry Input Ports Two general purpose multi line input ports are provided to allow vari ous input signals from the SCM and station circuitry to be accepted and sent to the Host uP The two ports I O Port PO In and I O Port P1 In are comprised of 32 and 24 lines respectively which come from circuitry in the SCM as well as other modules in the station via the backplane The buses are input to buffers which make the data available to the Host uP via the Host Buffered Data Bus Typical inputs include the pushbutton switches located on the SCM front panel and the MIC PTT signal from the handset microphone Output Ports Two general purpose multi line output ports are provided to allow various control signals from the Host uP to be output
500. t optimization is required for this module 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 23 Quantar Station Functional Manual Replacing Station Control Module all except modules in IntelliRepeater Ethernet Networks Note replacement board must have the same model number as the faulty board e g CLN6961 If it does not contact the System Support Center at 1 800 221 7144 for instruc tions on how to proceed Note I the existing EPROM or FLASH SIMM is faulty contact the System Support Center at 1 800 221 7144 to obtain replacement parts The version of software contained in the re placement devices must match that of the faulty devices Note Use an Extraction Tool Motorola Part No 01 80386A04 to remove the firm ware devices Replacement Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 If the module is capable of communicating with the RSS connect the PC to the RSS port start the RSS program and save the codeplug from the station to a file on the PC hard disk This will allow the codeplug information to be downloaded to the codeplug located on the replacement Station Control Board If the module cannot communicate with the RSS an archive file if available of the particular station codeplug may be downloaded If no archive code plug file exists you must program the codeplug as de scribed in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 Turn off station power refer to page 20 Using a Torx 15 driver remove f
501. t supply approximately 4 25 amperes The Quantar station equipment may be mounted in a variety of racks and cabinets available as options as follows No Rack or Cabinet e Station shipped without rack or cabinet Option X87AA cus tomer may install station in rack or cabinet of choice station is designed to fit standard EIA 19 rack configuration Standard Open Racks e 7 Model TRN7342 7 Model TRN7343 8 Model TRN7344 racks open frame racks accept multiple Quantar stations and ancillary equipment EIA 19 rack configuration Note that rack mounting hardware Option X153AA is required for each Quantar cage to be rack mounted Modular Racks e 30 Option X741AA 45 Option 742 or 60 Option X743AA modular racks accept multiple Quantar stations and ancillary equipment EIA 19 rack configuration These racks are designed to be stacked see page 26 Cabinets e Shipped 12 x 20 cabinet Option X430AA roll formed cabinet with front and rear vented doors holds a single Quantar station e Shipped in 30 x 20 cabinet Option X52AA roll formed cabinet with front and rear vented doors holds up to three 3 Quantar stations e Shipped in 46 x 20 cabinet Option X308AA roll formed cabinet with front and rear vented doors holds up to four 4 Quantar stations e Shipped in 60 x 20 cabinet Option X180AA roll formed cabinet with front and rear vented doors hold
502. tation manu console to Microwave Station 1 al for details of making wireline connections Step 2 Connect the station to landline audio to the console to the Microwave Station 68P81090E99 A 5 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products Microwave Station 2 to Station 3 Wiring Connections Note _ Referto the Microwave Station manu al for details of making wireline connections Note Phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the 8 position terminal connector Refer to the Installation section of the appropriate sta tion functional manual for more details on phone line connections Note RDSTAT INT signal goes high when Station 3 detects receive signal according to RX Activation parameter setting via RSS This energizes relay and provides ground signal to E LEAD input on Microwave Station 2 Wireline Connections Step 1 Connect the station to landline audio from Microwave Station 2 to the Line 1 connections on Station 3 as shown below Step 2 Connect the landline to station audio to Microwave Station 2 to the Line 2 connections on Station 3 as shown below 8 POSITION TERMINAL CONNECTOR Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 2 50 TELCO Line 2 Pin3 CONNECTOR Line 2 Pin 4 Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 26 Line 2 Pin2 Line 2 Pin 27 RDSTAT to E Lead Connection Station 3 to Station 2 Step 1 Connect the RD STAT and signals from
503. tations shipped with the optional dc input power supply module ac cept a dc input from either a 12 24 V dc or 48 60 V dc source e g a bank of storage batteries Connections to the dc source are made via a 10 battery charger cable kit shipped with the station as shown in Figure 13 P O CABLE CONNECTORS TRN5155A SHIPPED INSTALLED BATTERY CHARGER RED Os ABLI E KIT BLACK 8AWG C3 FUSE BLOCK AND 60A FUSE Y TO SOURCE OF DC INPUT POWER Making Connections to DC Power Source 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 29 Quantar Station Functional Manual Power Supply Connections Continued Ground Connection The Quantar station cage is equipped with a single ground lug located on the rear panel of the cage Connect this lug to the site ground point as shown in Figure 14 Refer to Quality Standards FNE Installation Manual 68P81089E50 for complete information regarding lightning protection STATION GROUND LUG CONNECT TO SITE GROUND Figure 14 Connecting Station Ground Lug to Site Ground 68P81096E57 A 30 11 15 99 Installation Power Supply Connections Continued Important Connectthe charged battery to the station before applying AC power Failure to do so may prevent the Power Supply Mod ule from reverting to battery power upon AC failure Important For Motorola Power Supply Modules with battery charging capability the
504. tering on the 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry and fed to the Audio Interface Circuit ry The T DATA signal is then waveshaped filtered and fed to an A D converter which outputs a digital signal to the DSP via the Audio Inter face Bus 6809 RX AUDIO is output from the DSP to the Local Audio Circuitry via the Audio Interface Bus The signal is amplified filtered buffered and output thru nominal filtering on the 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry to the 6809 Trunking Controller via J14 on the station backplane MRTI Interface MRTI AUDIO from an external MRTI module is input to the station via J14 on the station backplane The signal is routed thru the 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry and fed to one input of an 8 to 1 multiplexer If se lected the MRTI TX AUDIO signal is converted to a digital signal by the A D portion of the CODEC IC and sent to the DSP ASIC via the Audio Interface Bus MRTI RX AUDIO is output from the DSP to the Local Audio Circuitry via the Audio Interface Bus The signal is amplified filtered buffered and output thru the 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry to the external MRTI Mod ule via J14 on the station backplane 10 68 81094 76 9 1 00 CLN6960A and CLN6961A Station Control Modules Front Panel LEDs and Switches Note Refer to the Troubleshooting section of this manual for complete details on the in terpretation of the LEDs Note Refer to the Operation section of this man ual for complete d
505. th a variety of telephone line configurations and signal types In addition the board contains a connector to accept one modem card This card is required to interface with a 9 6kbps ASTRO input The WIB is installed behind the Station Control Module front panel and connects to the station backplane Phone line connections may be made either to a 50 pin Telco connector and or an orange screw ter minal connector see sidebar The WIB contains the following circuitry e Audio and Data Circuits the WIB provides a number of voice and data circuits which interface with the customer phone lines e Microprocessor serves as the main controller for the WIB communicates with the Station Control Module microprocessor interfaces with the ASTRO and SECURENET data signals and provides monitoring and control for a variety of on board circuits e Peripheral Application Specific IC PASIC primarily responsi ble for injecting and retrieving PCM voice signals into from the TDM time division multiplex bus that connects from the WIB to the Station Control Module e DC Remote Detection circuitry provides current sensing and detection for dc remote control of station e Simulcast Processing Circuitry circuitry is provided for sum ming and control of Simulcast PL and reverse burst tones Commercial Government and Inc 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81094E77 A Banca n 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg
506. the RX frequency and maximum RX isolation at the TX frequency Figure 1 Typical Duplexer Module Commercial Government and Inc 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81086E71 B Brinte s 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar VHF Station Functional Manual ADJUSTMENTS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 2 shows the location of the adjustment screws and input and output rf connectors for the duplexer module PASS FREQUENCY TUNING RODS DUPLEXER MODULE NOTCH FREQUENCY NOTCH FREQUENCY DUAL TRIMMER SCREWS TRIMMER SCREW 3 PAIRS 3 HIGH PASS LOW NOTCH RX INPUT TX OUTPUT LOW PASS HIGH NOTCH DUPLEXER INPUT CONNECTS TO SINGLE DUPLEXER INPUT CONNECTS TO PA OUTPUT RX TX ANTENNA CONNECTS TO PA OUTPUT OR RECEIVER INPUT WHICHEVER OR RECEIVER INPUT WHICHEVER HAS HIGHER FREQUENCY HAS LOWER FREQUENCY Figure 2 Quantar VHF Duplexer Module Adjustment Screws and Input Output Connections 2 68 81086 71 9 1 00 Duplexer Module 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the duplexer module Performance Specifications Table 1 Duplexer Performance Specifications Options X182AA AB AJ Operating Frequency Model X182AA 132 146 MHz Model X182AB 144 160 MHz Model X182AJ 158 174 MHz Insertion Loss 1 3 dB max Transmitter to Antenna Insertion Loss Antenna to Receiver 1 3 dB max Bandwidth
507. the receiver front end circuitry Functional operation of these circuits is as follows Phase Locked Loop The phase locked loop PLL IC receives frequency selection data from the Station Control Module microprocessor Once programmed the PLL IC compares 2 1 MHz reference signal from the Station Con trol Module with a feedback sample of the VCO output Depending on whether the feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2 1 MHz reference correction pulses are generated The width of these correction pulses is dependent on the amount of difference between the 2 1 MHz reference and the VCO feedback The up down pulses from the PLL IC are fed to a charge pump which outputs a dc voltage proportional to the pulse widths This dc voltage is then low pass filtered and fed to the VCO as the CONTROL VOLT AGE Note that if a frequency change is requested by the microproces sor the low pass loop filter is momentarily bypassed to accelerate the frequency change vco The dc control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to dual VCOs which generate the 1st LO injection signal Within each band Ranges 1 thru 4 one VCO generates signals in the upper half of the band while the other VCO generates signals in the lower half of the band Only one VCO is active at a time Selection of the active VCO is provided by a BANDSHIFT signal from the PLL IC The active VCO responds to the dc control voltage and generates the appropr
508. the station power supply to supply Digital 5V to the remainder of the receiver board circuitry 68P81086E48 C 4 15 99 Quantar Quantro Station Products THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6 68P81086E48 C 4 15 99 Quantar Quantro UHF Receiver Modules RECEIVER FRONT END CIRCUITRY AGC Se EOL RECEIVER FRONT END CIRCUITRY SWITCH RF INPUT OUTPUT NSTYPE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR ON HIGH LOW BRACKET RF INPUT OUTPUT paie KO REAR OF STATION CONNECTOR BRACKET STATION CONTROL TO MODULE 3 POLE FILTER INPUT 18 N TYPE MINI UHF MINI UHF MINI UHF CONNECTOR CONNECTORS 3 POLE CONNECTORS CONNECTORS AGE SPOLE SUEDE RECEIVE RF gt O gt O PR SELECTOR gt O lt 2 e SES Lo PASS MM SE FILTER gt gt BANDPASS gt BANDPASS gt RX ANTENNA HR ped lt T PIETER C ce
509. tion performance specifications identification of controls indicators and inputs outputs a functional block diagram and functional theory of operation are provided The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer also to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section of this manual for detailed troubleshooting procedures for all modules in the station General Description The Models CPN1049A CPN1050B Power Supply Modules each ac cept an ac input 90 264 V ac 47 63 Hz and generate 14 2V dc and 5 1V dc operating voltages to power the station modules Each power supply module is comprised of three circuit boards which pro vide several switching type power supply circuits power factor correc tion circuitry battery charger revert circuitry CPN1050B only and diagnostics and monitoring circuitry all contained within a slide in module housing The power supply module provides the following features Auto ranging for input voltage and frequency circuitry automatically adjusts for input ranges of 90 264 V ac and 47 63 Hz no jumpers switches or other settings are required Input transient and EMI protection MOV gas discharge and filter devices protect the power supply circuitry from ac line voltage transients and electro magnetic interference Internal voltage and current limiting ci
510. tion for entire Power Supply Module etc e The AC FAIL signal is high indicating that the AC power to the Power Supply Module has been interrupted Local Supplies Circuitry This circuitry contains two voltage regulators which accept 28 RAW from the 28V Main Supply Circuitry and generate VCC 10 V dc and 5 V supply voltages for use by local circuitry 68 81095 88 11 15 99 17 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 8 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 CPN1047A CPN1048APower Supply Modules INPUT CONDITIONING CIRCUITRY FRONT PANEL ON OFF SWITCH O o bi ANN Y gt oo gt w V BOOST POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CIRCUITRY RELAY APPROX 400 VDC FULL WAVE e gt BRIDGE RECTIFIER TOROID 400 VDC gt _ POWER COIL AC INPUT TRANSIENT EMI FILTER 50 60 HZ PROTECTION pt i 7 b CIRCUITRY 110V 220V AC gt CIRCUITRY 57 ENN ied gt oo INPUT OUTPUT VOLTAGE OUTPUT VOLTAGE wee SENSE CURRENT SENSE SENSE LH OUTPUT V T CURRENT DETECT Y STARTUP DELAY CIRCUITRY A Y TOY BEE AC MONITOR a 67 KHZ CIRCUITRY 1 5 SECOND y Jun gt TIMER RELAY ON SYNC
511. tion section of the appropriate sta tion functional manual for more details on phone line connections Note RDSTAT INT signal goes high when Station 3 detects receive signal according to RX Activation parameter setting via RSS This energizes relay and provides ground signal to E LEAD input on Microwave Station 2 Wireline Connections Step 1 Connect the station to landline audio from Microwave Station 2 to the Line 1 connections on Station 3 as shown below Step 2 Connect the landline to station audio to Microwave Station 2 to the Line 2 connections on Station 3 as shown below 8 POSITION TERMINAL CONNECTOR Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 2 50 TELCO Line 2 Pin 3 CONNECTOR Line 2 Pin 4 Line 1 Pin 1 Line 1 Pin 26 Line 2 Pin 2 Line 2 Pin 27 RDSTAT to E Lead Connection Step 1 Connect the RD STAT and signals from Station 3 to the E Lead signal on Microwave Station 2 as shown below An equivalent schematic circuit for the RD STAT and E LEAD signals is also shown MICROWAVE STATION 3 STATION 2 RD STAT E LEAD r STATION 3 MICROWAVE STATION 2 P EL x i R 3 9K npsrAT NT L E S E 68P81090E98 A 9 1 00 Quantar Quantro Station Products 4 RSS PROGRAMMING Using the Quantar Quant
512. tions Be sure to observe proper electro static discharge precautions if modules must be removed from the cage Unpacking the Equipment Introduction Important Regardless of the packing sya Quantar station equipment packing methods vary depending upon the extent of any damage to the transportation type of optional rack or cabinet selected by the customer Quantar sta company tion cages may also be packed and shipped as standalone units with no cabinet or cage Unpacking procedures for these various methods are provided in the following paragraphs Unpacking Standalone Quantar Station Cage Standalone cages ordered with Option X87AA omit cabinet are packed in a cardboard box with styrofoam interior spacers and card board stiffeners Unpack as described in Figure 8 1 4 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 Installation Open carton slide out station as shown CARDBOARD CONTAINER CARDBOARD STIFFENERS FOAM SPACER QUANTAR STATION CAGE E Remove foam spacers and cardboard poi stiffeners Line cord and plastic bag containing FOAM SPACER mounting hardware are located inside container Figure 8 Unpacking Procedures for Quantar Station Cages 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 15 Quantar Station Functional Manual Unpacking the Equipment Continued Unpacking 12 x 20 Cabinet Quantar stations ordered with the 12 x 20 cabinet option are shipped installed in the cabinet a
513. to the SCM and station circuitry via the backplane The two ports I O Port PO Out and I O Port P1 Out are comprised of 32 and 8 lines respectively which come from the Host Buffered Data Bus via latches Typical output con trol signals include the control lines for the eight LEDs located on the SCM front panel and the local speaker enable signal 6809 Trunking Interface TX DATA from the 6809 Trunking Controller is input to the station via J14 on the station backplane The signal is routed thru nominal filtering on the 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry and fed to the Audio Interface Circuit ry The T DATA signal is then waveshaped filtered and fed to an A D converter which outputs a digital signal to the DSP via the Audio Inter face Bus 6809 RX AUDIO is output from the DSP to the Local Audio Circuitry via the Audio Interface Bus The signal is amplified filtered buffered and output thru nominal filtering on the 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry to the 6809 Trunking Controller via J14 on the station backplane MRTI Interface MRTI TX AUDIO from an external MRTI module is input to the station via J14 on the station backplane The signal is routed thru the 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry and fed to one input of an 6 to 1 multi plexer If selected the MRTI TX AUDIO signal is converted to a digital signal by the A D portion of the CODEC IC and sent to the DSP ASIC via the Audio Interface Bus MRTI RX AUDIO is output from the DSP to the Loc
514. tor and Control Circuitry A thermistor mounted on the power supply module heatsink provides a varying resistance input to the Heatsink Temp Detect Circuitry If the heatsink temperature exceeds a preset limit the circuitry generates a MAIN_SD_SEC shutdown signal which shuts down the entire power supply module A HEATSINK_DIAG signal is also sent to the Station Control Module via the A D converter and SPI bus Fan Monitor and Control Circuitry The cooling fan in the power supply module is powered from the 14V Supply Circuitry and runs continuously If the fan fails the Fan Fault De tect circuit generates a fail signal FAN FAIL DIAG which is fed to the A D converter The fail signal also triggers a 50 second delay circuit which after 50 seconds generates a MAIN SD SEC signal which shuts down the entire power supply 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 13 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual Address Decode Circuitry Startup Shutdown Control Circuitry The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Module to use the address bus to select either the D A converter Battery Charger Re vert Board or the A D converter Diagnostics Circuitry for communica tions via the SPI bus Typical communications include reading status signals from the Diagnostics Circuitry and providing charger output control signals to the Battery Charger Revert Board Shutdown Delay Circuitry Upon receiving a shutdown signal MAIN SD PRI
515. tput Table 4 Performance Specifications for Low Pass Filter Operating Frequency 840 960 MHz Maximum RF Input Power 500W 68 81090 86 3 9 1 00 Quantar 800 MHz and 900 MHz Stations Functional Manuals INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the dual circulator assembly input and output external connections CABLE HARNESS MATES WITH 10 PIN CONNECTOR ON TRANSMIT OUTPUT LOW PASS DUAL CIRCULATOR STATION BACKPLANE FROM FILTER ASSEMBLY LOW PASS FILTER TRANSMIT RF INPUT FROM POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE PERIPHERAL DC POWER HEAT SINK THERMISTOR HEAT SINK TRAY TO OUTPUT COOLING COOLING FAN TO FAN FOR CABLE HARNESS CIRCULATOR HEAT SINK Figure 1 Dual Circulator Assembly and Low Pass Filter Mounted in Peripheral Tray Inputs and Outputs 4 68P81090E86 B 9 1 00 Triple Circulator Option FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the Dual Circulator Assembly and Low Pass Filter at a functional level The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the func tions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block and interconnect diagram of the Dual Circulator Assembly and Low Pass Filter Functional Operation Note The Triple Circulator Option is typi cally used in high density radio site applica tions where other co located transmitte
516. tter control voltage from the Exciter Module provides an output of approximately 0 to 15W Driver Power Amplifier DPA contained in 25W PA only provides final amplification of the IPA output provides an output of 35W max Final Power Amplifier FPA contained in 100 110W PAs only provides final amplification of the IPA output provides an output of 180W maximum Circulator provides PA module output isolation Harmonic Filter Coupler suppresses harmonic radiation and couples the PA output to the transmit antenna connector also serves as a power meter Sense and Detect Circuitry provides sense and detect signals for critical signal points throughout the circuitry signals are monitored by the Exciter Module Commercial Government and Inc 2000 Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81088E44 B Banca n 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar UHF Station Functional Manual 2 CONTROLS INDICATORS AND INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 1 shows the PA controls indicators and all input and output external connections RF INPUT FROM EXCITER MODULE POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE FRONT PANEL RF OUTPUT FRONT VIEW COOLING FANS HEAT SINK CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE Figure 1 Power Amplifier Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 110 W Model Shown 2 68P81088E44 B 9 1 00 TLE2731A TLE2732A TTE2061A 64A Power Amplifier Modules 3 FUNCTIONAL
517. uP via the SPI Bus and output to the Exciter Module as modulation signals VCO MOD AUDIO and REF MOD AUDIO 68P81094E76 A 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Input Output Ports 6809 MRTI Interface Circuitry Input Ports Two general purpose 32 line input ports are provided to allow vari ous input signals from the SCM and station circuitry to be accepted and sent to the Host uP The two ports I O Port PO In and I O Port P1 In are each comprised of 32 lines which come from circuitry in the SCM as well as other modules in the station via the backplane The buses are input to buffers which make the data available to the Host uP via the Host Buffered Data Bus Typical inputs include the pushbutton switches located on the SCM front panel and the MIC PTT signal from the handset microphone Output Ports Two general purpose 32 line output ports are provided to allow vari ous control signals from the Host uP to be output to the SCM and sta tion circuitry via the backplane The two ports I O Port PO Out and I O Port P1 Out are each comprised of 32 lines which come from the Host Buffered Data Bus via latches Typical output control signals include the control lines for the eight LEDs located on the SCM front panel and the local speaker enable signal 6809 Trunking Interface TX DATA from the 6809 Trunking Controller is input to the station via J14 on the station backplane The signal is routed thru nominal fil
518. uitry 68P81096E84 O 9 1 00 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual Diagnostics Circuitry Address Decode Circuitry Overview The diagnostics circuitry consists of an 11 channel A D converter which converts analog status signals from critical points in the power supply module to digital format for transfer to the Station Control Mod ule via the SPI bus Most of the status signals are generated by detect circuits to indicate the status of dc supply voltages and references Temperature Monitor and Control Circuitry A thermistor mounted on the power supply module heatsink provides a varying resistance input to the Heatsink Temp Detect Circuitry If the heatsink temperature exceeds a preset limit the circuitry generates a PRI_SHUT_SEC shutdown signal which shuts down the entire power supply module A HEATSINK_DIAG signal is also sent to the Station Control Module via the A D converter and SPI bus Overvoltage Undervoltage Detect Circuitry This circuitry monitors the VIN__FLTRD signal from the DC Input Board and generates a DC GOOD DIAG signal as long as the VIN FLTRD signal remains within predetermined limits The circuitry also drives the LED indicators described below LED Status Indicators Two LEDs located on the power supply module front panel indicate module status as follows e Power On lights GREEN when On Off switch is On and the AC input voltage is within operating range LED turns off when mod
519. ule Audio Interface Circuitry General The Audio Interface Circuitry interfaces external analog audio inputs and outputs with the DSP circuitry Most of the local audio processing is performed by a custom Local Audio ASIC External Audio Sources A multiplexer under control of the Host uP is used to select one of six possible external audio input sources four for diagnostic loopback sig nals one for 6809 MRTI transmit audio and one for handset or micro phone audio The selected audio source signal is converted to a digital signal by the A D portion of the CODEC circuit and sent to the DSP ASIC via the Audio Interface Bus The DSP circuitry processes the sig nal and routes it to the desired destination External Audio Destinations Digitized audio from the DSP circuitry is input to the D A portion of the CODEC IC and is output to one of four external devices e External Speaker connects RJ 11 jack located on SCM front panel e Handset Earpiece Microphone connects to RJ 11 jack 55 located on SCM front panel e Local Built In Speaker internal speaker and 1 2 W audio am plifier may be switched on off and volume controlled by using volume up 72 and down D buttons on SCM front panel e J14 Station Backplane 6809 MRTI receive audio output to external MRTI Module Exciter Modulation Signals Digitized audio data intended to be transmitted from the station is out pu
520. ule has failed or the station s Battery Type field has been pro grammed via RSS for NONE e The OVLO LCKOUT signal is high indicating that the battery voltage is too high e The MAIN SD SEC signal is low indicating that one of the vari ous monitoring points indicates a fault such as overcurrent condition for 14V or 5 V supplies overcurrent condition for entire Power Supply Module etc e The AC FAIL signal is high indicating that the AC power to the Power Supply Module has been interrupted Local Supplies Circuitry This circuitry contains two voltage regulators which accept 14V RAW from the 14V Main Supply Circuitry and generate VCC 10 V and 5 V supply voltages for use by local circuitry 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 17 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 8 68 81096 09 11 15 99 CPN1049A CPN1050BPower Supply Modules INPUT CONDITIONING CIRCUITRY FRONT PANEL ON OFF SWITCH O o bi ANN Y gt oo gt w V BOOST POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CIRCUITRY RELAY APPROX 400 VDC FULL WAVE e gt BRIDGE RECTIFIER TOROID 400 VDC gt _ POWER COIL AC
521. ule is turned off ac power is removed or AC input voltage is be low approximately 85 V rms e Module Fail lights RED when initially turning on or off the Pow er Supply this is normal and does not indicate a failure or when the DC to DC Converter Board is not functioning properly LED turns off when module is functioning properly The address decode circuitry allows the Station Control Module to use the address bus to select either the D A converter Battery Charger Re vert Board or the A D converter Diagnostics Circuitry for communica tions via the SPI bus Typical communications include reading status signals from the Diagnostics Circuitry 10 68P81096E84 O 9 1 00 CPN1031B Power Supply Module Startup Shutdown Control Circuitry Shutdown Delay Circuitry Upon receiving a shutdown signal PRI SHUTDOWN from the 28V Main Supply Circuitry this circuit passes the signal through the Soft Start Circuitry for a 1 second interval to allow the entire power supply module to shutdown The module then restarts if the on off switch is in On position If the PRI SHUTDOWN signal is still active the shut down process will repeat Soft Start Circuitry Each time the Soft Start Circuitry receives a startup signal i e PRI SHUTDOWN is inactive the Soft Start Circuitry provides a gradu ally increasing output signal to soft start the Pulse Width Modulators p o 28V Main Supply Circuitry This action minimizes the s
522. ultiplexer and filtering circuitry where it is used in calculating the current being drawn by the IPA FPA current sense circuitry comprised of two differential amplifiers and two sensing resistors meters the current being drawn by the FPA side A and side B and outputs two dc signals directly proportional to the currents for side A and side B Circuit operation is described in the following paragraph In each of the current sense circuits a differential amplifier measures the voltage drop across a sensing resistor and outputs a dc voltage directly proportional to the current through the resistor The dc voltages FPA I1 A and 11 is fed to the Exciter Module via an analog multiplexer and filtering circuitry where it is used in calculating the current being drawn by the FPA side A or side B 68P81088E44 B 9 1 00 TLE2731A TLE2732A TTE2061A 64A Power Amplifier Modules Sense and Detect Circuitry Continued PA Temperature Sense A thermistor and buffer circuit provides a dc voltage proportional to the PA temperature This signal PA_TEMP is fed to the Exciter Module which monitors the signal and reduces the PA output power by reducing the dc power control voltage V_CONT if the PA temperature exceeds set limits IPA DPA and FPA Detect Circuitry Detection circuits provide a dc voltage approximately proportional to the rf outputs of the IPA 15W DPA 25W and FPA 100 110W stages These dc signal
523. up tests and is now operational Exciter Module Failures If LEDs 1 and 2 TX Lock and PA Full respectively alternately blink one of the start up tests has failed Check to make sure that the EPROM 40 pin socket mounted IC located on Exciter Board is seated properly and installed with pin 1 of the IC closest to the center of the board Otherwise replace Exciter Module continued on next page 68P81096E57 A 11 15 99 55 Quantar Station Functional Manual Verifying Proper Operation Continued Wireline Module LEDs Power Up Sequence Step 1 After Station Control Module passes all start up tests and becomes operational the Wireline start up tests now run Step 2 If all tests are passed the WL LED is turned on green Wireline Module Failures e f the two LEDs alternately flash slowly in any one of several pos sible flashing patterns replace the Wireline Interface Board Proceeding to Optimization If all LEDs sequence properly the station may be considered electrical ly functional and is ready for optimizing and alignment Proceed to the Optimization section in this manual 56 68 81096 57 11 15 99 M MOTOROLA OPTIMIZATION For Quantar and Quantro Station and Ancillary Equipment El DESCRIPTION After the station and ancillary equipment have been mechanically installed properly cabled and power applied as described in the Installation section of this manual th
524. urge cur rent when charging the output filter capacitors 68P81096E84 O 9 1 00 11 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 2 68P81096E84 O 9 1 00 CPN1031B Power Supply Module INPUT CONDITIONING CIRCUITRY RELAY e i o VIN VIN gt TO DCOUTPUT BOARD FUSE VIN _FLTRD FRONT PANEL gt x ON OFF SWITCH DC INPUT 2 FILTER CIRCUITRY FILTER 40 TO 60 VDC 30 CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY s STARTUP VIN _FLTRD DELAY gt CIRCUITRY e Ln INVERTER CIRCUITRY A 28V 7 28V I SENSE E TO VIN _FLTRD DC OUTPUT TO BOARD FILTER DC OUTPUT g CIRCUITRY f _SENSE1 BOARD SYNC SEC a gt die m VIN FLTRD YY V bi DC OUTPUT P O BOARD BACKPLANE CONNECTOR 4 VCC_PRI 28VDC 5 28V DC TO STATION MODULES VIA V_GATE_1 alle OUTPUT FILTER CIRCUITRY FROM POWER DC OUTPUT 9 DRIVERS HOUSEKEEPING
525. utput alignment procedure located in the RSS User s Guide 68P81085E35 68P81096E59 B 11 15 99 21 Quantar Station Functional Manual Replacing Exciter Module Note replacement board must have the same model number as the faulty board e g TLF6920 If it does not contact the System Support Center at 1 800 221 7144 for instruc tions on how to proceed Note fthe existing EPROM is faulty con tact the System Support Center at 1 800 221 7144 to obtain replacement part The version of software contained in the replacement device must match that of the faulty device Note Use an IC Extraction Too Motoorla Part No 01 80386A04 to remove the firm ware devices Replacement Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Turn off station power refer to page 20 Using a Torx 15 driver remove anti vibration screw s if installed from top and or bottom of module front panel Disconnect mini UHF connector on rf cable connecting Power Amplifier Module to Exciter Module Remove faulty module from cage The Exciter Board software must now be removed from the old board and installed onto the replacement board The software is contained on a single EPROM You must remove the EPROM from the replacement board and re place it with the EPROM from the old board The following illustration shows the location of the EPROM Install replacement Exciter Module by sl
526. ver Module Board Preselector Hardware CLE1200A Receiver Module Board Preselector Hardware CLN7334A Receiver Module Front Panel CLN7334A Receiver Module Front Panel TRN7799A VHF UHF Tuning Kit TRN7799A VHF UHF Tuning Kit CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X43AB Power Supply Assembly X43AA Power Supply Assembly CPN1049B 265W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CPN1047A 625W Power Supply AC input w o battery chrg CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor CLN7261A Ferrite RFI Suppressor 6086 Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector 6086 Front Panel Dummy Charger Connector CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC X621AY Station Control Module SCM Standard EPIC CLN1614A Station Control Module CLN1614A Station Control Module TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker TRN7476A SCM Internal Speaker Options Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Options Kits TKN8751A Internal Speaker Cable Internally Added Internally Added by Motorola X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module by Motorola X222AB Front Panel Station Control Module Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Order CGN6157A Station Control Module Front Panel Processing CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 Processing CHN6100A Anti Vibration EFI Screws 2 X216AA Wireline Interface Module WIM 4 w
527. via duplexer Goce aeons Commercial Government and All Rights Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81086E34 B Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP OPTIONS COMPLEMENT Table 1 shows the applications and contents for the available triple circulator options for Quantar VHF station Option Complement Chart Table 1 Triple Circulator Options Complement mae Option TYD4001A Dual Circulator Quantar VHF High Band TLN3391A 50Q Load w heatsink 132 146 MHz TYD4010A Low Pass Filter TRN7796A Cooling Fan X676AA TYD4002A Dual Circulator X676AB Quantar VHF High Band TLN3391A 50Q Load w heatsink 144 160 MHz TYD4010A Low Pass Filter TRN7796A Cooling Fan TYD4003A Dual Circulator X676AC Quantar VHF High Band TLN3391A 50 2 Load w heatsink 158 174 MHz TYD4010A Low Pass Filter TRN7796A Cooling Fan 2 68P81086E34 B 9 1 00 Triple Circulator Option 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 2 shows the electrical performance specifications for the dual circulator assembly used for Options X676AA AC Table shows the electrical performance specifications for the low pass filter used in Options 676 Performance Specifications Table 2 Performance Specifications for Dual Circulator Assembly Operating Frequency X676AA 132 146 MHz X676AB 144 160 MHz X676AC 158 174 MHz Maximum RF Input Power 400W 1 25dB max with low pass filter 45 dB min
528. vice technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for an overall block dia gram of the WIB and Figure 3 thru Figure 6 for block diagrams for 2 wire voice 4 wire voice 9 6kbps ASTRO and 12kbps SECURENET signal paths Functional Overview Refer to Figure 2 Introduction As mentioned previously the WIB serves as the interface between the customer telephone lines and the station equipment In general the WIB processes and routes all voice and or data signals between the station equipment and the landline equipment e g a control center modem etc As shown in the block diagram in Figure xx the WIB contains a micro processor with RAM and EPROM two Peripheral Application Specific ICs PASIC two 4 wire audio circuits and one 2 wire audio circuit Also provided are a dc remote decoding circuit Simulcast processing circuitry and miscellaneous I O circuits All of these circuits are de scribed in the following paragraphs Microprocessor Circuitry The WIB microprocessor uP provides overall control of the WIB oper ation provides three serial bus links and communicates with the mi croprocessor in the Station Control Module The WIB operating code and other parameters are stored in two 256k x 8 FLASH ICs Short term storage is provided by two 128k x 8 RAM ICs The uP data bus is connected t
529. vides interfaces for the HDLC bus TDM bus and serial bus used to communicate with the Receiver Module e Accepts digitized data from Receiver Module via DSP ASIC Inter face Circuitry e Provides interfaces for several A D and D A converters 68 81096 87 9 1 00 Quantar and Quantro Station Products Station Reference Circuitry Note Two BNC connectors one 50 0 input lo cated on SCM front panel one high im pedance input located on the station backplane are provided to allow an nal 5 10 MHz source to be input to the 5 input to the PLL to perform frequen cy netting Refer to the Maintenance sec tion in this manual for recommended inter vals and procedures for netting the station reference HDLC Bus Control Circuitry The Station Reference Circuitry consists of a phase locked loop com prised of a high stability VCO and a PLL IC The output of the VCO is a 16 8 MHz signal which is fed to the DSP ASIC The ASIC divides the signal by 8 and outputs a 2 1 MHz signal which is separated and buff ered by a splitter and output to the Exciter Module and Receiver Module as 2 1 MHz REF The Station Reference Circuitry may operate in one of three modes e Normal Mode In this mode the control voltage is turned off via control voltage enable switch and the high stability VCO operates in an open loop mode stability of the VCO in this mode is 1 PPM per year e Manual Netting Mode Per
530. w pass filter and into the inputs of two amplifiers The outputs of the amplifiers are fed to two transistors which are connected a push pull configu ration to drive the primary of an audio transformer The audio signal is induced into the secondary and output to the landline system via ei ther the 50 pin Telco connector or screw terminal connector as bal anced audio JUMPERS IN POSITION WIRELINE 4 7UF INTERFACE ETTIN 27UF 25 033UF P 511 1 oar t Jl e 2 4 7UF 159 033UF lt 2 900 LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 3 LINE 4 047UF AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO z i JU1010 i t REE REE EERE 3 47UF 033UF gog 068UF r T1000 T1001 T1002 T1003 1 1 gt gt BEER BEER 4 70 L 4 680 033UF 909 gt Note All jumpers removed for high impedance input output 68P81094E78 A 9 1 00 CLN6956A and CLN6958A Wireline Interface Boards Description of Audio Data Signal Paths Continued Note Depending on local codes and or customer preference phone line connections may be made at either the 50 pin Telco connector or the screw terminal connector on the station ba
531. ween the two models are shown throughout the functional block diagram Figure 2 Commercial Government and 1 Inc dm Industrial Solutions Sector 68P81094E76 A ieri 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 9 1 00 UP Quantar and Quantro Station Products Overview of Circuitry The SCM contains the following circuitry Host Microprocessor 68EN360 uP which comprises the central controller of the SCM and station Non Volatile Memory consists of a FLASH SIMM module that contains the station operating software and data and an EEPROM that contains the station codeplug data DRAM Memory Dynamic RAM into which station software is downloaded and executed External Line Interface Circuitry provides interface between the SCM and external devices such as ntelliRepeater DLAN ports RSS port an Ethernet port and miscellaneous backplane connectors Digital Signal Processor DSP and DSP ASIC Circuitry performs high speed processing of audio and signaling data signals Station Reference Circuitry generates the 2 1 MHz refer ence signal used throughout the station HDLC Bus Control Circuitry provides bus control to allow Host Microprocessor communications port SCC1 to communi cate with the Wireline Interface Board and other optional mod ules via the HDLC interprocessor communications bus Audio Interface Circuitry routes the various audio input sig nals such as microphone wirel
532. wer supply which generates the charging current necessary to charge an external storage battery Switching Power Supply Operation The charger switching power supply accepts 14V from the DC to DC Converter Board which is fed through a filter and a Buck FET Switch to a Power Coil This coil is controlled by the Buck FET Switch and a Boost FET Switch to produce an induced output voltage of approximately 12 to 16 V dc This charging voltage is filtered and fed through a pair of Reverse Battery FET Switches to the output termi nals card edge connector that extends from the rear of the Power Sup ply Module Connections to an external storage battery are made to this card edge connector Protection against connecting the battery in reverse polarity is provided by the Charger Output Control Circuitry and the Reverse Battery FET Switches A thermistor mounted near the battery and connected to the station via a backplane connector provides an input to a comparator The comparator output T DIAG provides a dc voltage proportional to the battery temperature This signal is sent to the Station Control Module via the Diagnostics Circuitry on the DC to DC Converter Board 68P81096E09 O 11 15 99 15 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry Battery Revert Circuitry Current Mode Controller Circuitry A 133 kHz clock signal from the DC to DC Converter Board is fed through a
533. witch to produce an induced output voltage of approximately 21 to 31 V dc This charging voltage is filtered and fed through a pair of Reverse Battery FET Switches to the output termi nals card edge connector that extends from the rear of the Power Sup ply Module Connections to an external storage battery are made to this card edge connector Protection against connecting the battery in reverse polarity is provided by the Charger Output Control Circuitry and the Reverse Battery FET Switches A thermistor mounted near the battery and connected to the station via a backplane connector provides an input to a comparator The comparator output T DIAG provides a dc voltage proportional to the battery temperature This signal is sent to the Station Control Module via the Diagnostics Circuitry on the DC to DC Converter Board 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 15 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry Battery Revert Circuitry Current Mode Controller Circuitry A 133 kHz clock signal from the DC to DC Converter Board is fed through a buffer driver to a Pulse Width Modulator PWM The 133 kHz PWM output pulses are fed 1 directly to the Buck FET Switch via a driv er and 2 to the Boost FET Switch via a Boost Switch Timer and Driver The two signals control the respective FET switches to control the Pow er Coil in the Charger Supply Circuitry so that it produces an approxi matel
534. xer Module Input Output Connections 68P81091E93 B 9 1 00 800 MHz and 900 MHz Duplexer Modules PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 and Table 2 show the electrical perlormance specifications for the 800 MHz and 900 MHz duplexer modules Table 1 Duplexer Performance Specifications Option X182AG Operating Frequency Insertion Loss Transmitter to Antenna Insertion Loss Antenna to Receiver Frequency Passband TX Noise Suppression at RX Freq RX Isolation at TX Freq Frequency Separation Return Loss Maximum Input Power Temperature Range Size with rack mounting panel Weight with rack mounting panel Terminations Input and Output Impedance 806 869 MHz 1 0 dB max 1 0 dB max RX 806 824 MHz TX 851 869 MHz 3 H x 5 D x 19 W EIA Rack Mountable 7 5 lbs Female N Type 50 Ohms Table 2 Duplexer Performance Specifications Option X182AH Operating Frequency Insertion Loss Transmitter to Antenna Insertion Loss Antenna to Receiver Frequency Passband TX Noise Suppression at RX Freq RX Isolation at TX Freq Frequency Separation Return Loss Maximum Input Power Temperature Range Size with rack mounting panel Weight with rack mounting panel Terminations Input and Output Impedance 896 941 MHz 1 0 dB max 1 0 dB max RX 896 902 MHz TX 935 941 MHz 75 dB min 75 dB min H x 5 D x 19 W EIA Rack Mountable 7 5 lbs Fema
535. xternal connections RECEIVER RF INPUT FROM RECEIVE ANTENNA RECEIVER MODULE FRONT PANEL FRONT VIEW CARD EDGE CONNECTOR MATES WITH BACKPLANE Figure 1 Quantro Quantar 800 MHz Receiver Module Controls Indicators and Inputs Outputs 2 68P81086E76 D 9 1 00 Quantro Quantar 800 MHz Receiver Module 3 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION The following theory of operation describes the operation of the receiver circuitry at a functional level The informa tion is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level Refer to Figure 2 for a block diagram of the receiver module Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry Introduction The synthesizer and VCO circuitry generate the 1st LO injection signal for the 1st mixer in the receiver front end circuitry Functional operation of these circuits is as follows Phase Locked Loop The phase locked loop PLL IC receives frequency selection data from the Station Control Module microprocessor Once programmed the PLL IC compares a 2 1 MHz reference signal from the Station Con trol Module with a feedback sample of the VCO output Depending on whether the feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the 2 1 MHz reference correction pulses are generated The width of these correction pulses is dependent on the amount of difference between the 2
536. y ERR Rt ER Vere d ee x Cub page 1 Controls Indicators and page 2 Functional Theory of Operation page 3 Synthesizer and VCO page 3 Preselector Filter Assembly gt feo Gone PER DIS P RID PIA ERG Reb D Pes page 4 Receiver Front End Circuitry i ceps meto iuh wc bea a wee boa ies page 4 Custom Receiver IC Circuitry page 4 Address Decode and A D Converter Circuitry page 5 Voltage Regulator Circuitly nre Eb herb PR dA D YT sis Sie QE RP dS QS page 5 RECEIVER MODULE UHF 68P81086E48 Description urma aan Rx oe REPRE eae mean dH eter etes page 1 General Description reet ek mee ee e x I d a deg page 1 Overview Of CITCUITTy Rr Dix A s Rol page 1 Controls Indicators and page 2 Functional Theory of Operation page 3 Synthesizer VCO Circuitry page 3 Pre
537. y Overview The diagnostics circuitry consists of an 11 channel A D converter which converts analog status signals from critical points in the module to digital format for transfer to the Station Control Module via the SPI bus Most of the status signals are generated by detect circuits to indi cate the status of dc supply voltages and references Temperature Monitor and Control Circuitry A thermistor mounted on the power supply module heatsink provides a varying resistance input to several detect and control circuits as follows e Heatsink Status Detect compares signal from thermistor to reference voltage to generate an output proportional to heatsink temperature signal is sent to Station Control Board via A D con verter and SPI bus e Detect compares signal from thermistor to refer ence voltage to generate a high temperature signal if preset threshold is exceeded signal is sent to softstart circuitry to shut down main inverter if overtemperature condition is detected e Fan Control Circuitry compares signal from thermistor to ref erence voltage to generate a fan control signal to turn on cooling fan mounted in power supply module also generated is a FAN ON status signal which is sent to Station Control Board via A D converter and SPI bus Note that a Fan Fault Detect circuit accepts a pulsed feedback sig nal from the cooling fan to indicate whether the fan is functioning when turned on by Fan Contr
538. y 21 to 31 V dc output to be filtered and charge the external battery Overview The Battery Revert Circuitry accepts various inputs and determines when to activate battery revert mode by turning on the Battery Revert FET Switches Battery Revert Mode will be activated or deactivated in the following conditions e Ifthe AC FAIL signal from the DC to DC Converter Board goes low indicating that AC power has failed the Battery Revert FET Switches will be turned on via the FET Driver e If the battery voltage is too low the Undervoltage Detect circuit detects the condition and disables the battery revert circuitry e Ifthe battery voltage is too high the Overvoltage Detect circuit detects the condition and disables the battery charger and the battery revert circuitry e Ifa fault condition exists e g 5V Overvurrent the shutdown detect circuitry detects the condition and disables the battery charger and the battery revert circuitry Overview The Current Mode Controller Circuitry performs two major functions e The PWR CUT signal from the DC to DC Converter Board is fed through a Voltage Scaling Circuit and reduces the battery charger output current during periods of heavy current draw by the station e The Voltage Scaling Circuitry accepts V BC RAW voltage feed back signal from battery and BATT VOLT RANGE and BATT VOLT SELECT signals from the Station Control Module via the D A Converter which combine to set the
539. y programming certain station parameters using the Radio Service Software RSS External mode requires in addition to RSS settings that electrical connections be made to certain pins on the System Connector Connector 17 located on the station backplane external equipment customer provided is used to ground one or more of these lines to force the station into FBICR mode The FBICR feature can be configured for the following system types in Automatic or External Modes Automatic Mode e Conventional Analog both Simulcast and Non Simulcast Voting Systems e Conventional ASTRO CAI both Simulcast and Non Simulcast Voting Systems e Trunked ASTRO SMARTZONE or SMARTNET CAI VSELP Simulcast only External Mode e Conventional Analog both Simulcast and Non Simulcast Voting Systems e Conventional ASTRO CAI both Simulcast and Non Simulcast Voting Systems e Trunked Analog SMARTZONE or SMARTNET both Simulcast and Non Simulcast Voting Systems e Trunked ASTRO SMARTZONE or SMARTNET CAI VSELP Simulcast only continued on page 3 Gisela ine feo Commercial Government and All Rights Hesslusd Industrial Solutions Sector 68 81095 96 Printed in U S A 1301 E Algonquin Road Schaumburg IL 60196 7 15 99 UP Quantar Quantro Station Products If either both of these links fail for any coverage area station will revert to FBICR mode Coverage Area Coverage Area Coverage Area A B C STATION STATION STATION
540. y the synthe sizer VCO circuitry to produce 21 45 MHz 1st i f signal The 1st i f signal is 2 pole bandpass filtered and fed to an amplifier The amplifier gain high or low is determined by an AGC switch circuit that is controlled by an AGC select signal from the Station Control Board The amplified 1st i f signal is then 4 pole bandpass filtered and fed to the rf input of the custom receiver IC The custom receiver IC provides additional amplification filtering a second down conversion and finally analog to digital conversion of the 2nd i f signal The digital receive signal is then output via differential driver circuitry to the Station Control Board This data signal contains the necessary and Q quadrature information AGC information and other data transfer information required by the Station Control Board to process the receive signal Note that the recovered audio signal is in digital format throughout the station circuitry resulting in a more noi se free linear receiver Analog audio is present only in the external speaker driver circuitry on the Station Control Board and on the Wire line Interface Board at the phone line connections to and from the sta tion The remainder of the custom receiver IC circuitry consists of timing and tank circuits to support the internal oscillator 2nd LO synthesizer cir cuitry and 2nd 1 circuitry A serial bus allows data communications between the custom receiver IC a
541. y which turns on the Battery Revert FET Switches for certain in put signal conditions such as AC Fail Current Mode Controller Circuitry consists of current and voltage feedback signal monitoring circuitry which controls the Pulse Width Modulator Circuitry to maintain the desired charger output current and voltage SPI Bus Interface Circuitry consists of a D A converter which accepts charger control digital signals from the Station Control Module and converts these signals to analog dc volt ages to control various operating characteristics of the battery charger circuitry Shutdown Circuitry consists of signal monitoring circuitry which shuts down the battery charger for certain input signal conditions such as loss of BATT WATCHDOG signal from the Station Control Module Local Supplies Circuitry Accepts 28V RAW from DC to DC Converter Board and generates VCC 10V and 5V sup ply voltages for use by local circuitry 68P81095E88 A 11 15 99 CPN1047A CPN1048A625W Power Supply Modules THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 68P81095E88 A 5 11 15 99 Quantar Station Products Functional Manual B PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 shows the electrical performance specifications for the Models CPN1047A and CPN1048A Power Supply Modules Performance Specifications Table 1 1047 1048 Power Supply Modules Performance Specifications Parameter Specification Weight 6 5

Digital-Capable Station - The Repeater Builder`s Technical

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents